User's Guide

Printing

Copying

Scanning

Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)

Maintaining the Printer

Solving Problems

NPD6347-03 EN
Contents

Guide to This Manual List of Detected Paper Sizes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Introduction to the Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Loading Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Searching for Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Loading Pre-punched Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Printing Only the Pages You Need. . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
Loading Long Papers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
About This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Marks and Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Notes on Screenshots and Illustrations. . . . . . . . 11 Placing Originals
Operating System References. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Placing Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Detecting the Original Size Automatically. . . . . . . . 43
Copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Originals that are not Supported by the ADF. . . . . . 44

Important Instructions Inserting and Removing a Memory

Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Device
Setting Up the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 Inserting an External USB Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Using the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Removing an External USB Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Handling the Consumable Products. . . . . . . . . . 18
Advisories and Warnings for Using the
Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Printing
Advisories and Warnings for Using the Printing Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Printer with a Wireless Connection. . . . . . . . . . .19 Printing from a Computer - Windows. . . . . . . . . 48
Protecting Your Personal Information. . . . . . . . . . . 19 Printing a Document Using the PostScript
Disposing of European Printer Models. . . . . . . . . . 19 Printer Driver (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printing from a Computer - Mac OS. . . . . . . . . . 79
Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver
Part Names and Functions on Mac OS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printing PDF Files from a Memory Device. . . . . 92
Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Printing Documents from Smart Devices (iOS). . 93
Printing Documents from Smart Devices
(Android). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Guide to the Control Panel Printing on Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Turning the Power On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Printing on Envelopes from a Computer
Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Home Screen Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Printing on Envelopes from a Computer
Guide to the Network Icon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 (Mac OS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Menu Screen Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Printing Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Job/Status Screen Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device. . . . . 96
Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device. . . . . 97
Reserve Job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Entering Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing Web Pages from a Computer. . . . . . . . . 99
Viewing Animations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Printing Web Pages from Smart Devices. . . . . . . 99
Printing Using a Cloud Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Loading Paper Registering to Epson Connect Service from
Paper Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 the Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Paper Size and Type Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Setting the Paper Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2
Copying Scanning Originals to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Scanning Originals to a Memory Device. . . . . . . . 128
Available Copying Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory
Copying Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Copying on 2-Sides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Copying by Enlarging or Reducing. . . . . . . . . . 104 Scanning Originals to the Cloud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet. . . .105 Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud. . . . . .131
Copying in Page Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Scanning Originals to Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Copying Originals Using Good Quality. . . . . . . 106 Menu Options for Scanning to Storage. . . . . . . 133
Copying ID card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Scanning Using WSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Copying Books. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Setting Up a WSD Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Stacking Each Set of Copies by Alternately
Rotating 90 Degrees or by Offsetting. . . . . . . . . 108 Scanning Originals to a Smart Device. . . . . . . . . . 137
Copying Bar Codes Clearly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Copying with Page Numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)
Copying files and creating booklets. . . . . . . . . . 110 Before Using Fax Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Inserting Slip Sheets into Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Overview of this Printer's Fax Features. . . . . . . . . 139
Basic Menu Options for Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Feature: Sending Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Color Mode:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Feature: Receiving Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Density:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Feature: PC-FAX Send/Receive
Paper Setting:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 (Windows/Mac OS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Reduce/Enlarge:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Features: Various Fax Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Original Type:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Feature: Status or Logs for Fax Jobs. . . . . . . . . . 142
2-Sided:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Feature: Fax Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Multi-Page:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Feature: Security when Sending and
Finishing:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Receiving Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Advanced Menu Options for Copying. . . . . . . . . . 113 Features: Other Useful Features. . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Booklet:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Sending Faxes Using the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cover & Slip Sheet:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Selecting Recipients. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Original Size:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Various Ways of Sending Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Mixed Size Originals:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Receiving Faxes on the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Orientation (Original):. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Receiving Incoming Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Book →2Pages:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Receiving Faxes by Making a Phone Call. . . . . . 154
Continuous Scanning:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Saving and Forwarding Received Faxes. . . . . . . 156
Image Quality:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer
Binding Margin:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
on the LCD Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Reduce to Fit Paper:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Menu Options for Faxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Remove Shadow:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Remove Punch Holes:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Frequent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ID Card Copy:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Recipient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Output Tray:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Page Numbering:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
File Storing:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Menu Options for Fax Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Inbox/Confidential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Stored Documents:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Scanning
Polling Send/Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Available Scanning Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs. . . . . . . . 173
Scanning Originals to a Network Folder. . . . . . . . 119
Displaying Information when Received Faxes
Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder. . . . . . . 120 are Unprocessed (Unread/Not Printed/Not
Scanning Originals to an Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Saved/Not Forwarded). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Menu Options for Scanning to an Email. . . . . . 124 Checking Fax Jobs in Progress. . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

3
 Checking the Fax Job History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Checking the Clogged Nozzles. . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Reprinting Received Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Preventing nozzle clogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Sending a Fax from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Cleaning the Scanner Glass. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Sending Documents Created Using an Cleaning the ADF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Application (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Saving Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Sending Documents Created Using an Saving Power (Control Panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Application (Mac OS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately. 205
Receiving Faxes on a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 Installing the Applications Separately. . . . . . . . 205
Saving Incoming Faxes on a Computer. . . . . . . 180 Installing a PostScript Printer Driver. . . . . . . . . 207
Canceling the Feature that Saves Incoming Adding the Printer (for Mac OS Only). . . . . . . .208
Faxes to the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Uninstalling Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Checking for New Faxes (Windows). . . . . . . . . 181 Updating Applications and Firmware. . . . . . . . 210
Checking for New Faxes (Mac OS). . . . . . . . . . 182 Replacing Maintenance Rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Using Storage Solving Problems

Overview of the Storage Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 The Printer Does Not Work as Expected. . . . . . . . 214
About Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 The Printer Does Not Turn On or Off. . . . . . . . 214
Types of Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly. . . . . . .214
Guide to the Folder Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Cannot Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Creating Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Cannot Copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Saving Files to Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Cannot Start Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Saving to Storage Original Data to be Copied. . .187 Cannot Send or Receive Faxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Saving Data on a Memory Device to Storage. . . 187 Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu. . . 266
Saving Documents from a Computer to Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected. . . . . . 273
Storage (Windows). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen. . . . . . 277
Saving Documents from a Computer to Paper Gets Jammed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Storage (Mac OS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Preventing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Using the Files in Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
It is Time to Replace the Ink Cartridges. . . . . . . . . 280
Printing Data from Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Ink Cartridge Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . 280
Saving Data in Storage to a Memory Device. . . .189
Replacing Ink Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Sending Files in Storage by Email. . . . . . . . . . . 190
Saving Files in Storage to a Network Folder or It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box. . . . . . .281
Cloud Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Maintenance Box Handling Precautions. . . . . . 281
Menu Options for Printing or Saving. . . . . . . . .191 Replacing a Maintenance Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Managing Folders and Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing
Searching for Folders and Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Quality is Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Deleting Files Stored in the Folder. . . . . . . . . . .195 Print Quality is Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Changing the Storage Period or Set to Never Copy Quality is Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Scanned Image Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Deleting Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor. . . . . . . . . . 297
Restricting Shared Folder Operations. . . . . . . . 196 Received Fax Quality is Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Cannot Solve Problem After Trying All Solutions. .299
Maintaining the Printer Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems. . . 299

Checking the Consumables Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Checking the Ink Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Adding or Replacing the Computer or
Checking the Available Space in the Devices
Maintenance Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Connecting to a Printer that has been
Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality. . . . 198 Connected to the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

4
 Using a Network Printer from a Second Menu Options for Copying (When Staple
Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Finisher Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Using a Network Printer from a Smart Device. . 303 Staple Finisher Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Re-setting the Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . 303 Booklet Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
When Replacing the Wireless Router. . . . . . . . .303 Booklet Finisher Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
When Changing the Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Setting the Booklet Finisher in the Printer
Changing the Connection Method to the Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Printer Settings When Using the Booklet
Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel. .307 Finsher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly Using the Booklet Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
(Wi-Fi Direct). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Ejecting Documents Continuously. . . . . . . . . . 366
About Wi-Fi Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Problems with the Booklet Finisher. . . . . . . . . .366
Connecting to an iPhone, iPad or iPod touch Menu Options for Printing from a Computer
using Wi-Fi Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 (When Booklet Finisher Installed). . . . . . . . . . .367
Connecting to Android Devices using Wi-Fi Menu Options for Printing from Memory
Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Devices or Storage (When Staple Finisher
Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Android using Wi-Fi Direct. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Menu Options for Printing from Storage
Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) (When Booklet Finisher Installed). . . . . . . . . . .370
Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Menu Options for Copying (When Booklet
Changing the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Finisher Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Settings Such as the SSID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Booklet Finisher Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Checking the Network Connection Status. . . . . . . 320 Settings Menu List (When Finisher is Installed). . . 373
Checking the Network Connection Status Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
from the Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Expansion Fax Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Printing a Network Connection Report. . . . . . . 321 Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax
Printing a Network Status Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Boards Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Checking the Network of the Computer Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List
(Windows only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 (When Optional Fax Boards Installed). . . . . . . .376
Sending Faxes Using the Printer with
Optional Fax Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Using Optional Items Sending Faxes From a Computer Using an
List of Optional Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Optional Fax Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Access Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Checking the Status of the Lines (When
Optional Fax Boards Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
High Capacity Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Solving Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Setting the High Capacity Tray in the Printer
Specifications for Optional Super G3/G3
Driver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Multi Fax Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Loading Paper in the High Capacity Tray. . . . . 334
10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Problems with the High Capacity Tray. . . . . . . .335
High Capacity Tray Specification. . . . . . . . . . . 335 Function List when Using an Additional
Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Staple Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Installing an Ethernet Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Staple Finisher Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Settings when Using an Additional Network. . . 382
Setting the Staple Finisher in the Printer Driver 337 Solving Problems when Using an Additional
Printer Settings When Using the Staple Finsher 337 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Using the Staple Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Menu Options for Network Settings (When
Problems with the Staple Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . 346 Using an Additional Network). . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Menu Options for Printing from a Computer Paper Cassette Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
(When Staple Finisher Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Using the Paper Cassette Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Menu Options for Printing from Memory
Devices or Storage (When Staple Finisher Problems with the Paper Cassette Lock. . . . . . . 390
Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

5
Product Information Regulatory Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Standards and Approvals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Paper Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
German Blue Angel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Available Paper and Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Restrictions on Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Consumable Products Information. . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Ink Cartridge Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Maintenance Box Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 Administrator Information
Maintenance Rollers Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Connecting the Printer to the Network. . . . . . . . . 471
Software Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Before Making Network Connection. . . . . . . . . 471
Software for Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Connecting to the Network from the Control
Software for Scanning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Software for Faxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Settings to Use the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Software for Package Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 Using the Print Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Software for Making Settings or Managing Configuring a Mail Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Setting a Shared Network Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Software for Updating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Making Contacts Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Settings Menu List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Preparing to Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
General Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable
Print Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Printers Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Supply Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer 532
Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Problems when Making Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Managing the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Printer Status/Print. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Introduction of Product Security Features. . . . . 536
Contacts Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Administrator Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
User Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Restricting Available Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Authentication System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Disabling the External Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Product Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Making Settings for Processing Saved Data. . . . 550
Printer Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Monitoring a Remote Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Scanner Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Backing Up the Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
ADF Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Advanced Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Fax Specifications (Fax-capable Printers Only). .440 Security Settings and Prevention of Danger. . . . 555
Using Port for the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Making Settings for Password Encryption. . . . . 556
Interface Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Controlling Using Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Network Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Using a Digital Certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
PostScript Level 3 Compatibility. . . . . . . . . . . . 446 SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer. . . . .569
Memory Device Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP
Supported Data Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Filtering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X
Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
Environmental Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 S/MIME Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Installation Location and Space. . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Solving Problems for Advanced Security. . . . . . 587
Installation Location and Space with Using Epson Open Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Finishers Installed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Where to Get Help
Font Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Technical Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Available Fonts for PostScript. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Contacting Epson Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Available Fonts for PCL (URW). . . . . . . . . . . . 453
List of Symbol Sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Before Contacting Epson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only). . . . . . . 457 Help for Users in Europe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Help for Users in Taiwan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Storage Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Help for Users in Australia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

6
Help for Users in New Zealand. . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Help for Users in Singapore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Help for Users in Thailand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Help for Users in Vietnam. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Help for Users in Indonesia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .599
Help for Users in Hong Kong. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Help for Users in Malaysia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Help for Users in India. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Help for Users in the Philippines. . . . . . . . . . . . 602

7
Guide to This Manual

Introduction to the Manuals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Searching for Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Printing Only the Pages You Need. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

About This Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Copyright. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Guide to This Manual > Searching for Information

Introduction to the Manuals

The following manuals are supplied with your Epson printer. As well as the manuals, check the various types of
help information available from the printer itself or from the Epson software applications.
❏ Important Safety Instructions (paper manual)
Provides you with instructions to ensure the safe use of this product. Read the instruction before using the
product.
❏ User's Guide (digital manual)
This manual. Provides overall information and instructions on using the printer, on network settings when
using the printer on a network, and on solving problems.

You can obtain the latest versions of the above manuals with the following methods.
❏ Paper manual
Visit the Epson Europe support website at http://www.epson.eu/Support, or the Epson worldwide support
website at http://support.epson.net/.
❏ Digital manual
This manual is available in PDF and HTML versions. You can view the HTML version from the epson.sn
support page. Start EPSON Software Updater on your computer to view the PDF version. EPSON Software
Updater checks for available updates of Epson software applications and the digital manuals, and allows you to
download the latest ones.
http://epson.sn

Related Information
& “Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on page 408

Searching for Information

The PDF manual allows you to search for information you are looking for by keyword, or jump directly to specific
ections using the bookmarks. This section explains how to use a PDF manual that has been opened in Adobe
Reader X on your computer.

Searching by keyword
Click Edit > Advanced Search. Enter the keyword (text) for information you want to find in the search window,
and then click Search. Hits are displayed as a list. Click one of the displayed hits to jump to that page.

9
Guide to This Manual > About This Manual > Marks and Symbols

Jumping directly from bookmarks

Click a title to jump to that page. Click + or > to view the lower level titles in that section. To return to the previous
page, perform the following operation on your keyboard.
❏ Windows: Hold down Alt. and then press ←.
❏ Mac OS: Hold down the command key, and then press ←.

Printing Only the Pages You Need

You can extract and print only the pages you need. Click Print in the File menu, and then specify the pages you
want to print in Pages in Pages to Print.
❏ To specify a series of pages, enter a hyphen between the start page and the end page.
Example: 20-25
❏ To specify pages that are not in series, divide the pages with commas.
Example: 5, 10, 15

About This Manual

This section explains the meaning of marks and symbols, notes on descriptions, and operating system reference
information used in this manual.

Marks and Symbols

! Caution:
Instructions that must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury.

10
Guide to This Manual > About This Manual > Operating System References

c Important:
Instructions that must be observed to avoid damage to your equipment.

Note:
Provides complementary and reference information.

Related Information
& Links to related sections.

Notes on Screenshots and Illustrations

❏ Screenshots of the printer driver are from Windows 10 or macOS High Sierra. The content displayed on the
screens varies depending on the model and situation.
❏ Illustrations used in this manual are examples only. Although there may be slight differences depending on
themodel, the method of operation is the same.
❏ Some of the menu items on the LCD screen vary depending on the model and settings.
❏ You can read the QR code using dedicated app.

Operating System References

Windows
In this manual, terms such as "Windows 10", "Windows 8.1", "Windows 8", "Windows 7", "Windows Vista",
"Windows XP", "Windows Server 2019", "Windows Server 2016", "Windows Server 2012 R2", "Windows Server
2012", "Windows Server 2008 R2", "Windows Server 2008", "Windows Server 2003 R2", and "Windows Server
2003" refer to the following operating systems. Additionally, "Windows" is used to refer to all versions.
❏ Microsoft Windows 10 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows 8.1 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows 8 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows 7 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Vista operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows XP operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2019 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2016 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2012 R2 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2012 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2008 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 operating system
® ®
❏ Microsoft Windows Server 2003 operating system
® ®
11
Guide to This Manual > Trademarks

Mac OS
In this manual, "Mac OS" is used to refer to macOS Catalina, macOS Mojave, macOS High Sierra, macOS Sierra,
OS X El Capitan, OS X Yosemite, OS X Mavericks, OS X Mountain Lion, Mac OS X v10.7.x, and Mac OS X v10.6.8.

Trademarks
❏ EPSON is a registered trademark, and EPSON EXCEED YOUR VISION or EXCEED YOUR VISION is a
®
trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
❏ Epson Scan 2 software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.
❏ libtiff
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in
all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics
may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written
permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
❏ Microsoft , Windows , Windows Server , and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
® ® ® ®
❏ Apple, Mac, macOS, OS X, Bonjour, ColorSync, Safari, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, iTunes, TrueType, and iBeacon
are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
❏ Chrome, Google Play, and Android are trademarks of Google LLC.
❏ Albertus, Arial, Coronet, Gill Sans, Joanna and Times New Roman are trademarks of The Monotype
Corporation registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain
jurisdictions.
❏ ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, Lubalin Graph, Mona Lisa, ITC Symbol, Zapf Chancery and Zapf
Dingbats are trademarks of International Typeface Corporation registered in the U.S. Patent and Trademark
Office and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions.
❏ Clarendon, Eurostile and New Century Schoolbook are trademarks of Linotype GmbH registered in the U.S.
Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions.
❏ Wingdings is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
❏ CG Omega, CG Times, Garamond Antiqua, Garamond Halbfett, Garamond Kursiv, Garamond Halbfett Kursiv
are trademarks of Monotype Imaging, Inc. and may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
❏ Antique Olive is a trademark of M. Olive.
❏ Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography.

12
Guide to This Manual > Copyright

❏ Helvetica, Optima, Palatino, Times and Univers are trademarks of Linotype Corp. registered in the U.S. Patent
and Trademark Office and may be registered in certain other jurisdictions in the name of Linotype Corp. or its
licensee Linotype GmbH.
❏ PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
❏ Adobe,Photoshop,PostScript, and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
❏ Arcfour
This code illustrates a sample implementation of the Arcfour algorithm.
Copyright © April 29, 1997 Kalle Kaukonen. All Rights Reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that
this copyright notice and disclaimer are retained.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY KALLE KAUKONEN AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KALLE KAUKONEN OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
❏ QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and other countries.
❏ The SuperSpeed USB Trident Logo is a registered trademark of USB Implementers Forum, Inc.
❏ Firefox is a trademark of the Mozilla Foundation in the U.S. and other countries.
❏ General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks
of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
Seiko Epson Corporation. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained
herein. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information herein. The
information contained herein is designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any
use of this information as applied to other products.
Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for
damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties as a result of accident, misuse, or
abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.)
failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation's operating and maintenance instructions.
Seiko Epson Corporation and its affiliates shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of
any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson
Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.
Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be held liable for any damage resulting from electromagnetic interference that
occurs from the use of any interface cables other than those designated as Epson Approved Products by Seiko
Epson Corporation.
© 2019 Seiko Epson Corporation

13
Guide to This Manual > Copyright

The contents of this manual and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.

14
Important Instructions

Important Safety Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Protecting Your Personal Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Disposing of European Printer Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Important Instructions > Important Safety Instructions > Setting Up the Printer

Important Safety Instructions

Read and follow these instructions to ensure safe use of this printer. Make sure you keep this manual for future
reference. Also, be sure to follow all warnings and instructions marked on the printer.
Some of the symbols used on your printer are to ensure safety and proper use of the printer. Visit the following
Web site to learn the meaning of the symbols.
http://support.epson.net/symbols

Setting Up the Printer

❏ Do not move the printer by yourself.
❏ Do not place or store the printer outdoors, near excessive dirt or dust, water, heat sources, or in locations
subject to shocks, vibrations, high temperature or humidity.
❏ Place the printer on a flat, stable surface that extends beyond the base of the printer in all directions. The printer
will not operate properly if it is tilted at an angle.
❏ Avoid places subject to rapid changes in temperature and humidity. Also, keep the printer away from direct
sunlight, strong light, or heat sources.
❏ Do not block or cover the vents and openings in the printer.
❏ Allow space above the printer so that you can fully raise the ADF Unit (Automatic Document Feeder Unit).
❏ Leave enough space in front of the printer and to the left and right to perform printing and maintenance.
❏ Be sure the AC power cord meets the relevant local safety standards. Use only the power cord that comes with
this product. Use of another cord may result in fire or electric shock. This product’s power cord is for use with
this product only. Use with other equipment may result in fire or electric shock.
❏ Use only the type of power source indicated on the printer's label.
❏ Place the printer near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.
❏ Avoid using outlets on the same circuit as photocopiers or air control systems that regularly switch on and off.
❏ Avoid electrical outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers.
❏ Keep the entire computer system away from potential sources of electromagnetic interference, such as
loudspeakers or the base units of cordless telephones.
❏ The power-supply cords should be placed to avoid abrasions, cuts, fraying, crimping, and kinking. Do not place
objects on top of the power-supply cords and do not allow the power-supply cords to be stepped on or run over.
Be particularly careful to keep all the power-supply cords straight at the ends and the points where they enter
and leave the transformer.
❏ If you use an extension cord with the printer, make sure that the total ampere rating of the devices plugged into
the extension cord does not exceed the cord's ampere rating. Also, make sure that the total ampere rating of all
devices plugged into the wall outlet does not exceed the wall outlet's ampere rating.
❏ If you plan to use the printer in Germany, the building installation must be protected by a 10 or 16 amp circuit
breaker to provide adequate short-circuit protection and over-current protection for the printer.
❏ When using the optional booklet finisher, use a power cord for the printer and another power cord for the
booklet finisher. The rated current of the printer is 9 A, and the booklet finisher is 10 A. Connect the power
cords to a power supply with a capacity larger than the total rated current. If the total rated current exceeds the
power capacity, connect each power cord to a separate power source with an independent switchboard breaker.

16
Important Instructions > Important Safety Instructions > Using the Printer

Related Information
& “Installation Location and Space” on page 448

Using the Printer

❏ Never disassemble, modify, or attempt to repair the power cord, plug, printer unit, scanner unit, or options by
yourself, except as specifically explained in the printer’s manuals.
❏ Unplug the printer and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
The power cord or plug is damaged; liquid has entered the printer; the printer has been dropped or the casing
damaged; the printer does not operate normally or exhibits a distinct change in performance. Do not adjust
controls that are not covered by the operating instructions.
❏ Take care not to spill liquid on the printer and not to handle the printer with wet hands.
❏ If the LCD screen is damaged, contact your dealer. If the liquid crystal solution gets on your hands, wash them
thoroughly with soap and water. If the liquid crystal solution gets into your eyes, flush them immediately with
water. If discomfort or vision problems remain after a thorough flushing, see a doctor immediately.
❏ Avoid touching the components inside the printer unless instructed to do so in this guide.
❏ Do not touch the areas indicated by caution labels inside the printer and the optional items.
❏ Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
❏ Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
❏ When connecting the printer to a computer or other device with a cable, ensure the correct orientation of the
connectors. Each connector has only one correct orientation. Inserting a connector in the wrong orientation
may damage both devices connected by the cable.
❏ Do not insert objects through the slots in the printer.
❏ Do not put your hand inside the printer during printing.
❏ Do not use aerosol products that contain flammable gases inside or around the printer. Doing so may cause fire.
❏ Be careful not to trap your fingers when opening the covers, trays, cassettes, or when performing operations
inside the printer.
❏ Do not press too hard on the scanner glass when placing the originals.

❏ Always turn the printer off using the P button. Do not unplug the printer until the power light stops flashing.
❏ If you are not going to use the printer for a long period, be sure to unplug the power cord from the electrical
outlet.
❏ Do not sit or lean on the printer. Do not put heavy objects on the printer.
❏ When using the printer, make sure you lock the adjuster bolts of the printer.
❏ Do not move the printer when the adjuster bolts are locked.

17
Important Instructions > Important Safety Instructions > Advisories and Warnings for Using the Touchscreen

❏ When using the optional booklet finisher, be careful not to touch the areas that are marked with a caution label,
or their surrounding areas. If the printer has been in use, those areas may be very hot. High temperature may
cause burns.

Handling the Consumable Products

❏ Be careful when you handle used ink cartridge, as there may be some ink around the ink supply port.
❏ If ink gets on your skin, wash the area thoroughly with soap and water.
❏ If ink gets into your eyes, flush them immediately with water. If discomfort or vision problems continue after
a thorough flushing, see a doctor immediately.
❏ If ink gets into your mouth, see a doctor right away.

❏ Do not disassemble the ink cartridge and the maintenance box; otherwise ink may get into your eyes or on your
skin.
❏ Do not shake ink cartridge too vigorously; otherwise ink may leak from the ink cartridge.
❏ Keep ink cartridge and maintenance box out of the reach of children.
❏ Do not let the paper’s edge slide across your skin because the edge of the paper may cut you.

Related Information
& “Ink Cartridge Handling Precautions” on page 280
& “Maintenance Box Handling Precautions” on page 281

Advisories and Warnings for Using the Touchscreen

❏ The LCD screen may contain a few small bright or dark spots, and because of its features it may have an uneven
brightness. These are normal and do not indicate that it is damaged in any way.
❏ Only use a dry, soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use liquid or chemical cleaners.
❏ The exterior cover of the touchscreen could break if it receives a heavy impact. Contact your dealer if the panel
surface chips or cracks, and do not touch or attempt to remove the broken pieces.
❏ Press the touchscreen gently with your finger. Do not press force or operate with your nails.
❏ Do not use sharp objects such as ball point pens or sharp pencils to perform operations.

18
Important Instructions > Disposing of European Printer Models

❏ Condensation inside the touchscreen due to abrupt changes in temperature or humidity may cause
performance to deteriorate.

Advisories and Warnings for Using the Printer with a Wireless

Connection
❏ Radio waves from this printer may negatively affect the operation of medical electronic equipment, causing
them to malfunction. When using this printer inside medical facilities or near medical equipment, follow
directions from the authorized personnel representing the medical facilities, and follow all posted warnings and
directions on the medical equipment.
❏ Radio waves from this printer may negatively affect the operation of automatically controlled devices such as
automatic doors or fire alarms, and could lead to accidents due to malfunction. When using this printer near
automatically controlled devices, follow all posted warnings and directions on these devices.

Protecting Your Personal Information

When you give the printer to someone else or dispose of it, erase all the personal information stored in the printer's
memory by selecting the menus on the control panel as described below.
❏ Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Restore Default Settings > Clear All Data and
Settings
❏ Settings > General Settings > System Administration > HDD Erase Settings > Erase All Memory > High
Speed, Overwrite, or Triple Overwrite
Data on the HDD can be completely erased by High Speed.
❏ Overwriting it once is enough to erase the data on the HDD.
To overwrite to an additional level, select Triple Overwrite.
The Overwrite or Triple Overwrite function overwrites any invalid data in the memory which can take some
time to process.
❏ Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Clear Internal Memory Data > PDL Font, Macro,
and Working Area

Disposing of European Printer Models

There is a battery in the printer.
The crossed out wheeled bin label that can be found on your product indicates that this product and incorporated
batteries should not be disposed of via the normal household waste stream. To prevent possible harm to the
environment or human health please separate this product and its batteries from other waste streams to ensure
that it can be recycled in an environmentally sound manner. For more details on available collection facilities
please contact your local government office or the retailer where you purchased this product. Use of the chemical
symbols Pb, Cd or Hg indicates if these metals are used in the battery.
This information only applies to customers in the European Union, according to Directive 2006/66/EC OF THE
EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL OF 6 September 2006 on batteries and accumulators and
waste batteries and accumulators and repealing Directive 91/157/EEC and legislation transposing and
implementing it into the various national legal systems, and to customers in countries in Europe, Middle East and
Africa (EMEA) where they have implemented equivalent regulations.

19
Important Instructions > Disposing of European Printer Models

For other countries, please contact your local government to investigate the possibility of recycling your product.

20
Part Names and Functions

Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Part Names and Functions > Front

Front

A Control panel Allows you to make settings and perform operations on the printer.
Also displays the printer’s status.

B ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) cover Open when removing jammed originals in the ADF.
(F)

C ADF edge guide Feeds originals straight into the printer. Slide to the edge of the
originals.

D ADF input tray Feeds originals automatically.

E ADF output tray Holds originals ejected from the ADF.

F Stopper Prevents the ejected originals from falling from the ADF output tray.

G Face down tray (K) Holds the ejected paper.

H Edge guide Feeds the paper straight into the printer. Slide to the edges of the
paper.

I Paper tray (B) Loads paper. You can load all types of paper (thick paper and
envelopes) that can be used in this printer.

J Cover (E) Open when paper is jammed.

K Paper cassette 1, 2, 3, 4 (C1, C2, C3, C4) Loads paper.

L Cover (J) Open when paper is jammed.

M Front cover (L) Open when removing jammed paper or when replacing the
maintenance box.

N Ink cartridge cover (A) Open when replacing the ink cartridge.

22
Part Names and Functions > Front

A Document cover Blocks external light while scanning.

B Scanner glass Place the originals. You can place originals that are not fed from the
ADF such as envelopes or thick books.

C External interface USB port Connects memory devices.

D Cleaning stick This is a service part for cleaning the inside of the printer.

E Document holder Holds the manuals.

You can also attach it the rear.

F Maintenance box cover (H) Open when replacing the maintenance box. You need to open the
front cover (L) first.
The maintenance box is a container that collects a very small amount
of surplus ink during cleaning or printing.

G Face up tray (G) Holds the ejected paper.

H Duplexing unit (D1) Open when removing jammed paper.

I Cleaning cloth holder Holds the cleaning cloth.

J Cleaning cloth Use to clean the glass surface of the scanner unit and the ADF.

23
Part Names and Functions > Rear

Rear

A USB port Connects a USB cable.

B LAN port Connects a LAN cable.

C Option mounting point Use when this option is installed. See related information for more
details.

D AC inlet Connects the power cord.

Related Information
& “List of Optional Items” on page 330

24
Guide to the Control Panel

Turning the Power On and Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Home Screen Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Menu Screen Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Job/Status Screen Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Entering Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Viewing Animations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Guide to the Control Panel > Control Panel

Turning the Power On and Off

Turning the Power On

Press the power button on the control panel to turn on the power. Hold down the button until the LCD screen
is displayed.
The home screen is displayed when startup is complete.

Turning the Power Off

Press the button, then follow the on-screen instructions to turn off the power.

c Important:
❏ When unplugging the power cord, wait until the power light is off and the LCD screen has disappeared.

Control Panel

A Power buttonPower light

26
Guide to the Control Panel > Home Screen Configuration

B Home button
Returns you to the home screen.

C Touch screen
Displays the setting items and messages.
When no operations are performed for a specific length of time, the printer enters sleep mode and the display
turns off. Tap anywhere on the touch screen to turn on the display. Depending on the current settings,
pressing the power button wakes the printer from sleep mode.

D Data light
Flashes when the printer is processing data, and turns on when there are jobs waiting to be processed.

E Error light
Turns on or flashes when an error occurs.
Displays any errors on the screen.

F Fax reception light

Turns on when received documents that have not yet been processed.

You can tilt the control panel.

Home Screen Configuration

27
Guide to the Control Panel > Home Screen Configuration

A Title
Indicates the current screen.

B Displays information on each item. Grayed out items are not available.

Displays the Printer Status screen.

Displays the network connection status. See the following for more details.
“Guide to the Network Icon” on page 30

Displays the Device Sound Settings screen.

You can set Mute and Quiet Mode. You can access the Sounds menu from this screen. You can
also make this setting from the Settings menu.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds

Indicates whether or not Quiet Mode is set for the printer. When this
feature is enabled, the noise made by printer operations is reduced,
but print speed may slow down. However, noises may not be
reduced depending on the selected paper type and print quality.

Indicates that Mute is set for the printer.

Enters the printer into sleep mode. When the icon is grayed out, the printer cannot enter sleep
mode.

Displays the Help screen. You can check solutions to problems from here.

Indicates that the user restriction feature is enabled. Select this icon to log in to the printer. You
need to select a user name and then enter a password. Contact your printer administrator for
login information.

When is displayed, a user with access permission has logged in. Select the icon to logout.

28
Guide to the Control Panel > Home Screen Configuration

C Displays each menu.

You can change the position and order of the menu icon.
❏ Copy
Allows you to copy documents.
❏ Scan
Allows you to scan documents and save them to a memory device or a computer.
❏ Fax
Allows you to send faxes.
❏ Presets
Allows you to register frequently used settings for copying, scanning, or faxing as a preset.
❏ Memory Device
Allows you to print JPEG, TIFF or PDF data on a memory device such as a USB flash drive connected to the printer.
❏ Storage
Allows you to store data to the built-in hard disc and to view, print, and output as a file any time you want.
❏ Fax Box
Allows you to store received documents, documents to be sent, or documents for polling faxes.
❏ Print Stored Documents
Allows you to temporarily save jobs sent from the printer driver to the printer's memory before printing. You can
print passwords and test prints when printing multiple copies.
❏ Quick Dial
If you have assigned a recipient registered in the contacts list to a quick dial, you can send faxes quickly to the
recipient.
❏ Settings
Allows you to make settings related to maintenance, printer settings, and operations.

D Displays the status of jobs and printer. The contents of display change depending on the printer’s status.

The number displayed indicates the number of faxes that have not yet been read, printed, or
saved.

Job/Status Displays on-going jobs and jobs that are standing by. Tap to display the type of jobs, arrival time,
user names, and so on as a list. The number displayed indicates the number of jobs that are
standing by.

Pauses the current job and allows you to interrupt another job. Press this button again to restart a
paused job. You cannot interrupt from a computer.

Displays the Paper Setting screen. You can select the paper size and paper type settings for each
paper source.

An information Displays the printer’s status such as the Interrupt status, Error status, current job, and unprocessed
for the faxes.
interrupted job,
error or unread
fax, and job
name

Stop Pauses or cancels the job being processed.

Clock Displays the current time when there is no specific printer status to display.

29
Guide to the Control Panel > Menu Screen Configuration

Guide to the Network Icon

The printer is not connected to a wired (Ethernet) network or unset it.

The printer is connected to a wired (Ethernet) network.

The printer is not connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network.

The printer is searching for SSID, unset IP address, or having a problem with a wireless
(Wi-Fi) network.

The printer is connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network.

The number of bars indicates the signal strength of the connection. The more bars
there are, the stronger the connection.

The printer is not connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network in Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)
mode.

The printer is connected to a wireless (Wi-Fi) network in Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) mode.

Menu Screen Configuration

A Returns to the previous screen.

B Switches the list of settings using the tabs. The Basic Settings tab displays frequently used items. The Advanced tab
displays other items that you can set as necessary.

30
Guide to the Control Panel > Job/Status Screen Configuration

C
Displays the list of setting items. When is displayed, you can view additional information by selecting the icon.
Make settings by selecting the item or adding a check mark. When you have changed an item from the user default
or the factory default, is displayed on the item.
Grayed out items are not available. Select the item to check why it is unavailable.

If any problems occur, is displayed on the item. Select the icon to check how to solve the problem.

D Starts operations using the current settings. Items vary depending on the menu.

Presets Displays the preset list. You can register current setting as a preset, or load registered presets.

Copies Displays the on-screen keypad allowing you to enter the number of copies.

Reset Tap to cancel changes you have made and return to the original settings.

Preview Displays a preview of the image before printing, copying, scanning, or sending faxes.

x Starts printing, copying, scanning, or sending faxes.

Job/Status Screen Configuration

Select the Job/Status on the control panel to display the Job/Status menu. You can check the status of the printer or
the jobs.

A Switches the displayed lists.

B Filter the jobs by functional.

C When Active is selected, displays the list of ongoing jobs and jobs waiting to be processed.
When Log is selected, displays the job history.
You can cancel jobs or check the error code displayed in the history when the job has failed.

D Displays any errors that have occurred in the printer. Select the error from the list to display the error message.

E Switches the displayed lists.

When you are using the additional interface slot, you can switch tabs to display the status of the optional item. See
related information for more details.

F Indicates the approximate ink levels and the approximate service life of the maintenance box.

31
Guide to the Control Panel > Entering Characters

Related Information
& “Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu” on page 266
& “List of Optional Items” on page 330

Reserve Job
You can reserve jobs during copying or printing when you are not using the ADF or the Scanner Glass.

You do not need to perform any special actions to reserve jobs. If you select x during normal operation, the job
runs as soon as the current job is complete.
You can reserve up to 100 of the following types of jobs including the current job.
❏ Print
❏ Copy
❏ Send Fax

Entering Characters
You can enter characters and symbols by using on-screen keyboard when you make network settings, and so on.

A Moves the cursor to the input position.

B Enters character.

C Deletes a character to the left.

D Indicates the character count.

E Switches between upper case and lower case or numbers and symbols.

F Enters a space.

G Enters frequently used email domain addresses or URLs by simply selecting the item.

32
Guide to the Control Panel > Viewing Animations

Viewing Animations
You can view animations of operating instructions such as loading paper or removing jammed paper on the LCD
screen.

❏ Select : Displays the help screen. Select How To and select the items that you want to view.
❏ Select How To at the bottom of the operation screen: Displays the context-sensitive animation.

33
Loading Paper

Paper Handling Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Paper Size and Type Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Loading Paper > Paper Size and Type Settings

Paper Handling Precautions

Paper Handling
❏ Read the instruction sheets supplied with the paper.
❏ Fan and align the edges of the paper before loading.

Paper Storage
Notice the following when storing papers.
❏ Seal the rest of papers in a plastic bag to avoid absorbing moisture.
❏ Keep in a place with less humidity. Also, do not wet the paper.
❏ Keep away from direct sunlight.
❏ Do not stand papers, place it on a flat.

Note:
Although you store papers as mentioned above, the deterioration of print quality or paper jams may occur depending on the
environment. Before using stored paper, try printing a small amount of paper and check for paper jams or smears on the
printout.

Related Information
& “Unavailable Paper Types” on page 395

Paper Size and Type Settings

If you register the paper size and type on the screen displayed when you insert the paper cassette, the printer
informs you when the registered information and print settings differ. This prevents you from wasting paper and
ink by making sure you are not printing on the wrong paper size or printing in the wrong color due to using
settings that do not match the paper type.

35
Loading Paper > Paper Size and Type Settings > Setting the Paper Type

If displayed paper size and type differ from the loaded paper, select the item to change. If the settings match the
loaded paper, close the screen.
Note:
You can also display the paper size and paper type settings screen by selecting on the control panel.

Setting the Paper Type

To obtain optimum printing results, select the paper type that suits the paper.

Paper Name Paper Type

Control Panel Printer Driver PostScript Printer Epson Universal Printer

Driver Driver

Epson Business Plain paper1 Plain paper1 Plain1 Plain paper1

Paper (64-75g/m2)
Epson Bright White
Ink Jet Paper

Epson Matte Paper- Matte Epson Matte Epson Matte -

Heavyweight

Epson Archival Matte Epson Matte Epson Matte -

Matte Paper

Epson Double-Sided Matte Epson Matte Epson Matte -

Matte Paper

Epson Photo Quality Matte Epson Matte Photo Quality Ink -

Ink Jet Paper Jet Paper
Epson Double-sided
Photo Quality Ink
Jet Paper

Plain paper Plain paper1 Plain paper1 Plain1 Plain paper1

(64-75g/m2)
(60 to 75 g/m2)

Plain paper Plain paper2 Plain paper2 Plain2 Plain paper2

(76-90g/m2)
(76 to 90 g/m2)

Thick paper Thick1 (91-105g/m2) Thick paper1 Thick-Paper1 Thick paper1

(91 to 105 g/m2)

Thick paper Thick2 Thick paper2 Thick-Paper2 Thick paper2

(106-135g/m2)
(106 to 135 g/m2)

Thick paper Thick3 Thick paper3 Thick-Paper3 Thick paper3

(136-160g/m2)
(136 to 160 g/m2)

Thick paper Thick4 Thick paper4 Thick-Paper4 Thick paper4

(161-250g/m2)
(161 to 250 g/m2)

Extra thick paper Extra thick paper Extra Thick-Paper Extra Thick-Paper Extra Thick-Paper

(251 to 350 g/m2)

36
Loading Paper > Loading Paper

List of Detected Paper Sizes

When you enable Paper Size Auto Detect, the following paper sizes are detected automatically when they are
loaded in thepaper cassette.
A6, B6, A5, Half letter, B5, A4, Letter, B4, Legal, A3, 11×17 in.
Similar paper sizes such as A4 and Letter may not be detected correctly. If Half letter, Letter, Legal, and Leger sizes
are detected as A5, A4, B4, and A3 sizes, select and then set the correct size.

If the sizes cannot be automatically detected, select , disable the Paper Size Auto Detect feature, and then set
the paper size that you loaded.

Loading Paper
You can load paper by referring to the animations displayed on the printer's LCD screen.

Select , and then select How To > Load paper. Select the paper source you want to use to display the
animations. Select Close to close the animation screen.

c Important:
Insert and remove the paper cassette slowly. Insert the high capacity tray slowly because the tray is heavy due to the
large amount of paper loaded in the tray.

37
Loading Paper > Loading Paper > Loading Pre-punched Paper

Note:
When you change the position of the edge guides in the paper cassette, release the lock on the cassette and then move the
edge guides. After changing the position, lock the cassette again.

Loading Envelopes
Load envelopes in the center of the paper tray short edge first with the flap facing down, and slide the edge guides
to the edges of the envelopes.

If the flap is on the short edge, make sure you include the flap when setting the user-defined size.

Loading Pre-punched Paper

Set margin settings so that you avoid printing over the holes.
You cannot print in the area 17 mm from the edge (pre-punched edge) of the paper.

38
Loading Paper > Loading Paper > Loading Pre-punched Paper

c Important:
Load the prepunched paper with the hole side toward you. Loading paper in an incorrect direction may cause paper
jam or smears inside of the printer.

❏ Paper cassette
Load pre-punched paper with the printable side facing down and the position of the holes at the front.

Select On as the Prepunched setting on the paper settings screen displayed on the control panel.
❏ Paper tray
Load pre-punched paper with the printable side facing up and the position of the holes at the front.

Select On as the Prepunched setting on the paper settings screen displayed on the control panel.
Note:
You can also display the paper settings screen by selecting on the control panel.

39
Loading Paper > Loading Paper > Loading Long Papers

Loading Long Papers

Load a single sheet of long paper in the paper tray. Select User-Defined as the paper size setting.

❏ If paper falls from the face up tray, prepare a box and so on to make sure that paper does not touch the floor.
❏ Do not touch paper that is being ejected. It could injure your hand or cause print quality to decline.
❏ When loading long paper, be careful not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper when holding the paper.

40
Placing Originals

Placing Originals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Detecting the Original Size Automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Originals that are not Supported by the ADF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Placing Originals > Placing Originals

Placing Originals
You can place the originals by referring to the animations displayed on the printer's LCD screen.

Select , and then select How To > Place Originals. Select the method of placing originals that you want to view.
Select Close to close the animation screen.

If you want to copy multiple originals, place all of the originals on the ADF.

When using the scanner glass

! Caution:
Be careful not to trap your fingers when closing the document cover. Otherwise you may be injured.

c Important:
❏ When placing bulky originals such as books, prevent exterior light from shining directly onto the scanner glass.
If exterior light is too strong, the size of your original may not be automatically detected or the result of copying
or scanning may become white.
❏ Do not apply too much force to the scanner glass. Otherwise, it may be damaged.
❏ Do not press with too much force on the original. If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots
may occur.
❏ If the original has marks from folding or wrinkles, smooth them out, and then place them on the scanner glass.
Images may be blurred at the parts where the original is not in close contact with the scanner glass.
❏ If there is any trash or dirt on the scanner glass, the scanning range may expand to include it, so the image of the
original may be displaced or reduced. Remove any trash and dirt on the scanner glass before scanning.

❏ Remove the originals after scanning. If you leave the originals on the scanner glass for a long time, they may stick
to the surface of the glass.

42
Placing Originals > Detecting the Original Size Automatically

Note:
❏ A range of 1.5 mm from the edges of the scanner glass is not scanned.
❏ When originals are placed in the ADF and on the scanner glass, priority is given to the originals in the ADF.
❏ Some sizes may not be automatically detected. In this situation, manually select the size of the originals.

When using the ADF

c Important:
❏ Do not load originals above the line just under the triangle symbol inside the ADFedge guide.

❏ Do not add originals while scanning.

Note:
❏ You can place originals smaller than A4 size with the long edge facing toward the ADF.
❏ Some sizes may not be automatically detected. In this situation, manually select the size of the originals.

Related Information
& “Originals that are not Supported by the ADF” on page 44
& “Detecting the Original Size Automatically” on page 43
& “Scanner Specifications” on page 439
& “ADF Specifications” on page 440

Detecting the Original Size Automatically

When you select Auto Detectas the paper setting, the following types of paper size are identified automatically.

43
Placing Originals > Originals that are not Supported by the ADF

❏ Placing vertically: A4, B5, A5

Place the long edge of the original toward the paper feed entrance of the ADF or the left side of the scanner
glass.

❏ Placing horizontally: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5 (scanner glass only)

Place the short edge of the original toward the paper feed entrance of the ADF or the left side of the scanner
glass.

Note:
The sizes for the following originals may not be detected correctly. If the sizes are not detected, set the size manually on the
control panel.
❏ Originals that are torn, folded, wrinkled, or curled (if the originals are curled, flatten the curl before placing the
originals.)
❏ Originals with a lot of binder holes
❏ OHPs, translucent originals, or glossy originals

Originals that are not Supported by the ADF

c Important:
Do not feed photographs or valuable original artwork into the ADF. Misfeeding may wrinkle or damage the
original. Scan these documents on the scanner glass instead.

To prevent paper jams, avoid placing the following originals in the ADF. For these types, use the scanner glass.
❏ Originals that are torn, folded, wrinkled, deteriorated, or curled
❏ Originals with binder holes
❏ Originals held together with tape, staples, paper clips etc.
❏ Originals that have stickers or labels stuck to them
❏ Originals that are cut irregularly or not right angled
❏ Originals that are bound
❏ OHPs, thermal transfer paper, or carbon backs
❏ Originals that are just printed out (not dried, not cooled, and so on)

44
Inserting and Removing a Memory
Device

Inserting an External USB Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Removing an External USB Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

Inserting and Removing a Memory Device > Removing an External USB Device

Inserting an External USB Device

Insert an external USB device into the external interface USB port.

Related Information
& “Memory Device Specifications” on page 446

Removing an External USB Device

Remove the external USB device.

c Important:
If you remove the external USB device while operating the printer, the data on the external USB device may be lost.

46
Printing

Printing Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Printing on Envelopes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Printing Photos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96

Printing Web Pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Printing Using a Cloud Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Printing Documents

Printing from a Computer - Windows

If you cannot change some of the printer driver settings, they may have been restricted by the administrator.
Contact your printer administrator for assistance.

Printing Using Easy Settings

Note:
Operations may differ depending on the application. See the application's help for details.

1. Load paper in the printer.

“Loading Paper” on page 37

2. Open the file you want to print.

3. Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu.

4. Select your printer.

5. Select Preferences or Properties to access the printer driver window.

48
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

6. Change the settings as necessary.

See the menu options for the printer driver for details.
Note:
❏ You can also see the online help for explanations of the setting items. Right-clicking an item displays Help.
❏ When you select Print Preview, you can see a preview of your document before printing.
❏ When you only want to print on one side of the paper, set 2-Sided Printing to Off.
❏ If you want to save the document to be printed in storage, select the Finishing or More Options tab, select Save to
Storage and Print in Job Type, and then specify where to save the document.

7. Click OK to close the printer driver window.

8. Click Print.
Note:
❏ When you select Print Preview, a preview window is displayed. To change the settings, click Cancel, and then repeat
the procedure from step 3.
❏ If you want to cancel printing, on your computer right-click on your printer in Devices and Printers, Printer, or in
Printers and Faxes. Click See what's printing, right-click on the job you want to cancel, and then select Cancel.
However, you cannot cancel a print job from the computer once it has been completely sent to the printer. In this
case, cancel the print job by using the printer's control panel.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
& “Setting the Paper Type” on page 36
& “Menu Options for the Printer Driver” on page 49

Menu Options for the Printer Driver

Open the print window in an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.

Main Tab

Printing Presets:
Add/Remove Presets:
You can add or remove your own presets for frequently used print settings. Select the preset you want
to use from the list.

Ink Levels:
Displays the approximate ink level. You need to install EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature.
You can download it from the Epson website.
http://www.epson.com

Show Settings/Hide Settings:

Displays a list of items currently set on the Main, Finishing, and More Options tabs. You can show
or hide the current setting list screen.

49
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Restore Defaults:
Return all settings to their factory default values. The settings on the Finishing and the More
Options tabs are also reset to their defaults.

Print Preview:
Displays a preview of your document before printing.

Job Arranger Lite:

Job Arranger Lite allows you to combine several files created by different applications and print them
as a single print job.

Paper Source:
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed. Select Auto Select to automatically select the
paper source selected in the print settings on the printer. If you select Set separately for each paper,
you can select multiple paper sources for the pages in your document. You can also select whether or
not to print on the front cover and back cover.

Document Size:
Select the paper size on which you want to print. If you select User-Defined, enter the paper width
and height, and then register the size.

Output Paper:
Select the paper size on which you want to print. If the Document Size differs from the Output
Paper, Reduce/Enlarge Document is selected automatically. You do not have to select it when
printing without reducing or enlarging the size of a document.

Reduce/Enlarge Document:
Allows you to reduce or enlarge the size of a document.

Fit to Page:
Automatically reduce or enlarge the document to fit to the paper size selected in Output
Paper.

Zoom to:
Prints with a specific percentage.

Center:
Prints images in the center of the paper.

Paper Type:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Auto Select (plain papers), printing is
performed from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the printer's
settings.
Plain paper1, Plain paper2, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High quality plain paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to off in the
printer's Auto Select Settings. When printing on the front cover and back cover, paper is also printed
from the paper source set for paper types other than the above.

50
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Quality:
Select the pint quality you want to use for printing. Available settings depend on the paper type you
select. Selecting High provides higher quality printing, but the printing speed may be slower.

Paper Source Information:

Displays the paper information set for each paper source.

Orientation:
Select the orientation you want to use to print.

Color:
Select whether to print in color or in monochrome.

2-Sided Printing:
Allows you to perform 2-sided printing.

Settings:
You can specify the binding edge and the binding margins. When printing multi-page
documents, you can select to print starting from either the front or the back side of the page.

Multi-Page:
Allows you to print several pages on one sheet or perform poster printing. Click Layout Order to
specify the order in which pages are printed.

Reverse Order:
Allows you to print from the last page so that the pages are stacked in the correct order after printing.

Collate/Uncollated:
Select Collate to print multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.

Copies:
Set the number of copies you want to print.

Finishing Tab

Show Settings/Hide Settings:

Displays a list of items currently set on the Main, Finishing, and More Options tabs. You can show
or hide the current setting list screen.

Restore Defaults:
Return all settings to their factory default values. The settings on the Main and More Options tabs
are also reset to their defaults.

Job Type:
Select whether to store print data on the printer.

Normal Print:
Printing starts without storing.

51
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Confidential Job:
Password-protect confidential documents when printing. If you use this feature, the print data
is stored in the printer and can only be printed after the password has been entered using the
printer's control panel. Click Settings to change the settings.

Verify Job:
When printing multiple copies, allows you to print one copy to check the content. To print
after making the second copy, operate the printer's control panel.
Click Settings to set User Name and Job Name.

Re-Print Job:
Allows you to store the print job in the printer's memory. You can start printing by operating
the printer's control panel.
Click Settings to set User Name and Job Name.

Save to Storage:
You can save the data to be printed in a storage and print it later.

Save to Storage and Print:

You can save print data in a storage when printing.

Paper Source:
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed. Select Auto Select to automatically select the
paper source selected in the print settings on the printer. If you select Set separately for each paper,
you can select multiple paper sources for the pages in your document. You can also select whether or
not to print on the front cover and back cover.

Separator Sheet:
Select settings for inserting separator sheets between printouts.

Output Tray:
Select which output tray to use for printouts. The output tray may be automatically selected based on
other print settings.

Sort:
Select how to sort multiple copies.

Rotate Sort:
Stacks printouts alternately in the portrait orientation and the landscape orientation. To use
this feature, select Auto Select as the Paper Source setting and Auto Select or Face Down
Tray as theOutput Tray setting. The printouts are stacked in the face down tray.

Mixed Paper Size:

When the following document sizes are mixed, stacks the printouts by aligning the short edge of the
large size paper and the long edge of the small size paper. Select Specify Orientation, and then click
Settings to set the paper orientation and the binding margin.
❏ A3/A4
❏ Ledger/Letter

52
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

❏ B4/B5
❏ 8K/16K

More Options Tab

Printing Presets:
Add/Remove Presets:
You can add or remove your own presets for frequently used print settings. Select the preset you want
to use from the list.

Show Settings/Hide Settings:

Displays a list of items currently set on the Main, Finishing, and More Options tabs. You can show
or hide the current setting list screen.

Restore Defaults:
Return all settings to their factory default values. The settings on the Main and Finishing tabs are
also reset to their defaults.

Job Type:
Select whether to store print data on the printer.

Normal Print:
Printing starts without storing.

Confidential Job:
Password-protect confidential documents when printing. If you use this feature, the print data
is stored in the printer and can only be printed after the password has been entered using the
printer's control panel. Click Settings to change the settings.

Verify Job:
When printing multiple copies, allows you to print one copy to check the content. To print
after making the second copy, operate the printer's control panel.
Click Settings to set User Name and Job Name.

Re-Print Job:
Allows you to store the print job in the printer's memory. You can start printing by operating
the printer's control panel.
Click Settings to set User Name and Job Name.

Save to Storage:
You can save the data to be printed in a storage and print it later.

Save to Storage and Print:

You can save print data in a storage when printing.

53
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Color Correction:

Automatic:
Adjusts the tone of images automatically.

Custom:
Allows you to perform manual color correction. Clicking Advanced opens the Color
Correction screen where you can select a detailed method of color correction. Allows you to
set the method for Color Universal Print and emphasize text and thin lines when you click
Image Options. You can also enable Edge Smoothing, Fix Red-Eye, and print settings with
reduced edge blurring.

Additional Settings:

Watermark Features:
Allows you to make settings for anti-copy patterns, watermarks, or headers and footers.

Add/Delete:
Allows you to add or remove any anti-copy patterns or watermarks that you want to use.

Settings:
Allows you to set the printing method for anti-copy patterns or watermarks.

Header/Footer:
You can print information such as a user name and printing date in headers or footers.

Rotate 180°:
Rotates pages 180 degrees before printing. Select this item when printing on paper such as
envelopes that are loaded in fixed direction in the printer.

Maintenance Tab

Job Arranger Lite:

Opens the Job Arranger Lite window. Here you can open and edit previously saved data.

EPSON Status Monitor 3:

Opens the EPSON Status Monitor 3 window. Here you can confirm the status of the printer and the
consumables. You need to install EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature. You can download it
from the Epson website.
http://www.epson.com

Monitoring Preferences:
Allows you to make settings for items on the EPSON Status Monitor 3 window. You need to install
EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature. You can download it from the Epson website.
http://www.epson.com

Extended Settings:
Allows you to make a variety of settings. Right-click each item to view the Help for more details.

54
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Print Queue:
Displays the jobs waiting to be printed. You can check, pause, or resume print jobs.

Printer and Option Information:

Displays the number of sheets of paper fed into the printer or the ADF.

Language:
Changes the language to be used on the printer driver window. To apply the settings, close the printer
driver, and then open it again.

Software Update:
Starts EPSON Software Updater to check for the latest version of applications on the Internet.

Technical Support:
If the manual is installed on your computer, the manual is displayed. If it is not installed, you can
connect to the Epson Web site to check the manual and available technical support.

Adding Printing Presets for Easy Printing

If you create your own preset of frequently used print settings on the printer driver, you can print easily by
selecting the preset from the list.

1. On the printer driver's Main or More Options tab, set each item (such as Document Size and Paper Type).

2. Click Add/Remove Presets in Printing Presets.

3. Enter a Name and, if necessary, enter a comment.

4. Click Save.
Note:
To delete an added preset, click Add/Remove Presets, select the preset name you want to delete from the list, and then
delete it.

“Main Tab” on page 49

“More Options Tab” on page 53

5. Click Print.
The next time you want to print using the same settings, select the registered setting name from Printing Presets,
and click OK.

55
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Printing on 2-Sides
You can print on both sides of the paper.

Note:
❏ If you do not use paper that is suitable for 2-sided printing, the print quality may decline and paper jams may occur.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 395
❏ Depending on the paper and the data, ink may bleed through to the other side of the paper.

1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select the method of 2-Sided Printing.

2. Click Settings, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.

3. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

56
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Printing a Booklet
You can also print a booklet that can be created by re-ordering the pages and folding the printout.

Note:
❏ If you do not use paper that is suitable for 2-sided printing, the print quality may decline and paper jams may occur.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 395
❏ Depending on the paper and the data, ink may bleed through to the other side of the paper.

1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select the method of 2-Sided Printing.

2. Click Settings, and then select Booklet.

3. Click OK.
❏ Center Binding: Use this method when printing a small number of pages that can be stacked and easily
folded in half.
❏ Side Binding. Use this method when printing one sheet (four pages) at a time, folding each in half, and then
putting them together in one volume.

4. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

5. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

57
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Printing Several Pages on One Sheet

You can print several pages of data on a single sheet of paper.

1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up, 8-Up, 9-Up, or 16-Up as the Multi-Page setting.

2. Click Layout Order, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.

3. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

58
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Printing to Fit the Paper Size

Select the paper size you loaded in the printer as the Destination Paper Size setting.

1. On the printer driver's Main tab, make the following settings.

❏ Document Size: Select the size of the paper you set in the application setting.
❏ Output Paper: Select the paper size you loaded in the printer.
Fit to Page is automatically selected.

Note:
Click Center to print the reduced image in the middle of the paper.

2. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

59
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document at any Magnification

You can reduce or enlarge the size of a document by a specific percentage.

1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select the document size from the Document Size setting.

2. Select the paper size you want to print on from the Output Paper setting.

3. Select Reduce/Enlarge Document, Zoom to, and then enter a percentage.

4. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

5. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Inserting Separator Sheets

You can insert separator sheets between copies or jobs. Use plain paper, thick paper, or high-quality paper with a
thickness of up to 160 g/m² as a separator sheet.

60
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Note:
When different users send print jobs from the computer, you can also insert separator sheets between users from Settings >
General Settings > Printer Settings > Universal Print Settings > Insert Sheets per User.

1. On the printer driver's Finishing tab, click Separator Sheet next to Paper Source, and then select the method
for inserting separator sheets between printouts.
❏ Insert sheet between copies: Inserts separator sheets between copies.
❏ Insert sheet between jobs: Inserts separator sheets between jobs.

2. Select the paper source for the separator sheets.

3. For Insert sheet between copies, select the number of copies to print before a separator sheet is inserted as the
Insert sheet after every setting.
You need to set multiple numbers of copies as the Copies setting on the Main tab.

4. Click OK to close the Separator Sheet Settings window.

5. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

6. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Storing Data in the Printer's Memory for Printing

When printing a large volume of documents, you can print one copy to check the contents. To print after making
the second copy, operate the printer's control panel.

1. On the printer driver's Finishing tab, select Verify Job as the Job Type setting.

61
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

2. Click Settings, enter the User Name and Job Name, and then click OK.
You can identify the job by using the job name on the printer's control panel.

3. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

4. Click Print.
Only one copy is printed, and the print job is stored in the printer's memory.
The stored job is deleted when the printer is turned off.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Printing a Stored Job

1. Tap Print Stored Documents on the printer's control panel.

2. Select the job you want to print.

Select the User Name from the list, and then select the job. If you are asked to enter a password, enter the one
you set on the printer driver.

3. Tap x to start printing.

Note:
Tap Delete to delete the job.

Printing One Image on Multiple Sheets for Enlargement (Creating a Poster)

This feature allows you to print one image on multiple sheets of paper. You can create a larger poster by taping
them together.

1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select 2x1 Poster, 2x2 Poster, 3x3 Poster, or 4x4 Poster as the Multi-Page
setting.

62
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

2. Click Settings, make the appropriate settings, and then click OK.
Note:
Print Cutting Guides allows you to print a cutting guide.

3. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Making Posters Using Overlapping Alignment Marks

Here is an example of how to make a poster when 2x2 Poster is selected, and Overlapping Alignment Marks is
selected in Print Cutting Guides.

63
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

1. Prepare Sheet 1 and Sheet 2. Cut off the margins of Sheet 1 along the vertical blue line through the center of
the top and bottom cross marks.

2. Place the edge of Sheet 1 on top of Sheet 2 and align the cross marks, then temporarily tape the two sheets
together from the back.

64
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

3. Cut the taped sheets in two along the vertical red line through the alignment markers (this time, the line to the
left of the cross marks).

4. Tape the sheets together from the back.

5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to tape Sheet 3 and Sheet 4 together.

65
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

6. Cut off the margins of Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 along the horizontal blue line through the center of the left and right
side cross marks.

7. Place the edge of Sheet 1 and Sheet 2 on top of Sheet 3 and Sheet 4 and align the cross marks, and then
temporarily tape them together from the back.

66
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

8. Cut the taped sheets in two along the horizontal red line through the alignment markers (this time, the line
above the cross marks).

9. Tape the sheets together from the back.

67
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

10. Cut off the remaining margins along the outer guide.

Printing with a Header and Footer

You can print information such as a user name and printing date in headers or footers.

1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Watermark Features, and then select the Header/Footer
checkbox.

68
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

2. Select Settings, select the items you want to print, and click OK.
Note:
❏ To specify the first page number, select Page Number from the position you want to print in the header or footer, and
then select the number in Starting number.
❏ If you want to print text in the header or footer, select the position you want to print, and then select Text. Enter the
text you want to print in the text input field.

3. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Printing a Watermark
You can print a watermark such as "Confidential" or an anti-copy pattern on your printouts. If you print with an
anti-copy pattern, the hidden letters appear when photocopied in order to distinguish the original from the copies.

Anti-Copy Pattern is available under the following conditions:

❏ 2-Sided Printing: Off
❏ Paper Type: Plain paper 1, Plain paper 2, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Preprinted, High Quality Plain Paper,
Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2, Thick paper 3 or Thick paper 4
❏ Quality: Standard
❏ Color Correction: Automatic

Note:
You can also add your own watermark or anti-copy pattern.

1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Watermark Features, and then select Anti-Copy Pattern or
Watermark.

2. Click Settings to change details such as the size, density, or position of the pattern or the mark.

3. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49

69
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

“Finishing Tab” on page 51

“More Options Tab” on page 53

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Printing Password-Protected Files

Yon can set a password for a print job so that it starts printing only after entering the password on the printer's
control panel.

1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, select Confidential Job in the Job Type and then enter a password.

2. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

3. Click Print.

4. To print the job, select Print Stored Documents on the home screen of the printer's control panel. Select the
job you want to print, and then enter the password.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

70
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

Printing Multiple Files Together

Job Arranger Lite allows you to combine several files created by different applications and print them as a single
print job. You can specify the print settings for combined files, such as multi-page layout, and 2-sided printing.

1. On the printer driver's Main tab, select Job Arranger Lite.

“Main Tab” on page 49

2. Click Print.
When you start printing, the Job Arranger Lite window is displayed.

3. With the Job Arranger Lite window opened, open the file that you want to combine with the current file, and
then repeat the above steps.

4. When you select a print job added to Print Project Lite in the Job Arranger Lite window, you can edit the page
layout.

5. Click Print from the File menu to start printing.

Note:
If you close the Job Arranger Lite window before adding all the print data to the Print Project, the print job you are
currently working on is canceled. Click Save from the File menu to save the current job. The extension of the saved files
is "ecl".
To open a Print Project, click Job Arranger Lite on the printer driver's Maintenance tab to open the Job Arranger Lite
window. Next, select Open from the File menu to select the file.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Printing Using the Color Universal Print Feature

You can enhance the visibility of texts and images in printouts.

Color Universal Print is only available when the following settings are selected.

71
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

❏ Paper Type: Plain paper 1, Plain paper 2, Letterhead, Recycled, Color, Preprinted, High Quality Plain Paper,
Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2, Thick paper 3 or Thick paper 4
❏ Quality: Standard or a higher quality
❏ Print Color:Color
❏ Applications: Microsoft® Office 2007 or later
❏ Text Size: 96 pts or smaller

1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Image Options in the Color Correction setting.

2. Select an option from the Color Universal Print setting.

3. Enhancement Options to make further settings.

4. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

5. Click Print.
Note:
❏ Certain characters may be altered by patterns, such as "+" appearing as "±".
❏ Application-specific patterns and underlines may alter content printed using these settings.
❏ Print quality may decrease in photos and other images when using Color Universal Print settings.
❏ Printing is slower when using Color Universal Print settings.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Adjusting the Print Color

You can adjust the colors used in the print job. These adjustments are not applied to the original data.

PhotoEnhance produces sharper images and more vivid colors by automatically adjusting the contrast, saturation,
and brightness of the original image data.
Note:
PhotoEnhance adjusts the color by analyzing the location of the subject. Therefore, if you have changed the location of the
subject by reducing, enlarging, cropping, or rotating the image, the color may change unexpectedly. If the image is out of
focus, the tone may be unnatural. If the color is changed or becomes unnatural, print in a mode other than PhotoEnhance.

72
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Windows

1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, select the method of color correction from the Color Correction
setting.
❏ AutomaticThis setting automatically adjusts the tone to match the paper type and print quality settings.
❏ If you select Custom and click Advanced, you can make your own settings.

2. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Printing to Emphasize Thin Lines

You can thicken thin lines that are too thin to print.

1. On the printer driver's More Options tab, click Image Options in the Color Correction setting.

2. Select Emphasize Thin Lines.

3. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

73
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)

Printing Clear Bar Codes

If printed bar codes cannot be read correctly, you can print clearly using reduced ink bleeding. Only enable this
feature if the bar code you printed cannot be scanned.

Note:
❏ Paper Type: Thick paper4 (161-250g/m²) and Extra Thick-Paper (251-350g/m²) are not compatible with High.
❏ Deblurring may not always be possible depending on the circumstances.

1. On the printer driver's Maintenance tab, click Extended Settings, and then select Barcode mode.

2. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48

Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)

A PostScript Printer Driver is a driver that outputs printing commands to a printer using a PostScript Page
Description Language.

1. Open the file you want to print.

Load paper in the printer if it has not already been loaded.

2. Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu

3. Select your printer.

74
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)

4. Select Preferences or Properties to access the printer driver window.

5. Change the settings as necessary.

See the menu options for the printer driver for details.

6. Click OK to close the printer driver for details.

7. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Setting the Paper Type” on page 36
& “Paper/Quality Tab” on page 76
& “Layout Tab” on page 77

Using an Optional Device with a PostScript Printer Driver

You need to make settings in the PostScript printer driver to use optional devices.

Settings
❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers in
Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printer properties. On
theDevice Settings tab, select the optional device in the Installable Options setting.

75
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)

❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012

Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click
on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printer properties. On theDevice Settings tab, select the
optional device in the Installable Options setting.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-
click on your printer and select Printer properties. On the Device Settings tab, select the optional device in the
Installable Options setting.
❏ Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer
and select Properties. On the Device Settings tab, select the optional device in the Installable Options setting.
❏ Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers and Faxes. Right-
click on your printer and select Properties. On the Device Settings tab, select the optional device in the
Installable Options setting.

Menu Options for the PostScript Printer Driver

Open the print window on an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.

Paper/Quality Tab

Tray Selection:
Select the paper source and media.

Paper Source:
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed.
Select Automatically Select to automatically select the paper source selected in the Paper
Setting on the printer.

Media:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Unspecified, printing is performed
from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the printer's settings.
Plain paper1, Plain paper2, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High quality plain paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to off in
the printer's Auto Select Settings.

Color:
Select the color for your print job.

76
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)

Layout Tab

Orientation:
Select the orientation you want to use to print.

Print on Both Sides:

Allows you to perform 2-sided printing.

Page Order:
Select to print from the top or the last page. If you select Back to Front, the pages are stacked in the
correct order based on page number after printing.

Page Format:

Pages per Sheet:

Pages per Sheet Layout:
Allows you to specify the page layout when printing several pages on one sheet.

Booklet:
Booklet Binding:
Select the binding position for booklet.

Draw Borders:
Select this if you want to place a border line for each page when printing several pages on one
sheet or when creating a booklet.

Extended Settings Tab

Job Settings:
If the printer usage has been restricted by the administrator, printing is available after you register
your account on the printer driver. Contact the administrator for your user account.

Save Access Control settings:

Allows you to enter a user name and password.

User Name:
Enter a user name.

Password:
Enter a password.

Reserve Job Settings:

Make settings for print jobs stored in the printer's memory.

Reserve Job Settings:

Allows you to make settings for Reserve Job Settings, Verify Job, and Password.

77
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)

Verify Job:
When printing multiple copies, allows you to print one copy to check the content. To print
after the second copy, operate the printer's control panel.

Re-Print Job:
Allows you to store the print job in the printer's memory. You can start printing by operating
the printer's control panel.

Confidential Job:
Allows you to enter a password to the print job.

User Name:
Enter a user name.

Job Name:
Enter a job name.

Password:
Enter a password.

Advanced Options

Paper/Output:
Select the paper size and number of copies.

Paper Size:
Select the paper size on which you want to print.

Copies:
Set the number of copies you want to print.

Graphic:
Set the following menu items.

Print Quality:
Select the pint quality you want to use for printing.

Image Color Management:

Select the ICM method or intent.

Scaling:
Allows you to reduce or enlarge the document.

TrueType Font:
Sets the font substitute to TrueType Font.

78
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

Document Options:

Advanced Printing Features:

Allows you to make detailed settings for printing features.

PostScript Options:
Allows you to make optional settings.

Printer Features:
Set the following menu items.

Output Tray:
Select which output tray to use for printouts.

Sort:
Select how to sort multiple copies.

Color Mode:
Select whether to print in color or in monochrome.

Press Simulation:
You can select a CMYK ink color to simulate when you print by reproducing the CMYK
ink color of the offset press.

Ink Save Mode:

Conserves ink by reducing the print density.

Rotate by 180º:
Rotates the data 180 degrees before printing.

Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

Printing Using Easy Settings

Note:
Operations and screens differ depending on the application. See the application's help for details.

1. Load paper in the printer.

“Loading Paper” on page 37

79
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

2. Open the file you want to print.

3. Select Print from the File menu or another command to access the print dialog.

If necessary, click Show Details ord to expand the print window.

4. Select your printer.

5. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.

Note:
If the Print Settings menu is not displayed on macOS High Sierra, macOS Sierra, OS X El Capitan, OS X Yosemite, OS
X Mavericks, OS X Mountain Lion, the Epson printer driver has not been installed correctly. Enable it from the
following menu. macOS Catalina and macOS Mojave cannot access Print Settings in applications made by Apple such
as TextEdit.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), remove the
printer, and then add the printer again. See the following to add a printer.
“Adding the Printer (for Mac OS Only)” on page 208

6. Change the settings as necessary.

See the menu options for the printer driver for details.
Note:
If you want to save the document to be printed in the storage, select Print Settings from the pop-up menu, select Save to
Storage and Print as the Paper Source, and then set the save destination.

80
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

7. Click Print.
Note:
If you want to cancel printing, on your computer click the printer icon in the Dock. Select the job you want to cancel,
and then do one of the following. However, you cannot cancel a print job from the computer once it has been completely
sent to the printer. In this case, cancel the print job by using the printer's control panel.
❏ OS X Mountain Lion or later

Click next to the progress meter.

❏ Mac OS X v10.6.8 to v10.7.x
Click Delete.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
& “Setting the Paper Type” on page 36
& “Menu Options for Print Settings” on page 82

Menu Options for the Printer Driver

Open the print window in an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.

Menu Options for Layout

Pages per Sheet:

Select the number of pages to be printed on one sheet.

Layout Direction:
Specify the order in which the pages will be printed.

Border:
Prints a border around the pages.

Reverse page orientation:

Rotates pages 180 degrees before printing. Select this item when printing on paper such as envelopes
that are loaded in fixed direction in the printer.

Flip horizontally:
Inverts an image to print as it would appear in a mirror.

Menu Options for Color Matching

ColorSync/EPSON Color Controls:

Select the method for color adjustment. These options adjusts colors between the printer and the
computer display to minimize the difference in color.

81
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

Menu Options for Paper Handling

Collate pages:
Prints multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.

Pages to Print:
Select to print only odd pages or even pages.

Page Order:
Select to print from the top or the last page.

Scale to fit paper size:

Prints to fit to the paper size you loaded.
❏ Destination Paper Size:
Select the paper size to print on.
❏ Scale down only:
Select this when you want to reduce the size only if the print data is too large for the paper size
loaded in the printer.

Menu Options for Cover Page

Print Cover Page:

Select whether or not to print a cover page. When you want to add a back cover, select After document.

Cover Page Type:

Select the contents of the cover page.

Menu Options for Print Settings

Paper Source:
Select the paper source from which the paper is fed. Select Auto Select to automatically select the paper
source selected in the print settings on the printer.

Media Type:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Auto Select (plain papers), printing is
performed from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the printer's
settings.
plain papers1, plain papers2, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High Quality Paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to off in the
printer's Auto Select Settings.

Job Type:
Save the print job in the storage set in theStorage Settings of the Utility screen, or save and print.

Print Quality:
Select the pint quality you want to use for printing. The options vary depending on the paper type.

82
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

Grayscale:
Select when you want to print in black or shades of gray.

Menu Options for Color Options

Manual Settings:
Adjusts the color manually. In Advanced Settings, you can select detailed settings.

PhotoEnhance:
Produces sharper images and more vivid colors by automatically adjusting the contrast, saturation, and
brightness of the original image data.

Off (No Color Adjustment):

Print without enhancing or adjusting the color in any way.

Menu Options for Finishing

Output Tray:
Select which output tray to use for printouts. The output tray may be automatically selected based on
other print settings.

Sort:
Select how to sort multiple copies.
Rotate Sort
Stacks printouts alternately in the portrait orientation and the landscape orientation. To use this
feature, select Print Settings from the pop-up menu, and then select Auto Select as the Paper Source
setting. Next, select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select Auto Select or Face Down Tray
as the Output Tray setting. The printouts are stacked in the Face Down Tray.

Menu Options for Paper Configuration

Print Density:
Reduce the print density for finer printing when printing photos with dense data.

Menu Options for Two-sided Printing Settings

Two-sided Printing:
Prints on both sides of the paper.

83
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

Adding Printing Presets for Easy Printing

If you create your own preset of frequently used print settings on the printer driver, you can print easily by
selecting the preset from the list.

1. Set each item such as Print Settings and Layout (Paper Size, Media Type, and so on).

2. Click Presets to save the current settings as a preset.

3. Click OK.
Note:
To delete an added preset, click Presets > Show Presets, select the preset name you want to delete from the list, and then
delete it.

4. Click Print.
The next time you want to print using the same settings, select the registered preset name from the Presets.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 79

Printing on 2-Sides
You can print on both sides of the paper.

84
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

Note:
❏ If you do not use paper that is suitable for 2-sided printing, the print quality may decline and paper jams may occur.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 395
❏ Depending on the paper and the data, ink may bleed through to the other side of the paper.

1. Select Two-sided Printing Settings from the pop-up menu.

2. Select the bindings in Two-sided Printing.

3. Set the other items as necessary.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 79

Printing Several Pages on One Sheet

You can print several pages of data on a single sheet of paper.

1. Select Layout from the pop-up menu.

2. Set the number of pages in Pages per Sheet, the Layout Direction (page order), and Border.
“Menu Options for Layout” on page 81

3. Set the other items as necessary.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37

85
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 79

Printing to Fit the Paper Size

Select the paper size you loaded in the printer as the Destination Paper Size setting.

1. Select the size of the paper you set in the application as the Paper Size setting.

2. Select Paper Handling from the pop-up menu.

3. Select Scale to fit paper size.

4. Select the paper size you loaded in the printer as the Destination Paper Size setting.

5. Set the other items as necessary.

6. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 79

86
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from a Computer - Mac OS

Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document at any Magnification

You can reduce or enlarge the size of a document by a specific percentage.

1. When printing to fit to the paper size, select Paper Handling from the pop-up menu, and then select Scale to
fit paper size.

2. Select the paper size you loaded in the printer in Destination Paper Size.

3. When reducing the size of the document, select Scale down only.

4. When printing at a specific percentage, select Print or Page Setup from the File menu of the application.

5. Select Printer, Paper Size, enter the percentage in Scale, and then click OK.
Note:
Select the paper size you set in the application as the Paper Size setting.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 79

Adjusting the Print Color

You can adjust the colors used in the print job. These adjustments are not applied to the original data.

PhotoEnhance produces sharper images and more vivid colors by automatically adjusting the contrast, saturation,
and brightness of the original image data.

87
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS

Note:
PhotoEnhance adjusts the color by analyzing the location of the subject. Therefore, if you have changed the location of the
subject by reducing, enlarging, cropping, or rotating the image, the color may change unexpectedly. If the image is out of
focus, the tone may be unnatural. If the color is changed or becomes unnatural, print in a mode other than PhotoEnhance.

1. Select Color Matching from the pop-up menu, and then select EPSON Color Controls.

2. Select Color Options from the pop-up menu, and then select one of the available options.

3. Click the arrow next to Advanced Settings and make the appropriate settings.

4. Set the other items as necessary.

5. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 79

Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS

A PostScript Printer Driver is a driver that outputs printing commands to a printer using a PostScript Page
Description Language.

1. Open the file you want to print.

Load paper in the printer if it has not already been loaded.

2. Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu.

If necessary, click Show Details or d to expand the print window.

3. Select your printer.

88
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS

4. Select Print Features from the pop-up menu.

5. Change the settings as necessary.

See the menu options for the printer driver for details.

6. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Setting the Paper Type” on page 36
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Using an Optional Device with a PostScript Printer Driver

You need to make settings in the PostScript printer driver to the optional devices.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver). Makes settings according to the options
available.

Menu Options for the PostScript Printer Driver

Open the print window on an application, select the printer, and then access the printer driver window.
Note:
Menus vary depending on the option you selected.

89
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS

Menu Options for Layout

Pages per Sheet:

Select the number of pages to be printed on one sheet.

Layout Direction:
Specify the order in which the pages will be printed.

Border:
Prints a border around the pages.

Two-Sided:
Allows you to perform 2-sided printing.

Reverse page orientation:

Rotates pages 180 degrees before printing.

Flip horizontally:
Inverts the image so that it prints as it would appear in a mirror.

Menu Options for Color Matching

ColorSync/In Printer:
Select the method for color adjustment. These options adjusts color between the printer and the
computer display to minimize the difference in color.

Menu Options for Paper Handling

Collate pages:
Prints multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.

Pages to Print:
Select to print only odd pages or even pages.

Page Order:
Select to print from the top or the last page.

Scale to fit paper size:

Prints to fit to the paper size you loaded.

Destination Paper Size:

Select the paper size to print on.

Scale down only:

Select when reducing the size of the document.

90
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS

Menu Options for Paper Feed

Select the paper source from which the paper is fed.

All Pages From:

Selecting Auto Select selects the paper source that matches the Paper Setting on the printer
automatically.

First Page From/Remaining From:

You can also select the paper source for page.

Menu Options for Cover Page

Print Cover Page:

Select whether or not to print a cover page. When you want to add a back cover, select After
document.

Cover Page Type:

Select the contents of the cover page.

Menu Options for Printer Features

Feature Sets:

Quality:

Media Type:
Select the type of paper on which you print. If you select Unspecified, printing is
performed from the paper source for which the paper type is set to the following in the
printer's settings.
plain papers1, plain papers2, Preprinted, Letterhead, Color, Recycled, High Quality
Paper
However, paper cannot be fed from a paper source for which the paper source is set to
off in the printer's Auto Select Settings.

Output:

Output Tray:
Select which output tray to use for printouts.

Sort:
Select how to sort multiple copies.

Color:

Color Mode:
Select whether to print in color or in monochrome.

91
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing PDF Files from a Memory Device

Press Simulation:
You can select a CMYK ink color to simulate when you print by reproducing the CMYK
ink color of the offset press.

Others:

Ink Save Mode:

Conserves ink by reducing the print density.

Printing PDF Files from a Memory Device

You can print PDF files from a memory device connected to the printer.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select PDF.

4. Select the file.

5. Tap x.
Note:
To save print data to the storage, select File Storing and make the save settings. Select Setting to select whether or not to
print the data at the same time.

Basic Menu Options for PDF Settings

You can make print settings for PDF format files on your memory devices.

Recent to old/Old to recent:

Select a sort setting to display the files on the LCD screen.

Paper Setting:
Specify the paper source settings which you want to print on.

2-Sided:
Select On to print PDF files using 2-Sided printing. You can also select the binding method in the
Binding Position setting.

Print Order:
Select the order for printing multi-page PDF files.

Color Mode:
Select a color setting whether you normally print in B&W or Color.

92
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing Documents from Smart Devices (iOS)

Advanced Menu Options for PDF Settings

Finishing
❏ Finishing:
Select Collate (Page Order) to print multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.
Select Group (Same Pages) to print multi-page documents by acquiring the same numbered pages
as the group.
❏ Eject Paper:
Select Rotate Sort to print alternately in the portrait orientation from one paper source and the
landscape orientation from another paper source. Choose Auto as the Paper Setting when using
this feature.

File Storing
You can save the print data to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the print data only to the storage.
❏ Folder (Required):
Select the folder to save the print data.
❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

Printing Documents from Smart Devices (iOS)

You can print documents from a smart device such as a smartphone or tablet.

Printing Documents Using Epson iPrint

Note:
Operations may differ depending on the device.

1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 309

2. If Epson iPrint is not installed, install it.

“Installing Epson iPrint” on page 402

93
Printing > Printing Documents > Printing Documents from Smart Devices (Android)

3. Start Epson iPrint.

4. Tap Document on the home screen.

5. Tap the location of the document you want to print.

6. Select the document, and then tap Next.

7. Tap Print.

Printing Documents from Smart Devices (Android)

You can print documents from a smart device such as a smartphone or tablet.

Printing Documents Using Epson iPrint

Note:
Operations may differ depending on the device.

1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 309

2. If Epson iPrint is not installed, install it.

“Installing Epson iPrint” on page 402

3. Start Epson iPrint.

4. Tap Document on the home screen.

5. Tap the location of the document you want to print.

6. Select the document, and then tap Next.

7. Tap Print.

Printing Documents Using Epson Print Enabler

You can wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web pages right from your Android phone or tablet
(Android v4.4 or later). With a few taps, your Android device will discover an Epson printer that is connected to
the same wireless network.
Note:
Operations may differ depending on the device.

94
Printing > Printing on Envelopes > Printing on Envelopes from a Computer (Mac OS)

1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 309

2. On your Android device, install the Epson Print Enabler plug-in from Google Play.

3. Go to Settings on your Android device, select Printing, and then enable Epson Print Enabler.

4. From an Android application such as Chrome, tap the menu icon and print whatever is on the screen.
Note:
If you do not see your printer, tap All Printers and select your printer.

Printing on Envelopes

Printing on Envelopes from a Computer (Windows)

1. Load envelopes in the printer.
“Loading Envelopes” on page 38

2. Open the file you want to print.

3. Access the printer driver window.

4. Select the envelope size from Document Size on the Main tab, and then select Envelope from Paper Type.

5. Set the other items on the Main and More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.

6. Click Print.

Printing on Envelopes from a Computer (Mac OS)

1. Load envelopes in the printer.
“Loading Envelopes” on page 38

2. Open the file you want to print.

3. Select Print from the File menu or another command to access the print dialog.

4. Select the size as the Paper Size setting.

5. Select Print Settings from the pop-up menu.

6. Select Envelope as the Media Type setting.

7. Set the other items as necessary.

95
Printing > Printing Photos > Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device

8. Click Print.

Printing Photos

Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device

You can print JPEG files from a memory device connected to the printer.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select JPEG.

4. Select the file.

5. Tap x.
Note:
To save print data to the storage, select File Storing and make the save settings. Select Setting to select whether or not to
print the data at the same time.

Basic Menu Options for JPEG Settings

(Options) :
Make settings for ordering, selecting, and deselecting image data.

Paper Setting:
Specify the paper source settings which you want to print on.

Layout:
Select the way of layout the JPEG files. 1-up is for printing a file per a page. 20-up is for printing 20 files
per a page. Index is for making index printing with information.

Fit Frame:
Select On to crop the image to fit into the selected print layout automatically. If the aspect ratio of the
image data and the paper size is different, the image is automatically enlarged or reduced so that the
short sides match the short sides of the paper. The long side of the image is cropped if it extends beyond
the long side of the paper. This feature may not work for panorama photos.

Color Mode:
Select a color setting whether you normally print in B&W or Color.

96
Printing > Printing Photos > Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device

Advanced Menu Options for JPEG Settings

Finishing:
❏ Finishing
Select Collate (Page Order) to print multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.
Select Group (Same Pages) to print multi-page documents by acquiring the same numbered pages
as the group.
❏ Eject Paper
Standard is selected.

Quality:
Select Best for higher quality printing, but the printing speed may be slower.

Fix Photo:
Select this mode to improve the brightness, contrast, and saturation of the photo automatically. To turn
off automatic improvement, select Enhance Off.

Fix Red-Eye:
Select On to automatically fix the red-eye effect in photos. Corrections are not applied to the original
file, only to the printouts. Depending on the type of photo, parts of the image other than the eyes may
be corrected.

Date:
Select the format of the date the photo was taken or saved. The date is not printed for some layouts.

File Storing
You can save the print data to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the print data only to the storage.
❏ Folder (Required):
Select the folder to save the print data.
❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device

You can print TIFF files from a memory device connected to the printer.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

97
Printing > Printing Photos > Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select TIFF.

4. Select the file.

5. Tap x.
Note:
To save print data to the storage, select File Storing and make the save settings. Select Setting to select whether or not to
print the data at the same time.

Basic Menu Options for TIFF Settings

You can make print settings for TIFF format files in you memory devices.

Recent to old/Old to recent:

Changes the order of the files.

Paper Setting:
Specify the paper source settings which you want to print on.

Layout:
Select how to layout the Multi-TIFF file. 1-up is for printing one page per sheet. 20-up is for printing 20
pages on one sheet. Index is for making index printing with information.

Fit Frame:
Select On to crop the photo to fit into the selected photo layout automatically. If the aspect ratio of the
image data and the paper size is different, the image is automatically enlarged or reduced so that the
short sides match the short sides of the paper. The long side of the image is cropped if it extends beyond
the long side of the paper. This feature may not work for panorama photos.

Color Mode:
Select a color setting whether you normally print in B&W or Color.

Advanced Menu Options for TIFF Settings

Finishing:
❏ Finishing
Select Collate (Page Order) to print multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.
Select Group (Same Pages) to print multi-page documents by acquiring the same numbered pages
as the group.
❏ Eject Paper
Standard is selected.

Quality:
Select Best for higher quality printing, but the printing speed may be slower.

98
Printing > Printing Web Pages > Printing Web Pages from Smart Devices

Print Order:
Select the order for printing multi-page TIFF files.

Date:
Select the format of the date the photo was taken or saved. The date is not printed for some layouts.

File Storing
You can save the print data to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the print data only to the storage.
❏ Folder (Required):
Select the folder to save the print data.
❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

Printing Web Pages

Printing Web Pages from a Computer

1. Select the printing method from the E-Web Print Toolbar.
❏ Print: Print the entire web page to fit on the paper.
❏ Clip: Print only the area you selected.

2. Make the print settings, and then click the Print button.

Printing Web Pages from Smart Devices

Note:
Operations may differ depending on the device.

1. Connect your printer and your smart device using Wi-Fi Direct.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 309

2. If Epson iPrint is not installed, install it.

“Installing Epson iPrint” on page 402

3. Open the web page you want to print in your web browser app.

99
Printing > Printing Using a Cloud Service

4. Tap Share from the menu of the web browser application.

5. Select iPrint.

6. Tap Print.

Printing Using a Cloud Service

By using Epson Connect service available on the Internet, you can print from your smartphone, tablet PC, or
laptop, anytime and practically anywhere. To use this service, you need to register the user and the printer in
Epson Connect.

The features available on the Internet are as follows.

❏ Email Print
When you send an email with attachments such as documents or images to an email address assigned to the
printer, you can print that email and the attachments from remote locations such as your home or office printer.
❏ Epson iPrint
This Application is for iOS and Android, and allows you to print or scan from a smartphone or tablet. You can
print documents, images, and web sites by sending them directly to a printer on the same wireless LAN.
❏ Remote Print Driver
This is a shared driver supported by Remote Print Driver. When printing using a printer in a remote location,
you can print by changing the printer on the usual applications window.

See the Epson Connect web portal for details on how to setup or print.
https://www.epsonconnect.com/
http://www.epsonconnect.eu (Europe only)

100
Printing > Printing Using a Cloud Service > Registering to Epson Connect Service from the Control Panel

Registering to Epson Connect Service from the Control Panel

Follow the steps below to register the printer.

1. Select Settings on the control panel.

2. Select General Settings > Web Service Settings > Epson Connect Services > Unregister to print the
registration sheet.

3. Follow the instructions on the registration sheet to register the printer.

101
Copying

Available Copying Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Basic Menu Options for Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Advanced Menu Options for Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying Originals

Available Copying Methods

Place the originals on the scanner glass or the ADF, and then select the Copy menu on the home screen.

Copying Originals
You can copy the originals of fixed size or custom size by color or monochrome.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Auto or Color, B&W.

Note:
❏ To save the originals to the storage, select , and then enable File Storing.
❏ In Setting, select whether to print and store the scanned data or to save the data only.

4. Tap x.

103
Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying by Enlarging or Reducing

Copying on 2-Sides
Copy multiple originals on both sides of the paper.

1. Place all originals face up in the ADF.

c Important:
If you want to copy originals that are not supported by the ADF, use the scanner glass.
“Originals that are not Supported by the ADF” on page 44

Note:
You can also place the originals on the scanner glass.
“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, select 2-Sided, and then select 2→2-Sided or 1→2-Sided

4. Specify other settings such as the original orientation and the binding position.

5. Tap x.

Copying by Enlarging or Reducing

You can copy originals at a specified magnification.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Reduce/Enlarge.

104
Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet

4. Specify the amount of enlargement or reduction.

5. Tap x.

Copying Multiple Originals onto One Sheet

You can copy the multiple originals onto a single sheet.

1. Place all originals face up in the ADF.

Place them in the direction shown in the illustration.
❏ Readable Direction

❏ Left Direction

c Important:
If you want to copy originals that are not supported by the ADF, use the scanner glass.
“Originals that are not Supported by the ADF” on page 44

105
Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying Originals Using Good Quality

Note:
You can also place the originals on the scanner glass.
“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, select Multi-Page, and then select 2-up or 4-up.

4. Specify the layout order and the original orientation.

5. Tap x.

Copying in Page Order

When making multiple copies of a multi-page document, you can discharge one copy at a time in page order.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing > Collate (Page Order).

4. Tap x.

Copying Originals Using Good Quality

You can copy originals without shadows and punched holes.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

106
Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying Books

3. Select the Advanced tab, and then enable Remove Shadow or Remove Punch Holes or adjust the image
quality in Image Quality.

4. Tap x.

Copying ID card
Scans both sides of an ID card and copies onto one side of a paper.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Advanced tab, select ID Card Copy, and then enable the setting.

4. Specify the Orientation (Original).

5. Tap x.

Copying Books
Copies two facing pages of a book and so on onto separate sheets of paper.

1. Place the original on the scanner glass.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Advanced tab, select Book →2Pages, and then enable the setting.

4. Specify Scan Order.

5. Tap x.

107
Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying Bar Codes Clearly

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Alternately Rotating 90 Degrees or

by Offsetting
You can sort the printouts by stacking them alternately in the portrait orientation and the landscape orientation.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

4. Select Rotate Sort in Eject Paper.

Check the following settings when using this feature.
❏ Two paper sources are used. Load paper in the portrait orientation in one paper source and in the
landscape orientation in the other paper source, and then select Auto as the Paper Setting in Basic Settings.
❏ On the home screen, select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Copy, and make sure
that the Face Down Tray is selected.

5. Tap x.

Copying Bar Codes Clearly

You can copy a bar code clearly and make it easy to scan. Only enable this feature if the bar code you printed
cannot be scanned.

You can use this feature with the following paper types.
❏ Plain paper
❏ Preprinted paper

108
Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying with Page Numbers

❏ Letterhead
❏ Color paper
❏ Recycled paper
❏ Thick paper
❏ Envelope
❏ Epson Bright White Ink Jet Paper
❏ Epson Business Paper

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Original Type > Barcode.

4. Tap x.

Copying with Page Numbers

You can make copies with page numbers even if the originals do not have page numbers.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Advanced tab, and then select Page Numbering.

4. Enable the setting, and then make other settings such as the format and the stamp position.

5. Tap x.

109
Copying > Available Copying Methods > Copying files and creating booklets

Copying files and creating booklets

You can copy originals and turn the copies into a booklet. You can also add front and back covers to the booklet.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, select 2-Sided, and then select 2→2-Sided or 1→2-Sided.

4. Specify other settings such as the original orientation and the binding position as necessary, and then select
OK.

5. Select Reduce/Enlarge > Auto, and then select OK.

6. Select the Advanced tab, select Booklet > Booklet, and then enable Booklet.

7. Specify the biding position and binding margin.

8. If you want to add the covers, enable Cover.

Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers in Paper Setting, and then specitfy the
print settings in Front Cover and Back Cover.

9. Tap x.

110
Copying > Basic Menu Options for Copying

Inserting Slip Sheets into Copies

You can insert slip sheets into the copies and eject them.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Advanced tab, select Cover & Slip Sheet > Slip Sheet.

4. Select End of Job or End of Set, enable the settings, and then specify other settings as necessary.
If you want specify the page to insert the slipsheet or insert a chapter, select End of Page or Chapter, and then
specify the details such as the page number, paper, and so on.

5. Tap x.

Basic Menu Options for Copying

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

Color Mode:
Select whether to copy in color or in monochrome.
❏ Auto
Detects whether the original is color or monochrome, and automatically copies using the most
suitable color mode.
Depending on the original, monochrome originals may be detected as colored, or colored originals
as monochrome. If auto detection is not operating correctly, copy by selecting Color or B&W as
the color mode, or set the detection sensitivity. You can set the sensitivity by selecting Settings on
the home screen > General Settings > System Administration > Copy Color Sensitivity.
❏ Color
Copies the original in color.
❏ B&W
Copies the original in black and white (monochrome).

111
Copying > Basic Menu Options for Copying

Density:
Increase the level of density when the copying results are faint. Decrease the level of density when ink
smears.

Paper Setting:
Select the paper source that you want to use. When Auto is selected, a suitable size is fed
automatically depending on the auto detected original size and the specified magnification ratio.

Reduce/Enlarge:
Configures the magnification ratio of the enlargement or reduction. Tap the value and specify the
magnification used to enlarge or reduce the original within a range of 25 to 400%.
❏ Auto
Detects the scan area and automatically enlarges or reduces the original to fit to the paper size you
selected. When there are white margins around the original, the white margins from the corner
mark ( ) of the scanner glass are detected as the scan area, but the margins at the opposite side
may be cropped.

❏ Reduce to Fit Paper

Copies the scanned image at a smaller size than the Reduce/Enlarge value to fit within the paper
size. If the Reduce/Enlarge value is larger than the paper size, data may be printed beyond the
edges of the paper.
❏ Actual Size
Copies at 100 % magnification.
❏ A3→A4 and others
Automatically enlarges or reduces the original to fit to a specific paper size.

Original Type:
Select the type of your original. Copies in optimal quality to match the type of original.

2-Sided:
Select 2-sided layout.
❏ 1→1-Sided
Copies one side of an original onto a single side of paper.
❏ 2→2-Sided
Copies both sides of a double-sided original onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. Select the
orientation of your original and the binding position of the original and the paper.

112
Copying > Advanced Menu Options for Copying

❏ 1→2-Sided
Copies two single-sided originals onto both sides of a single sheet of paper. Select the orientation
of your original and the binding position of the paper.
❏ 2→1-Sided
Copies both sides of a double-sided original onto one side of two sheets of paper. Select the
orientation of your original and the binding position of the original.

Multi-Page:
Select the copy layout.
❏ Single Page
Copies a single-sided original onto a single sheet.
❏ 2-up
Copies two single-sided originals onto a single sheet in 2-up layout. Select the layout order and the
orientation of your original.
❏ 4-up
Copies four single-sided originals onto a single sheet in 4-up layout. Select the layout order and
the orientation of your original.

Finishing:
Select Collate (Page Order) to print multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.

Select Group (Same Pages) to print multi-page documents by acquiring the same numbered pages as
the group.

If you select Rotate Sort in Eject Paper, you can print alternately in the portrait direction and the
landscape direction. Choose Auto as the Paper Setting when using this feature.

Advanced Menu Options for Copying

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

Booklet:

Booklet
Specfy these settings when you want to create a booklet from your copies.

113
Copying > Advanced Menu Options for Copying

❏ Booklet
Allows you to create a booklet from your copies.
❏ Binding
Select the binding position of the booklet.
❏ Binding Margin
Specify the binding margin. You can set 0 to 50 mm as the binding margin in 1mm
increments.
❏ Cover
Allows you to add covers to the booklet.
❏ Paper Setting
Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers.
❏ Front Cover
Specify the print settings for the front cover. If you do not want to print on the front cover,
select Do not Print.
❏ Back Cover
Specify the print settings for the back cover. If you do not want to print on the back cover,
select Do not Print.

Cover & Slip Sheet:

Cover:
Specify these when you want to add covers to your copies.
❏ Front Cover
Allows you to add front covers to the copies. If you have loaded paper for the cover, select
the paper source in Paper Setting. If you do not want to print on the front cover, select Do
not Print in Print Mode.
❏ Back Cover
Allows you to add back covers to the copies. If you have loaded paper for the cover, select
the paper source in Paper Setting. If you do not want to print on the back cover, select Do
not Print in Print Mode.

Slip Sheet:
Specify these settings when you want to insert the slip sheets into the copies.
❏ End of Job
Allows you to insert slip sheets for each copy of the job. If you have loaded paper for the slip
sheets, select the paper source in Paper Setting.
❏ End of Set
Allows you to insert a slip sheet for each set. If you have loaded paper for the slip sheets,
select the paper source in Paper Setting. You can also specify the insertion interval for the
slip sheets in Sheets per Set.
❏ End of Page or Chapter
Allows you to make the settings to insert slip sheets of chapters at the pages you want to
insert them. The setting values are saved and displayed in a list. You can check the details of
the settings by selecting the setting from the list. You can also edit or delete the setting.

114
Copying > Advanced Menu Options for Copying

Original Size:
Select the size of your original. When you select Auto Detect, the size of your original is
automatically detected. When copying non-standard size originals, select User-Defined, and then
specify the original size.

Mixed Size Originals:

You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are copied at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.

Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of your original.

Book →2Pages:
Copies two facing pages of a booklet onto separate sheets of paper.
Select which page of a booklet to scan.

Continuous Scanning:
You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scaninng
job.

Image Quality:
Adjust image settings.
❏ Contrast
Adjust the difference between the bright and dark parts.
❏ Saturation
Adjust the vividness of the colors.
❏ Red Balance, Green Balance, Blue Balance
Adjust the density for each color.
❏ Sharpness
Adjust the outline of the image.
❏ Hue Regulation
Adjust the color tone of the skin. Tap + to make it cold (increase green) and tap - to make it warm
(increase red).
❏ Remove Background
Select the darkness of the background. Tap + to lighten (whiten) the background and tap - to
darken (blacken) it.
If you select Auto, the background colors of the originals are detected, and they are removed or
lightened automatically. It is not applied correctly if the background color is too dark or not
detected.

115
Copying > Advanced Menu Options for Copying

Binding Margin:
Select such as the binding position, margin, and orientation of your original.

Reduce to Fit Paper:

Copies the scanned image at a smaller size than the Reduce/Enlarge value to fit within the paper size.
If the Reduce/Enlarge value is larger than the paper size, data may be printed beyond the edges of the
paper.

Remove Shadow:
Removes shadows that appear around copies when copying thick paper or that appear in the center of
copies when copying a booklet.

Remove Punch Holes:

Removes the binding holes when copying.

ID Card Copy:
Scans both sides of an ID card and copies onto one side of a paper.

Output Tray:
Select the output tray for Copying.

Page Numbering:
❏ Page Numbering
Select On to print page numbers on your copies.
❏ Format
Select the format for page numbering.
❏ Stamp Position
Select the position for page numbering.
❏ Change Numbering
Select which page you want to print the page number. Select Starting Page Number to specify the
page on which page number printing should begin. You can also specify the starting page number
in First Print Number.
❏ Size
Select the size of the number.
❏ Background
Select whether or not to make the page number's background white. If you select White, you can
see the page number clearly when the background for the original is not white.

File Storing:
You can save the scanned image to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the scanned image only to the storage.
❏ Folder (Required):
Select the storage in which to save the scanned image.

116
Copying > Advanced Menu Options for Copying

❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

117
Scanning

Available Scanning Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Scanning Originals to a Network Folder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Scanning Originals to an Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Scanning Originals to a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Scanning Originals to a Memory Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Scanning Originals to the Cloud. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Scanning Originals to Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Scanning Using WSD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Scanning Originals to a Smart Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Network Folder

Available Scanning Methods

You can use any of the following methods to scan using this printer.

Scanning to a Network Folder

You can save the scanned image to a pre-configured folder on a network.
“Scanning Originals to a Network Folder” on page 119

Scanning to an Email
You can send scanned image files by email directly from the printer through a pre-configured email
server.
“Scanning Originals to an Email” on page 123

Scanning to a Computer
You can save the scanned image to a computer connected to the printer.
“Scanning Originals to a Computer” on page 127

Scanning to a Memory Device

You can save scanned images directly to a memory device inserted into the printer.
“Scanning Originals to a Memory Device” on page 128

Sending to a Cloud Service

You can send scanned images from the printer's control panel to cloud services that have been
registered in advance.
“Scanning Originals to the Cloud” on page 131

Scanning to Storage
You can save scanned images to the printer's built-in storage.
“Using Storage” on page 183
“Scanning Originals to Storage” on page 133

Scanning Using WSD

You can save the scanned image to a computer connected to the printer, using WSD feature.
“Scanning Using WSD” on page 135

Scanning Directly from Smart Devices

You can save scanned images directly to a smart device such as a smart phone or tablet by using the
Epson iPrint application on the smart device.
“Scanning Originals to a Smart Device” on page 137

Scanning Originals to a Network Folder

Check the following before scanning.

119
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Network Folder > Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder

❏ Make sure that a network folder is prepared. See the following when creating a shared folder on a network.
“Creating the Shared Folder” on page 487
❏ Register a network folder path in your contacts in advance to easily specify the folder.
“Making Contacts Available” on page 503

Note:
Make sure the printer's Date/Time and Time Difference settings are correct. Access the menus from Settings > General
Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Scan > Network Folder/FTP on the control panel.

3. Specify the folder.

❏ To select from frequently used addresses: Select a contact from Frequent tab.
❏ To enter the folder path directly: Select Keyboard. Select Communication Mode, enter the folder path as
the Location (Required), and then make other folder settings.
Enter the folder path in the following format.
When using SMB as the communication mode: \\host name\folder name
When using FTP as the communication mode: ftp://host name/folder name
When using FTPS as the communication mode: ftps://host name/folder name
When using WebDAV (HTTPS) as the communication mode: https://host name/folder name
When using WebDAV (HTTP) as the communication mode: http://host name/folder name
❏ To select from the contacts list: Select Destination tab, select a contact.

To search for a folder from the contacts list, select .

Note:
You can print the history of the folder in which documents are saved by tapping Menu.

4. Select Scan Settings, and then check settings such as the save format, and change them if necessary.
“Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder” on page 120
Note:
❏ Select to save your settings as a preset.

❏ Select to restore settings to their defaults.

❏ To save the originals to the storage, select File Storing and make the settings. Set Setting to select whether or not to
save the scanned image only to the storage.
You need not enter the destination information if you save the scanned image only to the storage.

5. Tap x.

Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

120
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Network Folder > Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder

Edit Location:
Enter the folder path and set each item on the screen.
❏ Communication Mode:
Select the communication mode for the folder.
❏ Location (Required):
Enter a folder path in which to save the scanned image.
Selecting the Browse searches a folder on computers connected to the network. You can use the
Browse only when Communication Mode is set to SMB.
❏ User Name:
Enter a user name to log on to the specified folder.
❏ Password:
Enter a password corresponding to the user name.
❏ Connection Mode:
Select the connection mode for the folder.
❏ Port Number:
Enter a port number for the folder.
❏ Proxy Server Settings:
Select whether or not to use a proxy server.

B&W/Color
Select whether to scan in monochrome or in color.

File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF, PDF/A, or TIFF as the file format, select whether to save all originals as one file
(multi-page) or save each original separately (single page).
❏ Compression Ratio:
Select how much to compress the scanned image.
❏ PDF Settings:
When you have selected PDF as the save format setting, use these settings to protect PDF files.
To create a PDF file that requires a password when opening, set Document Open Password. To
create a PDF file that requires a password when printing or editing, set Permissions Password.

Resolution:
Select the scanning resolution.

2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏ Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.

121
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Network Folder > Menu Options for Scanning to a Folder

Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Original Type:
Select the type of your original.

Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Mixed Size Originals:

You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are scanned at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.

Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.

Remove Background:
Select the darkness of the background. Tap + to lighten (whiten) the background and tap - to darken
(blacken) it.
If you select Auto, the background colors of the originals are detected, and they are removed or
lightened automatically. It is not applied correctly if the background color is too dark or not detected.

Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏ Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏ Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
❏ Rear Page:
Set the area for the rear side individually when scanning 2-sided originals.

Remove Punch Holes:

Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏ Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

122
Scanning > Scanning Originals to an Email

ADF Continuous Scan:

You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.

File Storing:
You can save the scanned image to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the scanned image only to the storage.
❏ Folder (Required):
Select the storage in which to save the scanned image.
❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

File Name:
❏ Filename Prefix:
Enter a prefix for the name of the images in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
❏ Add Date:
Add the date to the file name.
❏ Add Time:
Add the time to the file name.

Scanning Originals to an Email

You need to setup the following before scanning.
❏ Configure the email server.
“Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483
❏ Register an email address in your contacts in advance so that you can easily specify the address by selecting it
from your contacts.
❏ Make sure the printer's Date/Time and Time Difference settings are correct. Access the menus from Settings >
General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Scan > Email on the control panel.

3. Specify the addresses.

❏ To select from frequently used addresses: Select a contact from Frequent tab.

123
Scanning > Scanning Originals to an Email > Menu Options for Scanning to an Email

❏ To enter the email address manually: Select Keyboard, enter the email address, and then select OK.
❏ To select from the contacts list: Select Recipient tab, select a contact.

To search for a folder from the contacts list, select .

❏ To select from the history list: Select on the Frequent tab, and then select a recipient from the
displayed list.

Note:
❏ The number of recipients you selected is displayed on the right of the screen. You can send emails to up to 10
addresses and groups.
If groups is included in recipients, you can select up to 200 individual addresses in total, taking addresses in the
groups into account.
❏ Tap the address box at the top of the screen to display the list of selected addresses.
❏ Tap Menu to display or print the sending history, or change the email server settings.

4. Select Scan Settings, and then check settings such as the save format, and change them if necessary.
“Menu Options for Scanning to an Email” on page 124
Note:
❏ Select to save your settings as a preset.

❏ Select to restore settings to their defaults.

❏ To save the originals to the storage, select File Storing and make the settings. Set Setting to select whether or not to
save the scanned image only to the storage.
You need not enter the recipient information if you save the scanned image only to the storage.

5. Tap x.

Menu Options for Scanning to an Email

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

B&W/Color
Select whether to scan in monochrome or in color.

File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF, PDF/A, or TIFF as the file format, select whether to save all originals as one file
(multi-page) or save each original separately (single page).
❏ Compression Ratio:
Select how much to compress the scanned image.
❏ PDF Settings:
When you have selected PDF as the save format setting, use these settings to protect PDF files.
To create a PDF file that requires a password when opening, set Document Open Password. To
create a PDF file that requires a password when printing or editing, set Permissions Password.

124
Scanning > Scanning Originals to an Email > Menu Options for Scanning to an Email

Resolution:
Select the scanning resolution.

2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏ Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.

Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Original Type:
Select the type of your original.

Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Mixed Size Originals:

You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are scanned at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.

Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.

Remove Background:
Select the darkness of the background. Tap + to lighten (whiten) the background and tap - to darken
(blacken) it.
If you select Auto, the background colors of the originals are detected, and they are removed or
lightened automatically. It is not applied correctly if the background color is too dark or not detected.

Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏ Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏ Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.

125
Scanning > Scanning Originals to an Email > Menu Options for Scanning to an Email

❏ Rear Page:
Set the area for the rear side individually when scanning 2-sided originals.

Remove Punch Holes:

Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏ Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

ADF Continuous Scan:

You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.

File Storing:
You can save the scanned image to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the scanned image only to the storage.
❏ Folder (Required):
Select the storage in which to save the scanned image.
❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

Subject:
Enter a subject for the email in alphanumeric characters and symbols.

Attached File Max Size:

Select the maximum file size that can be attached to the email.

File Name:
❏ Filename Prefix:
Enter a prefix for the name of the images in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
❏ Add Date:
Add the date to the file name.
❏ Add Time:
Add the time to the file name.

Mail Encryption:
Encrypt emails when sending.

126
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Computer

Digital Signature:
Add a digital signature to emails.

Scanning Originals to a Computer

You can save the scanned image to a computer connected over a network.
The method of saving images is registered as a job in Document Capture Pro installed on your computer. Preset
jobs are available that allow you to save scanned images to a computer. You can also create and register new jobs
using Document Capture Pro on your computer.
Note:
You need to setup the following before scanning.
❏ Install the following applications on your computer.
❏ Document Capture Pro
❏ Epson Scan 2 (application required to use the scanner feature)

See the following to check for installed applications.

Windows 10: Click on the start button, and then select Windows System-Control Panel-Programs-Programs and
Features.
Windows 8.1/Windows 8: Select Desktop-Settings-Control Panel-Programs-Programs and Features.
Windows 7: Click the start button, and then select Control Panel-Programs-Programs and Features
Mac OS: Select Go > Applications > Epson Software.
❏ Connect the printer and the computer over a network.
❏ If you are using Windows Server, make the settings on the control panel.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Scan > Computer on the control panel.

3. Select Select Computer., and then select the computer on which Document Capture Pro is installed.
Note:
❏ The printer's control panel displays up to 100 computers on which Document Capture Pro is installed.
❏ If Server Mode is set as the operation mode, you do not need to perform this step.

4. Select Select Job., and then select the job.

Note:
If you have set only one job, you do not need to select the job. Proceed to the next step.

5. Select the area in which the job content is displayed, and then check the job details.

6. Tap x.
Document Capture Pro automatically starts on your computer, and scanning starts.

127
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Memory Device > Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device

Note:
❏ See the Document Capture Pro help for details on using the features, such as creating and registering new jobs.
❏ You can not only start scanning from the printer but also from your computer by using Document Capture Pro. See
the Document Capture Pro help for details.

Related Information
& “Application for Scanning Documents(Document Capture Pro)” on page 402
& “Installing the Applications Separately” on page 205
& “Using Document Capture Pro Server” on page 515

Scanning Originals to a Memory Device

You can save the scanned image to a memory device.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Insert a memory device into the printer.

“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

3. Select Scan > Memory Device on the control panel.

4. Make the scan settings.

“Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device” on page 128

❏ Select to save your settings as a preset.

❏ Select to restore settings to their defaults.

❏ To save the originals to the storage, select File Storing and make the settings. Set Setting to select whether
or not to save the scanned image only to the storage.

5. Tap x.

Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

B&W/Color
Select whether to scan in monochrome or in color.

File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF, PDF/A, or TIFF as the file format, select whether to save all originals as one file
(multi-page) or save each original separately (single page).

128
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Memory Device > Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device

❏ Compression Ratio:
Select how much to compress the scanned image.
❏ PDF Settings:
When you have selected PDF as the save format setting, use these settings to protect PDF files.
To create a PDF file that requires a password when opening, set Document Open Password. To
create a PDF file that requires a password when printing or editing, set Permissions Password.

Resolution:
Select the scanning resolution.

2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏ Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.

Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Original Type:
Select the type of your original.

Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Mixed Size Originals:

You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are scanned at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.

Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.

Remove Background:
Select the darkness of the background. Tap + to lighten (whiten) the background and tap - to darken
(blacken) it.
If you select Auto, the background colors of the originals are detected, and they are removed or
lightened automatically. It is not applied correctly if the background color is too dark or not detected.

129
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Memory Device > Menu Options for Scanning to a Memory Device

Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏ Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏ Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
❏ Rear Page:
Set the area for the rear side individually when scanning 2-sided originals.

Remove Punch Holes:

Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏ Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

ADF Continuous Scan:

You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.

File Storing:
You can save the scanned image to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the scanned image only to the storage.
❏ Folder (Required):
Select the storage in which to save the scanned image.
❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

File Name:
❏ Filename Prefix:
Enter a prefix for the name of the images in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
❏ Add Date:
Add the date to the file name.
❏ Add Time:
Add the time to the file name.

130
Scanning > Scanning Originals to the Cloud > Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud

Scanning Originals to the Cloud

Before using this feature, make settings using Epson Connect. See the following Epson Connect portal website for
details.
https://www.epsonconnect.com/
http://www.epsonconnect.eu (Europe only)

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Scan > Cloud on the control panel.

3. Select Select Destination. box on the top of the screen, and then select a destination.

4. Make the scan settings.

“Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud” on page 131

❏ Select to save your settings as a preset.

❏ Select to restore settings to their defaults.

❏ To save the originals to the storage, select File Storing and make the settings. Set Setting to select whether
or not to save the scanned image only to the storage.
You need not enter the destination information if you save the scanned image only to the storage.

5. Tap x.

Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

B&W/Color
Select whether to scan in monochrome or in color.

File Format:
Select the format in which to save the scanned image.
When you select PDF as the file format, select whether to save all originals as one file (multi-page) or
save each original separately (single page).

2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏ Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.

131
Scanning > Scanning Originals to the Cloud > Menu Options for Scanning to the Cloud

Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Original Type:
Select the type of your original.

Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.

Remove Background:
Select the darkness of the background. Tap + to lighten (whiten) the background and tap - to darken
(blacken) it.
If you select Auto, the background colors of the originals are detected, and they are removed or
lightened automatically. It is not applied correctly if the background color is too dark or not detected.

Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏ Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏ Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
❏ Rear Page:
Set the area for the rear side individually when scanning 2-sided originals.

Remove Punch Holes:

Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.
❏ Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

ADF Continuous Scan:

You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.

File Storing:
You can save the scanned image to the storage.
❏ Setting:
Select whether or not to save the scanned image only to the storage.

132
Scanning > Scanning Originals to Storage > Menu Options for Scanning to Storage

❏ Folder (Required):
Select the storage in which to save the scanned image.
❏ File Name:
Set the file name.
❏ File Password:
Set the password to select the file.
❏ User Name:
Set the user name.

Scanning Originals to Storage

See the following for details on the storage feature.
“Using Storage” on page 183

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Scan > Storage on the control panel.

3. Specify the folder.

4. Select Scan Settings, and then check settings such as the save format, and change them if necessary.
“Menu Options for Scanning to Storage” on page 133
Note:
❏ Select to save your settings as a preset.

❏ Select to restore settings to their defaults.

5. Tap x.

Menu Options for Scanning to Storage

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

B&W/Color
Select whether to scan in monochrome or in color.

Resolution:
Select the scanning resolution.

2-Sided:
Scan both sides of the original.

133
Scanning > Scanning Originals to Storage > Menu Options for Scanning to Storage

❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.
❏ Binding(Original):
Select the binding direction of the original.

Scan Area:
Select the scan area. To scan at the maximum area of the scanner glass, select Max Area.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Original Type:
Select the type of your original.

Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

Mixed Size Originals:

You can place the following combination of sizes in the ADF at the same time. A3 and A4; B4 and B5.
When using these combinations, originals are scanned at the actual size of the originals. Place your
originals by aligning the width of the originals as shown below.

Density:
Select the contrast of the scanned image.

Remove Background:
Select the darkness of the background. Tap + to lighten (whiten) the background and tap - to darken
(blacken) it.
If you select Auto, the background colors of the originals are detected, and they are removed or
lightened automatically. It is not applied correctly if the background color is too dark or not detected.

Remove Shadow:
Remove the shadows of the original that appear in the scanned image.
❏ Frame:
Remove the shadows at the edge of the original.
❏ Center:
Remove the shadows of the binding margin of the booklet.
❏ Rear Page:
Set the area for the rear side individually when scanning 2-sided originals.

Remove Punch Holes:

Remove the punch holes that appear in the scanned image. You can specify the area to erase the
punch holes by entering a value in the box on the right.

134
Scanning > Scanning Using WSD > Setting Up a WSD Port

❏ Erasing Position:
Select the position to remove the punch holes.
❏ Orientation (Original):
Select the orientation of the original.

ADF Continuous Scan:

You can place a large number of originals in the ADF in batches, and scan them as a single scanning
job.

File Name:
Set the file name.

File Password:
Set the password to select the file.

User Name:
Set the user name for the file.

Scanning Using WSD

Note:
❏ This feature is only available for computers running Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista.
❏ If you are using Windows 7/Windows Vista, you need to setup your computer in advance using this feature.
“Setting Up a WSD Port” on page 135

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Scan > WSD on the control panel.

3. Select a computer.

4. Tap x.

Setting Up a WSD Port

This section explains how to set up a WSD port for Windows 7/Windows Vista.
Note:
For Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8, the WSD port is set up automatically.

The following is necessary to set up a WSD port.

❏ The printer and the computer are connected to the network.
❏ The printer driver is installed on the computer.

1. Turn the printer on.

135
Scanning > Scanning Using WSD > Setting Up a WSD Port

2. Click start, and then click Network on the computer.

3. Right-click the printer, and then click Install.

Click Continue when the User Account Control screen is displayed.
Click Uninstall and start again if the Uninstall screen is displayed.

Note:
The printer name you set on the network and model name (EPSON XXXXXX (XX-XXXX)) are displayed on the
network screen. You can check the printer's name set on the network from the printer's control panel or by printing a
network status sheet.

4. Click Your device is ready to use.

5. Check the message, and then click Close.

136
Scanning > Scanning Originals to a Smart Device

6. Open the Devices and Printers screen.

❏ Windows 7
Click start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound (or Hardware) > Devices and Printers.
❏ Windows Vista
Click start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers.

7. Check that an icon with the printer's name on the network is displayed.
Select the printer name when using with WSD.

Scanning Originals to a Smart Device

Note:
❏ Before scanning, install Epson iPrint on your smart device.
❏ Epson iPrint screens are subject to change without notice.
❏ Epson iPrint contents may vary depending on the product.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Start Epson iPrint.

3. Tap Scan on the home screen.

4. Tap Scan.
Note:
You can set the scan settings. Tap the icon at the top-right of the screen.

Scanning starts.

5. Check the scanned image, and then select the saving method.

❏ : Displays the screen where you can save the scanned images.
❏ : Displays the screen where you can send scanned images by email.

❏ : Displays the screen where you can print scanned images.

6. Finally, follow the on-screen instructions.

137
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only)

Before Using Fax Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Overview of this Printer's Fax Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Sending Faxes Using the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Receiving Faxes on the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Menu Options for Faxing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Menu Options for Fax Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163

Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Sending a Fax from a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Receiving Faxes on a Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Overview of this Printer's Fax Features > Feature: Sending Faxes

Before Using Fax Features

Check the following before you start using the fax features.
❏ The printer and the phone line, and (if it is being used) the phone machine are connected correctly
❏ Fax basic settings (Fax Setting Wizard) is complete
❏ Other necessary Fax Settings are complete

“Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line” on page 517

“Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 520
“Making Settings for the Printer's Fax Features According to Use” on page 522
“Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)” on page 418
“Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 487
“Making Contacts Available” on page 503
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board” on page 374
If your organization has a printer administrator, contact your administrator to check the status or conditions of the
connection and settings.

Overview of this Printer's Fax Features

Feature: Sending Faxes

Sending Methods
❏ Sending automatically
When you scan an original by tapping x (Send), the printer dials the recipients and sends the fax.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer” on page 144
❏ Sending manually
When you perform a manual check on the line connection by dialing the recipient, tap x (Send) to start
sending a fax directly.
“Sending Faxes After Confirming the Recipient's Status” on page 146
“Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device” on page 147

Recipient Designation when Sending a Fax

You can enter recipients using Enter Directly, Contacts, and Recent.
“Recipient” on page 158
“Making Contacts Available” on page 503

139
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Overview of this Printer's Fax Features > Feature: Receiving Faxes

Scan Settings when Sending a Fax

You can select items such as Resolution or Original Size (Glass) when sending faxes.
“Scan Settings:” on page 159

Using Fax Send Settings when Sending a Fax

You can use Fax Send Settings such as Direct Send (to send a large document stably) or Backup when normal
sending fails. If you make settings to back up sent faxes when sending a fax but the backup fails, the printer can
send an email notification automatically when the backup is performed.
“Fax Send Settings:” on page 160
“Backup Error Report:” on page 419
“Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

Feature: Receiving Faxes

Receive Mode
There are two options in Receive Mode for receiving incoming faxes.

❏ Manual
Mainly for phoning, but also for faxing
“Usage of Manual Mode” on page 153
❏ Auto
- Only for faxing (external phone device is not required)
- Mainly for faxing, and sometimes phoning
“Usage of Auto Mode” on page 153

Receiving Faxes by Operating a Connected Phone

You can receive faxes by only operating an external phone device.
“Basic Settings” on page 419
“Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device” on page 523

140
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Overview of this Printer's Fax Features > Feature: PC-FAX Send/Rec…

Destinations of Received Faxes

❏ Output without conditions: Received faxes are printed unconditionally by default. You can set up destinations
for received faxes to the inbox, a computer, an external memory, emails, folders, or other faxes. If you save in the
inbox, you can check the contents on the screen.

“Unconditional Save/Forward:” on page 424

“Inbox settings:” on page 428

“Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 157
❏ Output when conditions match: You can set up destinations for received faxes to the inbox or a confidential box,
an external memory, an email, a folder, or another fax when specific conditions are met. If you save in the inbox
or a confidential box, you can check the contents on the screen.
“Conditional Save/Forward:” on page 425
“Fax Report:” on page 161

Feature: PC-FAX Send/Receive (Windows/Mac OS)

PC-FAX Send
You can send faxes from a computer.
“PC to FAX Function:” on page 423
“Software for Faxing” on page 404
“Sending a Fax from a Computer” on page 175

PC-FAX Receive
You can receive faxes on a computer.
“Making Settings to Send and Receive Faxes on a Computer” on page 531

141
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Overview of this Printer's Fax Features > Feature: Status or Logs for…

“Software for Faxing” on page 404

“Receiving Faxes on a Computer” on page 179

Features: Various Fax Reports

You can check the status of sent and received faxes in a report.

“Report Settings” on page 418

“Fax Send Settings:” on page 160
“Transmission Log:” on page 161
“Fax Report:” on page 161

Feature: Status or Logs for Fax Jobs

You can check the fax jobs in progress or check the job history.
“Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 173

142
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Overview of this Printer's Fax Features > Features: Other Useful Fea…

Feature: Fax Box

Inbox and confidential boxes

“Inbox/Confidential” on page 163

Stored Documents Box

“Stored Documents:” on page 166

Polling Send/Board Box

“Polling Send/Board” on page 168

Security for Fax Box feature

You can set a password for each box.
“Feature: Security when Sending and Receiving Faxes” on page 143

Feature: Security when Sending and Receiving Faxes

You can use many security features such as Direct Dialing Restrictions to prevent sending to the wrong
destination, or Backup Data Auto Clear to prevent information leakage. You can set a password for each fax box
in the printer.
“Security Settings” on page 422
“Inbox settings:” on page 428
“Menu Options for Fax Box” on page 163
“Box Document Delete Settings:” on page 428

Features: Other Useful Features

Blocking Junk Faxes
“Rejection Fax:” on page 421

Receiving Faxes After Dialing

“Receiving Faxes by Making a Phone Call” on page 154

143
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Selecting Recipients

“Polling Receive:” on page 162

Regarding Sending Faxes

“User Settings” on page 418
“Quick Operation Button:” on page 158

Sending Faxes Using the Printer

You can send faxes by entering fax numbers for recipients on the control panel.
Note:
❏ When sending a fax in monochrome, you can preview the scanned image on the LCD screen before sending.
❏ You can reserve up to 50 monochrome fax jobs even while the phone line is in use for a voice call, sending another fax, or
receiving a fax. You can check or cancel reserved fax jobs from Job/Status.

1. Place the originals.

You can send up to 200 pages in one transmission; however depending on the remaining amount of memory,
you may not be able to send faxes even with less than 200 pages.

2. Select Fax on the home screen.

3. Specify the recipient.

“Selecting Recipients” on page 144
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards” on page 377

4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings as necessary.

5. Tap x to send the fax .

Note:
❏ If the fax number is busy or there is some problem, the printer automatically redials after one minute.

❏ To cancel sending, tap y.

❏ It takes longer to send a fax in color because the printer performs scanning and sending simultaneously. While the
printer is sending a fax in color, you cannot use the other features.

Related Information
& “Fax Settings” on page 159
& “Checking Fax Jobs in Progress” on page 174

Selecting Recipients
You can specify recipients on the Recipient tab to send the fax using the following methods.

144
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Various Ways of Sending Faxes

Entering Fax Number Manually

Select Enter Directly, enter a fax number on the screen displayed, and then tap OK.
- To add a pause (pause for three seconds during dialing), enter a hyphen(-).
- If you have set an external access code in Line Type, enter "#" (hash) instead of the actual external access code at
the beginning of the fax number.
Note:
If you cannot manually enter a fax number, Direct Dialing Restrictions in Security Settings is set to On. Select fax
recipients from the contacts list or the sent fax history.

Selecting recipients from the contacts list

Select Contacts and select recipients you want to send. The following icon displays the contacts list.

To search for a recipient from the contacts list, select .

If the recipient you want to send to has not been registered in Contacts yet, select to register it.

Selecting recipients from the sent fax history

Select (Recent), and then select a recipient.

Selecting recipients from the list on the Recipient tab

Select a recipient registered as Assign to Frequent Use in Web Config.
Note:
To delete recipients you entered, display the list of recipients by tapping on the field of a fax number or the number of
recipients on the LCD screen, select the recipient from the list, and then select Remove.

Related Information
& “Making Contacts Available” on page 503
& “Destination Setting Items” on page 505
& “Recipient” on page 158

Various Ways of Sending Faxes

Sending a Fax after Checking the Scanned Image

You can preview the scanned image on the LCD screen before sending the fax. (Monochrome fax only)

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Fax on the home screen.

145
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Various Ways of Sending Faxes

3. Specify the recipient.

“Selecting Recipients” on page 144
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards” on page 377

4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings as necessary.
“Fax Settings” on page 159

5. Tap on the fax top screen to scan, check the scanned document image.

6. Select Start Sending. Otherwise, select Cancel

- : Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.

- : Reduces or enlarges.

- : Moves to the previous or the next page.

Note:
❏ When Direct Send is enabled, you cannot preview.
❏ When the preview screen is left untouched for the time set in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Send
Settings > Fax Preview Display Time, the fax is sent automatically.
❏ The image quality of a sent fax may be different from what you previewed depending on the capability of the
recipient machine.

Sending Faxes After Confirming the Recipient's Status

You can send a fax while listening to sounds or voices through the printer's speaker while dialing, communicating,
and transmitting. You can also use this feature when you want to receive a fax from a fax information service by
following audio guidance.

1. Select Fax on the home screen.

2. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the resolution and the sending method as
necessary. When you have finished making settings, select the Recipient tab.

3. Tap and then specify the recipient.

Note:
You can adjust the sound volume of the speaker.

4. When you hear a fax tone, select Send/Receive at the upper right corner of the LCD screen, and then select
Send.
Note:
When receiving a fax from a fax information service, and you hear the audio guidance, follow the guidance to make the
printer operations.

5. Tap x to send the fax.

6. When sending is complete, remove the originals.

146
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Various Ways of Sending Faxes

Related Information
& “Fax Settings” on page 159

Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device

You can send a fax by dialing using the connected telephone when you want to talk over the phone before sending
a fax, or when the recipient's fax machine does not switch to the fax automatically.

1. Pick up the handset of the connected telephone, and then dial the recipient's fax number using the phone.
Note:
When the recipient answers the phone, you can talk with the recipient.

2. Select Fax on the home screen.

3. Make necessary settings on theFax Settings.

“Fax Settings” on page 159

4. When you hear a fax tone, tap x, and then hang up the handset.
Note:
When a number is dialed using the connected telephone, it takes longer to send a fax because the printer performs
scanning and sending simultaneously. While sending the fax, you cannot use the other features.

Related Information
& “Fax Settings” on page 159

Sending Faxes on Demand (Using Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box)

If you store a monochrome document in the printer in advance, the stored document can be sent upon request
from another fax machine that has a polling receive feature. There is one Polling Send box and 10 bulletin board
boxes in the printer for this feature. In each box, you can store one document with up to 200 pages. To use a
bulletin board box, the one box to store a document must be registered beforehand, and the fax machine of the
recipient must support the subaddress/password feature.

Related Information
& “Setting the Polling Send Box” on page 147
& “Registering a Bulletin Board Box” on page 148
& “Storing a Document in the Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box” on page 148

Setting the Polling Send Box

You can store a document in the Polling Send Box without registering. Make the following settings as necessary.

1. Select Fax Box > Polling Send/Board from the home screen.

147
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Various Ways of Sending Faxes

2. Select Polling Send, and then select Settings.

Note:
If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.

3. Make the appropriate settings, such as Notify Send Result.

Note:
If you set a password in Box Open Password, you will be asked to enter the password from the next time you open the
box.

4. Select OK to apply the settings.

Related Information
& “Polling Send:” on page 169

Registering a Bulletin Board Box

You must register a bulletin board box for storing a document beforehand. Follow the steps below to register the
box.

1. Select Fax Box > Polling Send/Board from the home screen.

2. Select one of the boxes named Unregistered Bulletin Board.

Note:
If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.

3. Make settings for the items on the screen.

❏ Enter a name in Name (Required)
❏ Enter a subaddress in Subaddress(SEP)
❏ Enter a password in Password(PWD)

4. Make the appropriate settings such as Notify Send Result.

Note:
If you set a password in Box Open Password, you will be asked to enter the password from the next time you open the
box.

5. Select OK to apply the settings.

Related Information
& “Unregistered Bulletin Board:” on page 170

Storing a Document in the Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box

1. Select Fax Box on the home screen, and then select Polling Send/Board.

2. Select Polling Send or one of the bulletin board boxes that have already been registered.
If the password entry screen is displayed, enter the password to open the box.

148
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Various Ways of Sending Faxes

3. Tap Add Document.

4. On the fax top screen that is displayed, check the fax settings, and then tap x to scan and store the document.
To check the document you stored, select Fax Box > Polling Send/Board, select the box containing the document
you want to check, and then tap Check Document. On the screen that is displayed, you can view, print or delete
the scanned document.

Related Information
& “Each Registered Bulletin Board” on page 171

Sending Many Pages of a Monochrome Document (Direct Send)

When sending a fax in monochrome, the scanned document is temporarily stored in the printer's memory.
Therefore, sending a lot of pages may cause the printer to run out of memory and stop sending the fax. You can
avoid this by enabling the Direct Send feature, however, it takes longer to send the fax because the printer
performs scanning and sending simultaneously. You can use this feature when there is only one recipient.

Accessing the Menu

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Fax > Fax Settings > Direct Send.

Sending a Fax Preferentially (Priority Send)

You can send an urgent document ahead of the other faxes waiting to be sent.
Note:
You cannot send your document preferentially while one of the following is in progress because the printer cannot accept
another fax.
❏ Sending a monochrome fax with Direct Send enabled
❏ Sending a color fax
❏ Sending a fax using a connected telephone
❏ Sending a fax sent from the computer (except when sending from memory)

Accessing the Menu

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Fax > Fax SettingsPriority Send.

Related Information
& “Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 173

Sending Faxes in Monochrome at Specified Time of the Day (Send Fax Later)
You can set to send a fax at a specified time. Only monochrome faxes can be sent when the time to send is
specified.

149
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Various Ways of Sending Faxes

Accessing the Menu

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Fax > Fax Settings
Enable Send Fax Later, and then specify the time of day to send the fax.
Note:
To cancel the fax while the printer is waiting for the specified time to arrive, cancel it from Job/Status on the home screen.

Related Information
& “Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 173

Sending Different Size Documents Using ADF (ADF Continuous Scan)

Sending faxes by placing originals one by one, or by placing originals by size, you can send them as one document
at their original sizes.
If you place different sized originals in the ADF, all of the originals are sent at the largest size among them. To send
originals at their original sizes, do not place originals with mixed sizes.

1. Place the first batch of originals at the same size.

2. Select Fax on the home screen.

3. Specify the recipient.

4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then tap ADF Continuous Scan to set this to On.
You can also make settings such as the resolution and the sending method as necessary.

5. Tap x (Send).

6. When scanning the first set of originals is complete and a message is displayed on the control panel asking you
to scan the next set of originals, set the next originals, and then select Start Scanning.
Note:
If you leave the printer untouched for the time set in Wait Time for Next Original after you have been prompted to set
the next originals, the printer stops storing and starts sending the document.

Sending a Fax with a Subaddress(SUB) and Password(SID)

You can send faxes to the confidential boxes or the relay boxes in the recipient's fax machine when the recipient's
fax machine has the feature to receive confidential faxes or relay faxes. The recipients can receive them securely, or
can forward them to specified fax destinations.

1. Place the originals.

2. Select Fax on the home screen.

150
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending Faxes Using the Printer > Various Ways of Sending Faxes

3. Select the contacts list and select a recipient with a registered subaddress and password.
Note:
The following icon displays the contacts list.

You can also select the recipient from (Recent) if it was sent with a subaddress and password.

4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the resolution and the sending method as
necessary.

5. Send the fax.

Related Information
& “Making Contacts Available” on page 503

Sending the Same Documents Multiple Times

Related Information
& “Storing a Fax Without Specifying a Recipient (Store Fax Data)” on page 151
& “Sending Faxes Using the Stored Document Feature” on page 152

Storing a Fax Without Specifying a Recipient (Store Fax Data)

Since you can send faxes using documents stored in the printer, you can save the time spent scanning documents
when you need to send the same document frequently. You can store up to 200 pages of a single document in
monochrome. You can store 200 documents in the printer's stored documents box.
Note:
Saving 200 documents may not be possible depending on the usage conditions such as the file size of stored documents.

1. Place the originals.

2. Select Fax Box on the home screen.

3. Select Stored Documents, tap (Box Menu), and then select Store Fax Data.

4. In the Fax Settings tab that is displayed, make settings such as the resolution as necessary.

5. Tap x to store the document.

Related Information
& “Stored Documents:” on page 166

151
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on the Printer > Receiving Incoming Faxes

Sending Faxes Using the Stored Document Feature

1. Select Fax Box on the home screen, and then select Stored Documents.

2. Select the document you want to send,and then select Send/Save > Send Fax.
When the message Delete this document after sending? is displayed, select Yes or No.

3. Specify the recipient.

4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the sending method as necessary.

5. Tap x to send the fax.

Related Information
& “Stored Documents:” on page 166
& “Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 173

Receiving Faxes on the Printer

If the printer is connected to the phone line and basic settings have been completed using the Fax Setting Wizard,
you can receive faxes.
There are two ways of receiving faxes.
❏ Receiving an incoming fax
❏ Receiving a fax by making a call (Polling Receive)

Received faxes are printed in the printer's initial settings.

You can save received faxes, check them on the printer screen, and forward them.

To check the status of the fax settings, you can print a Fax Settings List by selecting Fax > (Menu) > Fax
Report > Fax Settings List.

Related Information
& “Menu” on page 161

Receiving Incoming Faxes

There are two options in Receive Mode.

152
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on the Printer > Receiving Incoming Faxes

Related Information
& “Usage of Manual Mode” on page 153
& “Usage of Auto Mode” on page 153

Usage of Manual Mode

This mode is mainly for making phone calls, but is also for faxing.

Receiving Faxes
When the telephone rings, you can answer the ringing manually by picking up the handset.
❏ When you hear a fax signal (baud):
Select Fax on the printer's home screen, select Send/Receive > Receive, and then tap x. Next, hang up the
handset.
❏ If the ringing is for a voice call:
You can answer the phone as normal.

Receiving Faxes Using only the Connected Telephone

When Remote Receive is set, you can receive faxes by simply entering the Start Code.
When the telephone rings, pick up the handset. When you hear a fax tone (baud), dial the two digit Start Code,
and then hang up the handset. If you do not know the start code, ask the administrator.

Usage of Auto Mode

This mode allows you to use the line for the following uses.
❏ Using the line for faxing only (external telephone is not necessary)
❏ Using the line for faxing mainly, and sometimes phoning

Receiving Faxes Without an External Phone Device

The printer automatically switches to receive faxes when the number of rings you set in Rings to Answer is
complete.

Receiving Faxes With an External Phone Device

A printer with an external phone device works as follows.
❏ When the answering machine answers within the number of rings set in Rings to Answer:
- If the ringing is for a fax: The printer automatically switches to receive faxes.
- If the ringing is for a voice call; The answering machine can receive voice calls and record voice messages.
❏ When you pick up the handset within the number of rings set in Rings to Answer:
- If the ringing is for a fax: Hold the line until the printer automatically starts receiving the fax. Once the printer
starts receiving the fax, you can hang up the handset. To start receiving the fax immediately, use the same steps
as for Manual. You can receive the fax using the same steps as for Manual. Select Fax on the home screen, and
then select Send/Receive > Receive. Next, tap x, and then hang up the handset.
- If the ringing is for a voice call: You can answer the phone as normal.

153
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on the Printer > Receiving Faxes by Making a Pho…

❏ When the ringing stops and the printer automatically switches to receive faxes:
- If the ringing is for a fax: The printer starts receiving faxes.
- If the ringing is for a voice call: You cannot answer the phone. Ask the person to call you back.

Note:
Set the number of rings to answer for the answering machine to a lower number than the number set in Rings to Answer.
Otherwise, the answering machine cannot receive voice calls to record voice messages. For details on setting up the answering
machine, see the manual supplied with the answering machine.

Receiving Faxes by Making a Phone Call

You can receive a fax stored on another fax machine by dialing the fax number.

Related Information
& “Receiving Faxes After Confirming the Sender's Status” on page 154
& “Receiving Faxes by Polling (Polling Receive)” on page 154
& “Receiving Faxes from a Board with a Subaddress (SEP) and Password (PWD) (Polling Receive)” on page 155

Receiving Faxes After Confirming the Sender's Status

You can receive a fax while listening to sounds or voices through the printer's speaker while dialing,
communicating, and transmitting. You can use this feature when you want to receive a fax from a fax information
service by following an audio guide.

1. Select Fax on the home screen.

2. Tap , and then specify the sender.

Note:
You can adjust the sound volume of the speaker.

3. Wait until the sender answers your call. When you hear a fax tone, select Send/Receive at the upper right
corner of the LCD screen, and then select Receive.
Note:
When receiving a fax from a fax information service, and you hear the audio guidance, follow the guidance to make the
printer operations.

4. Tap x.

Receiving Faxes by Polling (Polling Receive)

You can receive a fax stored on another fax machine by dialing the fax number. Use this feature to receive a
document from a fax information service.
Note:
❏ If the fax information service has an audio guidance feature that you need to follow to receive a document, you cannot
use this feature.
❏ To receive a document from a fax information service that uses audio guidance, just dial the fax number using the On
Hook feature or the connected telephone, and operate the phone and the printer following the audio guidance.

154
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on the Printer > Receiving Faxes by Making a Pho…

1. Select Fax on the home screen.

2. Tap (Menu).

3. Select Extended Fax.

4. Tap the Polling Receive box to set this to On.

5. Tap Close, and then tap Close again.

6. Enter the fax number.

Note:
If you cannot manually enter a fax number, Direct Dialing Restrictions in Security Settings is set to On. Select fax
recipients from the contacts list or the sent fax history.

7. Tap x.

Related Information
& “Polling Receive:” on page 162

Receiving Faxes from a Board with a Subaddress (SEP) and Password (PWD)
(Polling Receive)
By dialing to a sender, you can receive faxes from a board stored on sender's fax machine with a subaddress (SEP)
and password (PWD) feature. To use this feature, register the contact with the subaddress (SEP) and password
(PWD) in the contacts list in advance.

1. Select Fax on the home screen.

2. Select (Menu).

3. Select Extended Fax.

4. Tap Polling Receive to set this to On.

5. Tap Close, and then tap Close again.

6. Select the contacts list, and then select the contact with the registered subaddress (SEP) and password (PWD)
to match the destination board.
Note:
The following icon displays the contacts list.

7. Tap x.

155
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on the Printer > Saving and Forwarding Received …

Related Information
& “Making Contacts Available” on page 503
& “Making Contacts Available” on page 503
& “Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device” on page 147
& “Receiving Faxes After Confirming the Sender's Status” on page 154
& “Menu” on page 161

Saving and Forwarding Received Faxes

Summary of the Features

If your organization has a printer administrator, contact your administrator to check the status of the printer
settings.

Saving Received Faxes in the Printer

The received faxes can be saved in the printer, and you can view them on the printer's screen. You can print only
the faxes you want to print or delete unnecessary faxes.

Saving and/or Forwarding Received Faxes to Destinations Other than the Printer
The following can be set as destinations.
❏ Computer (PC-FAX reception)
❏ External memory device
❏ Email address
❏ Shared folder on a network
❏ Another fax machine

Note:
❏ The fax data is saved as PDF or TIFF format.
❏ Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. They are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.

Sorting Received Faxes by Conditions such as Subaddress and Password

You can sort and save received faxes to your Inbox or bulletin board boxes. You can also forward received faxes to
destinations other than the printer.
❏ Email address
❏ Shared folder on a network
❏ Another fax machine

Note:
❏ The fax data is saved as PDF or TIFF format.
❏ Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. They are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.

❏ You can print the save/forward conditions set in the printer. Select Fax on the home screen, and then select (Menu) >
Fax Report > Conditional Save/Forward list.

156
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on the Printer > Viewing Received Faxes Saved in t…

Related Information
& “Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes” on page 524
& “Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes with Specific Conditions” on page 527
& “Menu” on page 161
& “Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 157

Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen

If you set up to save received faxes in the printer, you can view the contents and print as necessary.
“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 524
“Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specific Conditions” on page 527

1. Select Fax Box on the home screen.

Note:
When there are received faxes that have not been read, the number of unread documents is displayed on the on the
home screen.

2. Select Inbox/Confidential.

3. Select the inbox or the confidential box you want to view.

4. If the inbox, or the confidential box has been password protected, enter the inbox password, the confidential
box password, or the administrator password.

5. Select the fax you want to view.

You can switch the document display between thumbnails and lists.

6. Select Preview.
The contents of the fax are displayed.

To view details about a page, select that page, and then select to display the page preview screen.

❏ : Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.

❏ : Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.

❏ : Reduces or enlarges.

❏ : Moves to the previous or the next page.

❏ To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons. Tap again to display
the icons.

7. Select whether to print or delete the document you have viewed, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

c Important:
If the printer runs out of memory, receiving and sending faxes is disabled. Delete documents that you have
already read or printed.

157
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Faxing > Recipient

Related Information
& “Inbox/Confidential” on page 163

Menu Options for Faxing

Frequent
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Fax > Frequent

You can send faxes using registered frequently used contacts, or using the history of recently sent faxes.

Select a recipient from the quick dial list displayed.

Select a recipient from the sent fax history. You can also add the recipient to the contacts list.

Frequent Contacts:
Displays contacts you registered in Settings > Contacts Manager > Frequent.

Quick Operation Button:

Displays up to four frequently used items such as Transmission Log and Original Type. These allow you to
quickly and easily make settings.
You must assign items in advance in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > User Settings > Quick
Operation Button
❏ There are four buttons available as the Quick Operation Button.

Recipient
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Fax > Recipient

Contacts
The following icon displays the contacts list.

Displays the registered contacts list in alphabetic order so that you can select a contact as a recipient from
the list.

158
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Faxing > Fax Settings

To search for a recipient from the contacts list, select .

Select a recipient from the quick dial list displayed.

Select a recipient from the sent fax history. You can also add the recipient to the contacts list.

Add New
You can register a new recipient or a group into the contacts list.

Fax Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Fax > Fax Settings

Scan Settings:

Original Size (Glass):

Select the size and orientation of the original you placed on the scanner glass.

Original Type:
Select the type of your original.

Color Mode:
Select whether to scan in color or in monochrome.

Resolution:
Select the resolution of the outgoing fax. If you select a higher resolution, the data size
becomes larger and it takes time to send the fax.

Density:
Sets the density of the outgoing fax. + makes the density darker, and - makes it lighter.

Remove Background:
Select the darkness of the background. Tap + to lighten (whiten) the background and tap - to
darken (blacken) it.
If you select Auto, the background colors of the originals are detected, and they are removed
or lightened automatically. It is not applied correctly if the background color is too dark or not
detected.

Sharpness:
Enhances or defocuses the outline of the image. + enhances the sharpness, and - defocuses the
sharpness.

159
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Faxing > Fax Settings

ADF 2-Sided:
Scans both sides of originals placed in the ADF and sends a monochrome fax.

ADF Continuous Scan:

When sending a fax from the ADF, you cannot add originals in the ADF after starting
scanning. If you place different sized originals in the ADF, all of the originals are sent at the
largest size among them. Enable this option so that the printer asks if you want to scan another
page after an original in the ADF has finished scanning. Then you can sort and scan your
originals by size and send them as a single fax.

Fax Send Settings:

Direct Send:
Sends a monochrome fax while scanning the originals. Since scanned originals are not stored
temporarily in the printer's memory even when sending a large volume of pages, you can avoid
printer errors due to a lack of memory. Note that sending using this feature takes longer than
not using this feature. See the related information below on this topic.
You cannot use this feature when:
❏ Sending a fax using the ADF 2-Sided option
❏ Sending a fax to multiple recipients

Priority Send:
Sends the current fax before other faxes waiting to be sent. See the related information below
on this topic.

Send Fax Later:

Sends a fax at a time you specified. Only a monochrome fax is available when using this
option. See the related information below on this topic.

Add Sender Information:

❏ Add Sender Information
Select the position where you want to include the header information (sender name and fax
number) in the outgoing fax, or not to include the information.
- Off: Sends a fax with no header information.
- Outside of Image: Sends a fax with header information in the top white margin of the fax.
This keeps the header from overlapping with the scanned image, however, the fax received
by the recipient may be printed across two sheets depending on the size of the originals.
- Inside of Image: Sends a fax with header information approximately 7 mm lower than the
top of the scanned image. The header may overlap with the image, however, the fax received
by the recipient will not be split into two documents.
❏ Fax Header
Select the header for the recipient. To use this feature, you should register multiple headers
in advance.
❏ Additional Information
Select the information you want to add. You can select one from Your Phone Number,
Destination List, and None.

160
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Faxing > Menu

Notify Send Result:

Sends a notification after you send a fax.

Transmission Report:
Prints a transmission report after you send the fax.
Print on Error prints a report only when an error occurs.
When Attach Fax image to report has been set in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings
> Report Settings, faxes with errors are also printed with the report.

Backup:
Saves a backup of the sent fax that is scanned and saved to the printer's memory automatically.
The backup feature is available when:
❏ Sending a fax in monochrome
❏ Sending a fax using the Send Fax Later feature
❏ Sending a fax using the Batch Send feature
❏ Sending a fax using the Store Fax Data feature

File Name:
If you set this to On and send a fax, you can specify the name of the document to be saved in
the Stored Documents box and the Polling Send/Board box.

Related Information
& “Sending Different Size Documents Using ADF (ADF Continuous Scan)” on page 150
& “Sending Many Pages of a Monochrome Document (Direct Send)” on page 149
& “Sending a Fax Preferentially (Priority Send)” on page 149
& “Sending Faxes in Monochrome at Specified Time of the Day (Send Fax Later)” on page 149

Menu
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Fax > Menu

Transmission Log:
You can check the history of sent or received fax jobs.
Note that you can also check the history of sent or received fax jobs from Job/Status.

Fax Report:

Last Transmission:
Prints a report for the previous fax that was sent or received through polling.

Fax Log:
Prints a transmission report. You can set to print this report automatically using the following
menu.

161
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Faxing > Menu

Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Report Settings > Fax Log

Stored Fax Documents:

Prints a list of fax documents stored in the printer’s memory, such as unfinished jobs.

Fax Settings List:

Prints the current fax settings.

Conditional Save/Forward list:

Prints the Conditional Save/Forward List.

Protocol Trace:
Prints a detailed report for the previous fax that was sent or received.

Extended Fax:

Polling Receive:
When this is set to On and you call the sender's fax number, you can receive documents from
the sender's fax machine. See the related information below for details on how to receive faxes
using Polling Receive.
When you leave the Fax menu, the setting returns to Off (default).

Polling Send/Board:
When this is set to On by selecting the polling send box or a bulletin board box, you can scan
and store documents to the box you selected by tapping x on the Fax Settings tab.
You can store one document to the polling send box. You can store up to 10 documents to up
to 10 bulletin boards in the printer, but you must register them from Fax Box before storing
documents. See the related information below for details on how to register a bulletin board
box.
When you leave the Fax menu, the setting returns to Off (default).

Store Fax Data:

When this is set to On, and you tap x on the Fax Settings tab, you can scan and store
documents to the Stored Documents box. You can store up to 200 documents.
You can also scan and save documents to the Stored Documents box from Fax Box. See the
related information below for details on how to store documents from Fax Box
When you leave the Fax menu, the setting returns to Off (default).

Save to Stored Documents Box after sending:

When this is set to On and you send a fax, the sent document is saved in the Stored
Documents box. You can send the document repeatedly from the Stored Documents box.

Fax Box:
Accesses the Fax Box on the home screen.

Fax Settings:
Accesses Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings. Access the setting menu as an administrator.

162
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Inbox/Confidential

Related Information
& “Receiving Faxes by Polling (Polling Receive)” on page 154
& “Setting the Polling Send Box” on page 147
& “Registering a Bulletin Board Box” on page 148
& “Storing a Document in the Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box” on page 148
& “Polling Send/Board” on page 168
& “Storing a Fax Without Specifying a Recipient (Store Fax Data)” on page 151
& “Stored Documents:” on page 166
& “Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs” on page 173
& “Checking the Fax Job History” on page 174

Menu Options for Fax Box

Inbox/Confidential
You can find Inbox/Confidential in Fax Box on the home screen.

Inbox and Confidential Boxes (List)

Inbox and confidential boxes are in Fax Box > Inbox/Confidential.
You can save up to 200 documents in the inbox and the confidential box in total.
You can use one Inbox and register up to 10 confidential boxes. The box name is displayed on the
box. Confidential XX is the default name for each confidential box.

Inbox and Confidential Boxes

Displays the received faxes list by sender name, date received, and pages. If File Name is set in
Others, the file name is displayed instead of the sender's name.

Preview:
Displays the preview screen for the document.

Select to display the page preview.

page preview screen

❏ : Reduces or enlarges.

❏ : Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.

❏ : Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.

❏ : Moves to the previous or the next page.

To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the
icons. Tap again to display the icons.

163
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Inbox/Confidential

Proceed to Print:
Prints the document you are previewing. You can make settings such as Copies
before starting printing.

Delete:
Deletes the document you are previewing.

Details:
Displays information for the selected document such as the saved date and time, and
total number of pages.

Send/Save:
You can perform the following operations for the selected document.
❏ Send Fax
❏ Forward(Email)
❏ Forward(Network Folder)
❏ Save to Memory Device

You can select PDF or TIFF in File Format when saving or forwarding the document.
When you select PDF, you can make the following settings in PDF Settings as
necessary.
❏ Document Open Password
❏ Permissions Password for Printing and Editing

When the message Delete When Complete is displayed, select On to delete faxes after
completing processes such as Forward(Email) or Save to Memory Device.

Delete:
Deletes the selected document.

Others:
Set the File Name for faxes you want to display in the received faxes list in the box.

(Box Menu)

Print All:
This is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Prints all faxes in the box.
Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all faxes when printing is complete.

Save All to Memory Device:

This is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Saves all faxes to external
memory devices in the box.
You can select PDF or TIFF in File Format when saving or forwarding the document.
When you select PDF, you can make the following settings in PDF Settings as
necessary.
❏ Document Open Password
❏ Permissions Password for Printing and Editing

164
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Inbox/Confidential

Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all documents when saving is complete.

Delete All Reads:

This is displayed when there are documents in the box. Deletes all read documents in
the box.

Delete All Unreads:

This is displayed when there are documents in the box. Deletes all unread documents in
the box.

Delete All:
This is displayed only when there are stored fax documents in the box. Deletes all faxes
in the box.

Settings:
The following items are displayed when you select Inbox > Box Menu > Settings.
❏ Options when memory is full: Select one option to print or to decline incoming faxes
after the Inbox is full.
❏ Inbox Password Settings: You can set a password or change it.
❏ Auto Delete Received Faxes: Selecting On automatically deletes received fax
documents in the inbox after a certain period of time. When Follow Fax Settings is
selected, the following settings are used.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward
Settings > Common Settings > Box Document Delete Settings

The following items are displayed when you select a confidential box and select Box
Menu > Settings.
❏ Name: Enter a name for the confidential box.
❏ Box Open Password: You can set a password or change it.
❏ Auto Delete Received Faxes: Selecting On automatically deletes received fax
documents in the inbox after a certain period of time.

Delete Box:
This item is displayed only when you select a confidential box and select Box Menu.
Clears the current settings for Confidential Boxes and deletes all stored documents.

Copies:
Set the number of copies to print.

Print Settings:
You can set the following items.

2-Sided:
Prints multiple pages of received faxes on both sides of the paper.
Binding Margin

Finishing:
❏ Finishing

165
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Stored Documents:

❏ Eject Paper
❏ Staple
❏ Punch

Output Tray:
Select the output tray.

Select Page:
Select the pages you want to print.

Delete When Complete:

When this is selected, the selected document is deleted when printing is complete.

Start Printing:
Prints the selected document.

Related Information
& “Checking the Fax Job History” on page 174

Stored Documents:
You can find Stored Documents in Fax Box on the home screen.
You can store up to 200 pages of a single document in monochrome, and up to 200 documents in the box. This
allows you to save time spent scanning documents when you need to send the same document frequently.
Note:
You may not be able to save 200 documents depending on the usage conditions such as the size of saved documents.

Stored Documents Box

Displays the stored documents list with information such as the date it was saved and the number of
pages.

Preview:
Displays the preview screen for the document.

Select to display the page preview.

page preview screen

❏ : Reduces or enlarges.

❏ : Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.

❏ : Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.

❏ : Moves to the previous or the next page.

To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons.
Tap again to display the icons.

166
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Stored Documents:

Delete:
Deletes the document you are previewing.

Start Sending:
Proceeds to the fax sending screen.

Details:
Displays information for the selected document such as the saved date and time, and total
number of pages.

Send/Save:
You can perform the following operations for the selected document.
❏ Send Fax
❏ Forward(Email)
❏ Forward(Network Folder)
❏ Save to Memory Device

You can select PDF or TIFF in File Format when saving or forwarding the document. When
you select PDF, you can make the following settings in PDF Settings as necessary.
❏ Document Open Password
❏ Permissions Password for Printing and Editing

When the message Delete When Complete is displayed, select On to delete faxes after
completing processes such as Forward(Email) or Save to Memory Device.

Delete:
Deletes the selected document.

Others:
Set the File Name for faxes you want to display in the received faxes list in the box.

(Box Menu)

Store Fax Data:

Displays the screen for the Fax > Fax Settings tab. Tapping x on the screen starts scanning
documents to store to the Stored Documents Box.

Print All:
This is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Prints all faxes in the box.
Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all faxes when printing is complete.

Save All to Memory Device:

This is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Saves all faxes to external
memory devices in the box.
You can select PDF or TIFF in File Format when saving or forwarding the document. When
you select PDF, you can make the following settings in PDF Settings as necessary.
❏ Document Open Password

167
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Polling Send/Board

❏ Permissions Password for Printing and Editing

Selecting On in Delete When Complete deletes all documents when saving is complete.

Delete All:
This is displayed only when there are stored faxes in the box. Deletes all faxes in the box.

Settings:
Box Open Password: You can set a password or change it.

Copies:
Set the number of copies to print.

Delete When Complete:

When this is selected, the selected document is deleted when printing is complete.

Start Printing:
Prints the selected document.

Print Settings:
You can set the following items.

2-Sided:
Prints multiple pages of received faxes on both sides of the paper.
Binding Margin

Finishing:
❏ Finishing
❏ Eject Paper
❏ Staple
❏ Punch

Output Tray:
Select the output tray.

Select Page:
Select the pages you want to print.

Related Information
& “Sending the Same Documents Multiple Times” on page 151
& “Checking the Fax Job History” on page 174

Polling Send/Board
You can find Polling Send/Board in Fax Box on the home screen.

168
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Polling Send/Board

There is a Polling Send Box and 10 bulletin boards. You can store up to 200 pages of a single document in
monochrome, and one document in each box.

Related Information
& “Sending Faxes on Demand (Using Polling Send/Bulletin Board Box)” on page 147

Polling Send:
You can find Polling Send in Fax Box > Polling Send/Board.

Polling Send Box:

Displays the setting items and values in Settings in (Menu).

Settings:

Box Open Password:

Set or change the password used to open the box.

Delete Document After Sending:

Setting this to On deletes the document in the box when the next request from a
recipient to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.

Notify Send Result:

When Email Notifications is set to On, the printer sends a notification to the Recipient
when a request to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.

Delete:
Deletes the document you are previewing.

Add Document:
Displays the screen for the Fax > Fax Settings tab. Tapping x on the screen starts scanning
documents to store them in the box.
When a document is in the box, Check Document is displayed instead.

Check Document:
Displays the preview screen when a document is in the box. You can print or delete the
document while you are previewing.

page preview screen

❏ : Reduces or enlarges.

❏ : Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.

❏ : Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.

❏ : Moves to the previous or the next page.

169
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Polling Send/Board

To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons.
Tap again to display the icons.

Proceed to Print:
Prints the document you are previewing. You can make settings such as Copies before
starting printing.

2-Sided:
Prints multiple pages of received faxes on both sides of the paper.
Binding Margin

Finishing:
❏ Finishing
❏ Eject Paper
❏ Staple
❏ Punch

Output Tray:
Select the output tray.

Select Page:
Select the pages you want to print.

Related Information
& “Checking the Fax Job History” on page 174

Unregistered Bulletin Board:

You can find Unregistered Bulletin Board in Fax Box > Polling Send/Board. Select one of the Unregistered
Bulletin Board boxes. After registering a board, the registered name is displayed on the box instead of
Unregistered Bulletin Board.
You can register up to 10 bulletin boards.

Bulletin Board Box Settings:

Name (Required):
Enter a name for the bulletin board box.

Subaddress(SEP):
Make or change the conditions for a recipient to receive the fax.

Password(PWD):
Make or change the conditions for a recipient to receive the fax.

Box Open Password:

Set or change the password used to open the box.

170
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Polling Send/Board

Delete Document After Sending:

Setting this to On deletes the document in the box when the next request from a recipient to
send the document (Polling Send) is completed.

Notify Send Result:

When Email Notifications is set to On, the printer sends a notification to the Recipient when
a request to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.

Related Information
& “Each Registered Bulletin Board” on page 171

Each Registered Bulletin Board

You can find bulletin boards in Fax Box > Polling Send/Board. Select the box for which the registered name is
displayed. The name displayed on the box is the name registered in Unregistered Bulletin Board.
You can register up to 10 bulletin boards.

(Registered Bulletin Board Name)

Displays the setting values of the items in Settings in (Menu).

Settings:

Bulletin Board Box Settings:

Name (Required):
Enter a name for the bulletin board box.

Subaddress(SEP):
Make or change the conditions for a recipient to receive the fax.

Password(PWD):
Make or change the conditions for a recipient to receive the fax.

Box Open Password:

Set or change the password used to open the box.

Delete Document After Sending:

Setting this to On deletes the document in the box when the next request from a
recipient to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.

Notify Send Result:

When Email Notifications is set to On, the printer sends a notification to the
Recipient when a request to send the document (Polling Send) is completed.

Delete Box:
Deleles the selected box clearing the current settings and deleting all stored documents.

171
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Menu Options for Fax Box > Polling Send/Board

Add Document:
Displays the screen for the Fax > Fax Settings tab. Tapping x on the screen starts scanning
documents to store them in the box.
When a document is in the box, Check Document is displayed instead.

Check Document:
Displays the preview screen when a document is in the box. You can print or delete the
document while you are previewing.

page preview screen

❏ : Reduces or enlarges.

❏ : Rotates the image to the right by 90 degrees.

❏ : Moves the screen in the direction of the arrows.

❏ : Moves to the previous or the next page.

To hide the operation icons, tap anywhere on the preview screen except for the icons.
Tap again to display the icons.

Proceed to Print:
Prints the document you are previewing. You can make settings such as Copies before
starting printing.

2-Sided:
Prints multiple pages of received faxes on both sides of the paper.
Binding Margin

Finishing:
❏ Finishing
❏ Eject Paper
❏ Staple
❏ Punch

Output Tray:
Select the output tray.

Select Page:
Select the pages you want to print.

Delete:
Deletes the document you are previewing.

Related Information
& “Unregistered Bulletin Board:” on page 170
& “Checking the Fax Job History” on page 174

172
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs > Displaying Information …

Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs

Displaying Information when Received Faxes are Unprocessed

(Unread/Not Printed/Not Saved/Not Forwarded)
When there are unprocessed received documents, the number of unprocessed jobs is displayed on the on the
home screen. See the table below for a definition of the "unprocessed".

c Important:
When the inbox is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from the inbox once they have
been checked.

Received Fax Save/Forward Unprocessed Status

Setting

Printing*1 There are received documents waiting to be printed or printing is in progress.

Saving in the inbox or the There are unread received documents in the inbox or the confidential box.
confidential box

Saving in an external memory There are received documents that have not been saved in the device because there is
device no device containing a folder specifically created to save received documents connected
to the printer or for other reasons.

Saving on a computer There are received documents that have not been saved on the computer because the
computer is in sleep mode or for other reasons.

Forwarding There are received documents that have not been forwarded or failed to be forwarded*2.

*1 : When you have not set any of the fax save/forward settings, or when you have set to print received documents while
saving them to an external memory device or a computer.
*2 : When you have set to save documents that could not be forwarded in the inbox, there are unread documents that failed to
be forwarded in the inbox. When you have set to print documents that failed to be forwarded, printing is not complete.

Note:
If you are using more than one of the fax save/forward settings, the number of unprocessed jobs may be displayed as "2" or
"3" even if only one fax has been received. For example, if you have set to save faxes in the inbox and on a computer and one
fax is received, the number of unprocessed jobs is displayed as "2" if the fax has not been saved to the inbox and on a
computer.

173
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Checking the Status or Logs for Fax Jobs > Checking the Fax Job Hi…

Related Information
& “Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 157
& “Checking Fax Jobs in Progress” on page 174

Checking Fax Jobs in Progress

You can display the screen to check fax jobs for which processing is incomplete. The following jobs are displayed
on the check screen. From this screen, you can also print documents that have not yet been printed, or you can
resend documents that have failed to send.
❏ Received fax jobs below
❏ Not printed yet (When the jobs are set to be printed)
❏ Not saved yet (When the jobs are set to be saved)
❏ Not forwarded yet (When the jobs are set to be forwarded)

❏ Outgoing fax jobs that have failed to be sent (If you have enabled Save Failure Data)

Follow the steps below to display the check screen.

1. Tap Job/Status on the home screen.

2. Tap the Job Status tab, and then tap Active.

3. Select the job you want to check.

Related Information
& “Displaying Information when Received Faxes are Unprocessed (Unread/Not Printed/Not Saved/Not
Forwarded)” on page 173

Checking the Fax Job History

You can check the history of sent or received fax jobs, such as the date, time and result for each job.

1. Tap Job/Status on the home screen.

2. Select Log on the Job Status tab.

3. Tap on the right, and then select Send or Receive.

The log for sent or received fax jobs is displayed in reverse chronological order. Tap a job you want to check to
display the details.

You can also check the fax history by printing Fax Log by selecting Fax > (Menu) > Fax Log.

Related Information
& “Menu” on page 161

174
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending a Fax from a Computer > Sending Documents Created Usi…

Reprinting Received Documents

You can reprint received documents from the logs of printed fax jobs.
Note that the printed received documents are deleted in chronological order when the printer runs out of memory.

1. Tap Job/Status on the home screen.

2. Select Log on the Job Status tab.

3. Tap on the right, and then select Print.

The history of sent or received fax jobs is displayed in reverse chronological order.

4. Select a job with from the history list.

Check the date, time, and result to determine if it is the document you want print.

5. Tap Print Again to print the document.

Sending a Fax from a Computer

You can send faxes from the computer by using the FAX Utility and PC-FAX driver.
Note:
❏ Check if the FAX Utility and the printer's PC-FAX driver has been installed before using this feature.
“Application for Configuring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)” on page 404
“Application for Sending Faxes (PC-FAX Driver)” on page 405
❏ If the FAX Utility is not installed, use one of the following methods and install the FAX Utility.

❏ Using the EPSON Software Updater (application for updating software)

“Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on page 408
❏ Using the disc supplied with your printer. (Windows users Only )

Related Information
& “Enabling Sending Faxes from a Computer” on page 531

Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Windows)

By selecting a printer fax from the Print menu of an application like Microsoft Word or Excel, you can directly
transmit data such as documents, drawings, and tables you have created, with a cover sheet.
Note:
The following explanation uses Microsoft Word as an example. The actual operation may differ depending on the application
you use. For details, see the application’s help.

1. Using an application, create a document to transmit by fax.

You can send up to 200 pages in monochrome or 100 pages in color including cover sheet in one fax
transmission.

175
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending a Fax from a Computer > Sending Documents Created Usi…

2. Click Print from the File menu.

The application’s Print window appears.

3. Select XXXXX (FAX) (where XXXXX is your printer name) in Printer, and then check the settings for fax
sending.
Specify 1 in Number of copies. Fax may not be transmitted correctly if you specify 2 or more.

4. Click Printer Properties or Properties if you want to specify Paper Size, Orientation, Color, Image Quality,
or Character Density.
For details, see the PC-FAX driver help.

5. Click Print.
Note:
When Using FAX Utility for the first time, a window for registering your information is displayed. Enter the necessary
information, and then click OK.

Recipient Settings screen of FAX Utility is displayed.

6. When you want to send other documents in the same fax transmission, select Add documents to send
checkbox.
The screen for adding documents is displayed when you click Next in step 10.

7. Select Attach a cover sheet checkbox if necessary.

8. Specify a recipient.
❏ Selecting a recipient (name, fax number and so on) from PC-FAX Phone Book:
If the recipient is saved in the phone book, do the steps below.
A Click the PC-FAX Phone Book tab.
B Select the recipient from the list and click Add.
❏ Selecting a recipient (name, fax number and so on) from the contacts on the printer:
If the recipient is saved in the contacts on the printer, do the steps below.
A Click the Contacts on Printer tab.
B Select contacts from the list and click Add to proceed to Add to Recipient window.
C Select the contacts from the list displayed, and then click Edit.
D Add the personal data such as Company/Corp. and Title as necessary, and then click OK to return to
the Add to Recipient window.
E As necessary, select the checkbox of Register in the PC-FAX Phone Book to save the contacts to PC-
FAX Phone Book.
F Click OK.

176
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending a Fax from a Computer > Sending Documents Created Usi…

❏ Specifying a recipient (name, fax number and so on) directly:

Do the steps below.
A Click the Manual Dial tab.
B Enter the necessary information.
C Click Add.
Furthermore, by clicking Save to Phone Book, you can save the recipient in the list under the PC-FAX
Phone Book tab.

Note:
❏ If your printer's Line Type is set to PBX and the access code has been set to use # (hash) instead of entering the exact
prefix code, enter # (hash). For details, see Line Type in Basic Settings from related information link below.
❏ If you have selected Enter fax number twice in the Optional Settings on the FAX Utility main screen, you need to
enter the same number again when you click Add or Next.

The recipient is added to the Recipient List displayed in the upper part of the window.

9. Click Sending options tab, and make the transmission option settings
See the following for information on adding optional faxes to the printer.
“Sending Documents Created in an Application Using an Optional Fax Board (Windows)” on page 377
❏ Transmission mode:
Select how the printer transmits the document.
- Memory Trans.: Sends a fax by storing the data temporarily in the printer's memory. If you want to send a
fax to multiple recipients or from multiple computers at the same time, select this item.
- Direct Trans.: Sends a fax without storing the data temporarily in the printer's memory. If you want to
send a large volume of monochrome pages, select this item to avoid an error due to insufficient printer's
memory.
❏ Time specification:
Select Specify the transmission time to send a fax at a specific time, and then enter the time in
Transmission time.

10. Click Next.

❏ When you have selected Add documents to send checkbox, follow the steps below to add documents in the
Document Merging window.
A Open a document you want to add, and then select the same printer (fax name) in the Print window.
The document is added to the Document List to Merge list.
BClick Preview to check the merged document.
C Click Next.
Note:
The Image Quality and Color settings you have selected for the first document are applied to other documents.

177
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Sending a Fax from a Computer > Sending Documents Created Usi…

❏ When you have selected Attach a cover sheet checkbox, specify the content of the cover sheet in the Cover
Sheet Settings window.
A Select a cover sheet from samples in the Cover Sheet list. Note that there is no function to create an
original cover sheet or to add an original cover sheet to the list.
B Enter the Subject and Message.
C Click Next.

Note:
Perform the following as necessary in Cover Sheet Settings.
❏ Click Cover Sheet Formatting if you want to change the order of the items on the cover sheet. You can select the
cover sheet size in Paper Size. You can also select a cover sheet at a different size to the document being transmitted.
❏ Click Font if you want to change the font used for the text on the cover sheet.
❏ Click Sender Settings if you want to change the sender information.
❏ Click Detailed Preview if you want to check the cover sheet with the subject and the message you entered.

11. Check the transmission content and click Send.

Make sure the name and fax number of the recipient are correct before transmitting. Click Preview to preview
the cover sheet and document to transmit.
Once transmission starts, a window displaying the transmission status appears.
Note:
❏ To stop transmitting, select the data, and click Cancel . You can also cancel using the printer's control panel.
❏ If an error occurs during transmission, the Communication error window appears. Check the error information
and retransmit.
❏ The Fax Status Monitor screen (the screen mentioned above where you can check the transmission status) is not
displayed if Display Fax Status Monitor During Transmission is not selected in the Optional Settings screen of the
FAX Utility main screen.

Related Information
& “Basic Settings” on page 419

Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Mac OS)

By selecting a fax-capable printer from the Print menu of a commercially available application, you can send data
such as documents, drawings, and tables, you have created.
Note:
The following explanation uses Text Edit, a standard Mac OS application as an example.

1. Create the document you want to send by fax in an application.

You can send up to 200 pages in monochrome, or 100 pages in color including cover sheet, and up to a size of
2GB, in one fax transmission.

2. Click Print from the File menu.

The application’s Print window is displayed.

3. Select your printer (fax name) in Name, click d to display the detailed settings, check the print settings, and
then click OK.

178
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on a Computer

4. Make settings for each item.

Specify 1 in Number of copies. Even if you specify 2 or more, only 1 copy is sent.
Note:
The page size of documents you can send is the same as the paper size you can fax from the printer.

5. Select Fax Settings from the popup menu, and then make settings for each item.
See the PC-FAX driver's help for explanations on each setting item.

Click at the bottom left of the window to open the PC-FAX driver's help.

6. Select the Recipient Settings menu, and then specify the recipient.
❏ Specifying a recipient (name, fax number, and so on) directly:

Click the Add item, enter the necessary information, and then click . The recipient is added to the
Recipient List displayed in the upper part of the window.
If you have selected "Enter fax number twice" in the PC-FAX driver settings, you need to enter the same
number again when you click .
If your fax connection line requires a prefix code, enter External Access Prefix.
Note:
If your printer's Line Type is set to PBX and the access code has been set to use # (hash) instead of entering the exact
prefix code, enter # (hash). For details, see Line Type in Basic Settings from Related Information link below.

❏ Selecting a recipient (name, fax number, and so on) from the phone book:

If the recipient is saved in the phone book, click . Select the recipient from the list, and then click Add
> OK.
If your fax connection line requires a prefix code, enter External Access Prefix.

Note:
If your printer's Line Type is set to PBX and the access code has been set to use # (hash) instead of entering the exact
prefix code, enter # (hash). For details, see Line Type in Basic Settings from Related Information link below.

7. Check the recipient settings, and then click Fax.

Sending starts.
Make sure the name and fax number of the recipient are correct before transmitting.
Note:
❏ If you click the printer icon in Dock, the transmission status check screen is displayed. To stop sending, click the data,
and then click Delete.
❏ If an error occurs during transmission, the Sending failed message is displayed. Check the transmission records on
the Fax Transmission Record screen.
❏ Mixed paper size documents may not be sent correctly.

Receiving Faxes on a Computer

You can receive faxes and save them as PDF or TIFF files to the computer connected to the printer. The FAX Utility
comes with features including how to specify a folder in which to save the faxes.

179
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on a Computer > Canceling the Feature that Saves…

Note:
❏ Check if the FAX Utility and the printer's PC-FAX driver has been installed before using this feature.
“Application for Configuring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)” on page 404
“Application for Sending Faxes (PC-FAX Driver)” on page 405
❏ If the FAX Utility is not installed, use one of the following methods and install the FAX Utility.

❏ Using the EPSON Software Updater (application for updating software)

“Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on page 408
❏ Using the disc supplied with your printer. (Windows users Only )

c Important:
❏ To receive faxes on a computer, the Receive Mode on the printer's control panel must be set to Auto. Contact
your administrator for information on the printer settings status.
❏ The computer set to receive faxes should always be on. Received documents are saved in the printer's memory
temporarily before the documents are saved on the computer. If you turn off the computer, the printer's memory
might become full as it cannot send the documents to the computer.

❏ The number of documents that have been temporarily saved to the printer’s memory are displayed on the on
the home screen.
❏ To read received faxes saved as PDF files, you need to install a PDF viewer such as Adobe Reader on the
computer.

Related Information
& “Receiving Incoming Faxes” on page 152

Saving Incoming Faxes on a Computer

You can make settings to save incoming faxes on a computer by using the FAX Utility. Install the FAX Utility on
the computer in advance.
For details, see Basic Operations in the FAX Utility help (displayed on the main window). If the password entry
screen is displayed on the computer screen while you are making settings, enter the password. If you do not know
the password, contact your administrator.
Note:
You can receive faxes on a computer and print from the printer at the same time. Contact your administrator for details on
the printer settings status.

Related Information
& “Receiving Faxes on a Computer” on page 179
& “Making Save to Computer Setting to Also Print on the Printer to Receive Faxes” on page 531

Canceling the Feature that Saves Incoming Faxes to the Computer

You can cancel saving faxes to the computer by using the FAX Utility.
For details, see Basic Operations in the FAX Utility help (displayed on the main window).

180
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on a Computer > Checking for New Faxes (Windows)

Note:
❏ If there are any faxes that have not been saved to the computer, you cannot cancel the feature that saves faxes on the
computer.
❏ You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
❏ You can also change the settings on the printer. Contact your administrator for information on canceling settings to save
received faxes on the computer.

Related Information
& “Making Save to Computer Setting not to Receive Faxes” on page 532
& “Application for Configuring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)” on page 404

Checking for New Faxes (Windows)

By setting up a computer to save faxes received by the printer, you can check the processing status of received faxes,
and whether or not there are any new faxes using the fax icon on the Windows task bar. By setting up the computer
to display a notification when new faxes are received, a notification screen pops up near the Windows system tray,
and you can check the new faxes.
Note:
❏ Received fax data saved to the computer is removed from the printer's memory.
❏ You need Adobe Reader to view the received faxes saved as PDF files.

Using the Fax Icon on the Task Bar (Windows)

You can check for new faxes and the operation status by using the fax icon displayed on the Windows taskbar.

1. Check the icon.

❏ : Standing by.

❏ : Checking for new faxes.

❏ : Importing new faxes is complete.

2. Right-click the icon, and then click View Receiving Fax Record.
The Receiving Fax Record screen is displayed.

3. Check the date and the sender in the list, and then open the file received as a PDF or TIFF.
Note:
❏ Received faxes are automatically renamed using the following naming format.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_xxxxxxxxxx_nnnnn (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second_sender’s number)
❏ You can also open the received fax folder directly when you right-click the icon. For details, see Optional Settings in
the FAX Utility or see its help (displayed on the main window).

While the fax icon indicates that it is standing by, you can check for new faxes instantly by selecting Check new
faxes now.

181
Faxing (Fax-Capable Printers Only) > Receiving Faxes on a Computer > Checking for New Faxes (Mac OS)

Using the Notification Window (Windows)

When you set to notify you the new faxes exist, a notification window is displayed near the task bar for each the
fax.

1. Check the notification screen displayed on your computer screen.

Note:
The notification screen disappears if no operation is performed for a given length of time. You can change the
notification settings such as the display time.

2. Click anywhere in the notification screen, except for the button.

The Receiving Fax Record screen is displayed.

3. Check the date and the sender in the list, and then open the file received as a PDF or TIFF.
Note:
❏ Received faxes are automatically renamed using the following naming format.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_xxxxxxxxxx_nnnnn (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second_sender’s number)
❏ You can also open the received fax folder directly when you right-click the icon. For details, see Optional Settings in
the FAX Utility or see its help (displayed on the main window).

Checking for New Faxes (Mac OS)

You can check for new faxes using one of the following methods. This is available only on computers set to "Save"
(save faxes on this computer).
❏ Open the received fax folder (specified in Received Fax Output Settings.)
❏ Open the Fax Receive Monitor and click Check new faxes now.
❏ Notification that new faxes have been received
Select the Notify me of new faxes via a dock icon in the Fax Receive Monitor > Preferences in the FAX Utility,
the fax receive monitor icon on the Dock jumps to notify you that new faxes have arrived.

Open the Received Fax Folder from Received Fax Monitor (Mac OS)
You can open the save folder from the computer specified to receive faxes when selecting "Save" (save faxes on
this computer).

1. Click the received fax monitor icon on the Dock to open Fax Receive Monitor.

2. Select the printer and click Open folder, or double click the printer name.

3. Check the date and the sender in the file name, and then open the PDF file.
Note:
Received faxes are automatically renamed using the following naming format.
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS_xxxxxxxxxx_nnnnn (Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/Second_sender's number)
Information sent from the sender is displayed as the sender's number. This number may not be displayed depending on
the sender.

182
Using Storage

Overview of the Storage Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Creating Folders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Saving Files to Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Using the Files in Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Managing Folders and Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Using Storage > Overview of the Storage Feature > About Storage

Overview of the Storage Feature

About Storage
You can store files to the built-in hard disk unit on the printer to view, print, or output them at any time.
The space where you store files is called a "folder".
Storing frequently used files allows you to quickly and easily print files or attach them to e-mail without using a
computer.

c Important:
Data in the folder may be lost or corrupted in the following situations.
❏ When affecteded by static electricity or electronic noise.
❏ When used incorrectly
❏ When a problem occurs or the printer undergoes repairs
❏ When the printer is damaged by a natural disaster

Epson takes no responsibility for any data loss, data corruption, or other problems due to any cause, even including
those listed above and within the warranty period. Be aware that we are also not responsible for the recovery of lost
or corrupted data.

Related Information
& “Storage Settings” on page 431
& “Storage Specifications” on page 466

184
Using Storage > Overview of the Storage Feature > Guide to the Folder Screen

Types of Folders
Type Overview

Shared folder Shared Folder All users can store and use files in the folders. Users cannot change the
name of the folder, set a password for the folder, or delete the folder.

Shared folder Users can create folders and assign files to each folder. You can set a
password for the folder. This allows you to limit users who have access to
the folder. If a password is set for a file, access to the file is also limited.

Personal folder When user authentication is implemented, only users logged in to the
folder can store and use the files. If another user logs in, the folder is not
displayed. A user can have one folder only.

Guide to the Folder Screen

Configuration of the Folder List Screen

Select Storage on the home screen to view the Folder List screen.

A Search for the folder by entering the name or the number of the folder.

B Sort the folder by items. You can switch the order between ascending or descending.

C Displays thumbnails of the folders.

D Create a new shared optional folder.

E Switches the folder display between thumbnails and lists.

F Select operations such as storing in the folder and changing settings.

185
Using Storage > Creating Folders

Configuration of the File List Screen

Select a folder on the Folder List screen, and then select Open to view a list of the files in the folder.

A Search for the document by entering the name of the document or the user.

B Sort the files by items. You can switch the order between ascending or descending.

C
Displays thumbnails of the files. A key icon is displayed if a password is set for the file. Indicates from
which function the file was saved.

D Switches the document display between thumbnails and lists.

E Set the number of prints.

F Displays the Printer Settings menu.

G Select to delete the file after printing.

H Select the operation you want to perform such as previewing, outputting, and deleting the file, or you can change
the name of files, users, and passwords from here.

I Start printing the file.

Creating Folders
An administrator or a user can create a shared folder. However, user can only create shared folders when the
Settings > General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control > Access setting is set to Allowed
and the Operation Authority setting is set to User.
User cannot create Personal folder.

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select .

186
Using Storage > Saving Files to Storage > Saving Data on a Memory Device to Storage

3. Set each item on the Storage Settings screen.

❏ Folder Number: Unused numbers are assigned automatically.
❏ Folder Name (Required) : Enter any name within 30 letters. You can enter a name that already exists.
❏ Folder Password: Set to password-protect the folder. When you set a password, you are prompted for the
password when saving files to the folder, viewing files in the folder, or operating the folder.
❏ Automatic File Delete Settings: Select whether or not to delete the saved file automatically. Select On to set
Period Until Deletion. Files are automatically deleted when the set period has elapsed after the last time
the file was used. If files have not been used, they are deleted when the set period has elapsed after they
were saved. Users can set this when the Settings > General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder
Access Control > Access setting is set to Allowed and the Automatic Delete Setting Authority setting is
set to User. Administrators can set this regardless of the Automatic Delete Setting Authority setting.

Saving Files to Storage

Saving to Storage Original Data to be Copied

You can save data to Storage at the same time as copying. You can also just save data to Storage.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the printer’s control panel.

3. Select the Advanced tab, and then select File Storing.

4. Enable the File Storing setting.

5. Specify the settings.

“File Storing:” on page 116

6. Tap x.

Saving Data on a Memory Device to Storage

You can save data to Storage at the same time as printing. You can also just save data to Storage.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select the file type and the file you want to save.

4. Select the Advanced tab, and then select File Storing.

187
Using Storage > Saving Files to Storage > Saving Documents from a Computer to Storage (Mac OS)

5. Select On as the File Storing setting.

6. Specify the folder, and then change the other settings as necessary.
“Advanced Menu Options for JPEG Settings” on page 97
“Advanced Menu Options for TIFF Settings” on page 98
“Advanced Menu Options for PDF Settings” on page 93
Note:
Select whether or not to perform printing at the same time as saving the data to Storage in the Setting option.

7. Tap x.

Saving Documents from a Computer to Storage (Windows)

You can select a document and save to storage when printing a document from the printer driver. You can also
save the document to storage without printing.

1. On the printer driver, open the Finishing tab or More Options tab.

2. Select Save to Storage and Print from Job Type.

Note:
To save the document to storage without printing, select Save to Storage from Job Type.

3. Click Settings, make settings such as the save destination, and then click OK.
Note:
If you do not know the Number and Password, contact your administrator.

4. Set the other items on the Main, Finishing or More Options tabs as necessary, and then click OK.
“Main Tab” on page 49
“Finishing Tab” on page 51
“More Options Tab” on page 53

5. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48

Saving Documents from a Computer to Storage (Mac OS)

You can select a document and save to storage when printing a document from the printer driver. You can also
save the document to storage without printing.

1. Click Storage Settings on the Epson Printer Utility screen.

2. Make settings such as the save destination, and then click OK.

3. On the printer driver's pop-up menu, select Print Settings.

188
Using Storage > Using the Files in Storage > Saving Data in Storage to a Memory Device

4. Select Save to Storage and Print in Paper Source.

Note:
Select Save to Storage to save the print data in a user storage without printing the document.

5. Set the other items as necessary.

6. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Print Settings” on page 82

Using the Files in Storage

Printing Data from Storage

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select the folder containing the file you want to print, and then select Open.

3. Select the file.

4. Set the number of copies.

5. Set the print settings if necessary.

“Menu Options for Print Settings” on page 191

6. Tap x.

Saving Data in Storage to a Memory Device

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select the folder containing the file you want to save to a memory device, and then select Open.

3. Select the file.

4. Select Send/Save.

5. Select Storage to Memory Device.

6. Make save settings if necessary.

“Menu Options for Send/Save” on page 194

189
Using Storage > Using the Files in Storage > Saving Files in Storage to a Network Folder or Cloud Services

7. Tap x.

Sending Files in Storage by Email

Configure the email server before sending.
“Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select the folder containing the file you want to send, and then select Open.

3. Select the file.

4. Select Send/Save.

5. Select Storage to Email.

6. Specify the recipient.

7. Set the save settings if necessary.

“Menu Options for Send/Save” on page 194

8. Tap x.

Saving Files in Storage to a Network Folder or Cloud Services

You need to setup a network folder or Epson Connect before you can save.
See the following when creating a shared folder on a network.
“Creating the Shared Folder” on page 487
See the following Epson Connect portal website for details.
https://www.epsonconnect.com/
http://www.epsonconnect.eu (Europe only)

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select the folder containing the file you want to save to a network folder or cloud service, and then select
Open.

3. Select the file.

4. Select Send/Save.

5. Select Storage to Network Folder/FTP or Storage to Cloud.

190
Using Storage > Using the Files in Storage > Menu Options for Printing or Saving

6. Specify the destination.

Note:
When you save to a network folder, enter the folder path in the following format.
❏ When using SMB: \\host name\folder name
❏ When using FTP: ftp://host name/folder name
❏ When using FTPS: ftps://host name/folder name
❏ When using WebDAV (HTTPS): https://host name/folder name
❏ When using WebDAV (HTTP): http://host name/folder name

7. Set the save settings if necessary.

“Menu Options for Send/Save” on page 194

8. Tap x.

Menu Options for Printing or Saving

Menu Options for Print Settings

Note:
The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

Basic Settings

Color Mode:
Select a color setting whether you normally print in B&W or Color. Saved Settings applies settings you
have made for saving to storage.

Paper Setting:
Specify the paper source settings which you want to print on.

Reduce/Enlarge:
Configures the magnification ratio of the enlargement or reduction. Tap the value and specify the
magnification within a range of 25 to 400%.
❏ Saved Settings
Applies settings you have made for saving to storage.
❏ Auto
Automatically enlarges or reduces the data to fit to the paper size you selected.
❏ Reduce to Fit Paper
Prints the data at a smaller size than the Reduce/Enlarge value to fit within the paper size. If the
Reduce/Enlarge value is larger than the paper size, data may be printed beyond the edges of the
paper.
❏ Actual Size
Prints at 100 % magnification.

191
Using Storage > Using the Files in Storage > Menu Options for Printing or Saving

❏ A3→A4 and others

Automatically enlarges or reduces the data to fit to a specific paper size.

2-Sided:
Select 2-sided layout.
❏ 2-Sided
Select whether or not to print using 2-sided.
❏ Binding
Select the binding position for 2-sided printing.

Multi-Page:
Select the print layout.
❏ Single Page
Prints single-sided data onto a single sheet.
❏ 2-up
Prints two single-sided data onto a single sheet in 2-up layout. Select the layout order.
❏ 4-up
Prints four single-sided data onto a single sheet in 4-up layout. Select the layout order.

Finishing:
❏ Finishing
Select Collate (Page Order) to print multi-page documents collated in order and sorted into sets.
Select Group (Same Pages) to print multi-page documents by acquiring the same numbered pages
as the group.
❏ Eject Paper
If you select Rotate Sort, you can print alternately in the portrait direction and the landscape
direction.

Booklet:
Specify these settings when you want to create a booklet from your printouts.
❏ Booklet
Allows you to create a booklet from your printouts.
❏ Binding
Select the binding position of the booklet.
❏ Binding Margin
Specify the binding margin. You can set 0 to 50 mm as the binding margin in 1mm increments.
❏ Cover
Allows you to add covers to the booklet.
❏ Paper Setting
Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers.
❏ Front Cover
Specify the print settings for the front cover. If you do not want to print on the front cover, select Do
not Print.

192
Using Storage > Using the Files in Storage > Menu Options for Printing or Saving

❏ Back Cover
Specify the print settings for the back cover. If you do not want to print on the back cover, select Do
not Print.

Advanced

Cover & Slip Sheet

❏ Cover
Specify these when you want to add covers to your printouts.
❏ Front Cover
Allows you to add front covers to the printouts. If you have loaded paper for the cover, select the
paper source in Paper Setting. If you do not want to print on the front cover, select Do not Print
in Print Mode.
❏ Back Cover
Allows you to add back covers to the printouts. If you have loaded paper for the cover, select the
paper source in Paper Setting. If you do not want to print on the back cover, select Do not Print
in Print Mode.

❏ Slip Sheet
Specify these settings when you want to insert the slip sheets into the printouts.

❏ End of Job
Allows you to insert slip sheets for each print job. If you have loaded paper for the slip sheets,
select the paper source in Paper Setting.
❏ End of Set
Allows you to insert a slip sheet for each set. If you have loaded paper for the slip sheets, select the
paper source in Paper Setting. You can also specify the insertion interval for the slip sheets in
Sheets per Set.
❏ End of Page or Chapter
Allows you to make the settings to insert slip sheets of chapters at the pages you want to insert
them. The setting values are saved and displayed in a list. You can check the details of the settings
by selecting the setting from the list. You can also edit or delete the setting.

Binding Margin:
Select the binding margin and binding position for 2-sided printing.

Reduce to Fit Paper:

Prints the data at a smaller size than the Reduce/Enlarge value to fit within the paper size. If the
Reduce/Enlarge value is larger than the paper size, data may be printed beyond the edges of the paper.

Output Tray:
Select which output tray to use for printouts.

Page Numbering:
❏ Page Numbering
Select On to print page numbers on your printouts.

193
Using Storage > Using the Files in Storage > Menu Options for Printing or Saving

❏ Format
Select the format for page numbering.
❏ Stamp Position
Select the position for page numbering.
❏ Change Numbering
Select which page you want to print the page number. Select Starting Page Number to specify the
page on which page number printing should begin. You can also specify the starting page number in
First Print Number.
❏ Size
Select the size of the number.
❏ Background
Select whether or not to make the page number's background white. If you select White, you can see
the page number clearly when the background for the data is not white.

Print Position Shift:

Specify the print position on the paper. Set the margins for the top and left of the paper.

Menu Options for Send/Save

Note:
❏ Depending on the items, the settings which are selected when the file was saved to the storage will be applied
automatically.
❏ The items may not be available depending on other settings you made.

B&W/Color:
Select the color for the file when sending or saving.

File Format:
Select the file format.
When you select PDF, PDF/A, or TIFF as the file format, select whether to save all originals as one file
(multi-page) or save each original separately (single page).
❏ Compression Ratio:
Select how much to compress the image.
❏ PDF Settings:
When you have selected PDF as the save format setting, use these settings to protect PDF files.
To create a PDF file that requires a password when opening, set Document Open Password. To
create a PDF file that requires a password when printing or editing, set Permissions Password.

Resolution:
Select the resolution.

Subject:
Enter a subject for the email in alphanumeric characters and symbols.

194
Using Storage > Managing Folders and Files > Deleting Files Stored in the Folder

Attached File Max Size:

Select the maximum file size that can be attached to the email.

File Name:
❏ Filename Prefix:
Enter a prefix for the name of the images in alphanumeric characters and symbols.
❏ Add Date:
Add the date to the file name.
❏ Add Time:
Add the time to the file name.

Mail Encryption:
Encrypt emails when sending.

Digital Signature:
Add a digital signature to emails.

Managing Folders and Files

Searching for Folders and Files

You can use the following keywords to search for folders and files.
❏ When searching for a folder, enter the folder number or name.
❏ When searching for a file, enter the file name or the user name.

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Enter keywords in the search window on the Folder List screen.

“Configuration of the Folder List Screen” on page 185
When searching for files, enter keywords in the search window on the File List screen.

Deleting Files Stored in the Folder

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select the folder where the file you want to delete is stored in, and then select Open.

3. Select the file, and then select Delete.

You can delete multiple files at the same time.

195
Using Storage > Managing Folders and Files > Restricting Shared Folder Operations

Changing the Storage Period or Set to Never Delete

By default, files saved in the folder are maintained and are not deleted automatically.
Administrators and users can change the storage period or set to never delete. However, user can only change the
storage period or set to never delete when the Settings > General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder
Access Control > Access setting is set to Allowed and the Automatic Delete Setting Authority setting is set to
User.

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > Storage Settings >Shared Folder File Management.

3. Change the period until files are deleted.

Deleting Folders
Administrators and users can delete shared folders. However, user can only delete shared folders when the Settings
> General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control > Access setting is set to Allowed and the
Operation Authority setting is set to User.

1. Select Storage on the printer's control panel.

2. Select the folder you want to delete, and then select Delete.
❏ Users need to enter a password to delete password-protected folders. However, administrators can delete
folders without entering the password.
❏ Users cannot delete folders that contain password-protected folders. However, administrators can delete
folders in this situation.
❏ The files in the folder are also deleted when you delete the folder.

Restricting Shared Folder Operations

Set whether to allow only the administrator or other users to operate shared folders.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > Storage Settings > Shared Folder Access Control > Operation Authority.

3. Select User or Administrator Only.

196
Maintaining the Printer

Checking the Consumables Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198

Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

Saving Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Replacing Maintenance Rollers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Maintaining the Printer > Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality > Checking the Clogged Nozzles

Checking the Consumables Status

You can check the approximate ink levels and the approximate service life of the maintenance box from the control
panel or the computer.

Checking the Ink Levels

Checking from the Control Panel

Tap on the home screen and select Consumables/Others to display the approximate remaining ink levels.
Two black ink cartridges are installed in this printer. Since ink cartridges switch automatically, you can continue
printing even if either one of them is low.
When using the printer driver, you can also check from your computer.
Note:
You can continue printing while the ink low message is displayed. Replace the ink cartridges when required.

Related Information
& “Replacing Ink Cartridge” on page 281

Checking the Available Space in the Maintenance Box

Checking from the Control Panel

Tap on the home screen and select Consumables/Others to display the approximate available space in the
maintenance box.
When using the printer driver, you can also check from your computer.

Related Information
& “It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box” on page 281

Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality

Checking the Clogged Nozzles

If the nozzles are clogged, the printouts become faint, there is visible banding, or unexpected colors appear. When
there is a problem in printing quality or when printing large quantities, we recommend using the nozzle check
feature. If the nozzles are clogged, clean the print head.

198
Maintaining the Printer > Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality > Preventing nozzle clogging

c Important:
Do not open the ink cartridge cover or turn off the printer during head cleaning. If the head cleaning is incomplete,
you may not be able to print.

Note:
❏ Because print head cleaning uses some ink, it may not be performed when ink is low.

❏ Drying causes clogging. To prevent the print head from drying out, always turn the printer off by pressing the P button.
Do not unplug the printer while the power is on.

1. Tap Settings on the home screen.

2. Tap Maintenance.

3. Tap Print Head Nozzle Check.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to select the paper source in which you loaded A4 size plain paper.

5. Follow the on-screen instructions to print the nozzle check pattern.

6. Check the printed pattern to see if the print head nozzles are clogged.
If the nozzles are not clogged, tap OK to finish.
OK

NG

7. If the nozzles are clogged, tap NG to clean the print head.

8. After cleaning is finished, print the nozzle check pattern again to make sure that there is no clogging. If nozzles
are still clogged, repeat head cleaning and run a nozzle check.

Preventing nozzle clogging

Always use the power button when turning the printer on and off.

199
Maintaining the Printer > Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality > Cleaning the Scanner Glass

Check that the power light is off before you disconnect the power cord.
The ink itself can dry out if it is not covered. Just like placing a cap on a fountain pen or an oil pen to prevent it
from drying, make sure the print head is capped properly to prevent the ink from drying.
When the power cord is unplugged or a power outage occurs while the printer is in operation, the print head may
not be capped properly. If the print head is left as it is, it will dry out causing nozzles (ink outlets) to clog.
In these cases, turn the printer on and off again as soon as possible to cap the print head.

Cleaning the Scanner Glass

When the copies or scanned images are smeared, clean the scanner glass.

! Caution:
Be careful not to trap your hand or fingers when opening or closing the document cover. Otherwise you may be
injured.

c Important:
Never use alcohol or thinner to clean the printer. These chemicals can damage the printer.

1. Open the document cover.

2. Take the cleaning cloth from the cleaning cloth holder.

200
Maintaining the Printer > Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality > Cleaning the ADF

3. Use the cleaning cloth to clean the surface of the scanner glass.

c Important:
❏ If the glass surface is stained with grease or some other hard-to-remove material, use a small amount of
glass cleaner and a soft cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid.
❏ Do not press the glass surface too hard.
❏ Be careful not to scratch or damage the surface of the glass. A damaged glass surface can decrease the scan
quality.

4. Return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth holder.

5. Close the document cover.

Cleaning the ADF

When the copied or scanned images from the ADF are smeared or the originals do not feed in the ADF correctly,
clean the ADF.

c Important:
Never use alcohol or thinner to clean the printer. These chemicals can damage the printer.

201
Maintaining the Printer > Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality > Cleaning the ADF

1. Open the ADF cover.

2. Use a soft, moist cloth to clean the roller and the interior of the ADF.

c Important:
❏ Using a dry cloth may damage the surface of the roller.
❏ Use the ADF after the roller has dried.

3. Close the ADF cover.

Press the lever until it clicks.

202
Maintaining the Printer > Improving Print, Copy, Scan, and Fax Quality > Cleaning the ADF

4. Open the document cover.

5. Take the cleaning cloth from the cleaning cloth holder.

6. Use the cleaning cloth to clean the part that is shown in the illustration.

203
Maintaining the Printer > Saving Power > Saving Power (Control Panel)

c Important:
❏ If the glass surface is stained with grease or some other hard-to-remove material, use a small amount of
glass cleaner and a soft cloth to remove it. Wipe off all remaining liquid.
❏ Do not press the glass surface too hard.
❏ Be careful not to scratch or damage the surface of the glass. A damaged glass surface can decrease the scan
quality.

7. Return the cleaning cloth to the cleaning cloth holder.

8. Close the document cover.

Saving Power
The printer enters sleep mode or turns off automatically if no operations are performed for a set period. You can
adjust the time before power management is applied. Any increase will affect the product's energy efficiency. Please
consider the environment before making any change.
Depending on the location of purchase, the printer may have a feature that turns it off automatically if it is not
connected to the network for 30 minutes.

Saving Power (Control Panel)

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Basic Settings.

3. Do one of the following.

Note:
Your product may have the Power Off Settings or Power Off Timer feature depending on the location of purchase.

❏ Select Sleep Timer or Power Off Settings > Power Off If Inactive or Power Off If Disconnected, and then
make settings.
❏ Select Sleep Timer or Power Off Timer, and then make settings.

204
Maintaining the Printer > Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately > Installing the Applications Separ…

Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately

Connect your computer to the network and install the latest version of applications from the website. Log in to
your computer as an administrator. Enter the administrator password if the computer prompts you.

Installing the Applications Separately

Note:
When reinstalling an application, you need to uninstall it first.

1. Make sure the printer and the computer are available for communication, and the printer is connected to the
Internet.

2. Start EPSON Software Updater.

The screenshot is an example on Windows.

3. For Windows, select your printer, and then click to check for the latest available applications.

4. Select the items you want to install or update, and then click the install button.

c Important:
Do not turn off or unplug the printer until the update is complete. Doing so may result in malfunction of the
printer.

205
Maintaining the Printer > Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately > Installing the Applications Separ…

Note:
❏ You can download the latest applications from the Epson website.
http://www.epson.com
❏ If you use Windows Server operating systems, you cannot use Epson Software Updater. Download the latest
applications from the Epson website.

Related Information
& “Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on page 408
& “Uninstalling Applications” on page 208

Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows

You can check if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed on your computer by using one of the following
methods.
Select Control Panel > View devices and printers (Printers, Printers and Faxes), and then do the following to
open the print server properties window.
❏ Windows Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016/
Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the printer icon, and then click Print server properties at the top of the window.
❏ Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Right-click on the Printers folder, and then click Run as administrator > Server Properties.
❏ Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
From the File menu, select Server Properties.

Click the Driver tab. If your printer name is displayed in the list, a genuine Epson printer driver is installed on
your computer.

206
Maintaining the Printer > Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately > Installing a PostScript Printer Driver

Related Information
& “Installing the Applications Separately” on page 205

Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Mac OS

You can check if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed on your computer by using one of the following
methods.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer. Click Options & Supplies, and if the Options tab and Utility tab are displayed on the window, a
genuine Epson printer driver is installed on your computer.

Related Information
& “Installing the Applications Separately” on page 205

Installing a PostScript Printer Driver

Installing a PostScript Printer Driver - Windows

1. Start the installation process from one of the following options.
❏ Use the software disc supplied with the printer.
Insert the software disc into the computer, access the following folder path, and then run SETUP64.EXE (or
SETUP.EXE).
Driver\PostScript\WINX64 (or WINX86)\SETUP\SETUP64.EXE ( or SETUP.EXE)
❏ Use the website.
Access your printer page from the following website, download the PostScript printer driver, and then run
the execution file.
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe)
http://support.epson.net/ (outside Europe)

207
Maintaining the Printer > Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately > Uninstalling Applications

2. Select your printer.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

4. Select the connection method from the network connection or USB connection.
❏ For network connection.
A list of available printers in the same network is displayed.
Select the printer you want to use.
❏ For USB connection.
Follow the on-screen instructions to connect the printer to the computer.

5. Follow the on-screen instructions to install the PostScript printer driver.

Installing a PostScript Printer Driver - Mac OS

Download the printer driver from the Epson Support website, and then install it.
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe)
http://support.epson.net/ (outside Europe)
You need the IP address of the printer while installing the printer driver.
Select the network icon on the printer's home screen, and then select the active connection method to confirm the
printer's IP address.

Adding the Printer (for Mac OS Only)

1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax).

2. Click +, and then select Add Other Printer or Scanner.

3. Select your printer, and then select your printer from the Use.

4. Click Add.
Note:
❏ If your printer is not listed, check that it is correctly connected to the computer and that the printer is on.
❏ For a USB, IP, or Bonjour connection, set the optional paper cassette unit manually after adding the printer.

Uninstalling Applications
Log in to your computer as an administrator. Enter the administrator password if the computer prompts you.

Uninstalling Applications - Windows

1. Press the P button to turn off the printer.

208
Maintaining the Printer > Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately > Uninstalling Applications

2. Quit all running applications.

3. Open Control Panel:

❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button and select Control Panel.

4. Open Uninstall a program (or Add or Remove Programs):

❏ Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server
2016/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008
Select Uninstall a program in Programs.
❏ Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click Add or Remove Programs.

5. Select the application you want to uninstall.

You cannot uninstall the printer driver if there is any print jobs. Delete or wait to be printed the jobs before
uninstalling.

6. Uninstall the applications:

❏ Windows 10/Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server
2016/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008
Click Uninstall/Change or Uninstall.
❏ Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click Change/Remove or Remove.

Note:
If the User Account Control window is displayed, click Continue.

7. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Uninstalling Applications - Mac OS

1. Download the Uninstaller using EPSON Software Updater.
Once you have downloaded the Uninstaller, you do not need to download it again each time you uninstall the
application.

2. Press the P button to turn off the printer.

3. To uninstall the printer driver or PC-FAX driver, select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers &
Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then remove the printer from the enabled printers list.

4. Quit all running applications.

209
Maintaining the Printer > Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately > Updating Applications and Firm…

5. Select Go > Applications > Epson Software > Uninstaller.

6. Select the application you want to uninstall, and then click Uninstall.

c Important:
The Uninstaller removes all drivers for Epson inkjet printers on the computer. If you use multiple Epson inkjet
printers and you only want to delete some drivers, delete all of them first, and then install the necessary printer
driver again.

Note:
If you cannot find the application you want to uninstall in the application list, you cannot uninstall using the
Uninstaller. In this situation, select Go > Applications > Epson Software, select the application you want to uninstall,
and then drag it to the trash icon.

Related Information
& “Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on page 408

Updating Applications and Firmware

You may be able to clear certain problems and improve or add functions by updating the applications and the
firmware. Make sure you use the latest version of the applications and firmware.

1. Make sure that the printer and the computer are connected, and the computer is connected to the internet.

2. Start EPSON Software Updater, and update the applications or the firmware.

c Important:
Do not turn off the computer or the printer until the update is complete; otherwise, the printer may
malfunction.

Note:
If you cannot find the application you want to update in the list, you cannot update using the EPSON Software Updater.
Check for the latest versions of the applications from your local Epson website.
http://www.epson.com

Related Information
& “Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on page 408

Updating the Printer's Firmware Automatically

You can set the firmware to update automatically when the printer is connected to the Internet.
When the administrator lock is enabled, only the administrator can execute this function. Contact your printer
administrator for assistance.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Firmware Update.

210
Maintaining the Printer > Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately > Updating Applications and Firm…

3. Select Automatic Firmware Update to display the settings screen.

4. Select Automatic Firmware Update to enable this feature.

Select Agree on the confirmation screen to return to the settings screen.

5. Set the day and time for the update, and then select Proceed.
Note:
You can select multiple days of the week, but you cannot specify the time for each day of the week.

Setup is complete when the connection to the server is confirmed.

c Important:
❏ Do not turn off or unplug the printer until the update is complete. The next time you turn on the printer,
"Recovery Mode" may be displayed on the LCD screen and you may not be able to operate the printer.
❏ If "Recovery Mode" is displayed, follow the steps below to update the firmware again.
1. Connect the computer and the printer using a USB cable. (You cannot perform updates in recovery mode over
a network.)
2. Download the latest firmware from the Epson website and start updating. For details, see "Update method" on
the download page.

Note:
You can set to update the firmware automatically from Web Config. Select the Device Management tab > Automatic
Firmware Update, enable the settings, and then set the day of the week and time.

Updating Firmware Using Web Config

When the printer can connect to the Internet, you can update the firmware from Web Config.

1. Access Web Config and select the Device Management tab > Firmware Update.

2. Click Start, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

The firmware confirmation starts, and the firmware information is displayed if the updated firmware exists.
Note:
You can also update the firmware using Epson Device Admin. You can visually confirm the firmware information on the
device list. It is useful when you want to update multiple devices' firmware. See the Epson Device Admin guide or help for
more details.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Updating Firmware without Connecting to the Internet

You can download the device's firmware from Epson website on the computer, and then connect the device and the
computer by USB cable to update the firmware. If you cannot update over the network, try this method.

1. Access Epson website and download the firmware.

211
Maintaining the Printer > Replacing Maintenance Rollers

2. Connect the computer that contains the downloaded firmware to the printer by USB cable.

3. Double-click the downloaded .exe file.

Epson Firmware Updater starts.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Replacing Maintenance Rollers

See the slip sheet supplied with the maintenance roller's carton box to replace the maintenance rollers.

Related Information
& “Maintenance Rollers Code” on page 397

212
Solving Problems

The Printer Does Not Work as Expected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277

Paper Gets Jammed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

It is Time to Replace the Ink Cartridges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Cannot Solve Problem After Trying All Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly

The Printer Does Not Work as Expected

The Printer Does Not Turn On or Off

Power Does Not Turn On

The following causes can be considered.

The power cord is not plugged in properly to the electrical outlet.

Solutions
Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in.

The P button was not pressed for long enough.

Solutions

Hold down the P button for a little longer.

Power Does Not Turn Off

The P button was not pressed for long enough.

Solutions

Hold down the P button for a little longer. If you still cannot turn off the printer, unplug the power cord.
To prevent the print head from drying out, turn the printer back on and turn it off by pressing the P
button.

Printer Turns Off During Use

The overcurrent protection function was activated.

Solutions
Unplug and plug in the power cord, and then turn the printer back on. If the problem cannot be cleared,
contact Epson support.

Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly

No Paper Feeds
The following causes can be considered.

214
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly

The installation location is inappropriate.

Solutions
Place the printer on a flat surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.

& “Environmental Specifications” on page 448

Unsupported paper is being used.

Solutions
Use paper supported by this printer.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

& “Unavailable Paper Types” on page 395

Paper handling is inappropriate.

Solutions
Follow paper handling precautions.

& “Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35

Too many sheets are loaded in the printer.

Solutions
Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specified for the paper. For plain paper, do not
load above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

The paper settings on the printer are incorrect.

Solutions
Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.

& “Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 35

Paper Feeds at a Slant

The following causes can be considered.

The installation location is inappropriate.

Solutions
Place the printer on a flat surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.

& “Environmental Specifications” on page 448

215
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly

Unsupported paper is being used.

Solutions
Use paper supported by this printer.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

& “Unavailable Paper Types” on page 395

Paper handling is inappropriate.

Solutions
Follow paper handling precautions.

& “Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35

The paper is loaded incorrectly.

Solutions
Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.

& “Loading Paper” on page 37

Too many sheets are loaded in the printer.

Solutions
Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specified for the paper. For plain paper, do not
load above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

The paper settings on the printer are incorrect.

Solutions
Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.

& “Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 35

Several Sheets of Paper are Fed at a Time

The following causes can be considered.

The installation location is inappropriate.

Solutions
Place the printer on a flat surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.

& “Environmental Specifications” on page 448

216
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly

Unsupported paper is being used.

Solutions
Use paper supported by this printer.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

& “Unavailable Paper Types” on page 395

Paper handling is inappropriate.

Solutions
Follow paper handling precautions.

& “Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35

The paper is moist or damp.

Solutions
Load new paper.

Static electricity is causing sheets of paper to stick to each other.

Solutions
Fan the paper before loading. If the paper still does not feed, load one sheet of paper at a time.

Too many sheets are loaded in the printer.

Solutions
Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specified for the paper. For plain paper, do not
load above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

The paper settings on the printer are incorrect.

Solutions
Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.

& “Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 35

Paper Out Error Occurs

Paper is not loaded in the center of the paper tray.

Solutions
When a paper out error occurs although paper is loaded in the paper tray, reload paper in the center of
the paper tray.

Original Does Not Feed in the ADF

The following causes can be considered.

217
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Paper Does Not Feed or Eject Correctly

Originals that are not supported by the ADF are being used.
Solutions
Use originals supported by the ADF.

& “ADF Specifications” on page 440

The originals are loaded incorrectly.

Solutions
Load originals in the correct direction, and slide the ADF edge guides against the edges of the originals.

Too many originals are loaded in the ADF.

Solutions
Do not load originals above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the ADF.

The original slips when paper dust adheres to the roller.

Solutions
Clean the inside of the ADF.

& “Cleaning the ADF” on page 201

Originals are not detected.

Solutions
On the screen for copy or scan, or fax, check that the ADF icon is on. If it is off, place the originals again.

218
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

Cannot Print

Cannot Print from Windows

Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
The cause and solution to the problem differ depending on whether or not they are connected.

Checking the Connection Status

Use Epson Printer Connection Checker to check the connection status for the computer and the printer. You may
be able to solve the problem depending on the results of the check.

1. Double-click the Epson Printer Connection Checker icon on the desktop.

Epson Printer Connection Checker starts.
If there is no icon on the desktop, follow the methods below to start Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏ Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to check.

Note:
If the printer name is not displayed, install a genuine Epson printer driver.
“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 206

When you have identified the problem, follow the solution displayed on the screen.
When you cannot solve the problem, check the following according to your situation.
❏ The printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 219
❏ The printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)” on page 222
❏ The printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Windows)” on page 223

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

219
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

220
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Efficient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏ Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏ Cannot connect to the printer.
❏ The communication speed becomes slow.

Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.

1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.

See the documentation provided with the computer for details.

3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.

4. On the printer, print a network connection report.

“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.

221
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

6. On the computer, access Web Config.

Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.

8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.

9. Click Next.

10. Click OK.

11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.

13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.

The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)

The following causes can be considered.

The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.

There is a problem with the USB hub.

Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.

There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.

Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.

222
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

You need to reconfigure the USB connection.

Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.

If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.

& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 303

The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.

Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏ Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏ Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏ Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.

Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Windows)

The following causes can be considered.

There is a problem with the software or data.

Solutions
❏ Make sure that a genuine Epson printer driver (EPSON XXXXX) is installed. If a genuine Epson
printer driver is not installed, the available functions are limited. We recommend using a genuine
Epson printer driver.
❏ If you are printing a large data size image, the computer may run out of memory. Print the image at a
lower resolution or a smaller size.
❏ If you have tried all of the solutions and have not solved the problem, try uninstalling and then
reinstalling the printer driver

& “Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 206
& “Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Mac OS” on page 207

223
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

& “Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately” on page 205

There is a problem with the printer's status.

Solutions
Click EPSON Status Monitor 3 on the printer driver's Maintenance tab, and then check the printer
status. You need to install EPSON Status Monitor 3 to enable this feature. You can download it from the
Epson website.

There is still a job waiting to be printed.

Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab. If unnecessary data remains, select Cancel all
documents from the Printer menu.

The printer is pending or offline.

Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
If the printer is offline or pending, clear the offline or pending setting from the Printer menu.

The printer is not selected as the default printer.

Solutions
Right-click the printer icon in Control Panel > View devices and printers (or Printers, Printers and
Faxes) and click Set as default printer.
Note:
If there are multiple printer icons, see the following to select the correct printer.

Example)

224
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

USB connection: EPSON XXXX Series

Network connection: EPSON XXXX Series (network)
If you install the printer driver multiple times, copies of the printer driver may be created. If copies such
as "EPSON XXXX Series (copy 1)" are created, right-click the copied driver icon, and then click Remove
Device.

The printer port is not set correctly.

Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
Make sure the printer port is set correctly as shown below in Property > Port from the Printer menu.
USB connection: USBXXX, Network connection: EpsonNet Print Port
If you cannot change the port, select Run as administrator on the Printer menu. If Run as
administrator is not displayed, contact your system administrator.

Printer Does Not Print While Using PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)
The following causes can be considered.

The Printing Language setting needs to be changed.

Solutions
Set the Printing Language setting to Auto or PS on the control panel.

A large number of jobs have been sent.

Solutions
In Windows, if a large number of jobs are sent, the printer may not print. Select Print directly to the
printer on the Advanced tab in the printer properties.

Suddenly the Printer Cannot Print over a Network Connection

The problem could be one of the following issues.

The network environment has been changed.

Solutions
When you have changed the network environment, such as the wireless router or provider, try making
network settings for the printer again.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the

225
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

The printer is not connected to the network.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check, and then print the network
connection report. If the report shows that the network connection failed, check the network connection
report and then follow the printed solutions.

& “Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

There is still a job waiting to be printed.

Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab. If unnecessary data remains, select Cancel all
documents from the Printer menu.

226
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

The printer is pending or offline.

Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
If the printer is offline or pending, clear the offline or pending setting from the Printer menu.

The printer is not selected as the default printer.

Solutions
Right-click the printer icon in Control Panel > View devices and printers (or Printers, Printers and
Faxes) and click Set as default printer.
Note:
If there are multiple printer icons, see the following to select the correct printer.

Example)
USB connection: EPSON XXXX Series
Network connection: EPSON XXXX Series (network)
If you install the printer driver multiple times, copies of the printer driver may be created. If copies such
as "EPSON XXXX Series (copy 1)" are created, right-click the copied driver icon, and then click Remove
Device.

The printer port is not set correctly.

Solutions
Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab.
Make sure the printer port is set correctly as shown below in Property > Port from the Printer menu.
USB connection: USBXXX, Network connection: EpsonNet Print Port
If you cannot change the port, select Run as administrator on the Printer menu. If Run as
administrator is not displayed, contact your system administrator.

Cannot Print from Mac OS

Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
The cause and solution to the problem differ depending on whether or not they are connected.

Checking the Connection Status

Use EPSON Status Monitor to check the connection status for the computer and the printer.

227
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.

2. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.

3. Click EPSON Status Monitor.

When the remaining ink levels are displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the computer
and the printer.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏ The printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 228
❏ The printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)” on page 231

Check the following if a connection has been established.

❏ The printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Mac OS)” on page 232

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

228
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.

229
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

The device connected to the USB 3.0 port causes radio frequency interference.
Solutions
When you connect a device to the USB 3.0 port on a Mac, radio frequency interference may occur. Try
the following if you cannot connect to wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or if operations become unstable.
❏ Place the device that is connected to the USB 3.0 port further away from the computer.
❏ Connect to the SSID for the 5 GHz range.

See the following to connect the printer to the SSID.

& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 307

The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Efficient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏ Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏ Cannot connect to the printer.
❏ The communication speed becomes slow.

Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.

1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.

See the documentation provided with the computer for details.

3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.

4. On the printer, print a network connection report.

“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.

6. On the computer, access Web Config.

Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.

8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.

9. Click Next.

10. Click OK.

230
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.

13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.

The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)

The following causes can be considered.

The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.

There is a problem with the USB hub.

Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.

There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.

Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.

You need to reconfigure the USB connection.

Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.

If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.

& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 303

231
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.

Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏ Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏ Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏ Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.

Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Mac OS)
The following causes can be considered.

There is a problem with the software or data.

Solutions
❏ Make sure that a genuine Epson printer driver (EPSON XXXXX) is installed. If a genuine Epson
printer driver is not installed, the available functions are limited. We recommend using a genuine
Epson printer driver.
❏ If you are printing a large data size image, the computer may run out of memory. Print the image at a
lower resolution or a smaller size.
❏ If you have tried all of the solutions and have not solved the problem, try uninstalling and then
reinstalling the printer driver

& “Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 206
& “Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Mac OS” on page 207
& “Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately” on page 205

There is a problem with the status of the printer.

Solutions
Make sure the printer status is not Pause.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax),
and then double-click the printer. If the printer is paused, click Resume.

User feature restrictions are enabled for the printer.

Solutions
The printer may not print when the user feature restriction is enabled. Contact your printer
administrator.

Printer Does Not Print While Using PostScript Printer Driver (Mac OS)

The Printing Language setting needs to be changed.

Solutions
Set the Printing Language setting to Auto or PS on the control panel.

232
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

Suddenly the Printer Cannot Print over a Network Connection

The problem could be one of the following issues.

The network environment has been changed.

Solutions
When you have changed the network environment, such as the wireless router or provider, try making
network settings for the printer again.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

The printer is not connected to the network.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check, and then print the network
connection report. If the report shows that the network connection failed, check the network connection
report and then follow the printed solutions.

& “Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

Cannot Print from Smart Device

Make sure the smart device and the printer are connected correctly.
The cause and solution to the problem differ depending on whether or not they are connected.

233
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

Checking the Connection Status

Use Epson iPrint to check the connection status for the smart device and the printer.
See the following to install Epson iPrint if it is not already installed.
“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 401

1. On the smart device, start Epson iPrint.

2. Check that the printer name is displayed on the home screen.

When the printer name is displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the smart device
and the printer.
If the following are displayed, a connection has not been established between the smart device and the printer.
❏ Printer is not selected.
❏ Communication error.

Check the following if a connection has not been established.

“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 234

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

234
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the smart device.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your smart device to make sure that your smart device's network settings
are correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the smart device.

235
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Print

Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the smart device
for details.

Suddenly the Printer Cannot Print over a Network Connection

The problem could be one of the following issues.

The network environment has been changed.

Solutions
When you have changed the network environment, such as the wireless router or provider, try making
network settings for the printer again.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

The printer is not connected to the network.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check, and then print the network
connection report. If the report shows that the network connection failed, check the network connection
report and then follow the printed solutions.

& “Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

There is a problem with the network settings on the smart device.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your smart device to make sure that your smart device's network settings
are correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the smart device.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the smart device
for details.

236
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

Cannot Copy

When the user feature restriction is enabled, a user ID and password are required to copy.
Solutions
If you do not know the password, contact your printer administrator.

The printer error has occured.

Solutions
You cannot copy if an error, such as a paper jam, has occurred in the printer. Check the printer's control
panel and follow the on-screen instructions to clear the error.

Cannot Start Scanning

Cannot Start Scanning from Windows

Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
The cause and solution to the problem differ depending on whether or not they are connected.

Checking the Connection Status

Use Epson Printer Connection Checker to check the connection status for the computer and the printer. You may
be able to solve the problem depending on the results of the check.

1. Double-click the Epson Printer Connection Checker icon on the desktop.

Epson Printer Connection Checker starts.
If there is no icon on the desktop, follow the methods below to start Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏ Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to check.

Note:
If the printer name is not displayed, install a genuine Epson printer driver.
“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 206

When you have identified the problem, follow the solution displayed on the screen.
When you cannot solve the problem, check the following according to your situation.
❏ The printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 238

237
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

❏ The printer is not recognized using a USB connection

“The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)” on page 222
❏ The printer is recognized, but scanning cannot be performed.
“Cannot Scan Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established (Windows)” on page 241

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.

238
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Efficient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏ Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏ Cannot connect to the printer.

239
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

❏ The communication speed becomes slow.

Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.

1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.

See the documentation provided with the computer for details.

3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.

4. On the printer, print a network connection report.

“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.

6. On the computer, access Web Config.

Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.

8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.

9. Click Next.

10. Click OK.

11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.

13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.

The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)

The following causes can be considered.

The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.

There is a problem with the USB hub.

If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.

240
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.

If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.

You need to reconfigure the USB connection.

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer, and then
select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.

If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method of
connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.

Related Information
& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 303

The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.

If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may occur on
some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏ Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏ Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏ Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.

Cannot Scan Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established (Windows)

Scanning at a high resolution over a network.

Try scanning at a lower resolution.

Cannot Start Scanning from Mac OS

Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly.
The cause and solution to the problem differ depending on whether or not they are connected.

241
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

Checking the Connection Status

Use EPSON Status Monitor to check the connection status for the computer and the printer.

1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.

2. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.

3. Click EPSON Status Monitor.

When the remaining ink levels are displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the computer
and the printer.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏ The printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 242
❏ The printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)” on page 231

Check the following if a connection has been established.

❏ The printer is recognized, but scanning cannot be performed.
“Cannot Scan Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established (Mac OS)” on page 246

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

242
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.

243
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

The device connected to the USB 3.0 port causes radio frequency interference.
Solutions
When you connect a device to the USB 3.0 port on a Mac, radio frequency interference may occur. Try
the following if you cannot connect to wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) or if operations become unstable.
❏ Place the device that is connected to the USB 3.0 port further away from the computer.
❏ Connect to the SSID for the 5 GHz range.

See the following to connect the printer to the SSID.

& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 307

The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Efficient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏ Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏ Cannot connect to the printer.
❏ The communication speed becomes slow.

Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.

1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.

See the documentation provided with the computer for details.

3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.

4. On the printer, print a network connection report.

“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.

6. On the computer, access Web Config.

Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.

8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.

9. Click Next.

10. Click OK.

244
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.

13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.

The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)

The following causes can be considered.

The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.

There is a problem with the USB hub.

If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.

There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.

If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.

You need to reconfigure the USB connection.

Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer, and then
select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.

If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method of
connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.

Related Information
& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 303

245
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.

If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may occur on
some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏ Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏ Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏ Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.

Cannot Scan Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established (Mac OS)

Scanning at a high resolution over a network.

Try scanning at a lower resolution.

Cannot Start Scanning from Smart Device

Make sure the smart device and the printer are connected correctly.
The cause and solution to the problem differ depending on whether or not they are connected.

Checking the Connection Status

Use Epson iPrint to check the connection status for the smart device and the printer.
See the following to install Epson iPrint if it is not already installed.
“Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 401

1. On the smart device, start Epson iPrint.

2. Check that the printer name is displayed on the home screen.

When the printer name is displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the smart device
and the printer.
If the following are displayed, a connection has not been established between the smart device and the printer.
❏ Printer is not selected.
❏ Communication error.

Check the following if a connection has not been established.

“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 246

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the

246
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they

247
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the smart device.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your smart device to make sure that your smart device's network settings
are correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the smart device.
Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the smart device
for details.

Cannot Save Scanned Images to the Shared Folder

Messages are Displayed on the Control Panel

When error messages are displayed on the control panel, check the message itself or the following list to solve the
problems.

248
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Start Scanning

Messages Solutions

DNS error. Check DNS settings. Cannnot connect to the computer. Check the following.
❏ Make sure that the address in the contacts list on the printer and the address
of the shared folder are the same.
❏ If the IP address of the computer is static and is set manually, change the
computer name in the network path to the IP address.
Example: \\EPSON02\SCAN to \\192.168.xxx.xxx\SCAN
❏ Make sure that the computer is turned on and does not sleep. If the computer
sleeps, you cannot save scanned images to the shared folder.
❏ Temporarily disable the computer's Firewall and security software. If this clears
the error, check the settings in the security software.
❏ If Public network is selected as the network place, you cannot save the
scanned images to the shared folder. Set the forward settings for each port.
❏ If you are using a laptop computer and the IP address is set as DHCP, the IP
address may change when reconnecting to the network. Obtain the IP address
again.
❏ Make sure the DNS setting is correct. Contact your network administrator
about the DNS settings.
❏ The computer name and the IP address may differ when the management
table of the DNS server is not updated. Contact your DNS server administrator.

Authentication error. Please check the Make sure the user name and the password are correct on the computer and the
Email Server Settings. contacts on the printer. Also, make sure that the password has not expired.

Communication error. Check the Wi-Fi/ Cannot communicate with a network folder that is registered on the contacts list.
network connection. Check the following.
❏ Make sure that Use Microsoft network sharing is enabled on the Web Config.
Select Network > MS Network on the Web Config.
❏ Make sure that the address in the contacts list on the printer and the address
of the shared folder are the same.
❏ Access rights for the user in the contacts list should be added on the Sharing
tab and the Security tab of the shared folder's properties. Also, the
permissions for the user should be set to "allowed".

The file name is already in use. Rename Change the file name settings. Otherwise, move or delete the files, or change the
the file and scan again. file name on the shared folder.

Scanned file(s) are too large. Only XX There is not enough disk space on the computer. Increase the free space on the
page(s) have been sent. Check if the computer.
destination has enough space.

Checking the Point where the Error Occurred

Solutions
When saving scanned images to the shared folder, saving process proceeds as following. You can then
check the point where the error occurred.

Items Operation Error Messages

Connecting Connect to the computer from the printer. DNS error. Check DNS settings.

Logging on to the Log on to the computer with the user name and Authentication error. Please check the
computer the password. Email Server Settings.

249
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Items Operation Error Messages

Checking the folder to Check the network path of the shared folder. Communication error. Check the Wi-Fi/
save network connection.

Checking the file name Check if there is a file with the same name as the The file name is already in use. Rename
file you want to save in the folder. the file and scan again.

Writing the file Write a new file. Scanned file(s) are too large. Only XX
page(s) have been sent. Check if the
destination has enough space.

Saving the Scanned Images Takes a Long Time

It takes a long time for the name resolution to correspond to the "Domain Name" and the "IP
Address".
Solutions
Check the following points.
❏ Make sure the DNS setting is correct.
❏ Make sure each DNS setting is correct when checking the Web Config.
❏ Make sure the DNS domain name is correct.

Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

The following causes can be considered.

There are some problems in telephone wall jack.

Solutions
Check that the telephone wall jack works by connecting a phone to it and testing it. If you cannot make or
receive calls, contact your telecommunication company.

There are some problems in connecting to the telephone line.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Check Fax Connection on the control panel to run
the automatic fax connection check. Try the solutions printed on the report.

Communication error occurs.

Solutions
Select Slow(9,600bps) in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Fax Speed on
the control panel.

250
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Connected to a DSL phone line without DSL filter.

Solutions
To connect to a DSL phone line, you need to use a DSL modem equipped with a built-in DSL filter, or
install a separate DSL filter to the line. Contact your DSL provider.
“Connecting to DSL or ISDN” on page 518

There are some problems in the DSL filter when you connect to a DSL phone line.
Solutions
If you can not send or receive fax, connect the printer directly to a telephone wall jack to see if the printer
can send a fax. If it works, the problem may be caused by the DSL filter. Contact your DSL provider.

Cannot Send Faxes

The following causes can be considered.

The connection line is set to PSTN in a facility where a private branch exchange (PBX) is
being used.
Solutions
Select PBX in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type on the control
panel.

Sending faxes without entering an access code in an environment in which a PBX is

installed.
Solutions
If your phone system requires an external access code to get an outside line, register the access code to the
printer, and enter # (hash) at the beginning of a fax number when sending.

The header information for outgoing faxes is not registered.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Header and set up the header
information. Some fax machines automatically reject incoming faxes that do not include header
information.

Your caller ID is blocked.

Solutions
Contact your telecommunication company to unblock your caller ID. Some phones or fax machines
automatically reject anonymous calls.

The recipient's fax number is wrong.

Solutions
Check that the recipient's number registered in your contacts list or that you entered directly using the
keypad is correct. Or, check with the recipient that the fax number is correct.

251
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

The recipient's fax machine is not ready to receive faxes.

Solutions
Ask the recipient if the recipient's fax machine is ready to receive a fax.

Sending a fax accidently using the subaddress feature.

Solutions
Check if you accidentally sent a fax using the subaddress feature. If you select a recipient with a
subaddress from the contact list, the fax may be sent using the subaddress feature.

The recipient's fax machine is not capable of receiving faxes using the subaddress feature.
Solutions
When sending faxes using the subaddress feature, ask the recipient if their fax machine is capable of
receiving faxes using the subaddress feature.

The subaddress and password are wrong.

Solutions
When sending faxes using the subaddress feature, check that the subaddress and password are correct.
Check with the recipient that the subaddress and password match.

The data being sent is too large.

Solutions
You can send faxes at a smaller data size using one of the following methods.
❏ When you send the fax in monochrome, enable Direct Send in Fax > Fax Settings > Fax Send
Settings.
“Sending Many Pages of a Monochrome Document (Direct Send)” on page 149
❏ Using the connected phone
“Sending Faxes Dialing from the External Phone Device” on page 147
❏ Using On Hook
“Sending Faxes After Confirming the Recipient's Status” on page 146
❏ Separating the originals

Cannot Send Faxes (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)

Attempted to send from a line port set to Receiving Only

Solutions
Send the fax from a line for which Transmission Setting By Line is set to Sending and Receiving or
Sending Only.
You can access Transmission Setting By Line by selecting Settings > General Settings >
Fax Settings > Basic Settings from the printer’s control panel.

252
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Cannot Receive Faxes

The following causes can be considered.
We also recommend checking the printer status in Job/Status, such as whether or not the printer is currently
receiving the fax.

Subscribing to a call forwarding service.

Solutions
If you have subscribed to a call forwarding service, the printer may not be able to receive faxes. Contact
the service provider.

The Receive Mode is set to Manual while an external phone device is connected to the
printer.
Solutions
If an external phone device is connected to the printer and is sharing a phone line with the printer, select
Settings >General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings, and then set Receive Mode to Auto.

The available memory of the inbox and the confidential box is not enough.
Solutions
200 received documents have been saved in the inbox and the confidential box in total. Delete the
unnecessary documents.

The computer that will save the received faxes is not turned on.
Solutions
When you have made settings to save received faxes to a computer, turn on the computer. The received
fax is deleted once it has been saved to the computer.

The subaddress and password are wrong.

Solutions
When receiving faxes using the subaddress feature, check that the subaddress and password are correct.
Check with the sender that the subaddress and password match.

The sender's fax number has been registered to the Blocked Number List.
Solutions
Make sure that the sender's number can be deleted from the Blocked Number List before deleting it.
Delete it from Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Edit
Blocked Number list. Or disable the Blocked Number List in Settings > General Settings > Fax
Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Rejection Fax. Faxes sent from numbers that have not been
registered to this list are blocked when this setting is enabled.

The sender's fax number has not been registered in the contacts list.
Solutions
Register the sender's fax number to contact list. Or disable Caller not in Contacts in Settings > General
Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Rejection Fax. Faxes sent from numbers that
have not been registered to this list are blocked.

253
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

The sender has sent the fax without header information.

Solutions
Ask the sender if header information is setup on their fax machine. Or, disable Fax Header Blank in
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax > Rejection Fax. Faxes that
do not include header information are blocked when this setting is enabled.

Cannot Receive Faxes (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)

Sender attempted to send a fax to a line port set to Sending Only

Solutions
Tell the sender the fax number for the line port for which Transmission Setting By Line is set to Sending
and Receiving or Receiving Only
You can access Transmission Setting By Line by selecting Settings > General Settings > Fax
Settings > Basic Settings from the printer’s home screen.

Cannot Send Faxes to a Specific Recipient

The following causes can be considered.

The recipient's machine takes a long time to answer.

Solutions
If the recipient machine does not pick up your call within 50 seconds after the printer has finished
dialing, the call ends with an error. Dial using the (On Hook) feature or using a connected
telephone to check how long it takes before you hear a fax tone. If it takes more than 50 seconds, add
pauses after the fax number to send the fax. Tap to enter the pause. A hyphen is entered as the pause
mark. One pause is about three seconds. Add multiple pauses as needed.

The Fax Speed setting registered in the contact list is wrong.

Solutions
Select the recipient from the contact list, and then select Edit > Fax Speed > Slow(9,600bps).

Cannot Send Faxes at a Specified Time

The printer's date and time is wrong.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time Settings, and then set the correct date
and time.

Cannot Save Received Faxes to a Memory Device

The following causes can be considered.

254
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

The setting for saving received faxes to external memory is disabled.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings, and then enable Save to Memory
Device in each menu.

A memory device is not connected to the printer.

Solutions
Connect a memory device, in which you have created a folder to save faxes, to the printer. Once the faxes
are saved in the device, they are deleted from the printer's memory.

There is not enough free space in the device.

Solutions
Delete unnecessary data from the device to increase the amount of free space. Or, connect another device
that has enough free space.

The memory device is write protected.

Solutions
Check if the device is write protected.

Faxes Are Sent at the Wrong Size

The following causes can be considered.

The recipient's fax machine does not support A3 size.

Solutions
Before you send an A3 size document, ask the recipient if the recipient's machine supports A3 size. If you
see OK (Reduced Size) in the fax transmission report, the recipient's fax machine does not support A3
size. You can print a fax transmission report from Fax > (Menu) > Fax Report > Last Transmission.

The originals are not placed correctly.

Solutions
❏ Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks.
❏ If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original slightly away from the edge of the
scanner glass. You cannot scan the area within approximately 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the edge of the
scanner glass.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

There is dust or dirt on the scanner glass.

Solutions
When scanning from the control panel and selecting auto scan area cropping function, remove any trash
or dirt from the scanner glass and document cover. If there is any trash or dirt around the original, the
scanning range expands to include it.
“Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 200

255
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Cannot Receive A3 Size Faxes

The following causes can be considered.

The paper source setting is wrong.

Check that the paper size setting of the paper source that contains A3 paper has been set to A3, and that the paper
source is set for use with the fax feature. Select Settings > General Settings >Printer Settings > Paper Source
Settings > Auto Select Settings > Fax, and then check the enabled paper source(s).

A3 is not selected in Receiving Paper Size.

Select Settings > General Settings >Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Receiving Paper Size, and then check that A3
is selected. This menu allows you to set the maximum size of fax that the printer can receive.

Received Faxes Are Not Printed

The following causes can be considered.

An error has occurred in the printer such as a paper jam.

Solutions
Clear the printer error, and then ask the sender to resend the fax.

Printing received faxes is disabled under the current settings.

Solutions
Make settings to print received faxes in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings >
Save/Forward Settings.

Cannot Send and Receive Faxes (Windows)

Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly. The cause and solution to the problem differ
depending on whether or not they are connected.

Checking the Connection Status

Use Epson Printer Connection Checker to check the connection status for the computer and the printer. You may
be able to solve the problem depending on the results of the check.

1. Double-click the Epson Printer Connection Checker icon on the desktop.

Epson Printer Connection Checker starts.
If there is no icon on the desktop, follow the methods below to start Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏ Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection Checker.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.

256
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

❏ Windows 7
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Software > Epson Printer Connection
Checker.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to check.

Note:
If the printer name is not displayed, install a genuine Epson printer driver.
“Checking if a genuine Epson printer driver is installed - Windows” on page 206

When you have identified the problem, follow the solution displayed on the screen.
When you cannot solve the problem, check the following according to your situation.
❏ The printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 219
❏ The printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)” on page 222
❏ The printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Windows)” on page 223

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

257
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.

258
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Efficient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏ Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏ Cannot connect to the printer.
❏ The communication speed becomes slow.

Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.

1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.

See the documentation provided with the computer for details.

3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.

4. On the printer, print a network connection report.

“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.

6. On the computer, access Web Config.

Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.

8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.

9. Click Next.

10. Click OK.

11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.

13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.

The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Windows)

The following causes can be considered.

259
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.

There is a problem with the USB hub.

Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.

There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.

Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.

You need to reconfigure the USB connection.

Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.

If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.

& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 303

The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.

Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏ Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏ Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏ Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.

260
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Cannot Send or Receive Faxes Even Though a Connection has been Correctly
Established (Windows)

The software is not installed.

Solutions
Make sure that the PC-FAX driver have been installed on the computer. The PC-FAX driver is installed
with FAX Utility. Follow the steps below to check if it is installed.
Make sure the printer (fax) is displayed in Devices and Printers, Printer, or Printers and Other
Hardware. The printer (fax) is displayed as "EPSON XXXXX (FAX)". If the printer (fax) is not displayed,
uninstall and then re-install the FAX Utility. See the following to access Devices and Printers, Printer, or
Printers and Other Hardware.
❏ Windows 10
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and
printers in Hardware and Sound.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound or
Hardware.
❏ Windows 7
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound
or Hardware.
❏ Windows Vista
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound.
❏ Windows XP
Click the start button, and select Settings > Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers
and Faxes.

User authentication failed when a fax is sent from a computer.

Solutions
Set the username and password in the printer driver. When sending a fax from a computer when the
security function that allows administrators to restrict users from changing the printer's fax function is
set, user authentication is performed with the username and password set in the printer driver.

There are some problems with fax connection and fax settings.
Solutions
Try the resolutions for fax connection and fax settings.

Cannot Send and Receive Faxes (Mac OS)

Make sure the computer and the printer are connected correctly. The cause and solution to the problem differ
depending on whether or not they are connected.

Checking the Connection Status

Use EPSON Status Monitor to check the connection status for the computer and the printer.

261
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.

2. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.

3. Click EPSON Status Monitor.

When the remaining ink levels are displayed, a connection has been successfully established between the computer
and the printer.
Check the following if a connection has not been established.
❏ The printer is not recognized over a network connection
“Cannot connect to a Network” on page 228
❏ The printer is not recognized using a USB connection
“The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)” on page 231

Check the following if a connection has been established.

❏ The printer is recognized, but printing cannot be performed.
“Cannot Print Even Though a Connection has been Established (Mac OS)” on page 232

Cannot connect to a Network

The problem could be one of the following issues.

Something is wrong with the network devices for Wi-Fi connection.

Solutions
Turn off the devices you want to connect to the network. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
devices in the following order; wireless router, computer or smart device, and then printer. Move the
printer and computer or smart device closer to the wireless router to help with radio wave
communication, and then try to make network settings again.

Devices cannot receive signals from the wireless router because they are too far apart.
Solutions
After moving the computer or the smart device and the printer closer to the wireless router, turn off the
wireless router, and then turn it back on.

262
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

When changing the wireless router, the settings do not match the new router.
Solutions
Make the connection settings again so that they match the new wireless router.

& “When Replacing the Wireless Router” on page 303

The SSIDs connected from the computer or smart device and computer are different.
Solutions
When you are using multiple wireless routers at the same time or the wireless router has multiple SSIDs
and devices are connected to different SSIDs, you cannot connect to the wireless router.
Connect the computer or smart device to the same SSID as the printer.

A privacy separator on the wireless router is available.

Solutions
Most wireless routers have a privacy separator feature that blocks communication between connected
devices. If you cannot communicate between the printer and the computer or smart device even if they
are connected to the same network, disable the privacy separator on the wireless router. See the manual
provided with the wireless router for details.

The IP address is incorrectly assigned.

Solutions
If the IP address assigned to the printer is 169.254.XXX.XXX, and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, the IP
address may not be assigned correctly.
Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced on the printer’s control panel, and
then check the IP address and the subnet mask assigned to the printer.
Restart the wireless router or reset the network settings for the printer.

& “Re-setting the Network Connection” on page 303

There is a problem with the network settings on the computer.

Solutions
Try accessing any website from your computer to make sure that your computer's network settings are
correct. If you cannot access any website, there is a problem on the computer.

263
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

Check the network connection of the computer. See the documentation provided with the computer for
details.

The printer has been connected by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy
Efficient Ethernet).
Solutions
When you connect the printer by Ethernet using devices that support IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient
Ethernet), the following problems may occur depending on the hub or router that you are using.
❏ Connection becomes unstable, the printer is connected and disconnected again and again.
❏ Cannot connect to the printer.
❏ The communication speed becomes slow.

Follow the steps below to disable IEEE802.3az for the printer and then connect.

1. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

2. When IEEE802.3az for the computer is enabled, disable it.

See the documentation provided with the computer for details.

3. Connect the computer and the printer with an Ethernet cable directly.

4. On the printer, print a network connection report.

“Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

5. Check the printer's IP address on the network connection report.

6. On the computer, access Web Config.

Launch a Web browser, and then enter the printer's IP address.
“Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

7. Select the Network Settings tab > Wired LAN.

8. Select OFF for IEEE 802.3az.

9. Click Next.

10. Click OK.

11. Remove the Ethernet cable connected to the computer and the printer.

12. If you disabled IEEE802.3az for the computer in step 2, enable it.

13. Connect the Ethernet cables that you removed in step 1 to the computer and the printer.
If the problem still occurs, devices other than the printer may be causing the problem.

The Printer Cannot Connect by USB (Mac OS)

The following causes can be considered.

264
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Send or Receive Faxes

The USB cable is not plugged into the electrical outlet correctly.
Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.

There is a problem with the USB hub.

Solutions
If you are using a USB hub, try to connect the printer directly to the computer.

There is a problem with the USB cable or the USB inlet.

Solutions
If the USB cable cannot be recognized, change the port, or change the USB cable.

You need to reconfigure the USB connection.

Solutions
Disconnect the USB cable from the computer. Right-click on the printer icon displayed on the computer,
and then select Remove Device. Next, connect the USB cable to the computer.

If you cannot use a USB cable, reset the USB connection by following the steps for changing the method
of connecting to a computer. See the related information link below for details.

& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 303

The printer is connected to a SuperSpeed USB port.

Solutions
If you connect the printer to a SuperSpeed USB port using a USB 2.0 cable, a communication error may
occur on some computers. In this case, re-connect the printer using one of the following methods.
❏ Use a USB 3.0 cable.
❏ Connect to a Hi-Speed USB port on the computer.
❏ Connect to a SuperSpeed USB port other than the port that generated the communication error.

265
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

Cannot Send or Receive Even Though a Connection has been Correctly Established
(Mac OS)

The software is not installed.

Solutions
Make sure that the PC-FAX driver have been installed on the computer. The PC-FAX driver is installed
with FAX Utility. Follow the steps below to check if it is installed.
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax),
and then make sure the printer (fax) is displayed. The printer (fax) is displayed as "FAX XXXX (USB)" or
"FAX XXXX (IP)". If the printer (fax) is not displayed, click [+] and then register the printer (fax).

PC-FAX driver is paused.

Solutions
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax),
and then double-click the printer (fax). If the printer is paused, click Resume (or Resume Printer).

User authentication failed when a fax is sent from a computer.

Solutions
Set the username and password in the printer driver. When sending a fax from a computer when the
security function that allows administrators to restrict users from changing the printer's fax function is
set, user authentication is performed with the username and password set in the printer driver.

There are some problems with fax connection and fax settings.
Solutions
Try the resolutions for fax connection and fax settings.

Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

If a job does not complete successfully, check the error code displayed on the history of each job. You can check the
error code by selecting Job/Status > Job Status. See the following table to find the problem and its solution.

Code Problem Solution

001 The product was turned off by a power failure. -

101 The memory is full. Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
job.
❏ Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏ Change the format setting.
❏ Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.

266
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

Code Problem Solution

102 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
memory. job. If you do not want to use these methods, try
printing one copy at a time.
❏ Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏ Change the format setting.
❏ Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.

103 Printing quality has been lowered due to a lack of If you do not want to lower the print quality, try the
available memory. following methods to reduce the size of the print job.
❏ Change the format setting.
❏ Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.

104 Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available If you want to print in reverse, try the following
memory. methods to reduce the size of the print job.
❏ Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏ Change the format setting.
❏ Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.

106 Cannot print from the computer due to the access Contact your printer administrator.
control settings.

107 User authentication failed. The job has been ❏ Make sure that the user name and password are
canceled. correct.
❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > System
Administration > Security Settings > Access
Control. Enable the user restriction function, and
then allow the job without an authentication
information.

108 Confidential job data was deleted when the printer -

was turned off.

109 The received fax was already deleted. -

110 The job was printed on one side only because the If you want to perform 2-sided printing, load paper
paper loaded does not support double sided that supports 2-sided printing.
printing.

111 Available memory is running low. Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
job.
❏ Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏ Change the format setting.
❏ Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.

120 Cannot communicate with the server that is Make sure there are no errors on the server or the
connected using an open platform. network.

267
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

Code Problem Solution

130 Collated printing has failed due to a lack of available Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
memory. job. If you do not want to use these methods, try
printing one copy at a time.
❏ Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏ Change the format setting.
❏ Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.

131 Reverse printing has failed due to a lack of available If you want to print in reverse, try the following
memory. methods to reduce the size of the print job.
❏ Lower the print quality and the resolution.
❏ Change the format setting.
❏ Reduce the number of images, letters or fonts
used in the print job.

132 Cannot print due to a lack of available memory. Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
data.
❏ Change to a smaller paper size.
❏ Simplify the data by reducing the number of
images in the print data or reducing the number
of font types.

133 Cannot print on 2-sides due to a lack of available Try the methods below to reduce the size of the print
memory. Only one side will be printed. data.
❏ Change to a smaller paper size.
❏ Simplify the data by reducing the number of
images in the print data or reducing the number
of font types.

141 Error in the printer's HDD. The job has been canceled. Contact Epson support or an authorized Epson
service provider to replace the HDD.

151 Printing is not performed because the login user Make sure you login with the same user name as the
name and the user name associated with the user name associated with the confidential job.
confidential job do not match.

201 The memory is full. ❏ Print received faxes from Job Status in Job/
Status .
❏ Delete received faxes saved in the inbox from Job
Status in Job/Status.
❏ If you are sending a monochrome fax to a single
destination, you can send it by using Direct Send.
❏ Divide your originals in two or more to send them
in several batches.

202 The line was disconnected by the recipient machine. Wait for a while and then try again.

268
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

Code Problem Solution

203 The product cannot detect the dial tone. ❏ Make sure that the phone cable is connected
correctly and the phone line is working.
❏ When the printer is connected to the PBX or the
terminal adapter, change the Line Type setting to
PBX.
❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings
> Basic Settings > Dial Tone Detection, and
then disable the dial tone setting.

204 The recipient machine is busy. ❏ Wait for a while and then try again.
❏ Check the recipient's fax number.

205 The recipient machine does not answer. Wait for a while and then try again.

206 The phone cable is incorrectly connected to the LINE Check the connection of the LINE port and the EXT.
and EXT. port of the product. port of the printer.

207 The product is not connected to the phone line. Connect the phone cable to the phone line.

208 The fax could not be sent to some of the specified Print a Fax Log or Last Transmission report for
recipients. previous faxes from Fax Report in the Fax mode to
check the failed destination. When the Save Failure
Data setting is enabled, you can resend a fax from
Job Status in Job/Status.

301 There is not enough storage space available to save ❏ Increase the storage space in the memory device.
the data in the memory device.
❏ Reduce the number of documents.
❏ Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
compression ratio to reduce the size of the
scanned image.

302 The memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection on the memory device.

303 No folder has been created to save the scanned Insert another memory device.
image.

304 The memory device has been removed. Reinsert the memory device.

305 An error occurred while saving the data to the If the external device is accessed from a computer,
memory device. wait for a while and then try again.

306 The memory is full. Wait until other ongoing jobs are finished.

307 The scanned image size exceeds the maximum limit. Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
(Scan to a Memory Device) compression ratio to reduce the size of the scanned
image.

311 A DNS error has occurred. ❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏ Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.

312 An authentication error has occurred. Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings, and then check the server settings.

269
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

Code Problem Solution

313 A communication error has occurred. ❏ Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings to check the email server settings. You
can check the cause of the error by running
connection check.
❏ The authentication method of the settings and
the email server may not match. When you select
Off as the authentication method, make sure the
authentication method of the email server is set
to None.

314 The data size exceeds the maximum size for attached ❏ Increase the Attached File Max Size setting in
files. the scan settings.
❏ Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
compression ratio to reduce the size of the
scanned image.

315 The memory is full. Retry after other ongoing jobs are finished.

316 A mail encryption error has occurred. ❏ Make sure that the encryption certificate setting
is correct.
❏ Make sure that the printer's time setting is correct.

317 A mail signature error has occurred. ❏ Make sure that the signing certificate setting is
correct.
❏ Make sure that the printer's time setting is correct.

321 A DNS error has occurred. ❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏ Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.

322 An authentication error has occurred. Check the Location settings.

323 A communication error has occurred. ❏ Check the Location settings.

❏ Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.

324 A file with the same name already exists in the ❏ Delete the file with the same name.
specified folder.
❏ Change the file name prefix in File Settings.

325 There is not enough storage space available in the ❏ Increase the storage space in the specified folder.
specified folder.
326 ❏ Reduce the number of documents.
❏ Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
compression ratio to reduce the size of the
scanned image.

327 The memory is full. Wait until other ongoing jobs are finished.

328 The destination was wrong or the destination does Check the Location settings.
not exist.

270
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

Code Problem Solution

329 The scanned image size exceeds the maximum limit. Lower the scanning resolution or increase the
(Scan to a Network Folder or FTP Server) compression ratio to reduce the size of the scanned
image.

330 An FTPS/FTPS secure connection error has occurred. ❏ Check the location in the destination settings.
❏ Run Web Config, and then update the root
certificate.
❏ Run Web Config, and then import or update the
CA certificate.

If the error cannot be cleared, set the certificate

verification to off in the destination settings.

331 A communication error occurred. Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.

332 There is not enough storage space available to save Reduce the number of documents.
the scanned image in the destination storage.

333 The destination could not be found because the Select the destination again.
destination information was uploaded to the server
before sending the scanned image.

334 An error occurred while sending the scanned image. -

341 A communication error has occurred. ❏ Check the connections for the printer and the
computer. If you are connecting over a network,
print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
❏ Make sure that Document Capture Pro is installed
on the computer.

350 An FTPS/HTTPS certificate error has occurred. ❏ Make sure that the date/time and time difference
settings are correct.
❏ Run Web Config, and then update the root
certificate.
❏ Run Web Config, and then import or update the
CA certificate.

If the error cannot be cleared, set the certificate

verification to off in the destination settings.

401 There is not enough storage space available to save Increase the storage space in the memory device.
the data in the memory device.

402 The memory device is write-protected. Disable write protection on the memory device.

404 The memory device has been removed. Reinsert the memory device.

405 An error occurred while saving the data to the ❏ Reinsert the memory device.
memory device.
❏ Use a different memory device on which you have
created a folder using the Create a folder to save
fax data function.

271
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Error Code is Displayed on the Status Menu

Code Problem Solution

411 A DNS error has occurred. ❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏ Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.

412 An authentication error has occurred. Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings, and then check the server settings.

413 A communication error has occurred. ❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server
Settings to check the email server settings. You
can check the cause of the error by running
connection check.
❏ The authentication method of the settings and
the email server may not match. When you select
Off as the authentication method, make sure the
authentication method of the email server is set
to None.
❏ Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.

421 A DNS error has occurred. ❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Network
Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP, and then check
the DNS settings.
❏ Check the DNS settings for the server, the
computer, or the access point.

422 An authentication error has occurred. Tap Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings, and
then check the settings of the folder selected in
Destination.

423 A communication error has occurred. ❏ Print a network connection report to check if the
printer is connected to the network.
❏ Tap Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings
> Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings,
and select on the box registered. Then, check
the folder setting in Save/Forward Destination.

425 There is not enough storage space available in the Increase the storage space in the forwarding
forwarding destination folder. destination folder.

428 The destination was wrong or the destination does Tap Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings >
not exist. Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings, and
select on the box registered. Then, check the
folder setting in Save/Forward Destination.

501 Cannot use the storage feature. Check the user permissions from Web Config.

502 The storage area is full. Delete unnecessary saved jobs from the control
panel or Web Config.

504 The number of files has reached the maximum limit. Delete unnecessary saved jobs from the control
panel or Web Config.

505 A read/write error has occurred in the storage. Contact Epson support.

272
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected

Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected

Operations are Slow

Printing Is Too Slow

The following causes can be considered.

Unnecessary applications are running.

Solutions
Close any unnecessary applications on your computer or smart device.

The print quality is set to high.

Solutions
Lower the quality setting.

Print Speed Priority is disabled.

Solutions
Select Settings on the home screen, select General Settings > Printer Settings > Print Speed Priority,
and then select On.

Quiet Mode is enabled.

Solutions
Disable Quiet Mode. The printing speed slows down when the printer is running in Quiet Mode.

Select on the home screen, and then select Off.

Drying takes a while for 2-sided printing.

Solutions
For 2-sided printing, one side of paper is printed and dried, and then the other side is printed. Because
the drying time differs depending on the environment, such as temperature or humidity, or the print data,
the printing speed may be slower.
Depending on the print data and environment, the printer takes time to process print jobs, or slows down
the print speed to maintain print quality.

Printing Is Too Slow While Using PostScript Printer Driver

The Print quality setting is high.

Solutions
Set the Thick-Paper1 setting to Thick-Paper2 in the printer driver.

273
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected

Scanning Speed Is Slow

Scanning at a high resolution.

Solutions
Try scanning at a lower resolution.

LCD Screen Gets Dark

The printer is in sleep mode.

Solutions
Tap anywhere on the LCD screen to return it to its former state.

Touch Screen Does Not Respond

The following causes can be considered.

A protective sheet has been stuck on the touch screen.

Solutions
If you stick a protective sheet on the touch screen, the optical touch screen may not respond. Remove the
sheet.

The screen is smeared.

Solutions
Turn off the printer, and then wipe the screen using a soft, dry cloth. If the screen is smeared, it may not
respond.

Cannot Operate from the Control Panel

When the user feature restriction is enabled, a user ID and password are required to print.
Solutions
If you do not know the password, contact your printer administrator.

"x" is Displayed on the Screen and you Cannot Select Photos

The image file is not supported.

Solutions
"x" is displayed on the LCD screen when the image file is not supported by the product. Use files
supported by the product.

& “Supported Data Specifications” on page 446

274
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected

Printing is Paused

The covers of the printer are open.

Solutions
Close the covers if you have opened them during printing.

Memory Device Is not Recognized

The memory device is set to disabled.

Solutions
On the control panel, select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device, and the
enable the memory device.

Cannot Save Data to a Memory Device

The following causes can be considered.

The setting to save to a memory device has not been set.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings on the home screen, then select
Save/Forward Settings > Save to Memory Device of Create a folder to save fax data. You cannot use the
external memory unless you set this setting.

The memory device is write-protected.

Solutions
Disable write protection on the memory device.

There is not enough free space on the memory device.

Solutions
Delete unnesesary data or insert another memory device.

Operation Sounds Are Loud

Quiet Mode is disabled.

Solutions
If operations sounds are too loud, enable Quiet Mode. Enabling this feature may reduce printing speed.
Without Fax: Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Quiet Mode
Fax: Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Print Settings > Quiet Mode

275
Solving Problems > The Printer Does Not Work as Expected > Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected

The Date and Time Are Incorrect

Error occurred in power supply.

Solutions
After a power failure caused by a lightning strike or if the power is left off for a long time, the clock may
show the wrong time. Set the date and the time correctly in Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings
> Date/Time Settings on the control panel.

The Root Certificate Needs to be Updated

The root certificate has expired.

Solutions
Run Web Config, and then update the root certificate.

Copies are Made or Faxes are Sent Unintentionally

Foreign objects are touching the optical touch panel.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Wake from Sleep, and then turn off Wake with
LCD Screen Touch. The printer will not return from sleep mode (power saving) until you press the P
button.

Slight Electric Shock when Touching the Pinter

Many peripherals are connected to the computer.

Solutions
If many peripherals are connected to the computer, you may feel a slight electric shock when touching the
printer. Install a ground wire to the computer that is connected to the printer.

Sender's Fax Number Not Displayed

The sender's fax number is not set to the sender's machine.

Solutions
The sender may not have set the fax number. Contact the sender.

Sender's Fax Number Displayed on Received Faxes is Wrong

The sender's fax number set to the sender's machine is wrong.

Solutions
The sender may have set the fax number incorrectly. Contact the sender.

276
Solving Problems > A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen

Cannot Make Calls on the Connected Telephone

The phone cable is not connected correctly.

Solutions
Connect the telephone to the EXT. port on the printer, and pick up the receiver. If you cannot hear a dial
tone through the receiver, connect the phone cable correctly.

Answering Machine Cannot Answer Voice Calls

The printer's Rings to Answer setting is set to less than the number of rings for your
answering machine.
Solutions
Select Slow(9,600bps) in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rings to
Answer, and then set to a number higher than the number of rings for your answering machine.

A Lot of Junk Faxes Have Been Received

The printer's feature to block junk faxes has not been set up.
Solutions
Make Rejection Fax settings in Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings.
“Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes” on page 531

A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen

If an error message is displayed on the LCD screen, follow the on-screen instructions or the solutions below to
solve the problem. If a message is displayed when you cannot scan to the shared folder from the control panel, see
the related information below.

Error Messages Solutions

Printer error. Turn the power off and on again. Remove any paper in the printer and disconnect any optional items. If
For details, see your documentation. the error message is still displayed after turning the power off and on
again, note the error code then contact Epson support.

Printer error. For details, see your The printer may be damaged. Contact Epson support or an authorized
documentation. Epson service provider to request repairs. However, non-printing
features such as scanning may be available.

Cannot print because XX is out of order. You can Turn the power off and on again, and then reinsert the paper cassette. If
print from another cassette. the error message is still displayed, contact Epson support or an
authorized Epson service provider to request repairs.

277
Solving Problems > A Message is Displayed on the LCD Screen

Error Messages Solutions

HDD error. Turn the printer off and back on The HDD is damaged. Contact Epson support or an authorized Epson
again. If the error continues, contact xxxxxxxx . service provider to replace the HDD device.
If the HDD is damaged, you will not be able to receive faxes. Also, you
may not be able to print or copy the following items.
❏ Documents that contain images.
❏ Copying more than 50 pages of Text & Image A4 documents may fail.

xxxxxxx are nearing the end of their service life. When it is time to replace a consumable item, the printer cannot be
used. Contact Epson or an authorized Epson service provider to request
replacement.

xxxxxxx are nearing the end of their service life. Contact Epson support or an authorized Epson service provider.

xxxxxxx is at the end of its service life. Replace it. Contact Epson support or an authorized Epson service provider.

You need to replace the following ink To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your
cartridge(s). Confirm the procedure, and then print head, it is designed to stop operation before the ink is completely
replace them. out. Replace to new ink cartridge.

No dial tone is detected. This problem might be resolved by tapping Settings > General
Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Line Type, and then
selecting PBX. If your phone system requires an external access code to
get an outside line, set the access code after selecting PBX. Use # (hash)
instead of the actual access code when entering an outside fax number.
This ensures the communication.
If the error message is still displayed, set the Dial Tone Detection
settings to disabled. However, disabling this feature may drop the first
digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number.

Failed to receive faxes because the fax data There are incoming faxes that are not printed and saved.
capacity is full. Touch the Job/Status at the
❏ Cannot Print
bottom of the Home Screen for details.
The printer cannot operate due to some error. Check the details and
solutions of the error.
❏ Cannot save in the computer or the memory device
Turn on the computer or connect a memory device to the printer.

The combination of the IP address and the Enter the correct IP address or default gateway. Contact your network
subnet mask is invalid. See your documentation administrator for assistance.
for more details.

To use cloud services, update the root certificate Run Web Config, and then update the root certificate.
from the Epson Web Config utility.

Check that the printer driver is installed on the Click Print Queue on the printer driver's Maintenance tab. Make sure
computer and that the port settings for the the printer port is selected correctly in Property > Port from the Printer
printer are correct. menu as follows.

Check that the printer driver is installed on the USB connection: USBXXX
computer and that the USB port settings for the Network connection: EpsonNet Print Port
printer are correct.

278
Solving Problems > Paper Gets Jammed > Preventing Paper Jams

Error Messages Solutions

Recovery Mode The printer has started in recovery mode because the firmware update
failed. Follow the steps below to try to update the firmware again.
Update Firmware
1. Connect the computer and the printer with a USB cable. (During
recovery mode, you cannot update the firmware over a network
connection.)
2. Visit your local Epson website for further instructions.

Related Information
& “Messages are Displayed on the Control Panel” on page 248

Paper Gets Jammed

Check the error displayed on the control panel and follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper including
any torn pieces. The LCD screen displays an animation that shows you how to remove jammed paper. Next, select
OK to clear the error.

! Caution:
Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the printer. If the printer starts operating, it
could cause an injury. Be careful not to touch the protruding parts to avoid injury.

c Important:
Remove the jammed paper carefully. Removing the paper vigorously may cause damage to the printer.

Preventing Paper Jams

Check the following if paper jams occur frequently.
❏ Place the printer on a flat surface and operate in the recommended environmental conditions.
“Environmental Specifications” on page 448
❏ Use the paper supported by this printer.
“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
❏ Follow paper handling precautions.
“Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35
❏ Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.
“Loading Paper” on page 37
❏ Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specified for paper.
❏ Load one sheet of paper at a time if you have loaded several sheets of paper.
❏ Make sure the paper size and paper type settings match the actual paper size and paper type loaded in the
printer.
“Setting the Paper Type” on page 36
❏ Check the paper condition. If paper absorbs moisture, it becomes wavy or curls that may cause the trouble.

279
Solving Problems > It is Time to Replace the Ink Cartridges > Ink Cartridge Handling Precautions

❏ If paper jams occur frequently, try using newly opened papers.

❏ Try disabling Print Speed Priority. On the home screen, tap Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings >
Print Speed Priority, and then disable the setting.
❏ When you punch holes using the hole punch unit installed in the staple finisher or the booklet finisher, adjust
the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

It is Time to Replace the Ink Cartridges

Ink Cartridge Handling Precautions

Read the following instructions before replacing ink cartridges.

Handling Precautions
❏ Store ink cartridges at normal room temperature and keep them away from direct sunlight.
❏ Epson recommends using the ink cartridge before the date printed on the package.
❏ For best results, store ink cartridge packages with their bottom down.
❏ After bringing an ink cartridge inside from a cold storage site, allow it to warm up at room temperature for at
least 12 hours before using it.
❏ Do not touch the sections shown in the illustration. Doing so may prevent normal operation and printing.

❏ Install all ink cartridges; otherwise you cannot print.

❏ Do not turn off the printer during ink charging. If the ink charging is incomplete, you may not be able to print.
❏ Do not leave the printer with the ink cartridges removed or do not turn off the printer during cartridge
replacement. Otherwise, ink remaining in the print head nozzles will dry out and you may not be able to print.
❏ If you need to remove an ink cartridge temporarily, make sure you protect the ink supply area from dirt and
dust. Store the ink cartridge in the same environment as the printer, with the ink supply port facing sideways.
Because the ink supply port is equipped with a valve designed to contain the release of excess ink, there is no
need to supply your own covers or plugs.
❏ Removed ink cartridges may have ink around the ink supply port, so be careful not to get any ink on the
surrounding area when removing the cartridges.

280
Solving Problems > It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box > Maintenance Box Handling Precautions

❏ This printer uses ink cartridges equipped with a green chip that monitors information such as the amount of
remaining ink for each cartridge. This means that even if the cartridge is removed from the printer before it is
expended, you can still use the cartridge after reinserting it back into the printer.
❏ To ensure you receive premium print quality and to help protect your print head, a variable ink safety reserve
remains in the cartridge when your printer indicates to replace the cartridge. The yields quoted for you do not
include this reserve.
❏ Although the ink cartridges may contain recycled materials, this does not affect printer function or
performance.
❏ Specifications and appearance of the ink cartridge are subject to change without prior notice for improvement.
❏ Do not disassemble or remodel the ink cartridge, otherwise you may not be able to print normally.
❏ Quoted yields may vary depending on the images that you are printing, the paper type that you are using, the
frequency of your prints and environmental conditions such as temperature.
❏ Do not drop or knock it against hard objects; otherwise, the ink may leak.

Ink Consumption
❏ To maintain optimum print head performance, some ink is consumed from all cartridges not only during
printing but also during maintenance operations such as print head cleaning.
❏ The ink in the ink cartridges supplied with your printer is partly used during initial setup. In order to produce
high quality printouts, the print head in your printer will be fully charged with ink. This one-off process
consumes a quantity of ink and therefore these cartridges may print fewer pages compared to subsequent ink
cartridges.

Replacing Ink Cartridge

When a message is displayed prompting you to replace the ink cartridge, select How To and then view the
animations displayed on the control panel to learn how to replace the ink cartridge.

Related Information
& “Ink Cartridge Codes” on page 396
& “Ink Cartridge Handling Precautions” on page 280

It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box

Maintenance Box Handling Precautions

Read the following instructions before replacing the maintenance box.

281
Solving Problems > It is Time to Replace the Maintenance Box > Replacing a Maintenance Box

❏ Do not touch the sections shown in the illustration. Doing so may prevent normal operation and you may get
smeared with ink.

❏ Do not tilt the used maintenance box until after it is sealed in the plastic bag; otherwise ink may leak.
❏ Keep the maintenance box out of direct sunlight.
❏ Do not store the maintenance box in high or freezing temperatures.
❏ Do not reuse a maintenance box which has been removed and left detached for a long period. Ink inside the box
will have solidified and no more ink can be absorbed.
❏ Do not remove the maintenance box and its cover except when replacing the maintenance box; otherwise ink
may leak.

Replacing a Maintenance Box

In some print cycles a very small amount of surplus ink may be collected in the maintenance box. To prevent ink
leakage from the maintenance box, the printer is designed to stop printing when the absorbing capacity of the
maintenance box has reached its limit. Whether and how often this is required will vary according to the number
of pages you print, the type of material that you print and the number of cleaning cycles that the printer performs.
When a message is displayed prompting you to replace the maintenance box, refer to the animations displayed on
the control panel. The need for replacement of the box does not mean that your printer has ceased to operate in
accordance with its specifications. The Epson warranty does not cover the cost of this replacement. It is a user-
serviceable part.
Note:
When the maintenance box is full, you cannot print and clean the print head until it is replaced to avoid ink leakage.
However, you can perform operations that do not use ink such as scanning.

Related Information
& “Maintenance Box Code” on page 396
& “Maintenance Box Handling Precautions” on page 281

282
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Print Quality is Poor

Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is

Poor

Print Quality is Poor

Printout is Scuffed, Color is Missing or Banding or Unexpected Colors Appear

The print head nozzles may be clogged.

Solutions
Perform a nozzle check to see if the print head nozzles are clogged. Perform a nozzle check, and then
clean the print head if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. If you have not used the printer for a
long time, the print head nozzles may be clogged and ink drops may not be discharged.

& “Checking the Clogged Nozzles” on page 198

Printout Comes Out as a Blank Sheet

Multiple sheets of paper are fed into the printer at the same time.
Solutions
See the following to prevent multiple sheets of paper being fed into the printer at the same time.

& “Several Sheets of Paper are Fed at a Time” on page 216

283
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Print Quality is Poor

Paper Is Smeared or Scuffed

The following causes can be considered.

Unsupported paper is being used.

Solutions
Use paper supported by this printer.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

& “Unavailable Paper Types” on page 395

Paper is loaded incorrectly.

Solutions
When horizontal banding (perpendicular to the printing direction) appears, or the top or bottom of the
paper is smeared, load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.

& “Loading Paper” on page 37

Too many sheets are loaded in the printer.

Solutions
Do not load more than the maximum number of sheets specified for the paper. For plain paper, do not
load above the line indicated by the triangle symbol on the edge guide.

& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

The paper is curled.

Solutions
Place the paper on a flat surface to check if it is curled. If it is, flatten it.

Paper is wet.
Solutions
Check the paper condition. If paper absorbs moisture, it becomes wavy or curls that may cause the
trouble.

Old paper is used.

Solutions
If papers are smeared or scuffed frequently, try using newly opened papers.

284
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Print Quality is Poor

Paper is not sealed.

Solutions
Keep paper that you opened once sealed in a plastic bag.

The print head is rubbing the surface of the paper.

Solutions
When printing on thick paper, the print head is close to the printing surface and the paper may be
scuffed. In this case, enable the reduce scuff setting. If you enable this setting, print quality may decline or
printing may slow down.
Control panel
Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings, and then enable Thick Paper. See the printer's
LCD screen for the setting options.

Print density is set to high.

Solutions
If paper is still smeared after enabling Thick Paper, reduce the print density.

The back of the paper was printed before the side that had already been printed was dry.
Solutions
When performing manual 2-sided printing, make sure that the ink is completely dry before reloading the
paper.

When printing using automatic 2-sided printing, the print density is too high and the drying
time is too short.
Solutions
When using the automatic 2-sided printing feature and printing high density data such as images and
graphs, set the print density to lower and the drying time to longer.

& “Printing on 2-Sides” on page 56

& “Printing on 2-Sides” on page 84

Images or Photos are Printed in Unexpected Colors

The following causes can be considered.

285
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Print Quality is Poor

The print head nozzles may be clogged.

Solutions
Perform a nozzle check to see if the print head nozzles are clogged. Perform a nozzle check, and then
clean the print head if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. If you have not used the printer for a
long time, the print head nozzles may be clogged and ink drops may not be discharged.

& “Checking the Clogged Nozzles” on page 198

Color correction has been applied.

Solutions
When printing from the control panel or from the Windows printer driver, the Epson auto photo
adjustment setting is applied by default depending on the paper type. Try change the setting.
❏ Control panel
Change the Fix Photo setting from Auto to any other option. If changing the setting does not work,
select Enhance Off as the Fix Photo setting.
❏ Windows printer driver
On the More Options tab, select Custom in Color Correction, and then click Advanced. Change the
Scene Correction setting from Automatic to any other option. If changing the setting does not work,
use any color correction method other than PhotoEnhance in Color Management.

& “Advanced Menu Options for JPEG Settings” on page 97

& “Adjusting the Print Color” on page 72

Grayscale sections and monochrome photos are printed using black and color inks.
Solutions
In the Windows printer driver, select the Maintenance tab, Extended Settings, and then enable the Print
grayscale using black ink only setting.
❏ On (except photo): Prints grayscale sections, except for photos, using black ink only. All Photos
including monochrome photos are printed using both black and color inks.
❏ On (full page): Prints all grayscale sections, including photos, using black ink only. Note that color
photos may be printed in different colors. In this case, select On (except photo).

The Position, Size, or Margins of the Printout Are Incorrect

The following causes can be considered.

286
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Print Quality is Poor

The paper is loaded incorrectly.

Solutions
Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.

& “Loading Paper” on page 37

The size of the paper is set incorrectly.

Solutions
Select the appropriate paper size setting.

The margin setting in the application software is not within the print area.
Solutions
Adjust the margin setting in the application so that it falls within the printable area.

& “Printable Area” on page 439

Printed Characters Are Incorrect or Garbled

The following causes can be considered.

The USB cable is not connected correctly.

Solutions
Connect the USB cable securely to the printer and the computer.

There is a job waiting to be printed.

Solutions
If there are any paused print jobs, printed characters may be corrupted.

The computer has been manually put into the Hibernate mode or the Sleep mode while
printing.
Solutions
Do not put the computer manually into the Hibernate mode or the Sleep mode while printing. Pages of
garbled text may be printed next time you start the computer.

287
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Print Quality is Poor

You are using the printer driver for a different printer.

Solutions
Make sure that the printer driver you are using is for this printer. Check the printer name on the top of
the printer driver window.

Mosaic-Like Patterns in the Prints

Images or photos with a low resolution were printed.

Solutions
When printing images or photos, print using high-resolution data. Images on web sites are often low
resolution although they look good enough on the display, and so print quality may decline.

Printer Does Not Print Correctly While Using PostScript Printer Driver
The following causes can be considered.

There is a problem with the data.

Solutions
❏ If the file is created in an application that allows you to change the data format, such as Adobe
Photoshop, make sure that the settings in the application match the settings in the printer driver.
❏ EPS files made in binary format may not be printed correctly. Set the format to ASCII when making
EPS files in an application.
❏ For Windows, the printer cannot print binary data when it is connected to the computer using a USB
interface. Set the Output Protocol setting on the Device Settings tab in the printer properties to
ASCII or TBCP.
❏ For Windows, select the appropriate substitution fonts on the Device Settings tab in the printer
properties.

Print Quality Is Poor While Using PostScript Printer Driver

Color settings have not been made.

Solutions
You cannot make color settings on the Paper/Quality tab in the printer driver. Click Advanced, and then
set the Color Mode setting.

288
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Copy Quality is Poor

Copy Quality is Poor

Copies are Scuffed, Color is Missing or Banding or Unexpected Colors Appear

The print head nozzles may be clogged.

Solutions
Perform a nozzle check to see if the print head nozzles are clogged. Perform a nozzle check, and then
clean the print head if any of the print head nozzles are clogged. If you have not used the printer for a
long time, the print head nozzles may be clogged and ink drops may not be discharged.

& “Checking the Clogged Nozzles” on page 198

Blurry Copies, Vertical Banding, or Misalignment

The following causes can be considered.

The originals are folded or wrinkled.

Solutions
❏ When using the ADF
Do not place the originals on in ADF. Place the originals on the scanner glass instead.
❏ When using the scanner glass
Flatten out the folds and wrinkles in the originals as much as possible. When placing originals, try
placing a piece of card and so on over the document so that it does not lift up, and remains in close
contact with the surface.

289
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Copy Quality is Poor

Printout Comes Out as a Blank Sheet

Multiple sheets of paper are fed into the printer at the same time.
Solutions
See the following to prevent multiple sheets of paper being fed into the printer at the same time.

& “Several Sheets of Paper are Fed at a Time” on page 216

Paper Is Smeared or Scuffed

The following causes can be considered.

Paper is loaded incorrectly.

Solutions
When horizontal banding (perpendicular to the printing direction) appears, or the top or bottom of the
paper is smeared, load paper in the correct direction and slide the edge guides to the edges of the paper.

& “Loading Paper” on page 37

The paper path is smeared.

Solutions
When vertical banding (horizontal to the printing direction) appears, or the paper is smeared, clean the
paper path.

The paper is curled.

Solutions
Place the paper on a flat surface to check if it is curled. If it is, flatten it.

290
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Copy Quality is Poor

The printhead is rubbing the surface of the paper.

Solutions
When copying on thick paper, the print head is close to the printing surface and the paper may be
scuffed. In this case, enable the reduce scuff setting.
Select Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings, and then enable Thick Paper on the control panel.
If you enable this setting, copy quality may decline or may slow down.

The Position, Size, or Margins of the Copies are Incorrect

The following causes can be considered.

The paper is loaded incorrectly.

Solutions
Load paper in the correct direction, and slide the edge guide against the edge of the paper.

& “Loading Paper” on page 37

The size of the paper is set incorrectly.

Solutions
Select the appropriate paper size setting.

The originals are not placed correctly.

Solutions
❏ Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks.
❏ If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original slightly away from the edge of the
scanner glass. You cannot scan the area within approximately 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the edge of the
scanner glass.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

There is some dust or stains on the scanner glass.

Solutions
Clean the scanner glass and the document cover using a dry, soft, clean cloth. If there is dust or stains
around the originals on the glass, the copy area may extend to include the dust or stains, resulting in the
wrong copying position or small images.

& “Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 200

& “Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 200

291
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Copy Quality is Poor

Original Size is wrong in copy setting.

Solutions
Select the appropriate Original Size in the copy setting.

Uneven Colors, Smears, Dots, or Straight Lines Appear in the Copied Image

The following causes can be considered.

There is dust or dirt on the originals or the scanner glass.

Solutions
Remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals, and clean the scanner glass.

& “Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 200

There is dust or dirt on the ADF or originals.

Solutions
Clean the ADF, and remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals.

& “Cleaning the ADF” on page 201

The original was pressed with too much force.

Solutions
If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots may occur.
Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

The copy density setting is too high.

Solutions
Lower the copy density setting.

& “Basic Menu Options for Copying” on page 111

292
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Copy Quality is Poor

Moiré (Cross-Hatch) Patterns Appear in the Copied Image

If the original is a printed document such as a magazine or a catalog, a dotted moiré pattern
appears.
Solutions
Change the reduce and enlarge setting. If a moiré pattern still appears, place the original at a slightly
different angle.

& “Basic Menu Options for Copying” on page 111

An Image of the Reverse Side of the Original Appears in the Copied Image

The following causes can be considered.

When scanning thin originals, images on the back may be scanned at the same time.
Solutions
Place the original on the scanner glass and then place a piece of black paper over it.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

The copy density setting is too high.

Solutions
Lower the copy density setting.

& “Basic Menu Options for Copying” on page 111

293
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Scanned Image Problems

Scanned Image Problems

Uneven Colors, Dirt, Spots, and so on Appear when Scanning from the Scanner
Glass

There is dust or dirt on the originals or the scanner glass.

Solutions
Remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals, and clean the scanner glass.

& “Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 200

The original was pressed with too much force.

Solutions
If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots may occur.
Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

Straight Lines Appear when Scanning from ADF

There is dust or dirt on the ADF or originals.

Solutions
Clean the ADF, and remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals.

& “Cleaning the ADF” on page 201

294
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Scanned Image Problems

Blurry Scans, Vertical Banding, or Misalignment

The originals are folded or wrinkled.

Solutions
❏ When using the ADF
Do not place the originals on in ADF. Place the originals on the scanner glass instead.
❏ When using the scanner glass
Flatten out the folds and wrinkles in the originals as much as possible. When placing originals, try
placing a piece of card and so on over the document so that it does not lift up, and remains in close
contact with the surface.

Offset Appears in the Background of Scanned Images

When scanning thin originals, images on the back may be scanned at the same time.
Solutions
When scanning from the scanner glass, place black paper or a desk pad over the original.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

Cannot Scan the Correct Area on the Scanner Glass

The originals are not placed correctly.

Solutions
❏ Make sure the original is placed correctly against the alignment marks.

295
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > Scanned Image Problems

❏ If the edge of the scanned image is missing, move the original slightly away from the edge of the
scanner glass. You cannot scan the area within approximately 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) from the edge of the
scanner glass.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

There is dust or dirt on the scanner glass.

Solutions
When scanning from the control panel and selecting auto scan area cropping function, remove any trash
or dirt from the scanner glass and document cover. If there is any trash or dirt around the original, the
scanning range expands to include it.

Cannot Solve Problems in the Scanned Image

Check the following if you have tried all of the solutions and have not solved the problem.

There are problems with the scanning software settings.

Solutions
Use Epson Scan 2 Utility to initialize the settings for the scanner driver "Epson Scan 2”.
Note:
Epson Scan 2 Utility is an application that comes with Epson Scan 2.

1. Start the Epson Scan 2 Utility.

❏ Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select EPSON > Epson Scan 2 Utility.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP
Click the start button, and then select All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2 >
Epson Scan 2 Utility.
❏ Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Software > Epson Scan 2 Utility.

2. Select the Other tab.

3. Click Reset.

If initialization does not solve the problem, uninstall and re-install Epson Scan 2.

& “Installing or Uninstalling Applications Separately” on page 205

296
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor

The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor

Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor

The following causes can be considered.

There is dust or dirt on the originals or the scanner glass.

Solutions
Remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals, and clean the scanner glass.

& “Cleaning the Scanner Glass” on page 200

The original was pressed with too much force.

Solutions
If you press with too much force, blurring, smudges, and spots may occur.
Do not press with too much force on the original or the document cover.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

Straight Lines Appear when Sending Faxes from the ADF

The following causes can be considered.

There is dust or dirt on the ADF or originals.

Solutions
Clean the ADF, and remove any dust or dirt that adheres to the originals.

& “Cleaning the ADF” on page 201

297
Solving Problems > Printing, Copying, Scanning, and Faxing Quality is Poor > The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor

The Iimage Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor

The following causes can be considered.

The Original Type setting is wrong.

Solutions
Select Fax > Fax Settings > Scan Settings > Original Type, and then change the setting. When the
original you are sending contains text and images, set this to Photo.

The resolution is set to low.

Solutions
If you do not know the performance of the sender’s fax machine, set the following before sending a fax.
❏ Select Fax > Fax Settings and then make the Resolution setting to set the highest quality image.
❏ Select Fax > Fax Settings and then enable Direct Send.
Note that if you set Resolution to Super Fine or Ultra Fine but you send the fax without enabling
Direct Send, the fax may be sent at a lower resolution.

ECM setting is disabled.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings and enable the ECM setting on the
control panel. This may clear errors that occur due to connection problems. Note that the speed of
sending and receiving faxes may be slower than when ECM is disabled.

An Image of the Reverse Side of the Original Appears in the Sent Fax

The following causes can be considered.

When scanning thin originals, images on the back may be scanned at the same time.
Solutions
Place the original on the scanner glass and then place a piece of black paper over it.

& “Placing Originals” on page 42

298
Solving Problems > Cannot Solve Problem After Trying All Solutions > Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems

The density setting is high when sending faxes.

Solutions
Select Fax > Fax Settings > Scan Settings > Density, and then lower the setting.

Received Fax Quality is Poor

The Image Quality of Received Faxes is Poor

The following causes can be considered.

ECM setting is disabled.

Solutions
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings and enable the ECM setting on the
control panel. This may clear errors that occur due to connection problems. Note that the speed of
sending and receiving faxes may be slower than when ECM is disabled.

The image quality setting is low on the sender's fax machine.

Solutions
Ask the sender to send faxes at a higher quality.

Cannot Solve Problem After Trying All Solutions

If you cannot solve the problem after trying all of the solutions, contact Epson support.
If you cannot solve printing or copying problems, see the following related information.

Related Information
& “Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems” on page 299

Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems

Try the following problems in order starting at the top until you solve the problem.
❏ Make sure you match the paper type loaded in the printer and the paper type set on the printer to the paper
type settings in the printer driver.
“Paper Size and Type Settings” on page 35
❏ Use a higher quality setting on the control panel or the printer driver.

299
Solving Problems > Cannot Solve Problem After Trying All Solutions > Cannot Solve Printing or Copying Problems

❏ Reinstall the ink cartridges already installed in the printer.

Reinstalling the ink cartridges may clear clogging in the print head nozzles and allow the ink to flow smoothly.
However, because the ink is consumed when the ink cartridge is reinstalled, a message asking you to replace the
ink cartridge may be displayed depending on the amount of ink remaining.
“It is Time to Replace the Ink Cartridges” on page 280
❏ Run a nozzle check to see if the print head nozzles are clogged.
If the nozzles are clogged, clean the print head.
Note that print head cleaning uses some ink.
“Checking the Clogged Nozzles” on page 198
❏ Check that you are using genuine Epson ink cartridges.
Try to use genuine Epson ink cartridges. This product is designed to adjust colors based on the use of genuine
Epson ink cartridges. The use of non-genuine ink cartridges may cause print quality to decline.
“Ink Cartridge Codes” on page 396
❏ Make sure that there are no paper fragments left inside the printer.
❏ Check the paper.
Check if the paper is curled or loaded with the printable side facing up.
“Paper Handling Precautions” on page 35
“Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392
“Unavailable Paper Types” on page 395
❏ Make sure that you are not using an old ink cartridge.
For best results, Epson recommends using up ink cartridges before the best before date printed on the package,
or within six months of opening the package, whichever is earlier.

If you cannot solve the problem by checking the solutions above, you may need to request repairs. Contact Epson
support.

Related Information
& “Before Contacting Epson” on page 596
& “Contacting Epson Support” on page 596

300
Adding or Replacing the Computer or
Devices

Connecting to a Printer that has been Connected to the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

Re-setting the Network Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309

Checking the Network Connection Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320

Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting to a Printer that has been Connected t…

Connecting to a Printer that has been Connected to

the Network
When the printer has already been connected to the network, you can connect a computer or a smart device to the
printer over the network.

Using a Network Printer from a Second Computer

We recommend using the installer to connect the printer to a computer. You can run the installer using one of the
following methods.
❏ Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn
❏ Setting up using the software disc (only for the models that come with a software disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the software disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

Selecting the Printer

Follow the on-screen instructions until the following screen is displayed, select the printer name you want to
connect to, and then click Next.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

302
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Re-setting the Network Connection > When Repl…

Using a Network Printer from a Smart Device

You can connect a smart device to the printer using one of the following methods.

Connecting over a wireless router

Connect the smart device to the same network as the printer.
See the following for more details.
“Making Settings for Connecting to the Smart Device” on page 304

Connecting by Wi-Fi Direct

Connect the smart device to the printer directly without a wireless router.
See the following for more details.
“Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi Direct)” on page 309

Re-setting the Network Connection

This section explains how to make the network connection settings and change the connection method when
replacing the wireless router or the computer.

When Replacing the Wireless Router

When you replace the wireless router, make settings for the connection between the computer or the smart device
and the printer.
You need to make these settings if you change your Internet service provider and so on.

Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer

We recommend using the installer to connect the printer to a computer. You can run the installer using one of the
following methods.
❏ Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn
❏ Setting up using the software disc (only for the models that come with a software disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the software disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

Selecting the Connection Methods

Follow the on-screen instructions until the following screen is displayed.

303
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Re-setting the Network Connection > When Chan…

Select Change connection method for printer (for new network router or changing USB to network, etc.) on
the Select Your Operation screen, and then click Next.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

If you cannot connect, see the following to try to solve the problem.
❏ Windows: “Cannot connect to a Network” on page 219
❏ Mac OS: “Cannot connect to a Network” on page 228

Making Settings for Connecting to the Smart Device

You can use the printer from a smart device when you connect the printer to the same Wi-Fi network (SSID) as the
smart device. To use the printer from a smart device, set up from the following website. Access to the website from
the smart device that you want to connect to the printer.
http://epson.sn > Setup

When Changing the Computer

When changing the computer, make connection settings between the computer and the printer.

Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer

We recommend using the installer to connect the printer to a computer. You can run the installer using one of the
following methods.
❏ Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn

304
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Re-setting the Network Connection > Changing t…

❏ Setting up using the software disc (only for the models that come with a software disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the software disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

Changing the Connection Method to the Computer

This section explains how to change the connection method when the computer and the printer have been
connected.

Changing the Network Connection from Ethernet to Wi-Fi

Change the Ethernet connection to Wi-Fi connection from the printer's control panel. The changing connection
method is basically the same as the Wi-Fi connection settings.

Related Information
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel” on page 307

Changing the Network Connection from Wi-Fi to Ethernet

Follow the steps below to change from a Wi-Fi connection to an Ethernet connection.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Wired LAN Setup.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Changing from USB to a Network Connection

Using the installer and re-set up in a different connection method.
❏ Setting up from the website
Access the following website, and then enter the product name. Go to Setup, and then start setting up.
http://epson.sn
❏ Setting up using the software disc (only for the models that come with a software disc and users with Windows
computers with disc drives.)
Insert the software disc into the computer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.

Selecting Change the Connection Methods

Follow the on-screen instructions until the following screen is displayed.

305
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Re-setting the Network Connection > Changing t…

Select Change connection method for printer (for new network router or changing USB to network, etc.) on
the Select Your Operation screen, and then click Next.

Select the network connection that you want to use, Connect via wireless network (Wi-Fi) or Connect via wired
LAN (Ethernet), and then click Next.

Follow the on-screen instructions.

306
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Re-setting the Network Connection > Making Wi-…

Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel

You can make network settings from the printer's control panel in several ways. Choose the connection method
that matches the environment and conditions that you are using.
If you know the information for the wireless router such as SSID and password, you can make settings manually.
If the wireless router supports WPS, you can make settings by using push button setup.
After connecting the printer to the network, connect to the printer from the device that you want to use (computer,
smart device, tablet, and so on.)

Related Information
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 307
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)” on page 308
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)” on page 309

Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password

You can set up a Wi-Fi network by entering the information necessary to connect to a wireless router from the
printer's control panel. To set up using this method, you need the SSID and password for a wireless router.
Note:
If you are using an wireless router with its default settings, the SSID and password are on the label. If you do not know the
SSID and password, contact the person who set up the wireless router, or see the documentation provided with the wireless
router.

1. Tap on the home screen.

2. Tap Router.

3. Tap Start Setup.

4. Tap Wi-Fi Setup.

If you have made Ethernet settings, check the message and then tap Yes.

5. Tap Wi-Fi Setup Wizard.

6. Follow the on-screen instructions to select the SSID, enter the password for the wireless router, and start setup.
If you want to check the network connection status for the printer after setup is complete, see the related
information link below for details.

307
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Re-setting the Network Connection > Making Wi-…

Note:
❏ If you do not know the SSID, check if it is written on the label of the wireless router. If you are using the wireless
router with its default settings, use the SSID written on the label. If you cannot find any information, see the
documentation provided with the wireless router.
❏ The password is case-sensitive.
❏ If you do not know the password, check if the information is written on the label of the wireless router. On the label,
the password may be written "Network Key", "Wireless Password", and so on. If you are using the wireless router
with its default settings, use the password written on the label.

Related Information
& “Entering Characters” on page 32
& “Checking the Network Connection Status” on page 320

Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)

You can automatically set up a Wi-Fi network by pressing a button on the wireless router. If the following
conditions are met, you can set up by using this method.
❏ The wireless router is compatible with WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
❏ The current Wi-Fi connection was established by pressing a button on the wireless router.

Note:
If you cannot find the button or you are setting up using the software, see the documentation provided with the wireless
router.

1. Tap on the home screen.

2. Tap Router.

3. Tap Start Setup.

4. Tap Wi-Fi Setup.

If you have made Ethernet settings, check the message and then tap Yes.

5. Tap Push Button Setup(WPS).

6. Follow the on-screen instructions.

If you want to check the network connection status for the printer after setup is complete, see the related
information link below for details.
Note:
If connection fails, restart the wireless router, move it closer to the printer, and try again. If it still does not work, print a
network connection report and check the solution.

Related Information
& “Checking the Network Connection Status” on page 320

308
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)

You can automatically connect to an wireless router by using a PIN code. You can use this method to set up if an
wireless router is capable of WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup). Use a computer to enter a PIN code into the wireless
router.

1. Tap on the home screen.

2. Tap Router.

3. Tap Start Setup.

4. Tap Wi-Fi Setup.

If you have made Ethernet settings, check the message and then tap Yes.

5. Tap Others > PIN Code Setup(WPS)

6. Follow the on-screen instructions.

If you want to check the network connection status for the printer after setup is complete, see the related
information link below for details.
Note:
See the documentation provided with your wireless router for details on entering a PIN code.

Related Information
& “Checking the Network Connection Status” on page 320

Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi-Fi

Direct)
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) allows you to connect a smart device directly to the printer without a wireless router and
print from the smart device.

About Wi-Fi Direct

Use this connection method when you are not using Wi-Fi at home or at the office, or when you want to connect
the printer and the computer or smart device directly. In this mode, the printer acts as an wireless router and you

309
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

can connect the devices to the printer without having to use a standard wireless router. However, devices directly
connected to the printer cannot communicate with each other through the printer.

The printer can be connected by Wi-Fi or Ethernet, and Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection simultaneously.
However, if you start a network connection in Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection when the printer is connected
by Wi-Fi, the Wi-Fi is temporarily disconnected.

Connecting to an iPhone, iPad or iPod touch using Wi-Fi Direct

This method allows you to connect the printer directly to an iPhone, iPad or iPod touch without a wireless router.
The following conditions are required to use this function. If your environment does not match these conditions,
you can connect by selecting Other OS Devices. See the related information link below for details on connecting.
❏ iOS 11 or later
❏ Using the standard camera application to scan the QR code
❏ Epson iPrint version 7.0 or later

Epson printing app, such as Epson iPrint, is used to print from a smart device. Install Epson printing app on the
smart device in advance.
Note:
You only need to make these settings for the printer and the smart device that you want to connect to once. Unless you
disable Wi-Fi Direct or restore the network settings to their defaults, you do not need to make these settings again.

1. Tap on the home screen.

2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct.

3. Tap Start Setup.

310
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

4. Tap iOS.

The QR code is displayed on the printer's control panel.

5. On your iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, start the standard Camera app, and then scan the QR code displayed on
the printer's control panel in PHOTO mode.

Use the Camera app for iOS 11 or later. You cannot connect to the printer using the Camera app for iOS 10 or
earlier. Also, you cannot connect using an app for scanning QR codes. If you cannot connect, select Other
Methods on the printer's control panel. See the related information link below for details on connecting.

311
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

6. Tap the notification displayed on the screen of the iPhone, iPad or iPod touch.

7. Tap Join.

8. On the printer's control panel, select Next.

9. On the iPhone, iPad or iPod touch, start Epson printing app.

Examples of Epson printing apps

10. On the Epson printing app screen, tap Printer is not selected..

11. Select the printer that you want to connect to.

312
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

See the information displayed on the printer's control panel to select the printer.

12. On the printer's control panel, select Complete.

For smart devices that have been connected to the printer before, select the network name (SSID) on the smart
device's Wi-Fi screen to connect them again.

Related Information
& “Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 401
& “Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Android using Wi-Fi Direct” on page 315

Connecting to Android Devices using Wi-Fi Direct

This method allows you to connect the printer directly to your Android device without a wireless router. The
following conditions are required to use this function.
❏ Android 4.4 or later
❏ Epson iPrint version 7.0 or later

Epson iPrint is used to print from a smart device. Install Epson iPrint on the smart device in advance.
Note:
You only need to make these settings for the printer and the smart device that you want to connect to once. Unless you
disable Wi-Fi Direct or restore the network settings to their defaults, you do not need to make these settings again.

1. Tap on the home screen.

2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct.

3. Tap Start Setup.

313
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

4. Tap Android.

5. On the smart device, start Epson iPrint.

6. On the Epson iPrint screen, tap Printer is not selected..

7. Select the printer that you want to connect to.

314
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

See the information displayed on the printer's control panel to select the printer.

Note:
Printers may not been displayed depending on the Android device. If printers are not displayed, connect by selecting
Other OS Devices. See the related information link below for connecting.

8. When the device connection approval screen is displayed, select Approve.

9. When the device registration confirmation screen is displayed, select whether you register the approved device
to the printer.

10. On the printer's control panel, select Complete.

For smart devices that have been connected to the printer before, select the network name (SSID) on the smart
device's Wi-Fi screen to connect them again.

Related Information
& “Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 401
& “Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Android using Wi-Fi Direct” on page 315

Connecting to Devices other than iOS and Android using Wi-Fi

Direct
This method allows you to connect the printer directly to smart devices without a wireless router.
Note:
You only need to make these settings for the printer and the smart device that you want to connect to once. Unless you
disable Wi-Fi Direct or restore the network settings to their defaults, you do not need to make these settings again.

1. Tap on the home screen.

2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct.

3. Tap Start Setup.

315
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

4. Tap Other OS Devices.

The Network Name(SSID) and Password for Wi-Fi Direct for the printer are displayed.

316
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

5. On the smart device's Wi-Fi screen, select the SSID shown on the printer's control panel, and then enter the
password.

6. On the printer's control panel, select Next.

7. On the smart device, start Epson printing app.

Examples of Epson printing apps

317
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

8. On the Epson printing app screen, tap Printer is not selected..

9. Select the printer that you want to connect to.

See the information displayed on the printer's control panel to select the printer.

10. On the printer's control panel, select Complete.

For smart devices that have been connected to the printer before, select the network name (SSID) on the smart
device's Wi-Fi screen to connect them again.

Related Information
& “Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 401

Disconnecting Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Connection

There are two methods available to disable a Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection; you can disable all connections
by using the printer's control panel, or disable each connection from the computer or the smart device. When you
want to disable all connections, see the related information link below for details.

318
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Connecting a Smart Device and Printer Directly (Wi…

c Important:
When Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection disabled, all computers and smart devices connected to the printer in
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection are disconnected.

Note:
If you want to disconnect a specific device, disconnect from the device instead of the printer. Use one of the following
methods to disconnect the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection from the device.
❏ Disconnect the Wi-Fi connection to the printer's network name (SSID).
❏ Connect to another network name (SSID).

Related Information
& “Changing the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Settings Such as the SSID” on page 319

Changing the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) Settings Such as the SSID

When Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) connection is enabled, you can change the settings from > Wi-Fi
Direct > Start Setup > Change, and then the following menu items are displayed.

Change Network Name

Change the Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) network name (SSID) used for connecting to the printer to your arbitrary
name. You can set the network name (SSID) in ASCII characters that is displayed on the software keyboard on the
control panel. You can enter up to 22 characters.
When changing the network name (SSID), all connected devices are disconnected. Use the new network name
(SSID) if you want to re-connect the device.

Change Password
Change the Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) password for connecting to the printer to your arbitrary value. You can set
the password in ASCII characters that is displayed on the software keyboard on the control panel. You can enter 8
to 22 characters.
When changing the password, all connected devices are disconnected. Use the new password if you want to re-
connect the device.

Change Frequency Range

Change the frequency range of Wi-Fi Direct used for connecting to the printer. You can select 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz.
When changing the frequency range, all connected devices are disconnected. Re-connect the device.
Note that you cannot re-connect from devices that do not support 5 GHz frequency range when changing to 5
GHz.
Depending on the region, this setting may not be displayed.

Disable Wi-Fi Direct

Disable Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) settings of the printer. When disabling it, all devices connected to the printer in
Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection are disconnected.

319
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Chec…

Restore Default Settings

Restore all Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) settings to their defaults.
The Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) connection information of the smart device saved to the printer is deleted.
Note:
You can also set up from the Network tab > Wi-Fi Direct on Web Config for the following settings.
❏ Enabling or disabling Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP)
❏ Changing network name (SSID)
❏ Changing password
❏ Changing the frequency range
Depending on the region, this setting may not be displayed.
❏ Restoring the Wi-Fi Direct (simple AP) settings

Checking the Network Connection Status

You can check the network connection status in the following way.

Related Information
& “Checking the Network Connection Status from the Control Panel” on page 320
& “Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

Checking the Network Connection Status from the Control Panel

You can check the network connection status using the network icon or the network information on the printer’s
control panel.

Checking the Network Connection Status using the Network Icon

You can check the network connection status and strength of the radio wave using the network icon on the
printer's home screen.

Related Information
& “Guide to the Network Icon” on page 30

320
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Printi…

Displaying Detailed Network Information on the Control Panel

When your printer is connected to the network, you can also view other network-related information by selecting
the network menus you want to check.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status.

3. To check the information, select the menus that you want to check.
❏ Wired LAN/Wi-Fi Status
Displays the network information (device name, connection, signal strength, and so on) for Ethernet or Wi-
Fi connections.
❏ Wi-Fi Direct Status
Displays whether Wi-Fi Direct is enabled or disabled, and the SSID, password and so on for Wi-Fi Direct
connections.
❏ Email Server Status
Displays the network information for email server.
❏ Print Status Sheet
Prints a network status sheet. The information for Ethernet, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Direct, and so on is printed on
two or more pages.

Printing a Network Connection Report

You can print a network connection report to check the status between the printer and the wireless router.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check.

The connection check starts.

3. Select Print Check Report.

4. Print the network connection report.

If an error has occurred, check the network connection report, and then follow the printed solutions.

Related Information
& “Messages and Solutions on the Network Connection Report” on page 322

321
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Printi…

Messages and Solutions on the Network Connection Report

Check the messages and error codes on the network connection report, and then follow the solutions.

a. Error code
b. Messages on the Network Environment

Related Information
& “E-1” on page 323
& “E-2, E-3, E-7” on page 323
& “E-5” on page 324
& “E-6” on page 324
& “E-8” on page 324
& “E-9” on page 325
& “E-10” on page 325
& “E-11” on page 325
& “E-12” on page 326
& “E-13” on page 326
& “Message on the Network Environment” on page 327

322
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Printi…

E-1

Solutions:
❏ Make sure the Ethernet cable is securely connected to your printer and to your hub or other network device.
❏ Make sure your hub or other network device is turned on.
❏ If you want to connect the printer by Wi-Fi, make Wi-Fi settings for the printer again because it is disabled.

E-2, E-3, E-7

Solutions:
❏ Make sure your wireless router is turned on.
❏ Confirm that your computer or device is connected correctly to the wireless router.
❏ Turn off the wireless router. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
❏ Place the printer closer to your wireless router and remove any obstacles between them.
❏ If you have entered the SSID manually, check if it is correct. Check the SSID from the Network Status part on
the network connection report.
❏ If an wireless router has multiple SSIDs, select the SSID that is displayed. When the SSID is using a non-
compliant frequency, the printer does not display them.
❏ If you are using push button setup to establish a network connection, make sure your wireless router supports
WPS. You cannot use push button setup if your wireless router does not support WPS.
❏ Makes sure your SSID uses only ASCII characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols). The printer cannot
display an SSID that contains non-ASCII characters.
❏ Makes sure you know your SSID and password before connecting to the wireless router. If you are using a
wireless router with its default settings, the SSID and password are located on a label on the wireless router. If
you do not know your SSID and password, contact the person who set up the wireless router, or see the
documentation provided with the wireless router.
❏ If you are connecting to an SSID generated from a tethering smart device, check for the SSID and password in
the documentation provided with the smart device.
❏ If your Wi-Fi connection suddenly disconnects, check for the conditions below. If any of these conditions are
applicable, reset your network settings by downloading and running the software from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup

❏ Another smart device was added to the network using push button setup.
❏ The Wi-Fi network was set up using any method other than push button setup.

Related Information
& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 304
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings from the Control Panel” on page 307

323
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Printi…

E-5

Solutions:
Make sure the wireless router’s security type is set to one of the following. If it is not, change the security type on
the wireless router, and then reset the printer’s network settings.
❏ WEP-64 bit (40 bit)
❏ WEP-128 bit (104 bit)
❏ WPA PSK (TKIP/AES)*
❏ WPA2 PSK (TKIP/AES)*
❏ WPA (TKIP/AES)
❏ WPA2 (TKIP/AES)
❏ WPA3-SAE (AES)
❏ WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise

* WPA PSK is also known as WPA Personal. WPA2 PSK is also known as WPA2 Personal.

E-6

Solutions:
❏ Check if MAC address filtering is disabled. If it is enabled, register the printer’s MAC address so that it is not
filtered. See the documentation provided with the wireless router for details. You can check the printer’s MAC
address from the Network Status part on the network connection report.
❏ If your wireless router is using shared authentication with WEP security, make sure the authentication key and
index are correct.
❏ If the number of connectable devices on the wireless router is less than the number of network devices that you
want to connect, make settings on the wireless router to increase the number of connectable devices. See the
documentation provided with the wireless router to make settings.

Related Information
& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 304

E-8

Solutions:
❏ Enable DHCP on the wireless router if the printer’s Obtain IP Address setting is set to Auto.
❏ If the printer’s Obtain IP Address setting is set to Manual, the IP address you manually set is invalid due to out
of range (for example: 0.0.0.0). Set a valid IP address from the printer’s control panel.

Related Information
& “Network Settings” on page 416

324
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Printi…

E-9

Solutions:
Check the following.
❏ Devices are turned on.
❏ You can access the Internet and other computers or network devices on the same network from the devices you
want to connect to the printer.

If still does not connect your printer and network devices after confirming the above, turn off the wireless router.
Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on. Then reset your network settings by downloading and running the
installer from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup

Related Information
& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 304

E-10

Solutions:
Check the following.
❏ Other devices on the network are turned on.
❏ Network addresses (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) are correct if you have set the printer’s
Obtain IP Address to Manual.

Reset the network address if they are incorrect. You can check the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
from the Network Status part on the network connection report.

Related Information
& “Network Settings” on page 416

E-11

Solutions:
Check the following.
❏ The default gateway address is correct if you set the printer’s TCP/IP Setup setting to Manual.
❏ The device that is set as the default gateway is turned on.

Set the correct default gateway address. You can check the default gateway address from the Network Status part
on the network connection report.

Related Information
& “Network Settings” on page 416

325
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Printi…

E-12

Solutions:
Check the following.
❏ Other devices on the network are turned on.
❏ The network addresses (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) are correct if you are entering them
manually.
❏ The network addresses for other devices (subnet mask and default gateway) are the same.
❏ The IP address does not conflict with other devices.

If still does not connect your printer and network devices after confirming the above, try the following.
❏ Turn off the wireless router. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
❏ Make network settings again using the installer. You can run it from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup
❏ You can register several passwords on a wireless router that uses WEP security type. If several passwords are
registered, check if the first registered password is set on the printer.

Related Information
& “Network Settings” on page 416
& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 304

E-13

Solutions:
Check the following.
❏ Network devices such as a wireless router, hub, and router are turned on.
❏ The TCP/IP Setup for network devices has not been set up manually. (If the printer’s TCP/IP Setup is set
automatically while the TCP/IP Setup for other network devices is performed manually, the printer’s network
may differ from the network for other devices.)

If it still does not work after checking the above, try the following.
❏ Turn off the wireless router. Wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it on.
❏ Make network settings on the computer that is on the same network as the printer using the installer. You can
run it from the following website.
http://epson.sn > Setup
❏ You can register several passwords on a wireless router that uses the WEP security type. If several passwords are
registered, check if the first registered password is set on the printer.

Related Information
& “Network Settings” on page 416
& “Making Settings for Connecting to the Computer” on page 304

326
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Chec…

Message on the Network Environment

Message Solution

The Wi-Fi environment needs to be After moving the printer closer to the wireless router and removing any
improved. Turn the wireless router off and obstacles between them, turn off the wireless router. Wait for about 10
then turn it on. If the connection does not seconds, and then turn it on. If it still does not connect, see the
improve, see the documentation for the documentation supplied with the wireless router.
wireless router.

*No more devices can be connected. Computer and smart devices that can be connected simultaneously are
Disconnect one of the connected devices if connected in full in the Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) connection. To add another
you want to add another one. computer or smart device, disconnect one of the connected devices or
connect it to the other network first.
You can confirm the number of wireless devices which can be connected
simultaneously and the number of connected devices by checking the
network status sheet or the printer’s control panel.

The same SSID as Wi-Fi Direct exists in the On the printer’s control panel, go to Wi-Fi Direct Setup screen and select the
environment. Change the Wi-Fi Direct SSID menu to change the setting. You can change the network name following
if you cannot connect a smart device to the after DIRECT-XX-. Enter within 22 characters.
printer.

Printing a Network Status Sheet

You can check the detailed network information by printing it.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Network Status.

3. Select Print Status Sheet.

4. Check the message, and then print the network status sheet.

Checking the Network of the Computer (Windows only)

By using the command prompt, check the connection status of the computer and the connection path to the
printer. This will lead you to solve the problems.

327
Adding or Replacing the Computer or Devices > Checking the Network Connection Status > Chec…

❏ ipconfig command
Display the connection status of the network interface that is currently used by the computer.
By comparing the setting information with actual communication, you can check whether the connection is
correct. In case there are multiple DHCP servers on the same network, you can find out the actual address
assigned to the computer, the referred DNS server, etc.
❏ Format : ipconfig /all
❏ Examples :

❏ pathping command
You can confirm the list of routers passing through the destination host and the routing of communication.

❏ Format : pathping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx

❏ Examples : pathping 192.0.2.222

328
Using Optional Items

List of Optional Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Access Point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

High Capacity Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Staple Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Booklet Finisher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Settings Menu List (When Finisher is Installed). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Paper Cassette Lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

Using Optional Items > List of Optional Items

List of Optional Items

Staple Finisher

No. Optional Item Code Overview

A Staple Finisher* C12C935501 Sorts and staples paper before ejecting it.
Punches holes using the optional hole punch
C12C935511 (For users in Australia
unit.
and New Zealand)
“Staple Finisher” on page 336
C12C935041 (For users in India)
C12C935531 (For users in Taiwan)

B Finisher Bridge Unit C12C935101 Use this when installed with the staple finisher
or booklet finisher.
C12C935161 (For users in India)

C High Capacity Tray C12C933041 Allows you to load up to Approx. 3000 sheets of
plain paper (80 g/m2).
“High Capacity Tray” on page 333

D Paper Cassette Lock C12C933231 Locks the paper cassette when the
administrator wants to manage paper.
“Paper Cassette Lock” on page 389

*: To operate the staple finisher you need to install the finisher bridge unit.

330
Using Optional Items > List of Optional Items

Internal Optional Items for the Staple Finisher

No. Optional Item Code Overview

A 2/4 Hole Punch Unit C12C935171 Punches holes at 70 mm intervals.

B 2/3 Hole Punch Unit C12C935181 Punches holes at 80 mm intervals.

C Staple Cartridge C12C935401 For flat stitching.

Booklet Finisher

No. Optional Item Code Overview

A Booklet Finisher* C12C935071 Sorts, saddle stitches, folds, and staples the
paper before ejecting it. Punches holes using
C12C935551 (For users in Australia
the optional hole punch unit.
and New Zealand)
“Booklet Finisher” on page 351
C12C935081 (For users in India)
C12C935581 (For users in Taiwan)

B Finisher Bridge Unit C12C935101 Use this when installed with the staple finisher
or booklet finisher.
C12C935161 (For users in India)

C High Capacity Tray C12C933041 Allows you to load up to Approx. 3000 sheets of
plain paper (80 g/m2).
“High Capacity Tray” on page 333

331
Using Optional Items > List of Optional Items

No. Optional Item Code Overview

D Paper Cassette Lock C12C933231 Locks the paper cassette when the
administrator wants to manage paper.
“Paper Cassette Lock” on page 389

*: To operate the booklet finisher you need to install the finisher bridge unit.

Internal Optional Items for the Booklet Finisher

No. Optional Item Code Overview

A 2/4 Hole Punch Unit C12C935171 Punches holes at 70 mm intervals.

B 2/3 Hole Punch Unit C12C935181 Punches holes at 80 mm intervals.

C Staple Cartridge C12C935401 For flat stitching.

D Staple Cartridge C12C935411 For saddle stitching.

No. Optional Item Code Overview

A 10/100/1000 Base- C12C934471 Two wired LAN networks are available. The
T,Ethernet communication speed is a high-speed interface
C12C934481 (For users in India)
that supports 1 Gbit/s.
“10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet” on page 379

332
Using Optional Items > High Capacity Tray

No. Optional Item Code Overview

B Super G3/G3 Multi Fax C12C934491 You can add up to 3 lines. You can use it as a fax,
Board or use it as a network fax to send and receive
C12C935271 (For users in Australia
documents on your computer. In addition, you
and New Zealand)
can connect to multiple phone lines by adding a
C12C934501 (For users in India) fax board. This allows you to send to a number
of destinations in a short time, or you can
C12C935691 (For users in Taiwan) dedicate one line to receiving faxes thereby
reducing the time that you cannot receive calls.*
*: External phones are not available.
“Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board” on page 374

Access Point
The following access points are shown in the guide on the LCD screen when a paper jam occurs.

*:Numbers S7 to S10 are only for the booklet finisher.

High Capacity Tray

Allows you to load up to Approx. 3000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).

333
Using Optional Items > High Capacity Tray > Loading Paper in the High Capacity Tray

Setting the High Capacity Tray in the Printer Driver

To use the installed high capacity tray, the printer driver needs to acquire the necessary information.

Setting the High Capacity Tray in the Printer Driver - Windows

Note:
Log on to your computer as an administrator.

1. Open the Optional Settings tab from the printer properties.

❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers
in Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer, or press and hold it, select Printer properties, and
then click the Optional Settings tab.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-
click on your printer, or press and hold it, select Printer properties, and then click the Optional Settings
tab.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Scanner and Cameras, and then
check if the printer is displayed. Right-click on your printer, select Printer properties, and then click the
Optional Settings.
❏ Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Click the start button, and then select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click on
your printer, select Property, and then click Optional Settings.
❏ Windows XP
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Scanner and Cameras,
and then check if the printer is displayed.

2. Select Acquire from Printer, and then click Get.

3. Click OK.

Setting the High Capacity Tray in the Printer Driver - Mac OS

1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Options (or Driver).

2. Make settings according to the type of optional unit.

3. Click OK.

Loading Paper in the High Capacity Tray

You can load paper by referring to the animations displayed on the printer's LCD screen.

334
Using Optional Items > High Capacity Tray > High Capacity Tray Specification

Select , and then select How To > Load paper. Select the paper type and paper source you want to use to display
the animations. Select Finish to close the animation screen.

Problems with the High Capacity Tray

Paper Does Not Feed from the High Capacity Tray

You need to make settings in the printer driver.

Related Information
& “Setting the High Capacity Tray in the Printer Driver” on page 334

Paper Gets Jammed in the High Capacity Tray

Check the error displayed on the control panel and follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper including
any torn pieces. The LCD screen displays an animation that shows you how to remove jammed paper. Next, select
OK to clear the error.

! Caution:
Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the printer. If the printer starts operating, it
could cause an injury. Be careful not to touch the protruding parts to avoid injury.

c Important:
Remove the jammed paper carefully. Removing the paper vigorously may cause damage to the printer.

High Capacity Tray Specification

Available Paper Type: Plain Paper, Recycled Paper, Thick Paper

Size*: A4 or Letter
Weight of Paper: 60 to 160g/m2

335
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Staple Finisher Part Names

Available Number of Settings Approx. 3000 sheets for 80 g/m2 paper

Power Supplied from the computer

Dimensions Width: 321 mm (12.6 in.)

Depth: 620 mm (24.4 in.)
Height: 504 mm (19.8 in.)

Weight Approx. 27.3 kg

*: The available paper sizes are set and fixed when the printer is installed.

Staple Finisher
Sorts and staples paper before ejecting it. Punches holes using the optional hole punch unit.

Staple Finisher Part Names

No. Optional Item Overview

A1 Staple Finisher Sorts and staples paper before ejecting it. Punches holes using the optional hole
punch unit.

B Finisher Bridge Unit To operate the staple finisher or booklet finisher you need to install the finisher
bridge unit.

A Finisher Tray Holds sorted or stapled documents.

B Output tray Mainly stores received faxes.

336
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Printer Settings When Using the Staple Finsher

No. Optional Item Overview

C Staple Cartridge For flat stitching.

D Punch Waste Tray Collects punch hole scraps.

Setting the Staple Finisher in the Printer Driver

The process if the same as for the high capacity tray.

Related Information
& “Setting the High Capacity Tray in the Printer Driver - Windows” on page 334

Printer Settings When Using the Staple Finsher

You need to make settings on the printer to use the Staple Finisher.
❏ When copying
Tap Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Copy, and then select Finisher tray.
❏ When faxing
Tap Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Fax, and then select Output tray or Finisher
tray.
❏ When printing from a computer, memory device, and so on.
Tap Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Other, and then select Finisher tray.
When printing from a computer, you can specify whether or not to use the finisher unit from the Output Tray
menu on the printer driver.

c Important:
When using the finisher tray, do not remove your printouts while the print job is still in progress. The print position
may be misaligned and the staple position may move from its original position.

337
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

Using the Staple Finisher

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Sorting from a Computer

You can sort the printouts by stacking each set of copies by alternately rotating 90 degrees. If you install the
optional booklet finisher, you can also sort by offsetting each set of copies.

Rotate Sort:
Stacks the printouts alternately in the portrait orientation and the landscape orientation when printing
multiple copies. This feature uses two paper sources. Load paper in the portrait orientation in the paper
source, load paper in the landscape orientation in the other paper source, and then select Auto Select
as the Paper Source setting. Select Auto Select or Face Down Tray as theOutput Tray setting. The
printouts are stacked in the Face Down Tray.

Shift Sort:
Offsets each set of copies when printing multiple copies. Auto Select or Finisher Tray must be selected
as the Output Tray setting.

Print Settings (Windows)

1. On the printer driver’s Finishing tab, select the method for stacking multiple copies from the Sort setting.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Print Settings (Windows PostScript)

1. On the printer driver's Advanced Options, click Printer Features in Document Options.

2. Select the method for stacking multiple copies from the Sort setting.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

338
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 74
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Print Settings (Mac OS)

1. Select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select an option from the Sort setting.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

Print Settings (Mac OS PostScript)

1. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, and then select Output from Feature Sets.

2. Select an option from the Sort setting.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS” on page 88
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Stapling Each Set of Copies from a Computer

You can use the optional staple finisher or booklet finisher to staple the printed paper.

339
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

Print Settings (Windows)

1. On the printer driver’s Finishing tab, select the stapling position from Staple.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Print Settings (Windows PostScript)

1. On the printer driver's Advanced Options, click Printer Features in Document Options.

2. Select the stapling position from Staple.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 74
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Print Settings (Mac OS)

1. Select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select the stapling position from Staple.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

Print Settings (Mac OS PostScript)

1. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, and then select Output from Feature Sets.

2. Select the stapling position from Staple.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

340
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS” on page 88
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Punching Each Set of Copies from a Computer

You can use the optional staple finisher or booklet finisher, and then the punch unit to punch holes on the printed
paper. If you want to use the punch hole feature, select the punch unit from Printer Properties > Optional
Settings > Printer Information > Manual Settings > Settings > Hole Punch in the printer driver.

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

Print Settings (Windows)

1. On the printer driver’s Finishing tab, select the hole punching position from Punch.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Print Settings (Windows PostScript)

1. On the printer driver's Advanced Options, click Printer Features in Document Options.

2. Select the hole punching position from Punch.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

341
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

Related Information
& “Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 74
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Print Settings (Mac OS)

1. Select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select the hole punching position from Punch.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

Print Settings (Mac OS PostScript)

1. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, and then select Output from Feature Sets.

2. Select the hole punching position from Punch.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS” on page 88
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Sorting from a Memory Device

You can print JPEG, PDF, and TIFF files from a memory device and sort by offsetting each set of copies.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

342
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select the file type and the file you want to print.

4. Select the Advanced tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select Shift Sort in Eject Paper.

6. Tap x.

Printing with Stapling or Punch Holes from a Memory Device

You can print JPEG, PDF, and TIFF files from a memory device and staple them or add punch holes.

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select the file type and the file you want to print.

4. Select the Advanced tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select the location in Staple or Punch.

6. Tap x.

343
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Sorting from Storage

You can print files from storage and sort by offsetting each set of copies.

1. Select Storage on the home screen.

2. Select the folder in which the file that you want to print is saved, and then select the file.

3. Select Print Settings.

4. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select Shift Sort in Eject Paper.

6. Tap x.

Printing with Stapling or Punch Holes from Storage

You can print files from storage and staple them or add punch holes.

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

1. Select Storage on the home screen.

2. Select the folder in which the file that you want to print is saved, and then select the file.

344
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Using the Staple Finisher

3. Select Print Settings.

4. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select the location in Staple or Punch.

6. Tap x.

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Offsetting

You can sort by offsetting each set of copies.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

4. Select Shift Sort in Eject Paper, and then select OK.

5. Tap x.

Copying and Stapling or Punching Holes

You can copy originals and staple them or add punch holes.

345
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Problems with the Staple Finisher

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

4. Select the staple position in the Staple option or the punch holes position in the Punch option, and then select
OK.

5. Tap x.

Replacing the Staple Cartridge for the Staple Finisher

When it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message is displayed on the LCD screen. Follow the on-screen
instructions to replace the cartridge.

Removing Punch Scraps from the Staple Finisher

When it is time to remove punch scraps, a message is displayed on the LCD screen. Follow the on-screen
instructions to remove punch scraps.

Problems with the Staple Finisher

The Staple Finisher is not Recognized

Set the optional unit in the printer driver.

Related Information
& “Setting the Staple Finisher in the Printer Driver” on page 337

Paper is not Ejected to the Staple Finisher

❏ Remove any scraps of paper left inside the staple finisher.
❏ Remove any objects that are around the staple finisher.

346
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Menu Options for Printing from a Computer (When Staple Finisher Ins…

Paper or Staples Get Jammed in the Staple Finisher

Check the error displayed on the control panel and follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper including
any torn pieces or jammed staples. The LCD screen displays an animation that shows you how to remove jammed
paper or staples. Next, select OK to clear the error.

! Caution:
Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the printer. If the printer starts operating, it
could cause an injury. Be careful not to touch the protruding parts to avoid injury.

c Important:
Remove the jammed paper carefully. Removing the paper vigorously may cause damage to the printer.

Cannot Staple

Paper edges are not aligned.

You can reduce paper misalignments by enabling Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Optimize
Finishing > Staple. Note that printing may take longer.

Menu Options for Printing from a Computer (When Staple Finisher

Installed)

Finishing Tab Windows (When Staple Finisher Installed)

Sort:
Shift Sort:
Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or Finisher Tray
as the Output Tray setting.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

Related Information
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

347
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Menu Options for Printing from a Computer (When Staple Finisher Ins…

Advanced Options Windows PostScript (When Staple Finisher Installed)

Document Options:
Printer Features:
❏ Sort:
Shift Sort: Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or
Finisher Tray as the Output Tray setting.
❏ Staple:
Select the staple location.
❏ Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

Related Information
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Menu Options for FinishingMac OS (When Staple Finisher Installed)

Sort:
Shift Sort:
Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or Finisher Tray
as the Output Tray setting.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

Related Information
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

Menu Options for Printer FeaturesMac OS PostScript (When Staple Finisher

Installed)
Feature Sets:
❏ Sort:
Shift Sort: Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or
Finisher Tray as the Output Tray setting.
❏ Staple:
Select the staple location.
❏ Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

348
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Menu Options for Copying (When Staple Finisher Installed)

Related Information
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Menu Options for Printing from Memory Devices or Storage (When

Staple Finisher Installed)
Select the following on the printer's control panel.
❏ Select Memory Device, select the file type, and then select the Advanced tab.
❏ Select Storage, and then select the folder and file. Select Print Settings > Basic Settings tab.

Finishing (When Staple Finisher installed)

Eject Paper:
❏ Shift Sort:
Offset each set of copies.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

Punch:
Select the location for the punch holes.

Menu Options for Copying (When Staple Finisher Installed)

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Copy > Basic Settings.

Finishing(When Staple Finisher installed)

Eject Paper:
❏ Shift Sort:
Offset each set of copies.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

Punch:
Select the location for the punch holes. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

349
Using Optional Items > Staple Finisher > Staple Finisher Specifications

Staple Finisher Specifications

Weight of Paper 60 to 250 g/m2

Available Paper Sizes A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6*, Legal, Letter
*:Ejected from the output tray only

Paper Type Plain Paper, Thick Paper, High Quality Plain Paper

Ejecting Capacity Output Tray 250 sheets

Finisher Tray Standard (Stack) Ejecting, Shift Ejecting

❏ A4/B5/Letter 1-sided/2-sided: 4000 sheets
❏ A3/B4/Legal 1-sided/2-sided: 1500 sheets
❏ Same width mixed loading 1-sided/2-sided: 1500 sheets

Staple
❏ A4/B5/Letter 50 sets or 1500 sheets (Whichever comes first)
❏ A3/B4/Legal 50 sets or 1500 sheets (Whichever comes first)

Shift Ejecting Available A3, B4, A4, B5, Legal, Letter

Paper Sizes

Staple*1 Available A3, B4, A4, B5, Legal, Letter

Paper Sizes

Amount of 60 to 90 g/m2
Available
Paper ❏ A4/B5/Letter 50 sheets
❏ A3/B4/Legal 30 sheets

91 to 105 g/m2
❏ A4/B5/Letter 30 sheets
❏ A3/B4/Legal 20 sheets

You can only use one sheet of thick paper (up to 160 g/m2) for the front
and back cover.

Staple One at the front, one at the back, and two at the edges.
Position

Punch*2 Available A3, B4*, A4, B5*, Legal, Letter

Paper Sizes
*:Not supported for 4 Hole

Punch 2/4 Hole, 2/3 Hole

Position

Power Supply Rating AC 100-240 V*3

Maximum Power Consumption 170 W

350
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher

Dimensions with the Printer Storage

Width: 1684 mm (66.3 in.)
Depth: 757 mm (29.8 in.)
Height: 1243 mm (48.9 in.)
Printing
Width: 2183 mm (85.9 in.)
Depth: 757 mm (29.8 in.)
Height: 1243 mm (48.9 in.)

Weight Approx. 310.6 kg

*1: Includes 5000 staples.

*2: You need the optional hole punch unit.
*3: Supplied from the printer.

Booklet Finisher
Sorts, saddle stitches, folds, and staples the paper before ejecting it. Punches holes using the optional hole punch
unit.

351
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Booklet Finisher Part Names

Booklet Finisher Part Names

No. Optional Item Overview

A2 Booklet Finisher Sorts, saddle stitches, folds, and staples the paper before ejecting it. Punches
holes using the optional hole punch unit.

B Finisher Bridge Unit To operate the staple finisher or booklet finisher you need to install the finisher
bridge unit.

A Staple Cartridge For saddle stitching.

B Finisher Tray Holds sorted or stapled documents.

C Output tray Mainly stores received faxes.

D Staple Cartridge For flat stitching.

E Inner Unit Pull out when a paper jam occurs.

F Punch waste tray Collects punch hole scraps.

G Booklet Tray Holds sorted or stapled documents.

“Ejecting Documents Continuously” on page 366

352
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

Setting the Booklet Finisher in the Printer Driver

The process if the same as for the high capacity tray.

Related Information
& “Setting the High Capacity Tray in the Printer Driver - Windows” on page 334

Printer Settings When Using the Booklet Finsher

You need to make settings on the printer to use the Booklet Finisher.
❏ When copying
Tap Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Copy, and then select Finisher tray.
❏ When faxing
Tap Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Fax, and then select Output tray or Finisher
tray.
❏ When printing from a computer, memory device, and so on.
Tap Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Other, and then select Finisher tray.
When printing from a computer, you can specify whether or not to use the finisher unit from the Output Tray
menu on the printer driver.

c Important:
When using the finisher tray, do not remove your printouts while the print job is still in progress. The print position
may be misaligned and the staple position may move from its original position.

Using the Booklet Finisher

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Sorting from a Computer

You can sort the printouts by stacking each set of copies by alternately rotating 90 degrees. If you install the
optional booklet finisher, you can also sort by offsetting each set of copies.

Rotate Sort:
Stacks the printouts alternately in the portrait orientation and the landscape orientation when printing
multiple copies. This feature uses two paper sources. Load paper in the portrait orientation in the paper
source, load paper in the landscape orientation in the other paper source, and then select Auto Select

353
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

as the Paper Source setting. Select Auto Select or Face Down Tray as theOutput Tray setting. The
printouts are stacked in the Face Down Tray.

Shift Sort:
Offsets each set of copies when printing multiple copies. Auto Select or Finisher Tray must be selected
as the Output Tray setting.

Print Settings (Windows)

1. On the printer driver’s Finishing tab, select the method for stacking multiple copies from the Sort setting.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Print Settings (Windows PostScript)

1. On the printer driver's Advanced Options, click Printer Features in Document Options.

2. Select the method for stacking multiple copies from the Sort setting.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 74
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Print Settings (Mac OS)

1. Select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select an option from the Sort setting.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

354
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

Print Settings (Mac OS PostScript)

1. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, and then select Output from Feature Sets.

2. Select an option from the Sort setting.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS” on page 88
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Stapling Each Set of Copies from a Computer

You can use the optional staple finisher or booklet finisher to staple the printed paper.

Print Settings (Windows)

1. On the printer driver’s Finishing tab, select the stapling position from Staple.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Print Settings (Windows PostScript)

1. On the printer driver's Advanced Options, click Printer Features in Document Options.

2. Select the stapling position from Staple.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

355
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 74
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Print Settings (Mac OS)

1. Select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select the stapling position from Staple.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

Print Settings (Mac OS PostScript)

1. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, and then select Output from Feature Sets.

2. Select the stapling position from Staple.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS” on page 88
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Punching Each Set of Copies from a Computer

You can use the optional staple finisher or booklet finisher, and then the punch unit to punch holes on the printed
paper. If you want to use the punch hole feature, select the punch unit from Printer Properties > Optional
Settings > Printer Information > Manual Settings > Settings > Hole Punch in the printer driver.

356
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

Print Settings (Windows)

1. On the printer driver’s Finishing tab, select the hole punching position from Punch.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Print Settings (Windows PostScript)

1. On the printer driver's Advanced Options, click Printer Features in Document Options.

2. Select the hole punching position from Punch.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 74
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Print Settings (Mac OS)

1. Select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select the hole punching position from Punch.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

357
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

Print Settings (Mac OS PostScript)

1. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, and then select Output from Feature Sets.

2. Select the hole punching position from Punch.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS” on page 88
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Folding or Creating a Booklet of Each Set of Copies from a Computer

You can use the optional Booklet Finisher to fold or saddle stitch the printed paper.

Print Settings (Windows)

1. On the printer driver’s Finishing tab, select Fold (Print Outside), Fold (Print Inside), or Fold and Saddle
Stitch from Fold/Saddle Stitch.

2. Click Settings, set the Binding Edgethe and so on, and then click OK.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

Note:
❏ If booklets or paper remain in the booklet tray, you will not be able to start bookbinding printing. Make sure there is
nothing on the booklet tray.
❏ If you want to print on one side, set 2-Sided Printing on the Main tab to Off. When printing on one side, you
cannot set Start Page or Booklet in Binding Settings.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Windows” on page 48
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Print Settings (Windows PostScript)

1. On the printer driver's Advanced Options, click Printer Features in Document Options.

358
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

2. Select Fold or Fold and Saddle from Fold / Saddle.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

Note:
If booklets or paper remain in the booklet tray, you will not be able to start bookbinding printing. Make sure there is
nothing on the booklet tray.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing a Document Using the PostScript Printer Driver (Windows)” on page 74
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Print Settings (Mac OS)

1. Select Finishing from the pop-up menu, and then select the method for fold or bind from the Fold/Saddle
Stitch.

2. Set the other items, and then click OK.

Note:
If booklets or paper remain in the booklet tray, you will not be able to start bookbinding printing. Make sure there is
nothing on the booklet tray.

3. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from a Computer - Mac OS” on page 79
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

Print Settings (Mac OS PostScript)

1. Select Printer Features from the pop-up menu, and then select Output from Feature Sets.

2. Select Fold or Fold and Saddle from Fold / Saddle.

3. Set the other items, and then click OK.

Note:
If booklets or paper remain in the booklet tray, you will not be able to start bookbinding printing. Make sure there is
nothing on the booklet tray.

4. Click Print.

Related Information
& “Printing from the PostScript Printer Driver on Mac OS” on page 88
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

359
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Sorting from a Memory Device

You can print JPEG, PDF, and TIFF files from a memory device and sort by offsetting each set of copies.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select the file type and the file you want to print.

4. Select the Advanced tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select Shift Sort in Eject Paper.

6. Tap x.

Printing with Stapling or Punch Holes from a Memory Device

You can print JPEG, PDF, and TIFF files from a memory device and staple them or add punch holes.

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

1. Connect the memory device to the printer's external interface USB port.
“Inserting an External USB Device” on page 46

360
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

2. Select Memory Device on the home screen.

3. Select the file type and the file you want to print.

4. Select the Advanced tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select the location in Staple or Punch.

6. Tap x.

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Sorting from Storage

You can print files from storage and sort by offsetting each set of copies.

1. Select Storage on the home screen.

2. Select the folder in which the file that you want to print is saved, and then select the file.

3. Select Print Settings.

4. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select Shift Sort in Eject Paper.

6. Tap x.

361
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

Printing with Stapling or Punch Holes from Storage

You can print files from storage and staple them or add punch holes.

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

1. Select Storage on the home screen.

2. Select the folder in which the file that you want to print is saved, and then select the file.

3. Select Print Settings.

4. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

5. Select the location in Staple or Punch.

6. Tap x.

362
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

Ejecting Each Set of Printouts with Saddle Stitching or Folding from Storage
You can print files from storage, and then eject each set of printouts with saddle stitching or folding.

1. Select Storage on the home screen.

2. Select the folder in which the file that you want to print is saved, and then select the file.

3. Select Print Settings.

4. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Booklet.

5. Select Saddle Stitch or Half Fold, and then enable the setting.

6. Make detailed settings such as the number of sheets for saddle stitching or folding, and the paper settings.
Note:
If booklets or paper remain in the booklet tray, you will not be able to start bookbinding printing. Make sure there is
nothing on the booklet tray.

7. Tap x.

Stacking Each Set of Copies by Offsetting

You can sort by offsetting each set of copies.

363
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

4. Select Shift Sort in Eject Paper, and then select OK.

5. Tap x.

Copying and Stapling or Punching Holes

You can copy originals and staple them or add punch holes.

c Important:
Adjust the data so that it is not printed at the punch position. If you punch on the printed area, it may cause punch
failure or a paper jam.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, and then select Finishing.

4. Select the staple position in the Staple option or the punch holes position in the Punch option, and then select
OK.

5. Tap x.

364
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Using the Booklet Finisher

Copying Files and Creating Booklets Using Saddle Stitching or Folding

You can eject each set of copies with saddle stitching or folding.

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Copy on the home screen.

3. Select the Basic Settings tab, select 2-Sided, and then select 2→2-Sided or 1→2-Sided.

4. Specify other settings such as the original orientation and the binding position as necessary, and then select
OK.

5. Select Reduce/Enlarge > Auto, and then select OK.

6. Select the Advanced tab, select Booklet > Booklet, and then enable Booklet.

7. Specify the biding position and binding margin and then select OK.

8. Select Saddle Stitch or Half Fold, and then enable the setting.

9. Specify the details as the number of sheet for saddle stitch or half fold and paper setting .
Note:
If booklets or paper remain in the booklet tray, you will not be able to start bookbinding printing. Make sure there is
nothing on the booklet tray.

10. Tap x.

Replacing the Stapler Cartridge for the Booklet Finisher

When it is time to replace the staple cartridge, a message is displayed on the LCD screen. Follow the on-screen
instructions to replace the cartridge.

365
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Problems with the Booklet Finisher

Removing Punch Scraps from the Booklet Finisher

When it is time to remove punch scraps, a message is displayed on the LCD screen. Follow the on-screen
instructions to remove punch scraps.

Ejecting Documents Continuously

When a given number of documents are ejected, the job stops to prevent paper jams. If you pull out the stopper
and lower it, you can eject documents continuously preventing the printer from detecting when the tray is full. In
this case the documents drop to the floor from the edge of the finisher booklet tray one by one.

Problems with the Booklet Finisher

The Booklet Finisher is not Recognized

Set the optional unit in the printer driver.

Related Information
& “Setting the Booklet Finisher in the Printer Driver” on page 353

Paper is not Ejected to the Booklet Finisher

❏ Remove any scraps of paper left inside the booklet finisher.
❏ Remove any objects that are around the booklet finisher.

Paper or Staples Get Jammed in the Booklet Finisher

Check the error displayed on the control panel and follow the instructions to remove the jammed paper including
any torn pieces or jammed staples. The LCD screen displays an animation that shows you how to remove jammed
paper or staples. Next, select OK to clear the error.

366
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Menu Options for Printing from a Computer (When Booklet Finisher I…

! Caution:
❏ Never touch the buttons on the control panel while your hand is inside the printer. If the printer starts operating,
it could cause an injury. Be careful not to touch the protruding parts to avoid injury.
❏ Never touch the areas that are marked with a caution label inside the booklet finisher. Those areas may be very
hot and high temperature may cause burns.

c Important:
Remove the jammed paper carefully. Removing the paper vigorously may cause damage to the printer.

Cannot Staple

Paper edges are not aligned.

You can reduce paper misalignments by enabling Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Optimize
Finishing > Staple. Note that printing may take longer.

Menu Options for Printing from a Computer (When Booklet Finisher

Installed)

Finishing Tab Windows (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

Sort:
Shift Sort:
Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or Finisher Tray
as the Output Tray setting.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

367
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Menu Options for Printing from a Computer (When Booklet Finisher I…

Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

Fold/Saddle Stitch:
Select whether to fold or fold and saddle stitch the print outs. You can set the binding edge, binding
margin, and create folded booklets on the binding setting screen.

Related Information
& “Finishing Tab” on page 51

Advanced Options Windows PostScript (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

Document Options:
Printer Features:
❏ Sort:
Shift Sort: Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or
Finisher Tray as the Output Tray setting.
❏ Staple:
Select the staple location.
❏ Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.
❏ Fold/Saddle Stitch:
Select whether to fold or fold and saddle stitch the print outs.

Related Information
& “Advanced Options” on page 78

Menu Options for FinishingMac OS (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

Sort:
Shift Sort:
Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or Finisher Tray
as the Output Tray setting.

Fold/Saddle Stitch:
Select whether to fold or fold and saddle stitch the print outs.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

368
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Menu Options for Printing from Memory Devices or Storage (When S…

Related Information
& “Menu Options for Finishing” on page 83

Menu Options for Printer Features Mac OS PostScript (When Booklet Finisher
Installed)
Feature Sets:
❏ Sort:
Shift Sort: Offsets each set of copies. You can select this option only when you select Auto Select or
Finisher Tray as the Output Tray setting.
❏ Staple:
Select the staple location.
❏ Punch:
Select the punch hole location. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.
❏ Fold/Saddle Stitch:
Select whether to fold or fold and saddle stitch the print outs.

Related Information
& “Menu Options for Printer Features” on page 91

Menu Options for Printing from Memory Devices or Storage (When

Staple Finisher Installed)
Select the following on the printer's control panel.
❏ Select Memory Device, select the file type, and then select the Advanced tab.
❏ Select Storage, and then select the folder and file. Select Print Settings > Basic Settings tab.

Finishing (When Staple Finisher installed)

Eject Paper:
❏ Shift Sort:
Offset each set of copies.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

Punch:
Select the location for the punch holes.

369
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Menu Options for Copying (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

Menu Options for Printing from Storage (When Booklet Finisher

Installed)
Select Storage on the printer's control panel, and then select the folder and file. Select the Print Settings > Basic
Settings tab.

Booklet

Saddle Stitch:
Specify these settings when you want to make the printouts saddle stitched.
This menu is displayed only when the saddle stich function is enabled.
❏ Saddle Stitch
Allows you to make the printouts saddle stitched.
❏ Sheets per Staple
Specify the number of page for saddle stiches.
❏ Split
Allows you to split printouts when they are ejected.
❏ Cover
Allows you to add the covers to the printouts.
❏ Paper Setting
Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers.

Half Fold:
Specify these settings when you want to make the printouts half folded.
This menu is displayed only when the half fold function is enabled.
❏ Half Fold
Allows you to make the printouts half folded.
❏ Sheets per Fold
Specify the number of page for half fold.
❏ Split
Allows you to split printouts when they are ejected.
❏ Cover
Allows you to add covers to the printouts.
❏ Paper Setting
Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers.

Menu Options for Copying (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Copy > Basic Settings or Advanced.

370
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Menu Options for Copying (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

Finishing (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

Eject Paper:
❏ Shift Sort:
Offset each set of copies.

Staple:
Select the staple location.

Punch:
Select the location for the punch holes. Displayed when the punch unit is installed.

Booklet (When Booklet Finisher Installed)

Saddle Stitch:
Make the following settings when you want to make the copies saddle stitched.
This menu is displayed only when the saddle stich function is enabled.
❏ Saddle Stitch
Allows you to make the copies saddle stitched.
❏ Sheets per Staple
Specify the number of page for saddle stiches.
❏ Split
Allows you to print separately.
❏ Cover
Allows you to add the covers to the copies.
❏ Paper Setting
Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers.

Half Fold:
Specfy these settings when you want to make the copies half folded.
This menu is displayed only when the half fold function is enabled.
❏ Half Fold
Allows you to make the copies half folded.
❏ Sheets per Fold
Specify the number of page for half fold.
❏ Split
Allows you to print separately.
❏ Cover
Allows you to add covers to the copies.
❏ Paper Setting
Select the paper source in which you loaded the paper for the covers.

371
Using Optional Items > Booklet Finisher > Booklet Finisher Specifications

Booklet Finisher Specifications

Weight of Paper 60 to 250 g/m2

*Booklet Tray: 60 to 105 g/m2

Available Paper Sizes A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6*, Legal, Letter
*:Ejected from the output tray only

Paper Type Plain Paper, Thick Paper, High Quality Plain Paper

Ejecting Capacity Output Tray 250 sheets

Finisher Tray Standard (Stack) Ejecting, Shift Ejecting

❏ A4/B5/Letter 1-sided/2-sided: 1700 sheets
❏ A3/B4/Legal 1-sided/2-sided: 1500 sheets
❏ Same width mixed loading 1-sided/2-sided: 1500 sheets

Staple
❏ A4/B5/Letter 80
❏ A3/B4/Legal 50 sets or 1500 sheets (Whichever comes first)

Shift Ejecting Available A3, B4, A4, B5, Legal, Letter

Paper Sizes

Staple*1 Available A3, B4, A4, B5, Legal, Letter

Paper Sizes

Amount of 60 to 90 g/m2
Available
Paper ❏ A4/B5/Letter 50 sheets
❏ A3/B4/Legal 30 sheets

91 to 105 g/m2
❏ A4/B5/Letter 30 sheets
❏ A3/B4/Legal 20 sheets

You can only use one sheet of thick paper (up to 160 g/m2) for the front
and back cover.

Staple One at the front, one at the back, and two at the edges.
Position

Booklet*2 Available A3, B4, A4, Legal, Letter

Paper Sizes

Amount of 60 to 90 g/m2: 20 sheets

Available
Paper 91 to 105 g/m2: 10 sheets

You can only use one sheet of thick paper (up to 250 g/m2) for the front
cover.

Punch*3 Available A3, B4*, A4, B5*, Legal, Letter

Paper Sizes
*:Not supported for 4 Hole

Punch 2/4 Hole, 2/3 Hole

Position

372
Using Optional Items > Settings Menu List (When Finisher is Installed)

Power Supply Rating AC 100-240 V*4

Maximum Power Consumption 200 W

Power Supply Rating (Saddle Unit) AC 110-120 V / AC 220-240 V

Maximum Power Consumption (Saddle Unit) 840 W*5

Dimensions with the Printer Storage

Width: 2009 mm (79.1 in.)
Depth: 757 mm (29.8 in.)
Height: 1243 mm (48.9 in.)
Printing
Width: 2364 mm (93.1 in.)
Depth: 757 mm (29.8 in.)
Height: 1243 mm (48.9 in.)

Weight Approx. 369.7 kg

*1: Includes 5000 staples.

*2: Includes 2000 staples.
*3: You need the optional hole punch unit.
*4: Supplied from the printer.
*5: Used during high density printing with saddle stitching or folding.

Settings Menu List (When Finisher is Installed)

When the finisher is installed, the menu below is displayed on the printer's control panel.
Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings

Job Separation:
Select On to output copies separated by jobs.

Optimize Finishing:
❏ Staple
Reduce paper misalignment to improve stapling performance. However, this may lower print speed.
❏ Shift Sort
Reduce paper misalignment to improve sorting performance. However, this may lower print speed.
❏ Fold and Saddle Stitch
Reduce paper misalignment to fold or saddle stich each set of copies in the correct position.
However, this may lower print speed.
This option is displayed only when the booklet finisher is installed.

373
Using Optional Items > Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board > Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)

Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board

For printers that can use multiple fax lines by adding the optional Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Boards, you can send a
fax while receiving a fax, receive multiple faxes at the same time, or send faxes at the same time.

Expansion Fax Ports

A EXT. port Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device. This is for standard
faxing.

B LINE1 port Connect the printer to the phone line. This is for standard faxing.

C LINE3 port Connect the printer to the phone line. The method for connecting the port is
the same as for the LINE1 port. For details, see the related Information below.
D LINE2 port

Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)

When you install the Optional Fax Boards, the following menus are added. After adding a fax line, make settings
for the added menus according to how the lines will be used.
Note that you cannot connect an external telephone to the added line.

Basic Settings (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings

374
Using Optional Items > Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board > Fax Settings Menu (When Optional Fax Boards Installed)

Note:
On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Basic Settings

Expansion Line Settings:

G3-2:
❏ Fax Speed
❏ ECM
❏ Dial Tone Detection
❏ Dial Mode
❏ Line Type
❏ Your Phone Number
❏ Rings to Answer

G3-3:
❏ Fax Speed
❏ ECM
❏ Dial Tone Detection
❏ Dial Mode
❏ Line Type
❏ Your Phone Number
❏ Rings to Answer

The functions for each item are the same as for standard faxing. See "Related Information" below for
details on each item.

Transmission Setting By Line:

G3-1:
Select an option for standard line G3-1 according to how it will be used (sending only,
receiving only, or sending and receiving). When any optional fax board is not installed
(standard faxing only), this corresponds to Sending and Receiving.

G3-2:
Select an option for extension line G3-2 according to how it will be used (sending only,
receiving only, or sending and receiving).

G3-3:
Select an option for extension line G3-3 according to how it will be used (sending only,
receiving only, or sending and receiving).

375
Using Optional Items > Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board > Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List (When Opti…

Receive Settings
Save/Forward Settings

Conditional Save/Forward:
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below: Settings > General Settings > Fax
Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward.
Note:
On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward

You can set saving and/or forwarding destinations to the Inbox, confidential boxes, an external
memory device, email addresses, shared folders, and another fax machine.
To switch between enabling or disabling the conditions, tap anywhere on the set item except
for .

Condition(s)
Select conditions and then make settings.

Received Line Match:

When the line port matches, the received fax is saved and forwarded.

You can also select the following conditions (the same as for standard faxing). See
"Related Information" below for more details.
❏ Sender Fax Number match
❏ Subaddress(SUB) perfect match
❏ Password(SID) perfect match
❏ Receiving Time

Registering a Recipient to the Contacts List (When Optional Fax

Boards Installed)
When registering a recipient to the contacts list, you can also add the line setting.

1. Access Web Config, click the Scan/Copy tab or the Fax fab, and then click Contacts.

2. Select the number that you want to register, and then click Edit.

3. Enter the Name and Index Word.

4. Select Fax as the Type option.

Note:
You cannot change the Type option after registration is complete. If you want to change the type, delete the destination
and then register again.

376
Using Optional Items > Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board > Sending Faxes From a Computer Using an Optional Fax …

5. Select a line in Select Line, and then click Apply.

Note that Select Line is set to G3-Auto by default.
You can also add the recipient to the contacts list.

Sending Faxes Using the Printer with Optional Fax Boards

You can send faxes by specifying a line and entering fax numbers from the printer’s control panel.
Note:
The basic method for sending faxes is the same as for standard faxing.
“Sending Faxes Using the Printer” on page 144

1. Place the originals.

“Placing Originals” on page 42

2. Select Fax on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

3. Select the recipients to send the fax to on the Recipient tab.

“Selecting Recipients” on page 144
To enter fax numbers manually, select Enter Directly, and then select Select Line. Select Sending and
Receiving or Sending Only in Transmission Setting By Line. You cannot send faxes when you select a line
that is set to receive faxes only. Note that Select Line is set to G3-Auto by default. Next, enter numbers using
the numerical keypad on the LCD screen, and then tap OK to complete.
Note:
When Direct Dialing Restrictions in Security Settings is enabled, you can only select fax recipients from the contacts
list or the sent fax history. You cannot manually enter a fax number.

4. Select the Fax Settings tab, and then make settings such as the resolution and the sending method as
necessary.

5. Tap x to start sending the fax.

Sending Faxes From a Computer Using an Optional Fax Board

Sending Documents Created in an Application Using an Optional Fax Board

(Windows)
By selecting a printer fax from the Print menu of an application like Microsoft Word or Excel, you can directly
transmit data such as documents, drawings, and tables you have created, with a cover sheet..
Note:
❏ The following explanation uses Microsoft Word as an example.
❏ See the following for information on how to send a fax.
“Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Windows)” on page 175
❏ The actual operation may differ depending on the application you use. For details, see the application’s help.

377
Using Optional Items > Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board > Checking the Status of the Lines (When Optional Fax Bo…

1. Using an application, create a document to transmit by fax.

2. Click Print from the File menu.

The application’s Print window appears.

3. Select XXXXX (FAX) (where XXXXX is your printer name) in Printer, and then check the settings for fax
sending.

4. Click Printer Properties or Properties if you want to specify settings such as the paper size and image quality.
For details, see the PC-FAX driver help.

5. Click Print.
Recipient Settings screen of FAX Utility is displayed.

6. Specify a recipient.
See "Related Information" below for more details.
“Sending Documents Created Using an Application (Windows)” on page 175
The recipient is added to the Recipient List displayed in the upper part of the window.

7. Click the Sending options tab, and select an option in Transmission line.
Select Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Transmission Setting By Line, and then
select a line that is set to Sending and Receiving or Sending Only. You cannot send faxes when you select the
line that is set to receive faxes only.

8. Click Next and make the necessary settings.

9. Check the transmission content and click Send.

Make sure the name and fax number of the recipient are correct before transmitting.

Sending Documents Created in an Application Using an Optional Fax Board

(Mac OS)
By selecting a fax-capable printer from the Print menu of a commercially available application, you can send data
such as documents, drawings, and tables, you have created. An available line is automatically selected and sent.
The basics of sending faxes is the same as standard fax.

Checking the Status of the Lines (When Optional Fax Boards

Installed)
You can check the status of each fax line such as whether it is ready or in use.
To display this menu, tap Job/Status on the home screen on the printer's control panel, and then select Printer
Status > Options.

378
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Function List when Using an Additional Network

Solving Problems
See "Related Information" below for more details.

Related Information
& “Cannot Send or Receive Faxes” on page 250
& “The Quality of the Sent Fax is Poor” on page 297
& “Received Fax Quality is Poor” on page 299
& “Cannot Operate the Printer as Expected” on page 273

Specifications for Optional Super G3/G3 Multi Fax Board

Possible number of expansions 2 (3 in total with standard)

Others are the same as for standard faxing. See the related Information below.

Related Information
& “Fax Specifications (Fax-capable Printers Only)” on page 440

10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet

Function List when Using an Additional Network

Functions Standard Additional Related information

Printing Printing from a ✓ ✓

computer

Scanning Scanning from a ✓ ✓

computer

Scan to Email ✓*3 ✓*3 “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 385

Scan to Folder ✓*3 ✓*3 “Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 487
“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 385

Scan to ✓*3 ✓*3 “Selecting the Network Transmission Route

Document (When Using an Additional Network)” on
Capture Pro page 385

Scan to Cloud ✓ - “Scanning Originals to the Cloud” on page 131

379
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Function List when Using an Additional Network

Functions Standard Additional Related information

Faxing Sending and ✓ -

receiving faxes on
a computer

Fax to Email ✓*3 ✓*3 “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 385

Fax to Folder ✓*3 ✓*3 “Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 487
“Selecting the Network Transmission Route
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 385

Epson Connect ✓ - “Printing Using a Cloud Service” on page 100

EPSON Software Updater ✓ - “Application for Updating Software and

Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on
page 408

Updating firmware ✓ - “Application for Updating Software and

Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)” on
page 408

Network settings Setting an IP ✓*1 ✓*1 “Assigning the IP Address (When Using an
address Additional Network)” on page 383

Setting a proxy ✓ - “Setting the Proxy Server (When Using an

server Additional Network)” on page 384

Setting from Web Config ✓*1 ✓*1 “Application for Configuring Printer Operations
(Web Config)” on page 405

Configuring the LDAP server ✓*3 ✓*3 “Configuring the LDAP Server” on page 511
“Selecting a Network that has an LDAP Server
(When Using an Additional Network)” on
page 386

Email notification ✓*2 ✓*2 “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

“Configuring Email Notification (When Using an
Additional Network)” on page 386

Configuring the administrator ✓*1 ✓*1 “Configuring the Administrator Password from
password the Control Panel” on page 538
“Configuring the Administrator Password from a
Computer” on page 538
“Configuring the Administrator Password for the
Additional Network” on page 383

Advanced IPsec/IP Filtering ✓*1 ✓*1 “Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP

security settings Filtering” on page 571

IEEE802.1X ✓*1 ✓*1 “Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X

Network” on page 582

Epson Open Platform ✓ - “Using Epson Open Platform” on page 593

380
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Installing an Ethernet Board

✓ = Available.
- = Not available.
*1 : You need to make settings for each network.
*2 : You can use the standard or the additional network to send to recipients for each destination.
*3 : Available only on either the standard or the additional network.

Installing an Ethernet Board

! Caution:
Make sure you turn off the power, unplug the power cord, and check that all wiring has been disconnected. The cord
may be damaged, resulting in electric shock or fire.

c Important:
Electrostatic discharge can damage printer parts. Make sure you discharge static electricity from your body by
touching grounding yourself before installing the ethernet board.

1. Turn off the printer by pressing the P button.

2. Disconnect all cables such as the power cord and USB cable.

3. Loosen the two screws and then remove the cover.

381
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Settings when Using an Additional Network

4. Install the ethernet board straight into the additional interface slot for the ethernet board.
Insert the ethernet board firmly into the slot.

c Important:
Do not remove the cover of the ethernet board.
Do not touch the terminals of the ethernet board.

5. Secure the ethernet board with the two screws.

6. Connect the removed power cord and USB cable.

7. Press the button, select the Job/Status > Options, and then confirm if the ethernet board is installed
correctly.

8. Select Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Firmware Update > Update to update the
firmware.

Settings when Using an Additional Network

Administrator Password Setting for Additional Network

When you set an administrator password for the additional network, you can prevent users from changing
additional network settings. You can set and change the administrator password for the additional network using
Web Config from a computer on the additional network. The administrator password for the additional network
and for the printer are different.
The initial password for the additional network is the last eight digits of the MAC address. To check this, select
Wired LAN Status for the additional network on the printer's control panel to display the details. You can also
confirm the MAC address on the label stuck to the Ethernet board.

382
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Settings when Using an Additional Network

We recommend that you change the initial password as soon as possible to prevent unauthorized access. If you
reset the additional network to the default settings, the initial password will be restored.

Related Information
& “Menu Options for Network Settings (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 388

Configuring the Administrator Password for the Additional Network

You can set the administrator password using Web Config from a computer on the additional network.

1. Enter the printer's IP address for the additional network into a browser to access Web Config.

2. Select the Product Security tab > Change Administrator Password.

3. Enter a password to New Password and Confirm New Password. Enter the user name, if necessary.
If you want to change the password to new one, enter a current password.

4. Select OK.
Note:
❏ To set or change the locked menu items, click Administrator Login, and then enter the administrator password.
❏ To delete the administrator password, click Product Security tab > Delete Administrator Password, and then enter
the administrator password.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Connecting to the Network from the Control Panel (When Using an Additional
Network)
Connect the printer to the network by using the printer's control panel.

Assigning the IP Address (When Using an Additional Network)

Set up the basic items such as Host Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway.
Make settings for the standard and the additional network.
This section explains the procedure for setting a static IP address.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

3. Select General Settings > Network Settings.

4. Select Standard or Additional for the network that you want to set up.

383
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Settings when Using an Additional Network

5. Select Advanced > TCP/IP.

Note:
When you select Advanced, you need to enter the administrator password for the additional network.

6. Select Manual for Obtain IP Address.

When you set the IP address automatically by using the DHCP function of router, select Auto. In that case, the
IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway on step 7 to 8 are also set automatically, so go to step 9.

7. Enter the IP address.

When entering an IP Address, enter zeroes (0) to make three digits as shown in the following example.
Example:
❏ If the IP address is 192.0.2.111, enter 192.000.002.111.
❏ If the IP address is 192.0.12.10, enter 192.000.012.010

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen. After the IP address is entered, the zeroes you entered to
make three digiits are omitted.

8. Set up the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

c Important:
If the combination of the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway is incorrect, Start Setup is inactive
and cannot proceed with the settings. Confirm that there is no error in the entry.

9. Enter the IP address for the primary DNS server.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.
Note:
When you select Auto for the IP address assignment settings, you can select the DNS server settings from Manual or
Auto. If you cannot obtain the DNS server address automatically, select Manual and enter the DNS server address.
Then, enter the secondary DNS server address directly. If you select Auto, go to step 11.

10. Enter the IP address for the secondary DNS server.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

11. Tap Start Setup.

Setting the Proxy Server (When Using an Additional Network)

Set up the proxy server if both of the following are true.
❏ The proxy server is built for Internet connection.
❏ When using a function in which a printer directly connects to the Internet, such as Epson Connect service or
another company's cloud services.

The proxy server is only available on the standard network.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

When making settings after IP address setting, the Advanced screen is displayed. Go to step 3.

384
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Settings when Using an Additional Network

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Standard > Advanced.

3. Select Proxy Server.

4. Select Use for Proxy Server Settings.

5. Enter the address for the proxy server by IPv4 or FQDN format.
Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

6. Enter the port number for the proxy server.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

7. Tap Start Setup.

Connecting to Ethernet (When Using an Additional Network)

Connecting to Ethernet on the Standard Network

Connect the printer to the standard network by using an Ethernet cable, and then check the connection.

1. Connect the printer and hub (LAN switch) by Ethernet cable.

2. Select Settings on the home screen.

3. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Standard > Connection Check.
The connection diagnosis result is displayed. Confirm the connection is correct.

4. Tap OK to finish.
When you tap Print Check Report, you can print the diagnosis result. Follow the on-screen instructions to
print it.

Connecting to Ethernet on an Additional Network

Connect the printer to the additional network by using an Ethernet cable, and then check the connection.

1. Connect the printer and hub (LAN switch) by Ethernet cable.

2. Select Job/Status on the home screen.

3. Select the Printer Status tab, and then select the Options tab.
The Ethernet connection status is displayed. Confirm the connection is correct.

Selecting the Network Transmission Route (When Using an Additional

Network)
The following scan and fax functions are available from the printer's control panel on either the standard or
additional network.

385
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Settings when Using an Additional Network

❏ Scan to Email
❏ Scan to Folder
❏ Scan to Document Capture Pro
❏ Fax to Email
❏ Fax to Folder

Follow the steps below to select the network to use these scan and fax functions.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Network Transmission Route.

3. Select Standard or Additional for the network to use the scan and fax functions.

Selecting a Network that has an LDAP Server (When Using an Additional

Network)
You can use the LDAP server on either the standard or additional network.
Follow the steps below to select the network that has the LDAP server you want to use.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > LDAP Server.

3. Select Standard or Additional for the network that has the LDAP server.

Receiving Email Notifications When Events Occur (When Using an Additional

Network)

About Email Notifications (When Using an Additional Network)

This is the notification function that, when events such as printing stop and printer error occur, send the email to
the specified address.
You can register up to five destinations and set the notification settings for each destination.
To use this function, you need to set up the mail server before setting up notifications. Set up the email server on
the network (standard or additional) to which you want to send the email.

Related Information
& “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

Configuring Email Notification (When Using an Additional Network)

Configure email notification by using Web Config from a computer on the standard network.

1. Enter the printer's IP address for the standard network into a browser to access Web Config.

386
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Solving Problems when Using an Additional Network

2. Select the Device Management tab > Email Notification.

3. Set the subject of email notification.

Select the contents displayed on the subject from the two pull-down menus.
❏ The selected contents are displayed next to Subject.
❏ The same contents cannot be set on left and right.
❏ When the number of characters in Location exceeds 32 bytes, characters exceeding 32 bytes are omitted.

4. Enter the email address for sending the notification email.

Use A-Z a-z 0-9 ! # $ % & ' * + - . /= ? ^ _ { | } ~ @, and enter between 1 and 255 characters.

5. Select Standard or Additional for the network used to send to recipients.

6. Select the language for the email notifications.

7. Select the check box on the event for which you want to receive a notification.
The number of Notification Settings is linked to the destination number of Email Address Settings.
Example :
If you want a notification sent to the email address set for number 1 in Email Address Settings when the
printer is out of paper, select the check box column 1 in line Paper out.

8. Click OK.
Confirm that an email notification will be sent by causing an event.
Example : Print by specifying the Paper Source where paper is not set.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483
& “Items for Email Notification” on page 553

Solving Problems when Using an Additional Network

Cannot Print or Scan from a Computer

The standard or additional network settings are incorrect.

You need to set up the standard network and the additional network. Check the settings for both networks.

Related Information
& “Connecting to the Network from the Control Panel (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 383

387
Using Optional Items > 10/100/1000 Base-T,Ethernet > Menu Options for Network Settings (When Using an Ad…

Scan or Fax Functions from the Control Panel Do Not Work Correctly (Except
for Scan to Cloud)

The network to use the scan or fax functions from the control panel is not selected correctly.
The scan or fax functions from the control panel are available on either the standard or additional network. Make
sure that the network to use the scan and fax functions is selected correctly.

Related Information
& “Selecting the Network Transmission Route (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 385

Cannot Use the LDAP Server

The network with the LDAP server is not selected correctly.

The LDAP server on either the standard or additional network is available. Make sure that the network that has the
LDAP server you want to use is selected correctly.

Related Information
& “Selecting a Network that has an LDAP Server (When Using an Additional Network)” on page 386

Menu Options for Network Settings (When Using an Additional

Network)
This section explains the Network Settings menu when using the additional network.
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings

Standard:
Set up the standard network. See Related Information below.

Related Information
& “Network Settings” on page 416

Additional:
Set up the additional network.

Network Status:
Displays or prints the current network settings.
❏ Wired LAN Status
❏ Print Status Sheet

388
Using Optional Items > Paper Cassette Lock > Using the Paper Cassette Lock

Advanced:
Make the following detailed settings.
❏ TCP/IP
❏ IPv6 Address
❏ Link Speed & Duplex
❏ Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
❏ Disable IPsec/IP Filtering
❏ Disable IEEE802.1X

You need to enter the administrator password for the additional network.

Restore Default Settings:

Reset the settings for the additional network to their defaults.
You need to enter the administrator password for the additional network.

Network Transmission Route:

Select the network to use the scan and fax functions from the control panel (Scan to Email, Scan to Folder, Scan to
Document Capture Pro, Fax to Email, Fax to Folder).

LDAP Server:
Select the network that has the LDAP server you want to use.

Paper Cassette Lock

Using the Paper Cassette Lock

You can attach the Paper Cassette Lock to paper cassette 1 to 4. This is useful when the administrator wants to
manage paper. Keep the key in a safe place.
1. Attach the paper cassette lock.

389
Using Optional Items > Paper Cassette Lock > Problems with the Paper Cassette Lock

2. Press the middle button, and then remove the key.

Keep the key in a safe place.

Note:
When you remove the Paper Cassette Lock from the paper cassette, insert the key all the way into the lock. Make sure you
remove the key after the button appears in the middle of the slot .

Problems with the Paper Cassette Lock

Lost the Paper Cassette Lock Key

Contact Epson support or an authorized Epson service provider.

390
Product Information

Paper Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392

Consumable Products Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396

Software Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Settings Menu List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408

Product Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Font Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

Storage Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Regulatory Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Product Information > Paper Information > Available Paper and Capacities

Paper Information

Available Paper and Capacities

Followings are the available papers for this printer. Using other papers causes paper jams and damage to the
printer.
The paper quality may change depending on the environment. We recommend purchasing paper after checking
your environment beforehand. Make sure that you perform a test print before using paper such as recycled paper
and envelopes with large variations in quality.

Genuine Epson Paper

Epson recommends using genuine Epson paper to ensure high-quality printouts.
Note:
❏ Genuine Epson paper is not available when printing with the Epson universal printer driver.
❏ The availability of paper varies by location. For the latest information on paper available in your area, contact Epson
support.
❏ See the following for information on available paper types for 2-sided printing.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 395
❏ When printing on genuine Epson paper at a user defined size, only Standard or Normal print quality settings are
available. Although some printer drivers allow you to select a better print quality, the printouts are printed using
Standard or Normal.
❏ When printing on paper longer than 483 mm as the user defined size, it is printed using the standard print quality
regardless of the settings in the paper type and paper name. Also, the printer slows down the print speed for some types of
paper such as plain paper.

Paper suitable for printing documents

Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)

Paper Tray Paper Cassette 1

to 4

Epson Business Paper A4 150 500

Epson Bright White Ink Jet Paper A4 150 500

Paper suitable for printing documents and photos

Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)

Paper Tray Paper Cassette 1

to 4

Epson Matte Paper-Heavyweight A3+, A3, A4 20 -

Epson Archival Matte Paper A3+, A3, A4 20 -

392
Product Information > Paper Information > Available Paper and Capacities

Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)

Paper Tray Paper Cassette 1

to 4

Epson Double-Sided Matte Paper A3+, A3, A4 20 -

Epson Photo Quality Ink Jet Paper A3+, A3 50 -

A4 100 -

Epson Double-sided Photo Quality Ink A4 100 -

Jet Paper

Commercially Available Paper

Note:
❏ 8.5×13 in, 8K (270×390 mm), 16K (195×270 mm) and the half letter sizes are not available when printing with the
PostScript printer driver.
❏ See the following for information on available paper types for 2-sided printing.
“Paper for 2-Sided Printing” on page 395

Plain papers

Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)

Paper Tray Paper Cassette 1 to 4

Plain paper, Copy paper A3+, SRA3, 12 x 18 in Up to the line indicated –

by the triangle symbol on
Preprinted paper* A3, US B (11×17 in.), B4, the edge guide. Up to the line indicated
Letterhead Legal, Indian-Legal, 8.5 x 13 by the triangle symbol on
in, Letter, A4, B5, Executive, (80 g/m2: 150) the edge guide.
Color paper A5, Half letter, 16K However, only one sheet (80 g/m2: 550)
Recycled paper (195×270 mm), 8K for user defined paper
(270×390 mm) sizes with a length of over
High quality plain paper 483 mm.
B6, A6 –
Thick paper
(60 to 160 g/m2) User Defined (mm) –
(Width: 55 to 330.2,
Length: 127 to 1200)

User Defined (mm) Up to the line indicated

by the triangle symbol on
(Width: 139.7 to 297,
the edge guide.
Length: 182 to 431.8)
(80 g/m2: 550)

393
Product Information > Paper Information > Available Paper and Capacities

Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Sheets)

Paper Tray Paper Cassette 1 to 4

Thick paper A3+, SRA3, 12 x 18 in, A3, Up to the line indicated –

US B (11×17 in.), B4, Legal, by the triangle symbol on
Extra thick paper
Indian-Legal, 8.5 x 13 in, the edge guide.
(161 to 350 g/m2) Letter, A4, B5, Executive,
( or 30 sheets)
A5, Half letter, 16K
(195×270 mm), 8K However, only one sheet
(270×390 mm), B6, A6, for user defined paper
sizes with a length of over
User Defined (mm)
483 mm.
(Width: 55 to 330.2,
Length: 127 to 1200)

* Paper on which various forms are pre-printed such as slips or securities.

Envelope

Media Name Size Loading Capacity (Envelopes)

Paper Tray Paper Cassette 1 to 4

Envelope* Envelope #10, Envelope DL, 10 –

Envelope C4, Envelope C5,
Envelope C6

* If the flap is on the short edge, make sure you include the flap when setting the user-defined size.

Available Paper Thickness

Followings are the available paper thickness (paper weight g/m2 : per 1 m 2 expressed in grams). Although it meets
the thickness of the paper, deteriorations of printing quality or paper jams may occur depending on the paper
quality (such as paper grain direction, hardness, etc.).

Paper Type Paper Thickness (Paper weight)

Plain paper 60 to 350 g/m2

Copy paper
Letterhead
Recycled paper
Color paper
Preprinted paper
Thick paper
Extra thick
High Quality Paper

394
Product Information > Paper Information > Available Paper and Capacities

Paper Type Paper Thickness (Paper weight)

Envelope #10 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb)

DL
C6
C5

C4 80 to 100 g/m2 (21 to 26 lb)

Paper for 2-Sided Printing

Genuine Epson Paper

❏ Epson Business Paper
❏ Epson Bright White Ink Jet Paper

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

Commercially Available Paper

❏ Plain paper, Copy paper, Preprinted paper, Letterhead, Color paper, Recycled paper, High quality plain paper*

* A3+, SRA3, 12×18 in, B6, A6 size paper is not supported for automatic 2-sided printing.
For automatic 2-sided printing with User Defined paper sizes, you can use 139.7 to 297×182 to 431.8 mm paper sizes.

Related Information
& “Available Paper and Capacities” on page 392

Unavailable Paper Types

Do not use the following papers. Using these papers may cause paper jams, smears on the printout, or damage to
the printer.
❏ Papers that are wavy and damp
❏ Papers that have not dried after printing on one side.
❏ Papers that are wadded and curled
❏ Papers that are torn, cut, folded
❏ Papers that are too thick, too thin
❏ Preprinted papers that used other inkjet printers, thermal transfer printers, page printers or copiers
❏ Papers that are perforated
❏ Papers that have stickers
❏ Papers held together with tape, staples, paper clips, perforated and so on.

395
Product Information > Consumable Products Information > Maintenance Box Code

❏ Do not use envelopes with adhesive surfaces on the flaps or window envelopes.

Consumable Products Information

Ink Cartridge Codes

The following are the codes for genuine Epson ink cartridges.

WF-C21000

BK1, BK2: Black C: Cyan M: Magenta Y: Yellow

T02Y1 T02Y2 T02Y3 T02Y4

WF-C20750

BK1, BK2: Black C: Cyan M: Magenta Y: Yellow

T02S1 T02S2 T02S3 T02S4

WF-C20600

BK1, BK2: Black C: Cyan M: Magenta Y: Yellow

T02Q1 T02Q2 T02Q3 T02Q4

Epson recommends the use of genuine Epson ink cartridges. Epson cannot guarantee the quality or reliability of
non-genuine ink. The use of non-genuine ink may cause damage that is not covered by Epson’s warranties, and
under certain circumstances, may cause erratic printer behavior. Information about non-genuine ink levels may
not be displayed.
Note:
❏ Ink cartridge codes may vary by location. For the correct codes in your area, contact Epson support.
❏ For users in Europe, visit the following website for information on Epson’s ink cartridge yields.
http://www.epson.eu/pageyield

Maintenance Box Code

Epson recommends the use of a genuine Epson maintenance box.
Maintenance box code: CT13T6713

c Important:
Once a maintenance box has been installed in a printer it cannot be used with other printers.

396
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Printing

Maintenance Rollers Code

Epson recommends the use of genuine Epson maintenance rollers.
The following are the codes.

For all countries except for India, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka and Nepal
Maintenance rollers of Paper cassette: C12C935961
Maintenance rollers of Paper tray: C12C935941

For India, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka and Nepal

Maintenance rollers of Paper cassette: C12C935971
Maintenance rollers of Paper tray: C12C935951
Note:
Contact Epson Support for your new maintenance roller.

Software Information
This section introduces the network services and software products available for your printer from the Epson
website or the supplied software disc.

Software for Printing

Application for Printing from a Computer (Windows Printer Driver)

The printer driver controls the printer according to the commands from an application. Making settings on the
printer driver provides the best printing results. You can also check the status of the printer or keep it in top
operating condition using the printer driver utility.
Note:
You can change the language of the printer driver. Select the language you want to use from the Language setting on the
Maintenance tab.

Accessing the printer driver from applications

To make settings that apply only to the application you are using, access from that application.
Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu. Select your printer, and then click Preferences or Properties.
Note:
Operations differ depending on the application. See the application's help for details.

Accessing the printer driver from the control panel

To make settings that apply to all of the applications, access from the control panel.
❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers in
Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences

397
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Printing

❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012

Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click
on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences
❏ Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.
❏ Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer
and select Printing preferences.
❏ Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers and Faxes. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.

Accessing the printer driver from the printer icon on the task bar
The printer icon on the desktop task bar is a shortcut icon allowing you to quickly access the printer driver.
If you click the printer icon and select Printer Settings, you can access the same printer settings window as the one
displayed from the control panel. If you double-click this icon, you can check the status of the printer.
Note:
If the printer icon is not displayed on the task bar, access the printer driver window, click Monitoring Preferences on the
Maintenance tab, and then select Register the shortcut icon to the taskbar.

Starting the utility

Access the printer driver window. Click the Maintenance tab.

Related Information
& “Menu Options for the Printer Driver” on page 49

Application for Printing from a Computer (Mac OS Printer Driver)

The printer driver controls the printer according to the commands from an application. Making settings on the
printer driver provides the best printing results. You can also check the status of the printer or keep it in top
operating condition using the printer driver utility.

Accessing the printer driver from applications

Click Page Setup or Print on the File menu of your application. If necessary, click Show Details (or d) to expand
the print window.
Note:
Depending on the application being used, Page Setup may not be displayed in the File menu, and the operations for
displaying the print screen may differ.See the application's help for details.

Starting the utility

Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.

398
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Printing

Related Information
& “Menu Options for the Printer Driver” on page 81

Guide to Mac OS Printer Driver

Epson Printer Utility

You can check the printer status and errors by starting the EPSON Status Monitor.

Application that can print PostScript Fonts (Windows PostScript Printer

Driver)
The PostScript printer driver allows the printer to receive and interpret print instructions in the page description
language sent from the computer and print properly. This is suitable for printing from PostScript compliant
applications used for DTP.

Accessing the printer driver from applications

To make settings that apply only to the application you are using, access from that application.
Select Print or Print Setup from the File menu. Select your printer, and then click Preferences or Properties.
Note:
Operations differ depending on the application. See the application's help for details.

Accessing the printer driver from the control panel

To make settings that apply to all of the applications, access from the control panel.
❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers in
Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click
on your printer, or press and hold it and then select Printing preferences
❏ Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.

399
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Printing

❏ Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008

Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound. Right-click on your printer
and select Printing preferences.
❏ Windows XP/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers and Other Hardware > Printers and Faxes. Right-
click on your printer and select Printing preferences.

Accessing the printer driver from the printer icon on the task bar
The printer icon on the desktop task bar is a shortcut icon allowing you to quickly access the printer driver.
If you click the printer icon and select Printer Settings, you can access the same printer settings window as the one
displayed from the control panel. If you double-click this icon, you can check the status of the printer.

Related Information
& “Menu Options for the PostScript Printer Driver” on page 76

Application that can print PostScript Fonts (Mac OS PostScript Printer Driver)
The PostScript printer driver allows the printer to receive and interpret print instructions in the page description
language sent from the computer and print properly. This is suitable for printing from PostScript compliant
applications used for DTP.

Accessing the printer driver from applications

Click Page Setup or Print on the File menu of your application. If necessary, click Show Details (or d) to expand
the print window.
Note:
Depending on the application being used, Page Setup may not be displayed in the File menu, and the operations for
displaying the print screen may differ.See the application's help for details.

Starting the utility

Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer. Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.

Related Information
& “Menu Options for the PostScript Printer Driver” on page 89

Application that can print PCL Language (PCL Printer Driver)

The PCL Printer Driver allows the printer to receive and interpret print instructions in the page description
language sent from the computer and print properly. This is suitable for printing from general applications such as
Microsoft Office.
Note:
Mac OS is not supported.

Connect the printer to the same network as the computer, and then follow the procedure below to install the
printer driver.

400
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Printing

1. Download the executable file of the driver from the Epson support website.
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe only)
http://support.epson.net/

2. Double-click the executable file.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions for the rest of the installation.

Note:
If you are using a Windows computer and you cannot download the driver from the website, install it from the software
disc that came with the printer. Access "Driver\PCL Universal".

Application for Printing Web Pages (E-Web Print)

E-Web Print is an application that allows you to easily print web pages with various layouts. See the application's
help for details. You can access the help from the E-Web Print menu on the E-Web Print tool bar.
Note:
❏ Windows Server operating systems are not supported.
❏ Mac OS is not supported.
❏ Check for supported browsers and the latest version from the download site.

Starting
When you install E-Web Print, it is displayed in your browser. Click Print or Clip.

Related Information
& “Installing the Applications Separately” on page 205

Application that Prints Using a Method that is not Standard on Windows

(EpsonNet Print)
EpsonNet Print is a software to print on the TCP/IP network. This is installed from the installer together with the
printer driver. To perform network printing, create an EpsonNet Print port. There are features and restrictions
listed below.
❏ The printer’s status is displayed on the spooler screen.
❏ If the printer’s IP address is changed by DHCP, the printer is still detected.
❏ You can use a printer located on a different network segment.
❏ You can print using one of the various protocols.
❏ IPv6 address is not supported.

Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)

Epson iPrint is an application that allows you to print photos, documents, and web pages from a smart device such
as a smartphone or tablet. You can use local print, printing from a smart device that is connected to the same

401
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Scanning

wireless network as your printer, or remote print, printing from a remote location over the Internet. To use remote
print, register your printer in the Epson Connect service.

Installing Epson iPrint

You can install Epson iPrint on your smart device from the following URL or QR code.
http://ipr.to/c

Application for Printing Easily from an Android Application (Epson Print

Enabler)
Epson Print Enabler is an application that allows you to wirelessly print your documents, emails, photos, and web
pages right from your Android phone or tablet (Android v4.4 or later). With a few taps, your Android device will
discover an Epson printer that is connected to the same wireless network.
Search for and install Epson Print Enabler from Google Play.

Software for Scanning

Application for Scanning Documents(Document Capture Pro)

Document Capture Pro* is an application that allows you to efficiently scan originals such as documents.
The method of saving images is registered as a job in this application. By registering a series of operations in
advance as a job, you can perform all of the operations by simply selecting the job. Preset jobs are available that
allow you to save scanned images to a computer.
See the Document Capture Pro help for details on using the features.
Note:
❏ You can perform jobs not only from the computer but also from the control panel of the printer that is connected over a
network.
❏ Document Capture Pro does not support Windows Vista/Windows XP.

*The names are for Windows. For Mac OS, the name is Document Capture. For Windows Server, the name is
Document Capture Pro Server.

402
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Scanning

Starting on Windows
❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click the start button, and then select Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Server 2008 R2
Click the start button, and then select All Programs > Epson Software > Document Capture Pro.

Starting on Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Software > Document Capture.

Application for Controlling the Scanner (Epson Scan 2)

Epson Scan 2 is a scanner driver that allows you to control the scanner. You can adjust the size, resolution,
brightness, contrast, and quality of the scanned image. You can also start this application from a TWAIN-
compliant scanning application. See the software help for details on using the features.

Starting on Windows
Note:
For Windows Server operating systems, make sure the Desktop Experience feature is installed.

❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2016

Click the start button, and then select EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and then select All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2.

Starting on Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Software > Epson Scan 2.

Adding the Network Scanner

To use the network scanner, add the scanner by using the scanner driver "Epson Scan 2".

1. Start Epson Scan 2.

❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2016
Click the start button, and then select EPSON > Epson Scan 2.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and then select All Programs or Programs > EPSON > Epson Scan 2.

403
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Faxing

❏ Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Software > Epson Scan 2.

2. On the Scanner Settings screen, click Add.

Note:
❏ If Add is grayed out, click Enable Editing.
❏ If the main screen of Epson Scan 2 is displayed, it has already been connected to the scanner. If you want to connect
to another network, select Scanner > Settings to open the Scanner Settings screen.

3. Add the network scanner. Enter the following items, and then click Add.
❏ Model: Select the scanner you want to connect to.
❏ Name: Enter the scanner name. You can enter up to 32 characters.
❏ Search for Network: When the computer and the scanner are on the same network, the IP address is
displayed. If it is not displayed, click the button. If the IP address is still not displayed, click Enter
address, and then enter the IP address directly.

4. Select the scanner on the Scanner Settings screen, and then click OK.

Software for Faxing

Application for Configuring Fax Operations and Sending Faxes (FAX Utility)
FAX Utility is an application that allows you to configure various settings for sending faxes from a computer. You
can create or edit the contacts list to be used when sending a fax, configure to save received faxes in PDF format on
the computer, and so on. See the application's help for details.
Note:
❏ Windows Server operating systems are not supported.
❏ Before installing the FAX Utility, make sure you have installed the printer driver for this printer; this does not include the
PostScript printer driver and Epson universal printer driver.
❏ Make sure you have installed the printer driver before installing FAX Utility. See "Starting on Windows" or "Starting on
Mac OS" below to check if the application has been installed.

Starting on Windows
❏ Windows 10
Click the start button, and select Epson Software > FAX Utility.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP
Click the start button, and select All Programs (or Programs) > Epson Software > FAX Utility.

Starting on Mac OS
Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and then
select the printer (FAX). Click Options & Supplies > Utility > Open Printer Utility.

404
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices

Related Information
& “Sending a Fax from a Computer” on page 175
& “Receiving Faxes on a Computer” on page 179

Application for Sending Faxes (PC-FAX Driver)

PC-FAX driver is an application that allows you to send a document created on a separate application as a fax
directly from the computer. PC-FAX driver is installed when you install FAX Utility. See the application's help for
details.
Note:
❏ Windows Server operating systems are not supported.
❏ The operation differs depending on the application you used to create the document. See the application's help for details.
❏ Check if the application has been installed. See "Accessing from Windows" or "Accessing from Mac OS" below.

Accessing from Windows

In the application, select Print or Print Setup from the File menu. Select your printer (FAX), and then click
Preferences or Properties.

Accessing from Mac OS

In the application, select Print from the File menu. Select your printer (FAX) as the Printer setting, and then select
Fax Settings or Recipient Settings from the pop-up menu.

Related Information
& “Sending a Fax from a Computer” on page 175

Software for Package Creation

Application for Creating Driver Packages (EpsonNet SetupManager)

EpsonNet SetupManager is a software to create a package for a simple printer installation, such as installing the
printer driver, installing EPSON Status Monitor and creating a printer port. This software allows the administrator
to create unique software packages and distribute them among groups.
For more information, visit your regional Epson website.
http://www.epson.com

Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices

Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)

Web Config is an application that runs in a web browser, such as Internet Explorer and Safari, on a computer or
smart device. You can confirm the printer status or change the network service and printer settings. To use the
Web Config, connect the printer and the computer or device to the same network.

405
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices

The following browsers are supported.

Microsoft Edge, Internet Explorer 8 or later, Firefox*, Chrome*, Safari*
* Use the latest version.

Running Web Config on a Web Browser

1. Check the printer's IP address.

Select the network icon on the printer's home screen, and then select the active connection method to confirm
the printer's IP address.
Note:
You can also check the IP address by printing the network connection report.

2. Launch a Web browser from a computer or smart device, and then enter the printer's IP address.
Format:
IPv4: http://the printer's IP address/
IPv6: http://[the printer's IP address]/
Examples:
IPv4: http://192.168.100.201/
IPv6: http://[2001:db8::1000:1]/
Note:
Using the smart device, you can also run Web Config from the maintenance screen of Epson iPrint.

Since the printer uses a self-signed certificate when accessing HTTPS, a warning is displayed on the browser
when you start Web Config; this does not indicate a problem and can be safely ignored.

Related Information
& “Application for Printing Easily from a Smart Device (Epson iPrint)” on page 401
& “Printing a Network Connection Report” on page 321

Running Web Config on Windows

When connecting a computer to the printer using WSD, follow the steps below to run Web Config.

1. Open the printer list on the computer.

❏ Windows 10
Click on the start button, and then select Windows System > Control Panel > View devices and printers
in Hardware and Sound.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Select Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound (or
Hardware).
❏ Windows 7
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > View devices and printers in Hardware and Sound.

406
Product Information > Software Information > Software for Making Settings or Managing Devices

❏ Windows Vista
Click the start button, and select Control Panel > Printers in Hardware and Sound.

2. Right-click on your printer and select Properties.

3. Select the Web Service tab and click the URL.

Since the printer uses a self-signed certificate when accessing HTTPS, a warning is displayed on the browser
when you start Web Config; this does not indicate a problem and can be safely ignored.

Running Web Config on Mac OS

1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu > Printers & Scanners (or Print & Scan, Print & Fax), and
then select the printer.

2. Click Options & Supplies> Show Printer Webpage.

Since the printer uses a self-signed certificate when accessing HTTPS, a warning is displayed on the browser
when you start Web Config; this does not indicate a problem and can be safely ignored.

Application for Setting up the Device on a Network (EpsonNet Config)

EpsonNet Config is an application that allows you to set the network interface addresses and protocols. See the
operations guide for EpsonNet Config or the application's help for more details.

Starting on Windows
❏ Windows 10/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016
Click the start button, and then select EpsonNet > EpsonNet Config.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2003 R2/Windows Server 2003
Click the start button, and select All Programs or Programs > EpsonNet > EpsonNet Config SE > EpsonNet
Config.

Starting on Mac OS
Go > Applications > Epson Software > EpsonNet > EpsonNet Config SE > EpsonNet Config.

Related Information
& “Installing the Applications Separately” on page 205

Software for Managing Devices on the Network (Epson Device Admin)

Epson Device Admin is a multifunctional application software that manages the device on the network.
The following functions are available.
❏ Monitor or manage up to 2,000 printers or scanners over the segment

407
Product Information > Settings Menu List

❏ Make a detailed report, such as for the consumable or product status

❏ Update the firmware of the product
❏ Introduce the device to the network
❏ Apply the unified settings to multiple devices.

You can download Epson Device Admin from Epson support website. For more information, see the
documentation or help of Epson Device Admin.

Software for Updating

Application for Updating Software and Firmware (EPSON Software Updater)

EPSON Software Updater is an application that installs new software, and updates firmware and manuals over the
Internet. If you want to check for update information regularly, you can set the interval for checking for updates in
EPSON Software Updater's Auto Update Settings.
Note:
Windows Server operating systems are not supported.

Starting on Windows
❏ Windows 10
Click the start button, and then select Epson Software > EPSON Software Updater.
❏ Windows 8.1/Windows 8
Enter the application name in the search charm, and then select the displayed icon.
❏ Windows 7/Windows Vista/Windows XP
Click the start button, and then select All Programs (or Programs) > Epson Software > EPSON Software
Updater.

Note:
You can also start EPSON Software Updater by clicking the printer icon on the task bar on the desktop, and then selecting
Software Update.

Starting on Mac OS
Select Go > Applications > Epson Software > EPSON Software Updater.

Related Information
& “Installing the Applications Separately” on page 205

Settings Menu List

Select Settings on the home screen of the printer to make various settings.

408
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

General Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings

Basic Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings

You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.

LCD Brightness:
Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen.

Sounds:
Adjust the volume.
❏ Mute
Select On to mute all sound.
❏ Normal Mode
Select the volume such as Button Press.
❏ Quiet Mode
Select the volume such as Button Press in Quiet Mode.

Detect Double Feed:

Select On to detect a double-feed paper error when scanning with the ADF.

Sleep Timer:
Adjust the time period to enter a sleep mode (energy saving mode) when the printer has not
performed any operations. The LCD screen turns black when the setting time passes.

Wake from Sleep:

Wake with LCD Screen Touch:

Select On to return from sleep mode (energy saving mode) by tapping the touch panel. When
this is off, you need to press a power button on the control panel to wake the printer. Turning
this feature off prevents any unintentional operations caused due to foreign objects touching
the screen. You can also set a time period during which this feature is on.

Power Off Timer:

Your product may have this feature or the Power Off Settings feature depending on the location of
purchase.
Select this setting to turn the printer off automatically when it is not used for a specified period of
time. You can adjust the time before power management is applied. Any increase will affect the
product’s energy efficiency. Please consider the environment before making any change.

409
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Power Off Settings:

Your product may have this feature or the Power Off Timer feature depending on the location of
purchase.
❏ Power Off If Inactive
Select this setting to turn the printer off automatically if it is not used for a specified period of
time. Any increase will affect the product’s energy efficiency. Please consider the environment
before making any change.
❏ Power Off If Disconnected
Select this setting to turn the printer off after 30 minutes when all ports including the LINE port
are disconnected. This feature may not be available depending on your region.
This setting is disabled when optional ethernet board or fax board is installed.

Date/Time Settings:
❏ Date/Time
Enter the current date and time.
❏ Daylight Saving Time
Select the summer time setting that applies to your area.
❏ Time Difference
Enter the time difference between your local time and UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).

Country/Region:
Select the country or region in which you are using your printer. If you change the country or region,
your fax settings return to their defaults and you must select them again.

Language:
Select the language used on the LCD screen.

Start-up Screen:
Specify the initial menu displayed on the LCD screen when the printer turns on and Operation Time
Out is enable.

Edit Home:
Change the layout of the icons on the LCD screen. You can also add, remove, and move icons.

Wall Paper:
Change the background color of the LCD screen.
You can also select a background image from a memory device. Only JPEG format is supported.

Operation Time Out:

Select On to return to the initial screen when no operations have been performed for the specified
time. When user restrictions have been applied and no operations are performed for the specified
time, you are logged out and returned to the initial screen. When printing is paused from the status
monitor or by using the cancel or stop button, and then no operations are performed for the specified
time, printing resumes automatically. If you select Off for this feature, it does not automatically
resume after printing has been paused.

410
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Color Print Count Alert:

Select On to display a confirmation message that asks if you want to continue printing when a print
job with grayscale is counted as a color print job.

Keyboard:
Change the layout of the keyboard on the LCD screen.

Default Screen(Job/Status)
Select the default information you want to display when you tap Default Screen(Job/Status).

Screen Effect:
Select On to enable animation effects when switching screens. If you select Off, screen switching is
faster.

Related Information
& “Saving Power” on page 204
& “Entering Characters” on page 32

Printer Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings

You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.

Paper Source Settings:

Paper Setting:
Select the paper source to specify the paper size and paper type you loaded. When Paper Size
Auto Detect is enabled, the printer detects the paper size you loaded.

Paper Tray Priority:

Select On to give printing priority to paper loaded in the paper tray.

A4/Letter Auto Switching:

Select On to feed paper from the paper source set as A4 size when there is no paper source set
as Letter, or feed from the paper source set as Letter size when there is no paper source set as
A4.

Auto Select Settings:

When paper runs out, paper is automatically fed from a paper source that has the same
settings as the paper settings for the print jobs. You can set automatic selection for every paper
source for each function in copy, fax, or other. You cannot set everything to off.
This setting is disabled when you select a specific paper source in the paper settings for the
print jobs. Depending on the paper type setting on the Main tab of the printer driver, paper
may not be fed automatically.

411
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Error Notice:
Select On to display an error message when the selected paper size or type does not match the
loaded paper.

Paper Setup Auto Display:

Select On to display the Paper Setting screen when loading paper in the paper source.

User-Defined Paper Size List:

You can change the user defined size setting. This is useful when you print frequently on
irregularly sized paper.

Output: Copy:
Select where to output when copying.

Output: Fax:
Select where to output when receiving a fax.

Output: Other:
Select where to output when printing anything except for copies and faxes.

Printing Language:
Select the printing language for the USB interface or the network interface.

Universal Print Settings:

These print settings are applied when you print using an external device without using the printer
driver. Items marked with * are controlled on the printer driver and determine which settings are
used, those made on the printer's control panel or those made in the printer driver. To check the
settings in the printer driver, select the Maintenance tab, click Extended Settings, and then check
Panel Settings. When this is set to give priority to the printer driver, the items marked with * are
applied when you print using the printer driver.

Top Offset*:
Adjust the top margin of the paper.

Left Offset*:
Adjust the left margin of the paper.

Top Offset in Back*:

Adjust the top margin for the back of the page when performing 2-sided printing.

Left Offset in Back*:

Adjust the left margin for the back margin of the page when performing 2-sided printing.

Skip Blank Page*:

Skips blank pages in the print data automatically.

Rotate Sort
Select On to rotate each copy by 90 degrees when printing multiple copies.

412
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Insert Sheets per User

Select On to insert a slip sheet between jobs per sender when printing from a computer. Slip
sheets are inserted from the specified paper source.

Color Correction:
Make settings such as brightness and contrast, and perform color correction when printing
from an external device. When this feature is On, the printer color correction settings take
precedence over the settings of the standard printer driver.
❏ Brightness
❏ Contrast
❏ Saturation
❏ Red Balance
❏ Green Balance
❏ Blue Balance

PDL Print Configuration:

Select the PDL Print Configuration options you want to use for PCL or PostScript printing.

Common Settings:
❏ Paper Size
Select the default paper size for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏ Paper Type
Select the default paper type for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏ Orientation
Select the default orientation for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏ Quality
Select the print quality for PCL or PostScript printing.
❏ Ink Save Mode
Select On to save ink by reducing the print density.
❏ Print Order
Last Page on Top
Starts printing from the first page of a file.
First Page on Top
Starts printing from the last page of a file.
❏ Number of Copies
Set the number of copies to print.
❏ Binding Margin
Select the binding position.
❏ Auto Paper Ejection
Select On to eject paper automatically when printing is stopped during a print job.
❏ 2-Sided Printing
Select On to perform 2-sided printing.

413
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

PCL Menu:
❏ Font Source
Resident
Select to use a font preinstalled on the printer.
Download
Select to use a font you have downloaded.
❏ Font Number
Select the default font number for the default font source. The available number varies
depending on the settings you made.
❏ Pitch
Set the default font pitch if the font is scalable and of fixed-pitch. You can select from 0.44 to
99.99 cpi (characters per inch), in 0.01 increments.
This item may not appear depending on the font source or font number settings.
❏ Height
Set the default font height if the font is scalable and proportional. You can select from 4.00
to 999.75 points, in 0.25 increments.
This item may not appear depending on the font source or font number settings.
❏ Symbol Set
Select the default symbol set. If the font that you selected in the font source and the font
number setting is not available in the new symbol set setting, the font source and the font
number settings are automatically replaced with the default value, IBM-US.
❏ Form
Set the number of lines for the selected paper size and orientation. This also causes a line
spacing (VMI) change, and the new VMI value is stored in the printer. This means that later
changes in the page size or orientation settings cause changes in the Form value based on
the stored VMI.
❏ CR Function
Select the line feed command when printing with a driver from a specific operating system.
❏ LF Function
Select the line feed command when printing with a driver from a specific operating system.
❏ Paper Source Assign
Set the assignment for the paper source select command. When 4 is selected, the commands
are set as compatible with the HP LaserJet 4. When 4K is selected, the commands are set as
compatible with the HP LaserJet 4000, 5000, and 8000. When 5S is selected, the commands
are set as compatible with the HP LaserJet 5S.

PS Menu:
❏ Error Sheet
Select On to print a sheet showing the status when an error occurs during PostScript or
PDF printing.
❏ Coloration
Select the color mode for PostScript printing.

414
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

❏ Binary
Select On when printing data that contains binary images. The application may send the
binary data even if the printer driver setting is set to ASCII, but you can print the data when
this feature is enabled.
❏ PDF Page Size
Select the paper size when printing a PDF file. If Auto is selected, the paper size is
determined based on the size of the first page.

Auto Error Solver:

Select an action to perform when a 2-sided printing error or a memory full error occurs.
❏ On
Displays a warning and prints in single-sided mode when a 2-sided printing error occurs, or prints
only what the printer could process when a memory full error occurs.
❏ Off
Displays an error message and cancels printing.

Memory Device:
Select Enable to allow the printer to access an inserted memory device. If Disable is selected, you
cannot read, print data in the memory device, or save data to the memory device with the printer.
This prevents confidential documents from being removed illegally.

Thick Paper:
Select On to prevent ink from smearing on your printouts, however, this may lower the print speed.

Quiet Mode:
Select On to reduce noise during printing, however, this may lower the print speed. Depending on
the paper type and print quality settings you selected, there may be no difference in the printer's noise
level.

Print Speed Priority

Select Off to allow the printer to match the printing speed to the paper type and print data
conditions. This allows you to prevent print quality from declining and paper jams.

PC Connection via USB:

Select Enable to allow a computer to access the printer when connected by USB. When Disable is
selected, printing and scanning that is not sent over a network connection is restricted.

USB I/F Timeout Setting:

Specify the length of time in seconds that must elapse before ending USB communication with a
computer after the printer receives a print job from a PostScript printer driver or PCL printer driver.
If the job ending is not clearly defined from a PostScript printer driver or PCL printer driver, it can
cause endless USB communication. When this occurs, the printer ends communication after the
specified time has elapsed. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not want to end communication.

Related Information
& “Loading Paper” on page 37
& “Printing Using Easy Settings” on page 48
& “Printing JPEG Files from a Memory Device” on page 96

415
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

& “Printing TIFF Files from a Memory Device” on page 97

Network Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings

Wi-Fi Setup:
Set up or change wireless network settings. Choose the connection method from following and then
follow the instructions on the control panel.

Router:
❏ Wi-Fi Setup Wizard
❏ Push Button Setup(WPS)
❏ Advanced
❏ Others

❏ PIN Code Setup(WPS)

❏ Wi-Fi Auto Connect
❏ Disable Wi-Fi
You may be able to resolve network problems by disabling the Wi-Fi settings or making

the Wi-Fi settings again. Tap > Router > Change Settings > Others >
Disable Wi-Fi > Start Setup.

Wi-Fi Direct:
❏ iOS
❏ Android
❏ Other OS Devices
❏ Change

❏ Change Network Name

❏ Change Password
❏ Disable Wi-Fi Direct
❏ Restore Default Settings

Wired LAN Setup:

Set up or change a network connection that uses a LAN cable and router. When this is being used,
Wi-Fi connections are disabled.

Network Status:
Displays or prints the current network settings.
❏ Wired LAN/Wi-Fi Status
❏ Wi-Fi Direct Status

416
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

❏ Email Server Status

❏ Print Status Sheet

Connection Check:
Checks the current network connection and prints a report. If there are any problems with the
connection, see the report to solve the problem.

Advanced:
Make the following detailed settings.
❏ Device Name
❏ TCP/IP
❏ Proxy Server
❏ Email Server
❏ IPv6 Address
❏ MS Network Sharing
❏ Link Speed & Duplex
❏ Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
❏ Disable IPsec/IP Filtering
❏ Disable IEEE802.1X

Related Information
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 307
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)” on page 308
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)” on page 309
& “Printing a Network Status Sheet” on page 327
& “Checking the Network Connection Status from the Control Panel” on page 320

Web Service Settings

Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Web Service Settings

You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.

Epson Connect Services:

Displays whether the printer is registered and connected to Epson Connect.
You can register to the service by selecting Register and follow the instructions.
When you have registered, you can change the following settings.
❏ Suspend/Resume
❏ Unregister

For details, see the following web site.

417
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

https://www.epsonconnect.com/
http://www.epsonconnect.eu (Europe only)

Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)

Selecting Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings from the printer's control panel displays this
menu.

Note:
❏ You can also access Fax Settings from Web Config. Click the Fax tab on the Web Config screen.
❏ When you use Web Config to display the Fax Settings menu, there may be slight differences in the user interface and in
location compared to the printer's control panel.

Related Information
& “User Settings” on page 418
& “Basic Settings” on page 419
& “Send Settings” on page 422
& “Receive Settings” on page 424
& “Report Settings” on page 418
& “Security Settings” on page 422
& “Check Fax Connection” on page 423
& “Fax Setting Wizard” on page 430

User Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > User Settings

Initial tab
Select the tab you want to display first each time you tap Fax from the fax top screen.

Quick Operation Button

You can register up to four items displayed in Fax > Frequent and Fax Settings. This is useful for
settings that you use often.

Report Settings
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Report Settings

Note:
❏ On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Report Settings
❏ If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.

418
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Forwarding Report:
Prints a report after forwarding a received fax document. Select Print to print every time a document
is forwarded.

Backup Error Report:

Prints a report when a backup error occurs on forwarding the sent fax to Backup Destination. You
can set the destination in Fax > Fax Settings > Backup. Note that the backup feature is available
when:
❏ Sending a fax in monochrome
❏ Sending a fax using the Send Fax Later feature
❏ Sending a fax using the Batch Send feature
❏ Sending a fax using the Store Fax Data feature

Fax Log Auto Print:

Prints the fax log automatically. Select On(Every 100) to print a log every time 100 fax jobs are
completed. Select On(Time) to print the log at a specified time. However, if the number of fax jobs
exceeds 100, the log is printed before the specified time.

Reception Report:
Prints a reception report after you received a fax.
Print on Error prints a report only when an error occurs.

Attach Fax image to report:

Prints a Transmission Report with an image of the first page of the sent document. Select On(Large
Image) to print the upper part of the page without reducing. Select On(Small Image) to print the
entire page reducing it to fit onto the report.

Fax Log Layout:

Combine Send and Receive prints a Transmission Report and Reception Report on the same sheet
when you print Fax Log.
Selecting Separate Send and Receive prints a Transmission Report and Reception Report
separately when you print Fax Log.

Report Format:
Selects a format for fax reports in Fax > Menu tab > Fax Report other than Protocol Trace. Select
Detail to print with error codes.

Fax Log Output Method:

Select an output method for fax reports such as Save to Memory Device. When you select Forward,
select Destination from the contacts.

Basic Settings
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings

419
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Note:
❏ On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Basic Settings
❏ If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.

Fax Speed:
Select the fax transmission speed. We recommend selecting Slow(9,600bps) when a communication
error occurs frequently, when sending/receiving a fax to/from abroad, or when you are using an IP
(VoIP) phone service.

ECM:
Automatically corrects errors in the fax transmission (Error Correction Mode), mostly caused by
telephone line noise. If this is disabled, you cannot send or receive documents in color.

Dial Tone Detection:

Detects a dial tone before starting to dial. If the printer is connected to a PBX (Private Branch
Exchange) or digital phone line, the printer may fail to start dialing. In this situation, change the Line
Type setting to PBX. If this does not work, disable this feature. However, disabling this feature may
drop the first digit of a fax number and send the fax to the wrong number.

Dial Mode:
Select the type of phone system to which you have connected the printer. When set to Pulse, you can
temporarily switch the dialing mode from pulse to tone by pressing ("T" is entered) while entering
numbers on the fax top screen. This setting may not be displayed depending on your region or
country.

Line Type:
Select the line type to which you have connected the printer.
When using the printer in an environment that uses extensions and requires an external access code,
such as 0 and 9, to get an outside line, select PBX. For an environment that uses a DSL modem or
terminal adapter, setting to PBX is also recommended.

Access Code
Select Use, and then register an external access code such as 0 or 9. Then, when sending a fax
to an outside fax number, enter # (hash) instead of the real code. # (hash) must also be used in
Contacts as an external access code. If an external access code such as 0 or 9 is set in a contact,
you cannot send faxes to the contact. In this case, set Access Code to Do Not Use, otherwise
you must change the code in Contacts to #.

Header:
Enter your sender name and fax number. These appear as a header on outgoing faxes.
❏ Your Phone Number: You can enter up to 20 characters using 0-9 + or space. For Web Config, you
can enter up to 30 characters.
❏ Fax Header: You can register up to 21 sender names as necessary. You can enter up to 40 characters
for each sender name. For Web Config, enter the header in Unicode (UTF-8).

Receive Mode:
Select the receive mode. For details, see the related Information below.

420
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

DRD:
If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, select the ring
pattern to be used for incoming faxes. The distinctive ring service, offered by many telephone
companies (the service name differs by company), allows you to have several phone numbers on one
phone line. Each number is assigned different ring pattern. You can use one number for voice calls
and another for fax calls. Depending on the region, this option may be On or Off.

Rings to Answer:
Select the number of rings that must occur before the printer automatically receives a fax.

Remote Receive:

Remote Receive
When you answer an incoming fax call on a phone connected to the printer, you can start
receiving the fax by entering the code using the phone.

Start Code
Set the start code of Remote Receive. Enter two characters using 0-9, *, #.

Rejection Fax:

Rejection Fax
Select options to reject receiving junk faxes.
❏ Blocked Number List: If the other party's phone number is in the rejection number list, set
whether to reject the incoming faxes.
❏ Fax Header Blank: If the other party's phone number is blocked, set whether to reject
receiving the faxes.
❏ Caller not in Contacts: If the other party's phone number is not in the contacts, set whether
to reject receiving the faxes.

Edit Blocked Number list

You can register up to 30 fax numbers to reject the faxes and calls. Enter up to 20 characters
using 0-9, *, #, or space.

Receiving Paper Size:

Select the maximum paper size for faxes that the printer can receive.

Save/Forward File Format:

File Format:
Select the format that you want to use for saving or forwarding faxes from PDF or TIFF.

Related Information
& “Enabling Sending Faxes from a Computer” on page 531
& “Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 520
& “Making Settings for a PBX Phone System” on page 522
& “Receiving Incoming Faxes” on page 152
& “Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes” on page 531

421
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Security Settings
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Security Settings

Note:
❏ On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Security Settings
❏ If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.

Direct Dialing Restrictions:

Selecting On disables manual entry of the recipient's fax numbers allowing the operator to select
recipients only from the contacts list or sent history.
Selecting Enter Twice requires the operator to enter the fax number again when the number was
manually entered.
Selecting Off enables manual entry of the recipient's fax numbers.

Broadcasting Restrictions:
Selecting On allows only one fax number to be entered as the Recipient.

Confirm Address List:

Selecting On displays a recipient confirmation screen before starting the transmission.
You can select the recipients from All or Only for Broadcasting.

Backup Data Auto Clear:

Selecting On automatically erases the backups when sending or receiving a document completes
successfully and the backups become unnecessary.
Selecting Off, to prepare for an unexpected power off due to an electricity failure or an incorrect
operation, temporarily stores backup copies of sent and received documents in its memory.

Clear Backup Data:

Erases all backup copies temporarily stored in the printer's memory. Run this before you give the
printer to someone else or dispose of it.
This menu is not displayed on the Web Config screen.

Send Settings
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Send Settings

Note:
❏ On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Send Settings
❏ If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.

422
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Auto Rotation:
An A4 size original placed in the ADF or on the scanner glass with its long edge facing to the left is
sent as an A3 size fax. Enable this to rotate the scanned image to send it at A4 size.

Quick memory send:

The quick memory send feature starts sending the fax when the printer finishes scanning the first
page. If you do not enable this feature, the printer starts sending after saving all of the scanned images
to memory. By using this feature, you can reduce the overall operation time as scanning and sending
are performed in parallel.

Batch Send:
When there are multiple faxes waiting to be sent to the same recipient, this groups them together to
send them at once. Up to five documents (up to 200 pages in total) can be sent at one time. This helps
you save on transmission costs by reducing the number of connection times.

Save Failure Data:

Saves documents that failed to be sent in the printer's memory. You can resend the documents from
the Job/Status.

Set Storage Period:

Storage Period
Set a period of days within which the printer will store the document that failed to send.

Wait Time for Next Original:

Set the time to wait for the next original. The printer starts sending the fax after the time has passed.

Fax Preview Display Time:

You can preview the scanned document for a set time before sending it. The printer stars sending the
fax after the time has passed.

Allow Backup:
Selecting Allowed allows you to backup faxes sent with Fax > Fax Settings > Backup.

PC to FAX Function:
This item is displayed on the Web Config screen only. Enables sending faxes using a client computer.

Check Fax Connection

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Check Fax Connection

Note:
You cannot display this menu on the Web Config screen.

Selecting Check Fax Connection checks that the printer is connected to the phone line and ready for fax
transmission. You can print the check result on A4 size plain paper.

423
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Receive Settings

Related Information
& “Save/Forward Settings” on page 424
& “Print Settings” on page 429

Save/Forward Settings

Unconditional Save/Forward:
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/
Forward
Note:
On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward

You can set saving and forwarding destinations to the Inbox, a computer, an external memory device, email
addresses, shared folders, and other fax machines. You can use these features at the same time. If you set all items
to Off on the printer's control panel, the printer is set to print received faxes.

Save to Inbox:
Saves received faxes to the printer's Inbox. Up to 200 documents can be saved. Note that saving 200
documents may not be possible depending on the usage conditions such as the file size of saved
documents, and using of multiple fax saving features at a time.
Though the received faxes are not automatically printed, you can view them on the printer's screen
and print only the ones you need. However, if you select Yes and Print in another item, such as Save
to Computer in Unconditional Save/Forward, the received faxes are printed automatically.

Save to Computer:
Saves received faxes as PDF or TIFF files on a computer connected to the printer. You can set this to
Yes by using only the FAX Utility. Install FAX Utility on the computer in advance. After setting this to
Yes, you can change this to Yes and Print.

Save to Memory Device:

Saves received faxes as PDF or TIFF files to an external memory device connected to the printer.
Selecting Yes and Print prints received faxes while saving them to the memory device.
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the documents are saved
in the memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory full error disables sending and
receiving faxes, keep the memory device connected to the printer.

Forward:
Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or forwards them as PDF or TIFF files to a shared
folder on a network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted from the printer. Selecting
Yes and Print prints received faxes while forwarding them. First add the forwarding destinations to
the contacts list. To forward to an email address, configure the email server settings.

424
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

❏ Destination: You can select forwarding destinations from the contacts list you added in advance.
If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the forwarding
destination, we recommend that you test if you can send a scanned image to the destination in the
scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network Folder/FTP from the home screen, select the
destination, and then start scanning.
❏ Options When Forwarding Failed: You can select whether to print the failed fax or save it to the
Inbox.
When the Inbox is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from the
inbox once they have been checked. The number of documents that have failed to be forwarded is
displayed on the on the home screen, in addition to other unprocessed jobs.

Email Notifications:
Sends an email notification when the process you select below is complete. You can use the features
below at the same time.

Recipient
Set the destination of the process completion notification.

Notify on Receive
Sends a notification when receiving a fax is complete.

Notify on Print
Sends a notification when printing a fax is complete.

Notify on Save
Sends a notification when saving a fax to a memory device is complete.

Notify on Forward
Sends a notification when forwarding a fax is complete.

Related Information
& “Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 524
& “Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 525

Conditional Save/Forward:
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/
Forward
Note:
On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward

You can set saving and/or forwarding destinations to the Inbox, confidential boxes, an external memory device,
email addresses, shared folders, and another fax machine.

To switch between enabling or disabling the conditions, tap anywhere on the set item except for .

425
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Name:
Enter name of the condition.

Condition(s):
Select the conditions and make the settings.

Sender Fax Number match

When the sender fax number matches, the received fax is saved and forwarded.

Subaddress(SUB) perfect match

When the subaddress (SUB) matches perfectly, the received fax is saved and forwarded.

Password(SID) perfect match

When the password (SID) matches perfectly, the received fax is saved and forwarded.

Receiving Time
Saves and forwards a fax received during the specified period of time.

Save/Forward Destination:
Select the destination to save and forward received documents that match the conditions. You can use
the features below at the same time.

Save to Fax Box:

Saves received faxes in the printer's Inbox or confidential box.
You can save up to 200 documents in total. Note that saving 200 documents may not be
possible depending on the usage conditions such as the file size of saved documents, and using
of multiple fax saving features at a time.

Save to Memory Device:

Saves received faxes as PDF or TIFF files to an external memory device connected to the
printer.
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the documents are
saved in the memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory full error disables
sending and receiving faxes, keep the memory device connected to the printer.

Forward:
Forwards received faxes to another fax machine, or forwards them as PDF or TIFF files to a
shared folder on a network or to an email address. Forwarded faxes are deleted from the
printer. First add the forwarding destination to the contacts list. To forward to an email
address, you also need to configure the email server settings.
❏ Destination: You can select a forwarding destination from the contacts list you added in
advance.
If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the forwarding
destination, we recommend that you test if you can send a scanned image to the destination
in the scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network Folder/FTP from the home
screen, select the destination, and then start scanning.
❏ Options When Forwarding Failed: You can select whether to print the failed fax or save it to
the Inbox.

426
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Print:
Prints received faxes.

Email Notifications:
Sends an email notification when the process you select below is complete. You can use the features
below at the same time.

Recipient
Set the destination of the process completion notification.

Notify on Receive
Sends a notification when receiving a fax is complete.

Notify on Print
Sends a notification when printing a fax is complete.

Notify on Save
Sends a notification when saving a fax to a memory device is complete.

Notify on Forward
Sends a notification when forwarding a fax is complete.

Save/Forward File Format:

You can set the file format when saving or forwarding received faxes.

PDF Settings:
Selecting PDF in Save/Forward File Format enables the settings.

Document Open Password:

Inbox Password Settings:

Enables to set a password to open saved or forwarded faxes.

Password:
Set a document open password.

Permissions Password:

Inbox Password Settings

Enables to set a password for printing or editing in a PDF file.

Password
Set a permission password in Password.
Printing: Allows printing the PDF file.
Editing: Allows editing the PDF file.

Transmission Report:
Prints a transmission report automatically after you save or forward a received fax.

427
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Selecting Print on Error prints a report only when you save or forward a received fax and an error
occurs.

Related Information
& “Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specific Conditions” on page 527
& “Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specified Conditions” on page 529

Common Settings:
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Common Settings
Note:
On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
❏ Fax tab > Fax Box > Inbox
❏ Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Common Settings

Inbox settings:

Options when memory is full:

You can select the operation to print the received fax or refuse to receive it when the Inbox
memory is full.

Inbox Password Settings:

Password protects the Inbox to restrict users from viewing received faxes. Select Change to
change the password, and select Reset to cancel password protection. When changing or
resetting the password, you need the current password.
You cannot set a password when Options when memory is full has been set to Receive and
print faxes.

Email Notifications:
You can specify a subject for the email when forwarding to an email address.

Box Document Delete Settings:

Box Document Delete Settings:

Selecting On automatically deletes received fax documents in the inbox after a certain period
of time.

Period Until Deletion:

Set a period of days after which the printer will delete the document saved in the inbox.

Faxes To Be Deleted:
Select the documents that you want to delete from Read, Unread and All.

Menu:

Selecting on the printer's control panel below displays Menu.

428
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings
Note:
You cannot print the list from the Web Config screen.

Print Conditional Save/Forward list:

Prints the Conditional Save/Forward list.

Print Settings
You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Print Settings

Note:
❏ On the Web Config screen, you can find the menu below.
Fax tab > Print Settings
❏ If a password entry screen is displayed, enter the password.

Auto Reduction:
Prints received faxes with large-size documents reduced to fit on the paper in the paper source.
Reducing may not always be possible depending on the received data. If this is turned off, large
documents are printed at their original size on multiple sheets, or a blank second page may be
ejected.

Split Page Settings:

Prints received faxes with the page split when the size of the received documents is larger than the
size of the paper loaded in the printer.

Acting Print:
Make print settings when the document size of the received fax is larger than the size of the paper
loaded in the printer.
Selecting On(Split to pages) splits the document longitudinally to print the received document.
Selecting On (Reduce to Fit) reduces to a 50 % minimum to print.

Auto Rotation:
Rotates faxes received as landscape-oriented A4 (Letter, B5, or A5) size documents so that they are
printed on A4 (Letter, B5, or A5) size paper. This setting is applied when the paper size setting for at
least one paper source used for printing faxes is set to A4 (B5, A5, or Letter).
By selecting Off, faxes received as landscape-oriented A4 (Letter, B5, or A5) size, which are the same
width as A3 (Tabloid, B4, or A4) portrait documents, are assumed to be A3 (Tabloid, B4, or A4) size
faxes and printed as such.
Check the paper source settings for printing faxes and paper size for the paper sources in the
following menus in Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Paper Source Settings.
❏ Auto Select Settings
❏ Paper Setting > Paper Size

429
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Add Reception Information:

Prints reception information on the received fax, even if the sender does not set the header
information. The reception information includes the received date and time, sender's ID, reception
ID (such as " #001"), and page number (such as "P1"). By collating the reception ID printed on the
received fax, you can check the transmission log in the fax report and the fax job history. When Split
Page Settings is enabled, the split page number is also included.

2-Sided:
Prints multiple pages of received faxes on both sides of the paper.

Print Start Timing:

Select options to start printing the faxes to receive.
❏ All Pages Received: Printing starts after receiving all of the pages. To start printing from the first
page or last page depends on the setting of Collation Stack feature. See the explanation for
Collation Stack.
❏ First Page Received: Starts printing when the first page is received, and then prints in order as the
pages are received. If the printer cannot start printing, such as when it is printing other jobs, the
printer starts printing received pages as a batch when it is available.

Collation Stack:
Since the first page is printed last (output to the top), the printed documents are stacked in the correct
page order. When the printer is running low on memory, this feature may not be available.

Print Suspend Time:

Print Suspend Time

During the specified time period, the printer saves documents received in the printer's
memory without printing them. This feature can be used for noise prevention at night or to
prevent confidential documents from being disclosed while you are away. Before using this
feature, make sure there is enough free memory. Even before the restarting time, you can check
and print the received documents individually from Job/Status on the home screen.

Time to Stop
Stops printing documents.

Time to Restart
Restarts printing documents automatically.

Quiet Mode:
Reduces the noise the printer makes when printing faxes, however, print speed may be reduced.

Fax Setting Wizard

You can find the menu on the printer's control panel below.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Setting Wizard

Note:
You cannot display this menu on the Web Config screen.

430
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Selecting Fax Setting Wizard makes basic fax settings. Follow the on-screen instructions.

Related Information
& “Basic Settings” on page 419
& “Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 520

Scan Settings
Initial tab
Select the tab you want to display first each time when scanning.

Quick Operation Button(Folder)/Quick Operation Button(Mail)

Set four settings you want to display on the Frequent screen when scanning.

Confirm Recipient
Check destination before scanning.

Document Capture Pro

Before scanning using the Computer menu on the control panel, set the operation mode on the
control panel to match the computer on which Document Capture Pro is installed.
❏ Client Mode
Select this if Document Capture Pro is installed on Windows or Mac OS.
❏ Server Mode
Select this if Document Capture Pro is installed on a Windows Server. Next, enter the server
address.

Email Server
Set the email server settings for scanning Email.
❏ Server Settings
Specify the authentication method for the printer to access the mail server.
“Mail Server Setting Items” on page 484
❏ Connection Check
Check the connection to the mail server.

Storage Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > Storage Settings

Shared Folder Access Control:

❏ Access
Select whether or not to allow the use of the shared folder (fixed).

431
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

❏ Operation Authority
Select to restrict creating, editing, and deleting folders to administrators or users.
❏ Automatic Delete Setting Authority
Select to restrict automatic deletion setting of the stored files to administrators or users.

Shared Folder File Management:

❏ Automatic File Deletion
Select whether or not to delete the stored files automatically.
❏ Period Until Deletion
Set the time period until the automatic deletion. It starts counting from when the file was saved or
last used. When a new shared folder is created, the setting here is applied to the new folder. You can
also change the setting for each folder later.
❏ Apply to All Shared Folders
Applies Automatic File Deletion and Period Until Deletion settings to all the shared folders.

Personal Folder File Management:

The settings below are applied to every personal folder. You cannot make settings for each folder.
❏ Period Until Deletion
Select whether or not to delete the stored files automatically.
❏ Period Until Deletion
Set the time period until the automatic deletion. It starts counting from when the file was saved or
last used.

Additional Action:
❏ Delete File after Output
Select whether or not to delete files after printing or saving.
❏ Access Control
When Allowed is selected, a checkbox is displayed on the File List screen and you can select whether
or not to delete the file after printing or saving.

View Options:
Select the display format for the Folder List and the File List screens.

Search Options:
❏ Begins with
Displays folders and files that begin with the keyword used in the search.
❏ Ends with
Displays folders and files that end with the keyword used in the search.
❏ Includes
Displays folders and files that include the keyword used in the search.

432
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

System Administration
By using this menu, you can maintain the product as a system administrator. It also allows you to restrict product
features for individual users to suite your work or office style.
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > General Settings > System Administration

Contacts Manager

Add/Edit/Delete:
Register and/or delete contacts for the Fax, Scan to Computer (Email), and Scan to Network
Folder/FTP menus.

Frequent:
Register frequently used contacts to access them quickly. You can also change the order of the
list.

Print Contacts:
Print your contact list.

View Options:
Change the way the contact list is displayed.

Search Options:
Change the method for searching contacts.

Print Head Cleaning Settings:

You can make the following settings for print head cleaning.

Auto Cleaning:
Check if the print head nozzles are clogged before printing or after printing.
Print head cleaning is performed automatically if it is necessary as a result of checking.

Periodic Cleaning:
Select On to perform print head cleaning when a certain number of pages are printed.

Copy Color Sensitivity:

Select the sensitivity setting to determine whether the document is monochrome or color when
copying using Auto.
You can select the sensitivity from five levels between More B&W and More Color.
Documents tend to be scanned in monochrome when selecting it closer to More B&W, and in color
when selecting it closer to More Color.

Reset Page count:

Set the cumulative color print page count (page count) and monochrome cumulative print count
(page count) to Default.

433
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

Clear Internal Memory Data:

This item is displayed on PCL or PostScript compatible printer.
Delete the printer's internal memory data, such as a downloaded font and macro for PCL printing or
a job of password printing.

HDD Erase Settings:

Make settings for processing data stored in the internal hard disc.
Jobs for printing, copying, and scanning are temporarily saved to the hard disc in order to handle the
data for authenticated printing and the large amount of copying, scanning, printing, etc. Make
settings to safely erase this data.

Auto Erase Memory Setting:

When enabled, the target data is erased sequentially when it becomes unnecessary, such as
when printing or scanning is completed. The target to be deleted is data written while this
function is enabled.
Because access to the hard disc is necessary, the time to enter power saving mode will be
delayed.

Erase All Memory:

Erases all data on the hard disc. You cannot perform other operations or turn off the device
during formatting.
❏ High Speed:
Erases all data with a dedicated erase command.
❏ Overwrite:
Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites other data in all areas to
erase all data.
❏ Triple Overwrite:
Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites three times other data in all
areas to erase all data.

Security Settings:
You can make the following security settings.

Restrictions:
Permit to change the settings of the following items when panel lock is enabled.
❏ Job Log Access
❏ Access to Register/Delete Contacts
❏ Fax Recent Access
❏ Fax Transmission Log Access
❏ Access to Fax Report
❏ Access to Print Save History of Scan to Network Folder/FTP
❏ Access to Recent of Scan to Email
❏ Access to Show Sent History of Scan to Email
❏ Access to Print Sent History of Scan to Email

434
Product Information > Settings Menu List > General Settings

❏ Access to Language
❏ Access to Thick Paper
❏ Access to Quiet Mode
❏ Access to Print Speed Priority
❏ Access to Detect Double Feed
❏ Protection of Personal Data
❏ Access to Copy Output Tray
❏ Accept Power Off

Access Control:
Select On to restrict product features. This requires users to log into the product control panel
with their user name and password before they can use control panel features. In Accept
Unknown User Jobs, you can select whether or not to allow jobs that do not have the
necessary authentication information.

Admin Settings:
❏ Admin Password
Set, change, and clear an administrator password.
❏ Lock Setting
Select whether or not to lock the control panel using the password registered in Admin
Password.

Password Policy:
Select On to set password policy.

Password Encryption:
Select On to encrypt your password. You can also connect a USB device to backup the
encryption key. If you turn the power off while restart is in progress, data may be damaged and
the printer settings are restores to defaults. In that case, set password information again.

Audit Log:
Select On to record an audit log.

Program Verification on Start Up:

Select On to verify the printer's program when starting up.

Customer Research:
Select Approve to provide product usage information such as the number of prints to Seiko Epson
Corporation.

Restore Default Settings:

Reset the settings in the following menus to their defaults.
❏ Network Settings
❏ Copy Settings
❏ Scan Settings

435
Product Information > Settings Menu List > Maintenance

❏ Fax Settings
❏ Clear All Data and Settings

Firmware Update:
You can get firmware information such as your current version and information on available updates.

Automatic Firmware Update:

Select On to update firmware automatically. Select On to set the day of the week/start time to
update.

Maintenance/Service Mode:
Select Off to disable Maintenance/Service Mode.

Related Information
& “Updating the Printer's Firmware Automatically” on page 210

Print Counter
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Print Counter

Displays the total number of prints, B&W prints, and color prints including items such as the status sheet from the
time you purchased the printer. You can also check the number of pages printed from a memory device or other
functions.

Supply Status
Select the menu on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Supply Status

Displays the approximate level of the ink and service life of the maintenance box.

When is displayed, the ink is running low or the maintenance box is nearly full. When is displayed, you
need to replace the item as ink is expended or the maintenance box is full.

Related Information
& “It is Time to Replace the Ink Cartridges” on page 280

Maintenance
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Maintenance

436
Product Information > Settings Menu List > Printer Status/Print

Related Information
& “Checking the Clogged Nozzles” on page 198

Print Head Nozzle Check:

Select this feature to check if the print head nozzles are clogged. The printer prints a nozzle check pattern.

Print Head Cleaning:

Select this feature to clean clogged nozzles in the print head.

Language
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Language

Select the language used on the LCD screen.

Printer Status/Print
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Printer Status/Print

Print Status Sheet:

Configuration Status Sheet:

Print information sheets showing the current printer status and settings.

Supply Status Sheet:

Print information sheets showing the status of consumables.

Usage History Sheet:

Print information sheets showing the usage history of the printer.

PS Font List:
Print a list of fonts that are available for a PostScript printer.

PCL Font List:

Print a list of fonts that are available for a PCL print.

Network:
Displays the current network settings. You can also print the status sheet.

437
Product Information > Settings Menu List > Authentication System

Contacts Manager
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Contacts Manager

Add/Edit/Delete:
Register and/or delete contacts for the Fax, Scan to Computer (Email), and Scan to Network
Folder/FTP menus.

Frequent:
Register frequently used contacts to access them quickly. You can also change the order of the list.

Print Contacts:
Print your contact list.

View Options:
Change the way the contact list is displayed.

Search Options:
Change the method for searching contacts.

User Settings
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > User Settings

You cannot change settings that have been locked by your administrator.
You can change the default settings of the following menus.
❏ Scan to Network Folder/FTP
❏ Scan to Email
❏ Scan to Memory Device
❏ Scan to Cloud
❏ Copy Settings
❏ Fax

Authentication System
Select the menus on the control panel as described below.
Settings > Authentication System

You can check the status of the Authentication System and the Epson Open Platform.

438
Product Information > Product Specifications > Scanner Specifications

Authentication Device Status

Displays the status of the authentication device.

Epson Open Platform Information

Displays the status of the Epson Open Platform.

Product Specifications

Printer Specifications
Type Printer Inkjet

Print Head Nozzle Placement Black ink nozzles: 8676

Color ink nozzles: 8676 for each color

Printable Area

Printable Area for Single Sheets

A 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)

B 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)

*Direction of paper being fed.

Printable Area for Envelopes

A 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)

B 3.0 mm (0.12 in.)

Scanner Specifications
Scanner Type Flatbed

439
Product Information > Product Specifications > Fax Specifications (Fax-capable Printers Only)

Photoelectric Device CIS

Effective Pixels 7020×10200 pixels (600 dpi)

Maximum Document Size 297×431.8 mm (11.7×17 in.)

A3

Scanning Resolution 600 dpi (main scan)

600 dpi (sub scan)

Output Resolution 50 to 9600 dpi in 1 dpi increments

Color Depth Color

❏ 30 bits per pixel internal (10 bits per pixel per color internal)
❏ 24 bits per pixel external (8 bits per pixel per color external)

Grayscale
❏ 10 bits per pixel internal
❏ 8 bits per pixel external

Black and white

❏ 10 bits per pixel internal
❏ 1 bits per pixel external

Light Source LED

ADF Specifications
ADF Type Auto duplex scanning

Available Paper Sizes

A6 to A3 /11x17in (Maximum 297×431.8 mm)

Paper Type Plain Paper, High quality plain paper, Recycled paper

Weight of Paper 38 to 128 g/m2 (1-sided)

50 to 128 g/m2 (2-sided)

Loading Capacity 150 sheets (80 g/m2) or 16.5 mm

Even when the original meets the specifications for media that can be placed in the ADF, it may not feed from the
ADF or the scan quality may decline depending on the paper properties or quality.

Fax Specifications (Fax-capable Printers Only)

Fax Type Walk-up black-and-white and color fax capability (ITU-T Super Group 3)

Supported Lines Standard analogue telephone lines, PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone
systems

Speed Up to 33.6 kbps

440
Product Information > Product Specifications > Using Port for the Printer

Resolution Monochrome
❏ Standard: 8 pel/mm×3.85 line/mm (203 pel/in.×98 line/in.)
❏ Fine: 8 pel/mm×7.7 line/mm (203 pel/in.×196 line/in.)
❏ Super Fine: 8 pel/mm×15.4 line/mm (203 pel/in.×392 line/in.)
❏ Ultra Fine: 16 pel/mm×15.4 line/mm (406 pel/in.×392 line/in.)

Color
200×200 dpi

Page Memory Up to 550 pages (when received ITU-T No.1 chart in monochrome draft mode)

Redial* 2 times (with 1 minute intervals)

Interface RJ-11 Phone Line, RJ-11 Telephone set connection

* The specifications may differ by country or region.

Note:
To check the fax firmware version, select the following on the printer's control panel, print the Fax Settings List, and then
check the version on the sheet.

Fax > (Menu)> Fax Report > Fax Settings List

Using Port for the Printer

The printer uses the following port. These ports should be allowed to become available by the network
administrator as necessary.

441
Product Information > Product Specifications > Using Port for the Printer

Sender Use Destination Protocol Port

(Client) (Server) Number

Printer File sending (When scan to network FTP/FTPS server FTP/FTPS (TCP) 20
folder is used from the printer)
21

File server SMB (TCP) 445

NetBIOS (UDP) 137

138

NetBIOS (TCP) 139

WebDAV server Protocol HTTP(TCP) 80

Protocol HTTPS(TCP) 443

Email sending (When scan to mail is SMTP server SMTP (TCP) 25

used from the printer)
SMTP SSL/TLS (TCP) 465

SMTP STARTTLS (TCP) 587

POP before SMTP connection (When POP server POP3 (TCP) 110
scan to mail is used from the printer)

When Epson Connect is used Epson Connect HTTPS 443

Server
XMPP 5222

When ERMS is used ERMS server Protocol HTTPS(TCP) 443

Protocol MQTT(TCP) 443

Collecting user information (Use the LDAP server LDAP (TCP) 389
contacts from the printer)
LDAP SSL/TLS (TCP) 636

LDAP STARTTLS (TCP) 389

User authentication when sending KDC server Kerberos 88

email (When activating Epson Open
Platform)
User authentication when collecting
user information (When using the
contacts from the printer)
User authentication when using the
scan to network folder (SMB) from the
printer

Control WSD Client computer WSD (TCP) 5357

Search the computer when push Client computer Network Push Scan 2968
scanning from Document Capture Pro Discovery

442
Product Information > Product Specifications > Network Specifications

Sender Use Destination Protocol Port

(Client) (Server) Number

Client File sending (When FTP printing is Printer FTP (TCP) 20

computer used from the printer)
21

Discover the printer from an Printer ENPC (UDP) 3289

application such as EpsonNet Config,
printer driver, and scanner driver.

Collect and set up the MIB information Printer SNMP (UDP) 161
from an application such as EpsonNet
Config, printer driver, and scanner
driver.

Forwarding LPR data Printer LPR (TCP) 515

Forwarding RAW data Printer RAW (Port9100) (TCP) 9100

Searching WSD printer Printer WS-Discovery (UDP) 3702

Forwarding the scan data from Printer Network Scan (TCP) 1865
Document Capture Pro

Collecting the job information when Printer Network Push Scan 2968
push scanning from Document
Capture Pro

Web Config Printer HTTP(TCP) 80

HTTPS(TCP) 443

Forwarding FaxOut Data Printer IPP FaxOut(TCP) 631

PC-FAX Printer HTTP(TCP) 80

Interface Specifications
For Computer SuperSpeed USB

For External USB Devices Hi-Speed USB

Network Specifications

Wi-Fi Specifications
See the following table for Wi-Fi specifications.

Countries or regions except for those listed Table A

below

443
Product Information > Product Specifications > Network Specifications

Australia Table B
New Zealand
Hong Kong
Taiwan
South Korea

Table A

Standards IEEE802.11b/g/n*1

Frequency Range 2.4 GHz

Channels 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12/13

Coordination Modes Infrastructure, Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP)*2*3

Security Protocols*4 WEP (64/128bit), WPA2-PSK (AES)*5, WPA3-SAE (AES), WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise

*1 Only available for the HT20

*2 Not supported for IEEE 802.11b
*3 Infrastructure and Wi-Fi Direct modes or an Ethernet connection can be used simultaneously.
*4 Wi-Fi Direct supports WPA2-PSK (AES) only.
*5 Complies with WPA2 standards with support for WPA/WPA2 Personal.

Table B

Standards IEEE802.11a/b/g/n*1/ac

Frequency Ranges IEEE802.11b/g/n: 2.4 GHz, IEEE802.11a/n/ac: 5 GHz

Channels Wi-Fi 2.4 GHz 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12*2/13*2

5 GHz*3 W52 (36/40/44/48),

W53 (52/56/60/64),
W56 (100/104/108/112/116/120/124/128/132/136/140/144),
W58 (149/153/157/161/165)

Wi-Fi Direct 2.4 GHz 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/9/10/11/12*2/13*2

5 GHz*3 W52 (36/40/44/48)

W58 (149/153/157/161/165)

Connection Modes Infrastructure, Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP) *4*5

Security Protocols*6 WEP (64/128bit), WPA2-PSK (AES)*7, WPA3-SAE (AES), WPA2/WPA3-Enterprise

*1 Only available for the HT20

*2 Not available in Taiwan
*3 The availability of these channels and use of the product outdoors over these channels varies by location. For more
information, see http://support.epson.net/wifi5ghz/
*4 Not supported for IEEE 802.11b

444
Product Information > Product Specifications > Network Specifications

*5 Infrastructure and Wi-Fi Direct modes or an Ethernet connection can be used simultaneously.
*6 Wi-Fi Direct only supports WPA2-PSK (AES) .
*7 Complies with WPA2 standards with support for WPA/WPA2 Personal.

Ethernet Specifications

Standards IEEE802.3i (10BASE-T)*1

IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)*1

IEEE802.3ab (1000BASE-T)*1

IEEE802.3az (Energy Efficient Ethernet)*2

Communication Mode Auto, 10 Mbps Full duplex, 10 Mbps Half duplex, 100 Mbps Full duplex, 100 Mbps
Half duplex

Connector RJ-45

*1 Use a category 5e or higher STP (Shielded twisted pair) cable to prevent risk of radio interference.
*2 The connected device should comply with IEEE802.3az standards.

Network Functions and IPv4/IPv6

Functions Supported Remarks

Network Printing EpsonNet Print (Windows) IPv4 ✓ -

Standard TCP/IP (Windows) IPv4, IPv6 ✓ -

WSD Printing (Windows) IPv4, IPv6 ✓ Windows Vista or

later

Bonjour Printing (Mac OS) IPv4, IPv6 ✓ -

IPP Printing (Windows, Mac IPv4, IPv6 ✓ -

OS)

PictBridge Printing (Wi-Fi) IPv4 - Digital camera

Epson Connect (Email Print, IPv4 ✓ -

Remote Print)

Network Scanning Epson Scan 2 IPv4, IPv6 ✓ -

Event Manager IPv4 - -

Epson Connect (Scan to IPv4 ✓ -

Cloud)

Fax Send a fax IPv4 ✓ -

Receive a fax IPv4 ✓ -

445
Product Information > Product Specifications > Supported Data Specifications

Security Protocol

IEEE802.1X*

IPsec/IP Filtering

SSL/TLS HTTPS Server/Client

IPPS

SMTPS (STARTTLS, SSL/TLS)

SNMPv3

* You need to use a device for connection that complies with IEEE802.1X.

PostScript Level 3 Compatibility

The PostScript used on this printer is compatible with PostScript Level 3.

Memory Device Specifications

Devices Maximum Capacities

USB Flash Drive 2 TB (formatted in FAT, FAT32, or exFAT.)

You cannot use the following devices:

❏ A device that requires a dedicated driver
❏ A device with security settings (password, encryption, and so on)

Epson cannot guarantee all operations of externally connected devices.

Supported Data Specifications

File Format JPEGs (*.JPG) with the Exif Version 2.31 standard taken by digital cameras DCF*1
version 1.0 or 2.0*2 compliant
TIFF 6.0 compliant images as below
❏ RGB full color images (not compressed)
❏ Binary images (not compressed or CCITT encoded)

PDF Version 1.7 compliant data file

Image Size Horizontal: 80 to 10200 pixels

Vertical: 80 to 10200 pixels

File Size Less than 2 GB

446
Product Information > Product Specifications > Electrical Specifications

Maximum Number of Files JPEG: 9990*3

TIFF: 999
PDF: 999

*1 Design rule for Camera File system.

*2 Photo data stored on digital cameras with a built-in memory is not supported.
*3 Up to 999 files can be displayed at a time. (If the number of files exceeds 999, the files are displayed in groups.)

Note:
"×" is displayed on the LCD screen when the printer cannot recognize the image file. In this situation, if you select a multiple
image layout, blank sections will be printed.

Dimensions
Dimensions Storage
❏ Width: 674 mm (26.5 in.)
❏ Depth: 757 mm (29.8 in.)
❏ Height: 1243 mm (48.9 in.)

Printing
❏ Width: 1426 mm (56.1 in.)
❏ Depth: 757 mm (29.8 in.)
❏ Height: 1243 mm (48.9 in.)

Weight* Approx. 177.1 kg (390.4 lb)

* Without the ink cartridges and the power cord.

Electrical Specifications
Model 100 to 240 V Model

Rated 50 and 60 Hz
Frequency

Rated Current 9.0 to 4.5 A

Power WF-C21000 WF20750 WF-C20600

Consumption
(With LAN Standalone copying: Approx. Standalone copying: Approx. Standalone copying: Approx.
Connection) 170 W (ISO/IEC24712) 160 W (ISO/IEC24712) 160 W (ISO/IEC24712)
Ready mode: Approx. 76 W Ready mode: Approx. 76 W Ready mode: Approx. 76 W
Sleep mode: Approx. 1.1 W Sleep mode: Approx. 1.1 W Sleep mode: Approx. 1.1 W
Power off: Approx. 0.1 W Power off: Approx. 0.1 W Power off: Approx. 0.1 W
Maximum Power Consumption: Maximum Power Consumption: Maximum Power Consumption:
Approx. 320 W Approx. 300 W Approx. 300 W

447
Product Information > Product Specifications > Installation Location and Space

Note:
❏ Check the label on the printer for its voltage.
❏ For European users, see the following Website for details on power consumption.
http://www.epson.eu/energy-consumption

Environmental Specifications
Operation Use the printer within the range shown in the following graph.

Temperature: 10 to 35°C (50 to 95°F)

Humidity: 15 to 85% RH (without condensation)

Storage Temperature after initial ink charging: -14 to 40°C (6.8 to 104°F)*

Temperature before initial ink charging: -20 to 40°C (-4 to 104°F)*

Humidity: 5 to 85% RH (without condensation)

* You can store for one month at 40°C (104°F).

Environmental Specifications for Ink Cartridges

Storage Temperature -20 to 40 °C (-4 to 104 °F)*

Freezing Temperature -14 °C (6.8 °F)

Ink thaws and is usable after approximately 12 hours at 25 °C (77 °F).

* You can store for one month at 40 °C (104 °F).

Installation Location and Space

To ensure safe use, place the printer in a location that meets the following conditions.
❏ A flat, stable surface that can support the weight of the printer
❏ Locations that do not block or cover the vents and openings in the printer
❏ Locations where you can load paper and remove paper easily
❏ Locations that meet the conditions in the "Environmental Specifications" in this manual

448
Product Information > Product Specifications > Installation Location and Space

c Important:
Do not place the printer in the following locations; otherwise a malfunction may occur.
❏ Subject to direct sunlight
❏ Subject to rapid changes in temperature and humidity
❏ Subject to fire
❏ Subject to volatile substances
❏ Subject to shocks or vibrations
❏ Near a television or a radio
❏ Near excessive dirt or dust
❏ Near water
❏ Near air-conditioning or heating equipment
❏ Near a humidifier

Use a commercially available anti-static mat to prevent static generation in locations prone to generating static
electricity.
Secure enough place to install and operate the printer correctly.

A 1626mm

B 1388mm

449
Product Information > Product Specifications > Installation Location and Space with Finishers Installed

C 1544mm

D 383mm

E 397mm

F 631mm

G 474mm

Installation Location and Space with Finishers Installed

With Staple Finisher

A* 2666 mm

450
Product Information > Font Specifications

With Booklet Finisher

A* 2990 mm

*:See Related Information for the depth and height.

Related Information
& “Installation Location and Space” on page 448

System Requirements
❏ Windows 10 (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows 8.1 (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-
bit)/Windows Vista (32-bit, 64-bit)/Windows XP SP3 or later (32-bit)/Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
SP2 or later/Windows Server 2019/Windows Server 2016/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2012/
Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2003 R2/Windows Server 2003 SP2 or later
❏ macOS Catalina/macOS Mojave/macOS High Sierra/macOS Sierra/OS X El Capitan/OS X Yosemite/OS X
Mavericks/OS X Mountain Lion/Mac OS X v10.7.x/Mac OS X v10.6.8

Note:
❏ Mac OS may not support some applications and features.
❏ The UNIX File System (UFS) for Mac OS is not supported.

Font Specifications
The following fonts are available on the Internet.
❏ Epson Barcode Font

451
Product Information > Font Specifications > Available Fonts for PostScript

Available Fonts for PostScript

Font Name Family HP Equivalent

Nimbus Mono Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Courier

Letter Gothic Medium, Bold, Italic Letter Gothic

Nimbus Mono PS Regular, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique CourierPS

Nimbus Roman No4 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Times

URW Classico Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Omega

URW Coronet - Coronet

URW Clarendon Condensed - Clarendon Condensed

URW Classic Sans Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers

URW Classic Sans Condensed Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers Condensed

Antique Olive Medium, Bold, Italic Antique Olive

Garamond Antiqua, Halbfett, Kursiv, Kursiv Halbfett Garamond

Mauritius - Marigold

Algiers Medium, Extra Bold Albertus

NimbusSansNo2 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Arial

Nimbus Roman No9 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times New Roman

Nimbus Sans Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica

Nimbus Sans Narrow Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow

Palladio Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Palatino

URW Gothic Book, Demi, Book Oblique, Demi Oblique ITC Avant Garde

URW Bookman Light, Demi, Light Italic, Demi Italic ITC Bookman

URW Century Schoolbook Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic New Century Schoolbook

Nimbus Roman Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times

URW Chancery Medium Italic - ITC Zapf Chancery Italic

Symbol - Symbol

URW Dingbats - Wingdings

Dingbats - ITC Zapf Dingbats

Standard Symbol - SymbolPS

452
Product Information > Font Specifications > Available Fonts for PCL (URW)

Available Fonts for PCL (URW)

Scalable Font

Font Name Family HP Equivalent Symbol

Set for
PCL5

Nimbus Mono Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Courier 1

Letter Gothic Medium, Bold, Italic Letter Gothic 1

Nimbus Mono PS Regular, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique CourierPS 3

Nimbus Roman No4 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Times 2

URW Classico Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic CG Omega 3

URW Coronet - Coronet 3

URW Clarendon Condensed - Clarendon Condensed 3

URW Classic Sans Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers 2

URW Classic Sans Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Univers Condensed 3
Condensed

Antique Olive Medium, Bold, Italic Antique Olive 3

Garamond Antiqua, Halbfett, Kursiv, Kursiv Halbfett Garamond 3

Mauritius - Marigold 3

Algiers Medium, Extra Bold Albertus 3

NimbusSansNo2 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Arial 3

Nimbus Roman No9 Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times New 3

Nimbus Sans Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica 3

Nimbus Sans Narrow Medium, Bold, Oblique, Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow 3

Palladio Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Palatino 3

URW Gothic Book, Demi, Book Oblique, Demi Oblique ITC Avant Garde Gothic 3

URW Bookman Light, Demi, Light Italic, Demi Italic ITC Bookman 3

URW Century Schoolbook Roman, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic New Century Schoolbook 3

Nimbus Roman Medium, Bold, Italic, Bold Italic Times 3

URW Chancery Medium - ITC Zapf Chancery Medium 3

Italic Italic

Symbol - Symbol 4

URW Dingbats - Wingdings 5

Dingbats - ITC Zapf Dingbats 6

Standard Symbol - SymbolPS 4

453
Product Information > Font Specifications > List of Symbol Sets

Font Name Family HP Equivalent Symbol

Set for
PCL5

URW David Medium, Bold HP David 7

URW Narkis Medium, Bold HP Narkis 7

URW Miryam Medium, Bold, Italic HP Miryam 7

URW Koufi Medium, Bold Koufi 8

URW Naskh Medium, Bold Naskh 8

URW Ryadh Medium, Bold Ryadh 8

Bitmap Font

Font Name Symbol

Set

Line Printer 9

OCR/Barcode Bitmap Font (for PCL5 only)

Font Name Family Symbol

Set

OCR A - 10

OCR B - 11

Code39 9.37cpi, 4.68cpi 12

EAN/UPC Medium, Bold 13

Note:
Depending on the print density, or on the quality or color of the paper, OCR A, OCR B, Code39, and EAN/UPC fonts may
not be readable. Print a sample and make sure the fonts can be read before printing large quantities.

List of Symbol Sets

Your printer can access a variety of symbol sets. Many of these symbol sets differ only in the international
characters specific to each language.
When you are considering which font to use, you should also consider which symbol set to combine with the font.
Note:
Since most software handles fonts and symbols automatically, you will probably never need to adjust the printer's settings.
However, if you are writing your own printer control programs, or if you are using older software that cannot control fonts,
refer to the following sections for symbol set details.

454
Product Information > Font Specifications > List of Symbol Sets

List of Symbol Sets for PCL 5

Symbol Set Attribute Font Classification

Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Norweg1 0D ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

Roman 0E - - - - - - - - ✓ - - - -
Extension

Italian 0I ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

ECM94-1 0N ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

Swedis2 0S ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

ANSI ASCII 0U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - ✓ ✓ - - - - -

UK 1E ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

French2 1F ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

German 1G ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

Legal 1U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

8859-2 ISO 2N ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

Spanish 2S ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

ISO 8859/4 4N ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -
Latin 4

Roman-9 4U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

PsMath 5M ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - ✓ ✓ - - - - -

8859-9 ISO 5N ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

WiTurkish 5T ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

MsPublishin 6J ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

VeMath 6M ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

8859-10ISO 6N ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

DeskTop 7J ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

Math-8 8M ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - ✓ ✓ - - - - -

Roman-8 8U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

WiE.Europe 9E ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

Pc1004 9J ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

8859-15ISO 9N ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

PcTk437 9T ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

Windows 9U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

455
Product Information > Font Specifications > List of Symbol Sets

Symbol Set Attribute Font Classification

Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

PsText 10J ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

IBM-US 10U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

IBM-DN 11U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

McText 12J ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

PcMultiling 12U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - -

VeInternati 13J ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

PcEur858 13U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

VeUS 14J ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

PiFont 15U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

PcE.Europe 17U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

Unicode 3.0 18N ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - ✓ ✓ - - - - -

WiBALT 19L ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

WiAnsi 19U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

PcBlt775 26U ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - -

Pc866Cyr 3R ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

Greek8 8G ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

WinGrk 9G ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

WinCyr 9R ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

Pc851Grk 10G ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

ISOCyr 10N ✓ ✓ - - - - - - ✓ - - - -

Pc8Grk 12G ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

ISOGrk 12N ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

Pc866Ukr 14R ✓ ✓ - - - - - - - - - - -

Hebrew7 0H ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - - - -

8859-8 ISO 7H ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - - - -

Hebrew8 8H ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - - - -

Pc862Heb 15H ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - - - -

PC-862, 15Q ✓ - - - - - ✓ - - - - - -
Hebrew

Arabic8 8V - - - - - - - ✓ - - - - -

HPWARA 9V - - - - - - - ✓ - - - - -

456
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

Symbol Set Attribute Font Classification

Name
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Pc864Ara 10V - - - - - - - ✓ - - - - -

Symbol 19M - - - ✓ - - - - - - - - -

Wingdings 579L - - - - ✓ - - - - - - - -

ZapfDigbats 14L - - - - - ✓ - - - - - - -

OCR A 0O - - - - - - - - - ✓ - - -

OCR B 1O - - - - - - - - - - ✓ - -

OCR B 3Q - - - - - - - - - - ✓ - -
Extension

Code3-9 0Y - - - - - - - - - - - ✓ -

EAN/UPC 8Y - - - - - - - - - - - - ✓

Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

Epson BarCode Fonts let you easily create and print many types of bar codes.
Normally, bar code creation is a laborious process requiring you to specify various command codes, such as Start
bar, Stop bar and OCR-B, in addition to the bar code characters themselves. However, Epson BarCode Fonts are
designed to add such codes automatically, allowing you to easily print bar codes that conform to a variety of bar
code standards.

Printing with Epson BarCode Fonts

Follow the steps below to create and print bar codes using Epson BarCode Fonts. The application featured in these
instructions is Microsoft WordPad in Windows 10. The actual procedure may differ slightly when printing from
other applications.

457
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

1. Open a document in your application and enter the characters you want to convert into a bar code.

2. Select the characters, then select the Epson BarCode font you want to use, and the font size.

Note:
You cannot use font sizes larger than 96 points when printing bar codes.

458
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

3. The characters you selected appear as bar code characters similar to those shown below.

4. Select Print from the File menu, select your Epson printer, click Preferences, and then make the printer driver
settings.

5. Click Print to print the bar code.

Note:
If there is an error in the bar code character string, such as inappropriate data, the bar code will be printed as it appears
on the screen, but it cannot be read by a bar code reader.

Notes on inputting and formatting bar codes

Please note the following when inputting and formatting bar code characters:
❏ Do not apply shading or special character formatting, such as bold, italic, or underline.
❏ Print bar codes in black and white only.
❏ When rotating characters, only specify rotation angles of 90˚, 180˚, and 270˚.
❏ Turn off all automatic character and word spacing settings in your application.
❏ Do not use features in your application that enlarge or reduce the size of characters in only the vertical or
horizontal direction.
❏ Turn off your application’s auto-correct features for spelling, grammar, spacing, etc.
❏ To more easily distinguish bar codes from other text in your document, set your application to show text
symbols, such as paragraph marks, tabs, etc.
❏ Because special characters such as Start bar and Stop bar are added when an Epson BarCode Font is selected,
the resulting bar code may have more characters than were originally input.
❏ For best results, use only the font sizes recommended in “Epson BarCode Font Specifications” for the Epson
BarCode Font you are using. Bar codes in other sizes may not be readable with all bar code readers.
❏ Select Grayscale in the Print Settings and Standard or High in the Quality.

Note:
Depending on the print density, or on the quality or color of the paper, bar codes may not be readable with all bar code
readers. Print a sample and make sure the bar code can be read before printing large quantities.

459
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

Epson BarCode Fonts specifications

This section contains details on the character input specifications for each Epson BarCode Font.

EPSON EAN-8
❏ EAN-8 is an eight-digit abbreviated version of the EAN bar code standard.
❏ Because the check digit is added automatically, only 7 characters can be input.

Character type Numbers (0 to 9)

Number of characters 7 characters

Font size 52 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 52 pt and 65 pt (standard).

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right margin
❏ Left/Right guard bar
❏ Center bar
❏ Check digit
❏ OCR-B

Print sample

EPSON EAN-8

EPSON EAN-13
❏ EAN-13is the standard 13-digit EAN bar code.
❏ Because the check digit is added automatically, only 12 characters can be input.

Character type Numbers (0 to 9)

Number of characters 12 characters

Font size 60 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 60 pt and 75 pt (standard).

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right margin
❏ Left/Right guard bar
❏ Center bar

460
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

❏ Check digit
❏ OCR-B

Print sample

EPSON EAN-13

EPSON UPC-A
❏ UPC-A is the standard bar code specified by the American Universal Product Code (UPC Symbol Specification
Manual).
❏ Only regular UPC codes are supported. Supplementary codes are not supported.

Character type Numbers (0 to 9)

Number of characters 11 characters

Font size 60 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 60 pt and 75 pt (standard).

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right margin
❏ Left/Right guard bar
❏ Center bar
❏ Check digit
❏ OCR-B

Print sample

EPSON UPC-A

EPSON UPC-E
❏ UPC-E is the UPC-A zero-suppression (deletes extra zeros) bar code specified by the American Universal
Product Code (UPC Symbol Specification Manual).

Character type Numbers (0 to 9)

Number of characters 6 characters

461
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

Font size 60 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 60 pt and 75 pt (standard).

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right margin
❏ Left/Right guard bar
❏ Check digit
❏ OCR-B
❏ The numeral “0”

Print sample

EPSON UPC-E

EPSON Code39
❏ Four Code39 fonts are available, allowing you to enable and disable the automatic insertion of check digits and
OCR-B.
❏ The height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Code39 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏ Spaces in Code39 bar codes should be input as “_” underbars.
❏ When printing two or more bar codes on one line, separate the bar codes with a tab, or select a font other than a
BarCode Font and input the space. If a space is input while a Code39 font is selected, the bar code will not be
correct.

Character type Alphanumeric characters (A to Z, 0 to 9) Symbols (- . space $ / + %)

Number of characters No limit

Font size When OCR-B is not used: 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.
When OCR-B is used: 36 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 36 pt and 72 pt.

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right quiet zone
❏ Check digit
❏ Start/Stop character

Print sample

EPSON Code39 EPSON Code39 CD

462
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

EPSON Code39 Num EPSON Code39 CD Num

EPSON Code128
❏ Code128 fonts support code sets A, B, and C. When the code set of a line of characters is changed in the middle
of the line, a conversion code is automatically inserted.
❏ The height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Code128 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏ Some applications automatically delete the spaces at the end of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs. Bar
codes containing spaces may not be correctly printed from applications that automatically delete spaces from
the ends of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs.
❏ When printing two or more bar codes on one line, separate the bar codes with a tab, or select a font other than a
BarCode Font and input the space. If a space is input while a Code128 font is selected, the bar code will not be
correct.

Character type All ASCII characters (95 in total)

Number of characters No limit

Font size 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right quiet zone
❏ Start/Stop character
❏ Check digit
❏ Change code set character

Print sample

EPSON Code128

EPSON ITF
❏ The EPSON ITF fonts conform to the USSInterleaved 2-of-5 standard (American).
❏ Four EPSON ITF fonts are available, allowing you to enable and disable the automatic insertion of check digits
and OCR-B.
❏ The height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Interleaved 2-of-5 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and
the surrounding text to prevent overlapping.

463
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

❏ Interleaved 2-of-5 treats every two characters as one set. When there are an odd number of characters, EPSON
ITF fonts automatically add a zero to the beginning of the character string.

Character type Numbers (0 to 9)

Number of characters No limit

Font size When OCR-B is not used: 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.
When OCR-B is used: 36 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 36 pt and 72 pt.

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right quiet zone
❏ Start/Stop character
❏ Check digit
❏ The numeral “0” (added to the beginning of character strings as needed)

Print sample

EPSON ITF EPSON ITF CD

EPSON ITF Num EPSON ITF CD Num

EPSON Codabar
❏ Four EPSON Codabar are available, allowing you to enable and disable the automatic insertion of check digits
and OCR-B.
❏ The height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Codabar standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏ When either a Start or a Stop character is input, Codabar fonts automatically insert the complementary
character.
❏ If neither a Start nor a Stop character is input, these characters are automatically input as the letter “A”.

Character type Numbers (0 to 9)

Symbols (- $ : / . +)

Number of characters No limit

Font size When OCR-B is not used: 26 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 26 pt, 52 pt and 78 pt.
When OCR-B is used: 36 pt to 96 pt. Recommended sizes are 36 pt and 72 pt.

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:
❏ Left/Right quiet zone

464
Product Information > Font Specifications > Epson BarCode Fonts (Windows Only)

❏ Start/Stop character (when not input)

❏ Check digit

Print sample

EPSON Codabar EPSON Codabar CD

EPSON Codabar Num EPSON Codabar CD Num

EPSON EAN128
❏ GS1-128(EAN128) fonts support code sets A, B, and C. When the code set of a line of characters is changed in
the middle of the line, a conversion code is automatically inserted.
❏ The following 4 kinds of the properties are supported as the Application Identifier (AI).
01: Global traded item number
10: Batch / Lot number
17: Expiry date
30: Quantity
❏ The height of the bar code is automatically adjusted to 15% or more of its total length, in conformance to the
Code128 standard. For this reason, it is important to keep at least one space between the bar code and the
surrounding text to prevent overlapping.
❏ Some applications automatically delete the spaces at the end of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs. Bar
codes containing spaces may not be correctly printed from applications that automatically delete spaces from
the ends of lines or change multiple spaces into tabs.
❏ When printing two or more bar codes on one line, separate the bar codes with a tab, or select a font other than a
BarCode Font and input the space. If a space is input while a GS1-128(EAN128) font is selected, the bar code
will not be correct.

Character type Alphanumeric characters (A to Z, 0 to 9)

Parenthesis are only for identification of the Application Identifier (AI)
Only the capital letters are supported by the small letter key input.

Number of characters It changes with the Application Identifier (AI).

01: 4 characters "(01)" and 13 numbers
17: 4 characters "(17)" and 6 numbers
10: 4 characters "(10)" and maximum of 20 alphanumeric characters
30: 4 characters "(30)" and maximum of 8 numbers

Font size 36 pt or more

Recommended sizes are 36 pt, 72 pt

The following codes are inserted automatically and need not be input by hand:

465
Product Information > Regulatory Information > Standards and Approvals

❏ Left/Right quiet zone

❏ Start/Stop character
❏ FNC1 character
It inserts for discernment from Code128 and for a pause of the variable length application identifier.
❏ Check digit
❏ Change code set character

Print sample

EPSON EAN128

Storage Specifications
Storage Capacity 90GB

Number of Folders Shared Folder 1

Shared folder 0 to 199

Personal folder No limitation

Maximum number of files saved in the folder 3,000 files

Maximum pages of files saved in the folder 15,000 pages

Maximum number of saved jobs* Printing: 100

Sending by e-mail, Saving in the folder, cloud service: 10

*:The number of jobs that can be executed before the first job finishes.
Note:
You may not be able to save new files after the memory usage rate reaches 100%. When the memory usage rate is less than
100%, if the number of files saved or number of pages saved in the folder reaches the limit, you may not be able to save the
entire job. Delete as many unnecessary files as possible.

Regulatory Information

Standards and Approvals

Standards and Approvals for U.S. Model

Safety UL60950-1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.60950-1

466
Product Information > Regulatory Information > Standards and Approvals

EMC FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class B

CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)

This equipment contains the following wireless module.

Manufacturer: Seiko Epson Corporation
Type: J26H006
This product conforms to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of the IC Rules. Epson cannot accept
responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject
to licensing.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and
meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio
frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment should be installed and operated so that the radiator is kept at least
7.9 inches (20 cm) or more away from a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).

Standards and Approvals for European Model

For European users
Hereby, Seiko Epson Corporation declares that the following radio equipment model is in compliance with
Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following website.
http://www.epson.eu/conformity
C741A
For use only in Ireland, UK, Austria, Germany, Liechtenstein, Switzerland, France, Belgium, Luxemburg,
Netherlands, Italy, Portugal, Spain, Denmark, Finland, Norway, Sweden, Iceland, Croatia, Cyprus, Greece,
Slovenia, Malta, Bulgaria, Czech, Estonia, Hungary, Latvia, Lithuania, Poland, Romania, and Slovakia.
Epson cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-
recommended modification of the products.

Frequency Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitted

2400-2483.5 MHz 20 dBm (EIRP)

Standards and Approvals for Australian Model

EMC AS/NZS CISPR32 Class B

Epson hereby declares that the following equipment Models are in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of AS/NZS4268:

467
Product Information > Regulatory Information > Restrictions on Copying

C741A
Epson cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-
recommended modification of the products.

Standards and Approvals for New Zealand Model

General Warning
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the
item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product
by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work
correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it
imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the EXT telephone port. This port is not specifically designed
for 3-wire-connected equipment. 3-wire-connected equipment might not respond to incoming ringing when
attached to this port.
Important Notice
Under power failure conditions, this telephone may not operate. Please ensure that a separate telephone, not
dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it
is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom '111' Emergency Service.

German Blue Angel

See the following website to check whether or not this printer meets the standards for the German Blue Angel.
http://www.epson.de/blauerengel

Restrictions on Copying
Observe the following restrictions to ensure the responsible and legal use of the printer.
Copying of the following items is prohibited by law:
❏ Bank bills, coins, government-issued marketable securities, government bond securities, and municipal
securities
❏ Unused postage stamps, pre-stamped postcards, and other official postal items bearing valid postage
❏ Government-issued revenue stamps, and securities issued according to legal procedure

Exercise caution when copying the following items:

❏ Private marketable securities (stock certificates, negotiable notes, checks, etc.), monthly passes, concession
tickets, etc.
❏ Passports, driver’s licenses, warrants of fitness, road passes, food stamps, tickets, etc.

Note:
Copying these items may also be prohibited by law.

Responsible use of copyrighted materials:

468
Product Information > Regulatory Information > Restrictions on Copying

Printers can be misused by improperly copying copyrighted materials. Unless acting on the advice of a
knowledgeable attorney, be responsible and respectful by obtaining the permission of the copyright holder before
copying published material.

469
Administrator Information

Connecting the Printer to the Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Settings to Use the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Managing the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536

Advanced Security Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

Administrator Information > Connecting the Printer to the Network > Before Making Network Connection

Connecting the Printer to the Network

You can connect the printer to the network in several ways.
❏ Connect by using advanced settings on the control panel.
❏ Connect by using the installer on the website or on the software disc.

This section explains the procedure to connect the printer to the network using the printer's control panel.

Before Making Network Connection

To connect to the network, check the connection method and setting information for connection in advance.

Gathering Information on the Connection Setting

Prepare the necessary setting information to connect. Check the following information in advance.

Divisions Items Note

Device connection ❏ Ethernet Decide how to connect the printer to the network.
method
❏ Wi-Fi For Wired LAN, connects to the LAN switch.
For Wi-Fi, connects to the network (SSID) of the access point.

LAN connection ❏ IP address Decide the IP address to assign to the printer.

information
❏ Subnet mask When you assign the IP address statically, all values are required.
❏ Default gateway When you assign the IP address dynamically using the DHCP function,
this information is not required because it is set automatically.

Wi-Fi connection ❏ SSID These are the SSID (network name) and the password of the access
information point that the printer connects to.
❏ Password
If MAC address filtering has been set, register the MAC address of the
printer in advance to register the printer.
See the following for the supported standards.
“Wi-Fi Specifications” on page 443

DNS server information ❏ IP address for These are required when specifying DNS servers. The secondary DNS
primary DNS is set when the system has a redundant configuration and there is a
secondary DNS server.
❏ IP address for
secondary DNS If you are in a small organization and do not set the DNS server, set
the IP address of the router.

Proxy server ❏ Proxy server name Set this when your network environment uses the proxy server to
information access the internet from the intranet, and you use the function that
the printer directly accesses to the internet.
For the following functions, the printer directly connects to the
internet .
❏ Epson Connect Services
❏ Cloud services of other companies
❏ Firmware updating

471
Administrator Information > Connecting the Printer to the Network > Before Making Network Connection

Divisions Items Note

Port number ❏ Port number to Check the port number used by the printer and computer, then
information release release the port that is blocked by a firewall, if necessary.
See the following for the port number used by the printer.
“Using Port for the Printer” on page 441

IP Address Assignment
These are the following types of IP address assignment.

Static IP address:
Assign the predetermined IP address to the printer (host) manually.
The information to connect to the network (subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server and so on) need to be set
manually.
The IP address does not change even when the device is turned off, so this is useful when you want to manage
devices with an environment where you cannot change the IP address or you want to manage devices using the IP
address. We recommend settings to the printer, server, etc. that many computers access. Also, when using security
features such as IPsec / IP filtering, assign a fixed IP address so that the IP address does not change.

Automatic assignment by using DHCP function (dynamic IP address):

Assign the IP address automatically to the printer (host) by using the DHCP function of the DHCP server or
router.
The information to connect to the network (subnet mask, default gateway, DNS server and so on) is set
automatically, so you can easily connect the device to the network.
If the device or the router is turned off, or depending on the DHCP server settings, IP address may change when
re-connecting.
We recommend managing devices other than the IP address and communicating with protocols that can follow
the IP address.
Note:
When you use the IP address reservation function of the DHCP, you can assign the same IP address to the devices at any
time.

DNS Server and Proxy Server

The DNS server has a host name, domain name of the email address, etc. in association with the IP address
information.
Communication is impossible if the other party is described by host name, domain name, etc. when the computer
or the printer performs IP communication.
Queries the DNS server for that information and gets the IP address of the other party. This process is called name
resolution.
Therefore, the devices such as computers and printers can communicate using the IP address.
Name resolution is necessary for the printer to communicate using the email function or Internet connection
function.
When you use those functions, make the DNS server settings.

472
Administrator Information > Connecting the Printer to the Network > Connecting to the Network from the …

When you assign the printer's IP address by using the DHCP function of the DHCP server or router, it is
automatically set.
The proxy server is placed at the gateway between the network and the Internet, and it communicates to the
computer, printer, and Internet (opposite server) on behalf of each of them. The opposite server communicates
only to the proxy server. Therefore, printer information such as the IP address and port number cannot be read
and increased security is expected.
When you connect to the Internet via a proxy server, configure the proxy server on the printer.

Connecting to the Network from the Control Panel

Connect the printer to the network by using the printer's control panel.

Assigning the IP Address

Set up the basic items such as Host Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway.
This section explains the procedure for setting a static IP address.

1. Turn on the printer.

2. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

3. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > TCP/IP.

4. Select Manual for Obtain IP Address.

When you set the IP address automatically by using the DHCP function of router, select Auto. In that case, the
IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway on step 5 to 6 are also set automatically, so go to step 7.

5. Enter the IP address.

When entering an IP Address, enter zeroes (0) to make three digits as shown in the following example.
Example:
❏ If the IP address is 192.0.2.111, enter 192.000.002.111.
❏ If the IP address is 192.0.12.10, enter 192.000.012.010

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen. After the IP address is entered, the zeroes you entered to
make three digiits are omitted.

6. Set up the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

c Important:
If the combination of the IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway is incorrect, Start Setup is inactive
and cannot proceed with the settings. Confirm that there is no error in the entry.

7. Enter the IP address for the primary DNS server.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

473
Administrator Information > Connecting the Printer to the Network > Connecting to the Network from the …

Note:
When you select Auto for the IP address assignment settings, you can select the DNS server settings from Manual or
Auto. If you cannot obtain the DNS server address automatically, select Manual and enter the DNS server address.
Then, enter the secondary DNS server address directly. If you select Auto, go to step 9.

8. Enter the IP address for the secondary DNS server.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

9. Tap Start Setup.

Setting the Proxy Server

Set up the proxy server if both of the following are true.
❏ The proxy server is built for Internet connection.
❏ When using a function in which a printer directly connects to the Internet, such as Epson Connect service or
another company's cloud services.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

When making settings after IP address setting, the Advanced screen is displayed. Go to step 3.

2. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced.

3. Select Proxy Server.

4. Select Use for Proxy Server Settings.

5. Enter the address for the proxy server by IPv4 or FQDN format.
Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

6. Enter the port number for the proxy server.

Confirm the value reflected on the previous screen.

7. Tap Start Setup.

Connecting to LAN
Connect the printer to the network by Ethernet or Wi-Fi.

Connecting to Ethernet
Connect the printer to the network by using the Ethernet cable, and check the connection.

1. Connect the printer and hub (LAN switch) by Ethernet cable.

2. Select Settings on the home screen.

3. Select General Settings > Network Settings > Connection Check.

The connection diagnosis result is displayed. Confirm the connection is correct.

474
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

4. Tap OK to finish.
When you tap Print Check Report, you can print the diagnosis result. Follow the on-screen instructions to
print it.

Related Information
& “Changing the Network Connection from Wi-Fi to Ethernet” on page 305

Connecting to the Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi)

You can connect the printer to the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) in several ways. Choose the connection method that
matches the environment and conditions that you are using.
If you know the information for the wireless router such as SSID and password, you can make settings manually.
If the wireless router supports WPS, you can make settings by using push button setup.
After connecting the printer to the network, connect to the printer from the device that you want to use (computer,
smart device, tablet, and so on.)

Related Information
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Entering the SSID and Password” on page 307
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by Push Button Setup (WPS)” on page 308
& “Making Wi-Fi Settings by PIN Code Setup (WPS)” on page 309

Settings to Use the Printer

Using the Print Functions

Enable to use the print function through the network.
To use the printer on the network, you need to set the port for network connection on the computer as well as the
printer’s network connection.

Printer Connection Types

The following two methods are available for the printer's network connection.
❏ Peer to peer connection (direct printing)
❏ Server / client connection (printer sharing using the Windows server)

Peer to Peer Connection Settings

This is the connection to connect the printer on the network and the computer directly. Only a network-capable
model can be connected.

Connection method:
Connect the printer to the network directly via hub or access point.

475
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

Printer driver:
Install the printer driver on each client computer.
When using EpsonNet SetupManager, you can provide the driver's package that includes the printer settings.

Features:
❏ The print job starts immediately because the print job is sent to the printer directly.
❏ You can print as long as the printer runs.

Server / Client Connection Settings

This is the connection that the server computer shares with the printer. To prohibit the connection without going
through the server computer, you can enhance the security.
When using USB, the printer without the network function can be also shared.

Connection method:
Connect the printer to the network via LAN switch or access point.
You can also connect the printer to the server directly by USB cable.

Printer driver:
Install the printer driver on the Windows server depending on the OS of the client computers.
By accessing the Windows server and linking the printer, the printer driver is installed on the client computer and
can be used.

Features:
❏ Manage the printer and the printer driver in batch.
❏ Depending on the server spec, it may take time to start the print job because all print jobs go through the print
server.
❏ You cannot print when the Windows server is turned off.

Print Settings for Peer to Peer Connection

For peer to peer connection (direct printing), a printer and a client computer have a one-to-one relationship.
The printer driver must be installed on each client computer.

Print Settings for Server / Client Connection

Enable to print from the printer that is connected as the server / client connection.
For the server / client connection, set up the print server first, and then share the printer on the network.
When using the USB cable to connect to the server, also set the print server first, and then share the printer on the
network.

476
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

Setting Up the Network Ports

Create the print queue for network printing on the print server by using standard TCP/IP, and then set the network
port.
This example is when using Windows 2012 R2.

1. Open the devices and printers screen.

Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound or Hardware > Devices and Printers.

2. Add a printer.
Click Add printer, and then select The printer that I want isn't listed.

3. Add a local printer.

Select Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings, and then click Next.

4. Select Create a new port, select Standard TCP/IP Port as the Port Type, and then click Next.

5. Enter the printer's IP address or printer name in Host Name or IP Address or Printer Name or IP Address,
and then click Next.
Example:
❏ Printer name : EPSONA1A2B3C
❏ IP address : 192.0.2.111

Do not change Port name.

477
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

Click Continue when the User Account Control screen is displayed.

Note:
If you specify the printer name on the network where the name resolution is available, the IP address is tracked even if
printer's IP address has been changed by DHCP. You can confirm the printer name from the network status screen on
the printer's control panel or network status sheet.

6. Set the printer driver.

❏ If the printer driver is already installed:
Select Manufacturer and Printers. Click Next.

7. Follow the on-screen instructions.

When using the printer under the server / client connection (printer sharing using the Windows server), make the
sharing settings hereafter.

Checking the Port Configuration - Windows

Check if the correct port is set for the print queue.

1. Open the devices and printers screen.

Desktop > Settings > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound or Hardware > Devices and Printers.

2. Open the printer properties screen.

Right-click the printer icon, and then click Printer properties.

3. Click the Ports tab, select Standard TCP/IP Port, and then click Configure Port.

4. Check the port configuration.

❏ For RAW
Check that Raw is selected in Protocol, and then click OK.

478
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

❏ For LPR
Check that LPR is selected in Protocol. Enter "PASSTHRU" in Queue name from LPR Settings. Select LPR
Byte Counting Enabled, and then click OK.

Sharing the Printer (Windows only)

When using the printer under the server / client connection (printer sharing using the Windows server), set up the
printer sharing from the print server.

1. Select Control Panel > View devices and printers on the print server.

2. Right-click the printer icon (print queue) that you want to share with, and then select Printer Properties >
Sharing tab.

3. Select Share this printer and then enter to Share name.

For Windows Server 2012, click Change Sharing Options and then configure the settings.

Installing Additional Drivers (Windows only)

If the Windows versions for a server and clients are different, it is recommended to install additional drivers to the
print server.

1. Select Control Panel > View devices and printers on the print server.

2. Right-click the printer icon that you want to share with the clients, and then click Printer Properties >
Sharing tab.

3. Click Additional Drivers.

For Windows Server 2012, click Change Sharing Options and then configure the settings.

4. Select versions of Windows for clients, and then click OK.

5. Select the information file for the printer driver (*.inf) and then install the driver.

Using the Shared Printer – Windows

The administrator needs to inform the clients of the computer name assigned to the print server and how to add it
to their computers. If the additional driver(s) have not been configured yet, inform the clients how to use Devices
and Printers to add the shared printer.
If additional driver(s) have already been configured on the print server, follow these steps:

1. Select the name assigned to the print server in Windows Explorer.

2. Double-click the printer that you want to use.

Basic Settings for Printing

Set the print settings, such as paper size or printing error.

479
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

Setting the Paper Source

Set the size and type of paper to be loaded in each paper source.

1. Access Web Config and select the Print tab > Paper Source Settings.

2. Set each item.

The displayed items may vary by the situation.
❏ Paper source name
Display the target paper source name, such as Rear Paper Feed, Cassette 1.
❏ Paper Size
Select the paper size you want to set from the pull-down menu.
❏ Unit
Select the unit of the user-defined size. You can select it when User defined is selected on Paper Size.
❏ Width
Set the horizontal length of the user-defined size.
The range you can enter here depends on the paper source, which is indicated on the side of Width.
When you select mm in Unit, you can enter up to one decimal place.
When you select inch in Unit, you can enter up to two decimal places.
❏ Height
Set the vertical length of the user-defined size.
The range you can enter here depends on the paper source, which is indicated on the side of Height.
When you select mm in Unit, you can enter up to one decimal place.
When you select inch in Unit, you can enter up to two decimal places.
❏ Paper Type
Select the paper type you want to set from the pull-down menu.

3. Check the settings, and then click OK.

Setting the Interface

Set the timeout of the print jobs or printing language assigned to each interface.
This item is displayed on the PCL or PostScript compatible printer.

1. Access Web Config and select the Print tab > Interface Settings.

2. Set each item.

❏ Timeout Settings
Set the timeout of the print jobs sent directly via USB.
You can set between 5 and 300 seconds by the second.
When you do not want to timeout, enter 0.
❏ Printing Language
Select the printing language for each USB interface and network interface.
When you select Auto, the printing language is automatically detected by the print jobs being sent.

480
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

3. Check the settings, and then click OK.

Setting Errors
Set the displaying error for the device.

1. Access Web Config and select the Print tab > Error Settings.

2. Set each item.

❏ Paper Size Notice
Set whether to display an error on the control panel when the paper size of the specified paper source is
different from the paper size of the print data.
❏ Paper Type Notice
Set whether to display an error on the control panel when the paper type of the specified paper source is
different from the paper type of the print data.
❏ Auto Error Solver
Set whether to automatically cancel the error if there is no operation on the control panel for 5 seconds
after displaying the error.

3. Check the settings, and then click OK.

Setting Universal Print

Set when you print from external devices without using the printer driver.
Some items are not displayed depending on the printing language of your printer.

1. Access Web Config and select the Print tab > Universal Print Settings.

2. Set each item.

3. Check the settings, and then click OK.

Basic

Items Explanation

Top Offset(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the vertical position of the paper on which printing starts.

Left Offset(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the horizontal position of the paper on which printing starts.

Top Offset in Back(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the vertical position of the paper on which the printing of the back side of
the paper starts in duplex printing.

Left Offset in Back(-30.0-30.0mm) Sets the horizontal position of the paper on which the printing of the back side of
the paper starts in duplex printing.

Check Paper Width Set whether to check paper width when printing.

Skip Blank Page If there is a blank page in the print data, set not to print a blank page.

481
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Using the Print Functions

PDL Print Configuration

You can specify settings for PCL or PostScript printing.
This item is displayed on a PCL or PostScript compatible printer.

Common Settings

Items Explanation

Paper Size Select the paper size on which you want to print.

Paper Type Select the type of paper on which you print.

Orientation Select the orientation you want to use to print.

Quality Select the print quality you want to use for printing.

Ink Save Mode Set whether to print with reduced ink consumption.

Print Order Select to print from the top or the last page.

Number of Copies(1-999) Set the number of copies you want to print.

Binding Margin Select the binding position.

Auto Paper Ejection Select whether to eject paper automatically when timeout is occurred during
receiving a print job.

2-Sided Printing Set whether printing 2-sided.

PCL Menu

Items Explanation

Font Source Select whether to use the font installed on the printer or download it.

Font Number Specify the font number you want to use.

Pitch(0.44-99.99cpi) If the font to use is scalable and fixed-pitch font, specify the font size in pitch.

Height(4.00-999.75pt) If the font to use is scalable and proportional font, specify the font size in points.

Symbol Set Select the symbol set of the font you want to use.

Form(5-128lines) Specify the number of lines per page.

CR Function Select the operation for the CR code (return).

LF Function Select the operation for the LF code (new line), FF code (new page).

Paper Source Assign Specify paper feeder assignment for PCL paper feed command.

PS Menu

Items Explanation

Error Sheet Set whether to print an error sheet when PS3 printing error occurs.

Coloration Set as color printing or monochrome printing.

482
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Configuring a Mail Server

Items Explanation

Binary Set whether to accept the binary data or not.

PDF Page Size Set the paper size for PDF printing.

Configuring a Mail Server

Set the mail server from Web Config.
When the printer can send the email by setting the mail server, the following are possible.
❏ Transfers the scan results or fax by using email
❏ Receives the email notification from the printer

Check below before setting up.

❏ The printer is connected to the network that can access the mail server.
❏ Email setting information of the computer that uses the same mail server as the printer.

Note:
❏ When you use the mail server on the Internet, confirm the setting information from the provider or website.
❏ You can also set the mail server from the printer’s control panel. Access as below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Server Settings

1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab > Email Server > Basic.

2. Enter a value for each item.

3. Select OK.
The settings you have selected are displayed.
When the setup completes, perform the connection check.

Related Information
& “Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

483
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Configuring a Mail Server

Mail Server Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

Authentication Method Specify the authentication method for the printer to access the mail server.

Off Set when the mail server does not need authentication.

SMTP AUTH Authenticates on the SMTP server (outgoing mail server)

when sending the email. The mail server needs to support
SMTP authentication.

POP before SMTP Authenticates on the POP3 server (receiving mail server)
before sending the email. When you select this item, set the
POP3 server.

Authenticated Account If you select SMTP AUTH or POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter the
authenticated account name between 0 and 255 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).
When you select SMTP AUTH, enter the SMTP server account. When you select POP before
SMTP, enter the POP3 server account.

Authenticated Password If you select SMTP AUTH or POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter the
authenticated password between 0 and 20 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).
When you select SMTP AUTH, enter the authenticated account for the SMTP server. When
you select POP before SMTP, enter the authenticated account for the POP3 server.

484
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Configuring a Mail Server

Items Settings and Explanation

Sender's Email Address Enter the sender's email address such as the email address of the system administrator. This
is used when authenticating, so enter a valid email address that is registered to the mail
server.
Enter between 0 and 255 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E) except for : ( ) < > [ ] ; ¥. A period "."
cannot be the first character.

SMTP Server Address Enter between 0 and 255 characters using A-Z a-z 0-9 . - . You can use IPv4 or FQDN format.

SMTP Server Port Number Enter a number between 1 and 65535.

Secure Connection Select the encryption method of the communication to the mail server.

None If you select POP before SMTP in Authentication Method,

the connection is not encrypted.

SSL/TLS This is available when Authentication Method is set to Off

or SMTP AUTH. Communication is encrypted from the start.

STARTTLS This is available when Authentication Method is set to Off

or SMTP AUTH. Communication is not encrypted from the
start, but depending on the network environment, whether
the communication is encrypted or not is changed.

Certificate Validation The certificate is validated when this is enabled. We recommend this is set to Enable. To set
up, you need to import the CA Certificate to the printer.

POP3 Server Address If you select POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter the POP3 server
address between 0 and 255 characters using A-Z a-z 0-9 . - . You can use IPv4 or FQDN
format.

POP3 Server Port Number If you select POP before SMTP as the Authentication Method, enter a number between 1
and 65535.

Checking a Mail Server Connection

You can check the connection to the mail server by performing the connection check.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab > Email Server > Connection Test.

2. Select Start.
The connection test to the mail server is started. After the test, the check report is displayed.
Note:
You can also check the connection to the mail server from the printer’s control panel. Access as below.
Settings > General Settings > Network Settings > Advanced > Email Server > Connection Check

Mail Server Connection Test References

Messages Cause

Connection test was successful. This message appears when the connection with the server is successful.

485
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Configuring a Mail Server

Messages Cause

SMTP server communication error. This message appears when

Check the following. - Network
❏ The printer is not connected to a network
Settings
❏ SMTP server is down
❏ Network connection is disconnected while communicating
❏ Received incomplete data

POP3 server communication error. This message appears when

Check the following. - Network
❏ The printer is not connected to a network
Settings
❏ POP3 server is down
❏ Network connection is disconnected while communicating
❏ Received incomplete data

An error occurred while connecting to This message appears when

SMTP server. Check the followings. -
❏ Connecting to a DNS server failed
SMTP Server Address - DNS Server
❏ Name resolution for an SMTP server failed

An error occurred while connecting to This message appears when

POP3 server. Check the followings. -
❏ Connecting to a DNS server failed
POP3 Server Address - DNS Server
❏ Name resolution for an POP3 server failed

SMTP server authentication error. This message appears when SMTP server authentication failed.
Check the followings. - Authentication
Method - Authenticated Account -
Authenticated Password

POP3 server authentication error. This message appears when POP3 server authentication failed.
Check the followings. - Authentication
Method - Authenticated Account -
Authenticated Password

Unsupported communication method. This message appears when you try to communicate with unsupported protocols.
Check the followings. - SMTP Server
Address - SMTP Server Port Number

Connection to SMTP server failed. This message appears when an SMTP mismatch occurs between a server and a
Change Secure Connection to None. client, or when the server does not support SMTP secure connection (SSL
connection).

Connection to SMTP server failed. This message appears when an SMTP mismatch occurs between a server and a
Change Secure Connection to SSL/TLS. client, or when the server requests to use an SSL/TLS connection for an SMTP
secure connection.

Connection to SMTP server failed. This message appears when an SMTP mismatch occurs between a server and a
Change Secure Connection to client, or when the server requests to use an STARTTLS connection for an SMTP
STARTTLS. secure connection.

The connection is untrusted. Check the This message appears when the printer’s date and time setting is incorrect or the
following. - Date and Time certificate has expired.

The connection is untrusted. Check the This message appears when the printer does not have a root certificate
following. - CA Certificate corresponding to the server or a CA Certificate has not been imported.

The connection is not secured. This message appears when the obtained certificate is damaged.

486
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

Messages Cause

SMTP server authentication failed. This message appears when an authentication method mismatch occurs between
Change Authentication Method to a server and a client. The server supports SMTP AUTH.
SMTP-AUTH.

SMTP server authentication failed. This message appears when an authentication method mismatch occurs between
Change Authentication Method to a server and a client. The server does not support SMTP AUTH.
POP before SMTP.

Sender's Email Address is incorrect. This message appears when the specified sender’s Email address is wrong.
Change to the email address for your
email service.

Cannot access the printer until This message appears when the printer is busy.
processing is complete.

Setting a Shared Network Folder

Set a shared network folder to save the scanned image and the results of faxing.
When saving a file to the folder, the printer logs on as the user of the computer on which the folder was created.
Also, make sure you setup MS Network when creating the shared network folder.

Creating the Shared Folder

Before Creating the Shared Folder

Before creating the shared folder, check the following.
❏ The printer is connected to the network where it can access the computer where the shared folder will be
created.
❏ A multi-byte character is not included in the name of the computer where the shared folder will be created.

c Important:
When a multi-byte character is included in the computer name, saving the file to the shared folder may fail.
In that case, change to the computer that does not include the Multi-byte character in the name or change the
computer name.
When changing the computer name, make sure to confirm with the administrator in advance because it may affect
some settings, such as computer management, resource access, etc.

Checking the Network Profile

On the computer where the shared folder will be created, check whether folder sharing is available.

1. Log in to the computer where the shared folder will be created by the administrator authority user account.

2. Select Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and Sharing Center.

487
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

3. Click Advanced sharing settings, and then click for the profile with (current profile) in the displayed
network profiles.

4. Check whether Turn on file and printer sharing is selected on File and Printer Sharing.
If already selected, click Cancel and close the window.
When you change the settings, click Save Changes and close the window.

Related Information
& “Location Where the Shared Folder is Created and an Example of the Security” on page 488

Location Where the Shared Folder is Created and an Example of the Security
Depending on the location where the shared folder is created, security and convenience vary.
To operate the shared folder from the printers or other computers, the following reading and changing permissions
for the folder are required.
❏ Sharing tab > Advanced Sharing > Permissions
It controls the network access permission of the shared folder.
❏ Access permission of Security tab
It controls permission of the network access and local access of the shared folder.

When you set Everyone to the shared folder that is created on the desktop, as an example of creating a shared
folder, all users who can access the computer will be permitted access.
However, the user who does not have authority cannot access them because the desktop (folder) is under the
control of the user folder, and then the security settings of the user folder are handed down to it. The user who is
permitted access on the Security tab (user logged in and administrator in this case) can operate the folder.
See below to create the proper location.
This example is when creating the "scan_folder" folder.

Related Information
& “Example of Configuration for File Servers” on page 488
& “Example of Configuration for a Personal Computer” on page 494

Example of Configuration for File Servers

This explanation is an example for creating the shared folder on the root of the drive on the shared computer, such
as the file server under the following condition.
Access controllable users, such as someone who has the same domain of a computer to create a shared folder, can
access the shared folder.
Set this configuration when you permit any user to read and write to the shared folder on the computer, such as the
file server and the shared computer.
❏ Place for creating shared folder: Root of drive
❏ Folder path: C:\scan_folder
❏ Access permission via network (Share Permissions): Everyone
❏ Access permission on file system (Security): Authenticated Users

488
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

1. Log in to the computer where the shared folder will be created by the administrator authority user account.

2. Start explorer.

3. Create the folder on the root of drive, and then name it "scan_folder".
For the folder name, enter between 1 and 12 alphanumeric characters. If the character limit of the folder name
is exceeded, you may not be able to access it normally by the varied environment.

4. Right click the folder, and then select Properties.

489
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

5. Click Advanced Sharing on the Sharing tab.

490
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

6. Select Share this folder, and then click Permissions.

7. Select Everyone group of Group or user names, select Allow on Change, and then click OK.

491
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

8. Click OK.

9. Select Security tab, and then select Authenticated Users on the Group or user names.

"Authenticated Users" is the special group that includes all users who can log in to the domain or computer.
This group is displayed only when the folder is created just below the root folder.
If it is not displayed, you can add it by clicking Edit. For more details, see Related Information.

492
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

10. Check that Allow on Modify is selected in Permissions for Authenticated Users.
If it is not selected, select Authenticated Users, click Edit, select Allow on Modify in Permissions for
Authenticated Users, and then click OK.

493
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

11. Select Sharing tab.

The network path of the shared folder is displayed. This is used when registering to the contacts of the printer.
Please write it down.

12. Click OK or Close to close the screen.

Check whether the file can be written or read on the shared folder from the computers of the same domain.

Related Information
& “Registering a Destination to Contacts using Web Config” on page 504
& “Adding Group or User Which Permits Access” on page 499

Example of Configuration for a Personal Computer

This explanation is an example for creating the shared folder on the desktop of the user currently logging in to the
computer.
The user who logs in to the computer and who has administrator authority can access the desktop folder and the
document folder that are under the User folder.
Set this configuration when you DO NOT permit reading and writing to another user to the shared folder on a
personal computer.
❏ Place for creating shared folder: Desktop

494
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

❏ Folder path: C:\Users\xxxx\Desktop\scan_folder

❏ Access permission via network (Share Permissions): Everyone
❏ Access permission on file system (Security): do not add, or add User/Group names to permit access

1. Log in to the computer where the shared folder will be created by the administrator authority user account.

2. Start explorer.

3. Create the folder on the desktop, and then name it "scan_folder".

For the folder name, enter between 1 and 12 alphanumeric characters. If the character limit of the folder name
is exceeded, you may not be able to access it normally by the varied environment.

4. Right click the folder, and then select Properties.

495
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

5. Click Advanced Sharing on the Sharing tab.

496
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

6. Select Share this folder, and then click Permissions.

7. Select Everyone group of Group or user names, select Allow on Change, and then click OK.

497
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

8. Click OK.

9. Select Security tab.

10. Check the group or the user in the Group or user names.
The group or the user that is displayed here can access the shared folder.
In this case, the user who logs in to this computer and the Administrator can access the shared folder.
Add access permission, if necessary. You can add it by clicking Edit. For more details, see Related Information.

498
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

11. Select Sharing tab.

The network path of the shared folder is displayed. This is used when registering to the printer's contact. Please
write it down.

12. Click OK or Close to close the screen.

Check whether the file can be written or read on the shared folder from the computers of users or groups with
access permission.

Related Information
& “Registering a Destination to Contacts using Web Config” on page 504
& “Adding Group or User Which Permits Access” on page 499

Adding Group or User Which Permits Access

You can add the group or user which permits access.

1. Right click the folder and select Properties.

2. Select Security tab.

499
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

3. Click Edit.

500
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

4. Click Add under the Group or user names.

5. Enter the group or user name that you want to permit access, and then click Check Names.
An underline is added to the name.
Note:
If you do not know the full name of the group or user, enter part of the name, and then click Check Names. The group
names or user names that match part of the name are listed, and then you can select the full name from the list.
If just one name matches, the full name with underlining is displayed in Enter the object name to select.

501
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Setting a Shared Network Folder

6. Click OK.

7. On the Permission screen, select the user name that is entered in Group or user names , select the access
permission on Modify, and then click OK.

8. Click OK or Close to close the screen.

Check whether the file can be written or read on the shared folder from the computers of users or groups with
access permission.

Using Microsoft Network Sharing

When enabling it, the following are possible.
❏ Shares the USB storage over the network that is connected to the printer.
❏ Forwards the scan result or receiving fax to the shared folder on the computer.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab > MS Network.

2. Select Use Microsoft network sharing.

3. Set each item.

4. Click Next.

502
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

5. Confirm the settings, and then click OK.

6. Enter the following on the computer's explorer, and then press the Enter key.
Check whether there is a network folder and that you can access it.
\\Printer's IP address
Example : \\192.0.2.111

Related Information
& “Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

MS Network Setting items

Items Explanation

Use Microsoft network sharing Select when enabling MS Network sharing.

SMB1.0 Enable the protocol you want to use. You can only enable SMB1.0 or SMB2/SMB3.
SMB2/SMB3

File Sharing Select whether to enable file sharing or not.

Enable it for the following situations.
❏ Shares the USB storage over the network that is connected to the printer.
❏ Forwards the scan result or receiving fax to the shared folder on the computer.

User Authentication Select whether to perform user authentication or not when accessing USB storage
on the network that is connected to the printer.

User Name Set the user name for user authentication. Enter between 1 and 127 characters in
ASCII except "/\[]:;|=,+*?<>@%. However, you cannot enter a single period or a
combination of the period "." and a space alone.

Password Set the password for user authentication. Enter between 1 and 64 characters in
ASCII. However, you cannot just set 10 asterisks "*".

Encrypted Communication Set whether to enable encrypted communication or not. You can select it when
Enable is selected on User Authentication.

Host Name Display the MS Network host name of the printer. To change this, select the
Network tab > Basic, and then change the Device Name.

Workgroup Name Enter the work group name of MS Network. Enter between 0 and 15 characters in
ASCII.

Access Attribute Set the Access Attribute of file sharing.

Shared Name(USB Host) Display as the shared name when sharing the file.

Making Contacts Available

Registering destinations in the printer's contacts list allows you to easily enter the destination when scanning or
sending faxes.
You can also use the LDAP server (LDAP search) to enter the destination.

503
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

Note:
❏ You can switch between your printer's contacts list and the LDAP using the printer’s control panel.
❏ You can register the following types of destinations in the contacts list. You can register up to 2,000 entries in total.

Fax Destination for fax

Email Destination for email

You need to configure the email server settings beforehand.

Network Folder (SMB) Destination for scan data and fax forwarding data

Network Folder/FTP

Contacts Configuration Comparison

There are three tools for configuring the printer's contacts: Web Config, Epson Device Admin, and the printer’s
control panel. The differences between three tools are listed in the table below.

Features Web Config Epson Device Admin Printer’s control panel

Registering a destination ✓ ✓ ✓

Editing a destination ✓ ✓ ✓

Adding a group ✓ ✓ ✓

Editing a group ✓ ✓ ✓

Deleting a destination or ✓ ✓ ✓
groups

Deleting all destinations ✓ ✓ –

Importing a file ✓ ✓ –

Exporting to a file ✓ ✓ –

Assigning destinations to ✓ ✓ ✓
frequent use

Sorting destinations – – ✓
assigned to frequent use

Note:
You can also configure the fax destination using the FAX Utility.

Registering a Destination to Contacts using Web Config

Note:
You can also register the contacts on the printer’s control panel.

1. Access Web Config and select the Scan/Copy or Fax tab > Contacts.

2. Select the number that you want to register, and then click Edit.

504
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

3. Enter Name and Index Word.

4. Select the destination type as the Type option.

Note:
You cannot change the Type option after registration is complete. If you want to change the type, delete the destination
and then register again.

5. Enter a value for each item, and then click Apply.

Related Information
& “Scanning Originals to a Network Folder” on page 119

Destination Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

Common Settings

Name Enter a name displayed in the contacts in 30 characters or less in Unicode (UTF-8).
If you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Index Word Enter words to search in 30 characters or less in Unicode (UTF-8). If you do not
specify this, leave it blank.

Type Select the type of the address that you want to register.

Assign to Frequent Use Select to set the registered address as a frequently used address.
When setting as a frequently used address, it is displayed on the top screen of fax
and scan, and you can specify the destination without displaying the contacts.

Fax

Fax Number Enter between 1 and 64 characters using 0-9 - * # and space.

Fax Speed Select a communication speed for a destination.

505
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

Items Settings and Explanation

Subaddress (SUB/SEP) Set the sub address that is appended when fax is sent. Enter within 20 characters
or less using 0-9, *, # or spaces. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Password (SID/PWD) Set the password for the sub address. Enter within 20 characters or less using 0-9,
*, # or spaces. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Email

Email Address Enter between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z a-z 0-9 ! # $ % & ' * + - . / = ? ^ _ { | }
~ @.

Network Folder (SMB)

Save to \\“Folder path”

Enter the location where the target folder is located between 1 and 253 characters
in Unicode (UTF-8), omitting "\\".

User Name Enter a user name to access a network folder in 30 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F).

Password Enter a password to access a network folder in 20 characters or less in Unicode

(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F).

FTP

Secure Connection Select FTP or FTPS according to the file transfer protocol the FTP server supports.
Select FTPS to allow the printer to communicate with security measures.

Save to Enter the server name between 1 and 253 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E),
omitting "ftp://" or "ftps://".

User Name Enter a user name to access an FTP server in 30 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F). If the server
allows anonymous connections, enter a user name such as Anonymous and FTP. If
you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Password Enter a password to access to an FTP server within 20 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). However, avoid using control characters (0x00 to 0x1f, 0x7F). If you do not
specify this, leave it blank.

Connection Mode Select the connection mode from the menu. If a firewall is set between the printer
and the FTP server, select Passive Mode.

Port Number Enter the FTP server port number between 1 and 65535.

Certificate Validation The FTP server's certificate is validated when this is enabled. This is available when
FTPS is selected for Secure Connection.
To set up, you need to import the CA Certificate to the printer.

Registering Destinations as a Group Using Web Config

If the destination type is set to Fax or Email, you can register the destinations as a group.

1. Access Web Config and select the Scan/Copy or Fax tab > Contacts.

2. Select the number that you want to register, and then click Edit.

506
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

3. Select a group from Type.

4. Click Select for Contact(s) for Group.

The available destinations are displayed.

5. Select the destination that you want to register to the group, and then click Select.

6. Enter a Name and Index Word.

7. Select whether or not you assign the registered group to the frequently used group.
Note:
Destinations can be registered to multiple groups.

8. Click Apply.

Registering Frequently Used Contacts

1. Tap Settings on the home screen.

2. Tap Contacts Manager > Frequent.

3. Select the type of contact that you want to register.

4. Tap Edit.

5. Select frequently used contacts that you want to register, and then tap OK. To cancel the selection, tap it again.

6. Tap Close.

507
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

Backing Up and Importing Contacts

Using Web Config or other tools, you can back up and import contacts.
For Web Config, you can back up contacts by exporting the printer settings that include contacts. The exported file
cannot be edited because it is exported as a binary file.
When importing the printer settings to the printer, contacts are overwritten.
For Epson Device Admin, only contacts can be exported from the device’s property screen. Also, if you do not
export the security-related items, you can edit the exported contacts and import them because this can be saved as
a SYLK file or CSV file.

Importing Contacts Using Web Config

If you have a printer that allows you to backup contacts and is compatible with this printer, you can register
contacts easily by importing the backup file.
Note:
For instructions on how to back up the printer contacts, see the manual provided with the printer.

Follow the steps below to import the contacts to this printer.

1. Access Web Config, select Device Management > Export and Import Setting Value > Import.

2. Select the backup file you created in File, enter the password, and then click Next.

3. Select the Contacts checkbox, and then click Next.

Backing up Contacts Using Web Config

Contacts data may be lost due to a printer malfunction. We recommend that you make a backup of the data
whenever you update the data. Epson shall not be responsible for the loss of any data, for backing up or recovering
data and/or settings even during a warranty period.
Using Web Config, you can back up the contact data stored in the printer to the computer.

1. Access Web Config, and then select the Device Management tab > Export and Import Setting Value >
Export.

2. Select one of the Contacts checkboxes.

For example, if you select Contacts under the Scan/Copy category, the same checkbox under the Fax category
is also selected.

3. Enter a password to encrypt the exported file.

You need the password to import the file. Leave this blank if you do not want to encrypt the file.

4. Click Export.

Starting from Importing Contacts from Another Epson Printer

If you have a printer that allows you to backup contacts and is compatible with this printer, you can register
contacts easily by importing the backup file.

508
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

Note:
For instructions on how to back up the printer contact,s, see the manual provided with the printer.

Follow the steps below to import the contacts to this printer.

1. Access Web Config, select Device Management > Export and Import Setting Value > Import.

2. Select the backup file you created in File, enter the password, and then click Next.

3. Select the Contacts checkbox, and then click Next.

Export and Bulk Registration of Contacts Using Tool

If you use Epson Device Admin, you can back up just the contacts and edit the exported files, then register them all
at once.
It is useful if you want to back up only the contacts or when you replace the printer and you want to transfer the
contacts from the old one to new one.

Exporting Contacts
Save the contacts information to the file.
You can edit files saved in SYLK format or csv format by using a spreadsheet application or text editor. You can
register all at once after deleting or adding the information.
Information that includes security items such as password and personal information can be saved in binary format
with a password. You cannot edit the file. This can be used as the backup file of the information including the
security items.

1. Start Epson Device Admin.

2. Select Devices on the side bar task menu.

3. Select the device you want to configure from the device list.

4. Click Device Configuration on the Home tab on the ribbon menu.

When the administrator password has been set, enter the password and click OK.

5. Click Common > Contacts.

6. Select the export format from Export > Export items.

❏ All Items
Export the encrypted binary file. Select when you want to include the security items such as password and
personal information. You cannot edit the file. If you select it, you have to set the password. Click
Configuration and set a password between 8 and 63 characters long in ASCII. This password is required
when importing the binary file.
❏ Items except Security Information
Export the SYLK format or csv format files. Select when you want to edit the information of the exported
file.

509
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

7. Click Export.

8. Specify the place to save the file, select the file type, and then click Save.
The completion message is displayed.

9. Click OK.
Check that the file is saved to the specified place.

Importing Contacts
Import the contacts information from the file.
You can import the files saved in SYLK format or csv format or the backed-up binary file that includes the security
items.

1. Start Epson Device Admin.

2. Select Devices on the side bar task menu.

3. Select the device you want to configure from the device list.

4. Click Device Configuration on the Home tab on the ribbon menu.

When the administrator password has been set, enter the password and click OK.

5. Click Common > Contacts.

6. Click Browse on Import.

7. Select the file you want to import and then click Open.
When you select the binary file, in Password enter the password you set when exporting the file.

8. Click Import.
The confirmation screen is displayed.

9. Click OK.
The validation result is displayed.
❏ Edit the information read
Click when you want to edit the information individually.
❏ Read more file
Click when you want to import multiple files.

10. Click Import, and then click OK on the import completion screen.
Return to the device's property screen.

11. Click Transmit.

12. Click OK on the confirmation message.

The settings are sent to the printer.

510
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

13. On the sending completion screen, click OK.

The printer's information is updated.
Open the contacts from Web Config or printer's control panel, and then check that the contact is updated.

Cooperation between the LDAP Server and Users

When cooperating with the LDAP server, you can use the address information registered to the LDAP server as the
destination of an email or fax.

Configuring the LDAP Server

To use the LDAP server information, register it on the printer.

1. Access the Web Config and select the Network tab > LDAP Server > Basic.

2. Enter a value for each item.

3. Select OK.
The settings you have selected are displayed.

LDAP Server Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

Use LDAP Server Select Use or Do Not Use.

LDAP Server Address Enter the address of the LDAP server. Enter between 1 and 255 characters of
either IPv4, IPv6, or FQDN format. For the FQDN format, you can use alphanumeric
characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E) and "- " except for the beginning and end of the
address.

LDAP server Port Number Enter the LDAP server port number between 1 and 65535.

Secure Connection Specify the authentication method when the printer accesses the LDAP server.

Certificate Validation When this is enabled, the certificate of the LDAP sever is validated. We
recommend this is set to Enable.
To set up, the CA Certificate needs to be imported to the printer.

Search Timeout (sec) Set the length of time for searching before timeout occurs between 5 and 300.

Authentication Method Select one of the methods.

If you select Kerberos Authentication, select Kerberos Settings to make
settings for Kerberos.
To perform Kerberos Authentication, the following environment is required.
❏ The printer and the DNS server can communicate.
❏ The time of the printer, KDC server, and the server that is required for
authentication (LDAP server, SMTP server, File server) are synchronized.
❏ When the service server is assigned as the IP address, the FQDN of the service
server is registered on the DNS server reverse lookup zone.

511
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

Items Settings and Explanation

Kerberos Realm to be Used If you select Kerberos Authentication for Authentication Method, select the
Kerberos realm that you want to use.

Administrator DN / User Name Enter the user name for the LDAP server in 128 characters or less in Unicode
(UTF-8). You cannot use control characters, such as 0x00-0x1F and 0X7F. This
setting is not used when Anonymous Authentication is selected as the
Authentication Method. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Password Enter the password for the LDAP server authentication in 128 characters or less in
Unicode (UTF-8). You cannot use control characters, such as 0x00-0x1F and 0X7F.
This setting is not used when Anonymous Authentication is selected as the
Authentication Method. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Kerberos Settings
If you select Kerberos Authentication for Authentication Method of LDAP Server > Basic, make the following
Kerberos settings from the Network tab > Kerberos Settings. You can register up to 10 settings for the Kerberos
settings.

Items Settings and Explanation

Realm (Domain) Enter the realm of the Kerberos authentication in 255 characters or less in ASCII
(0x20-0x7E). If you do not register this, leave it blank.

KDC Address Enter the address of the Kerberos authentication server. Enter 255 characters or
less in either IPv4, IPv6 or FQDN format. If you do not register this, leave it blank.

Port Number (Kerberos) Enter the Kerberos server port number between 1 and 65535.

Configuring the LDAP Server Search Settings

When you set up the search settings, you can use the email address and fax number registered to the LDAP server.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab > LDAP Server > Search Settings.

2. Enter a value for each item.

3. Click OK to display the setting result.

The settings you have selected are displayed.

LDAP Server Search Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

Search Base (Distinguished Name) If you want to search an arbitrary domain, specify the domain name of the LDAP
server. Enter between 0 and 128 characters in Unicode (UTF-8). If you do not
search for arbitrary attribute, leave this blank.
Example for the local server directory: dc=server,dc=local

512
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Contacts Available

Items Settings and Explanation

Number of search entries Specify the number of search entries between 5 and 500. The specified number of
the search entries is saved and displayed temporarily. Even if the number of the
search entries is over the specified number and an error message appears, the
search can be completed.

User name Attribute Specify the attribute name to display when searching for user names. Enter
between 1 and 255 characters in Unicode (UTF-8). The first character should be a-z
or A-Z.
Example: cn, uid

User name Display Attribute Specify the attribute name to display as the user name. Enter between 0 and 255
characters in Unicode (UTF-8). The first character should be a-z or A-Z.
Example: cn, sn

Fax Number Attribute Specify the attribute name to display when searching for fax numbers. Enter a
combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and -. The first
character should be a-z or A-Z.
Example: facsimileTelephoneNumber

Email Address Attribute Specify the attribute name to display when searching for email addresses. Enter a
combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and -. The first
character should be a-z or A-Z.
Example: mail

Arbitrary Attribute 1 - Arbitrary You can specify other arbitrary attributes to search for. Enter between 0 and 255
Attribute 4 characters in Unicode (UTF-8). The first character should be a-z or A-Z. If you do
not want to search for arbitrary attributes, leave this blank.
Example: o, ou

Checking the LDAP Server Connection

Performs the connection test to the LDAP server by using the parameter set on LDAP Server > Search Settings.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network tab > LDAP Server > Connection Test.

2. Select Start.
The connection test is started. After the test, the check report is displayed.

LDAP Server Connection Test References

Messages Explanation

Connection test was successful. This message appears when the connection with the server is successful.

513
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Preparing to Scan

Messages Explanation

Connection test failed. This message appears for the following reasons:
Check the settings. ❏ The LDAP server address or the port number is incorrect.
❏ A timeout has occurred.
❏ Do Not Use is selected as the Use LDAP Server.
❏ If Kerberos Authentication is selected as the Authentication Method,
settings such as Realm (Domain), KDC Address and Port Number (Kerberos)
are incorrect.

Connection test failed. This message appears when the connection fails because the time settings for the
printer and the LDAP server are mismatched.
Check the date and time on your
product or server.

Authentication failed. This message appears for the following reasons:

Check the settings. ❏ User Name and/or Password is incorrect.
❏ If Kerberos Authentication is selected as the Authentication Method, the
time/date may not be configured.

Cannot access the printer until This message appears when the printer is busy.
processing is complete.

Preparing to Scan

Scanning using the control panel

The scan to network folder function and the scan to mail function using the printer’s control panel, as well as the
transfer of scan results to mail, folders, etc. are performed by executing a job from the computer.

Settings of Servers and Folders

Name Settings Location Requirement

Scan to Network Folder Create and set up sharing of A computer that has a save The administrative user
(SMB) the save folder folder location account to the computer
that creates save folders.

Destination for Scan to Contacts of the device User name and password
Network Folder (SMB) to log on to the
computer that has the
save folder, and the
privilege to update the
save folder.

Scan to Network Folder Setup for FTP server log on Contacts of the device Logon information for
(FTP) the FTP server and the
privilege to update the
save folder.

Scan to Email Setup for email server Device Setup information for
email server

514
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Preparing to Scan

Name Settings Location Requirement

Scan to Cloud Printer registration to Epson Device Internet connection

Connect environment

Contact registration to Epson Epson Connect service User and printer

Connect registration to Epson
Connect service

Scan to Compuer (when Server mode setup for Device IP address, host name, or
using Document Capture Document Capture Pro FQDN for the computer
Pro Server) that Document Capture
Pro Server is installed on

Related Information
& “Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 487
& “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

Using Document Capture Pro Server

By using Document Capture Pro Server, you can manage the sorting method, saving format, and forwarding
destination of a scanning result executed from the printer's control panel. You can call and execute a job previously
registered on the server from the printer's control panel.
Install it on the server computer.
For more information on Document Capture Pro Server, contact your local Epson office.

Setting Server Mode

To use Document Capture Pro Server, set up as follows.

1. Access Web Config and select the Scan/Copy tab > Document Capture Pro.

2. Select Server Mode for Mode.

3. Enter the address of the server with Document Capture Pro Server installed on it for Server Address.
Enter between 2 and 255 characters in either IPv4, IPv6, host name or FQDN format. For FQDN format, you
can use alphanumeric characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E) and "- " except for at the beginning and end of the
address.

4. Click OK.
The network is re-connected, and then the settings are enabled.

Scanning From a Computer

Install the software and check that the network scan service is enabled to scan via a network from the computer.

515
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Software to be installed
❏ Epson Scan 2
This is a scanner driver. If you use the device from a computer, install the driver on each client computer. If
Document Capture Pro/Document Capture is installed, you can perform the operations assigned to the buttons
of the device.
If EpsonNet SetupManager is used, the printer driver is also distributed as a package.
❏ Document Capture Pro (Windows)/Document Capture (Mac OS)
It is installed on the client computer. The jobs registered on a network computer where Document Capture Pro/
Document Capture is installed can be called and run from the deivce's control panel.
You can scan over the network from a computer. Epson Scan 2 is required to scan.

Confirming that Network Scan is Enabled

You can set the network scan service when you scan from a client computer over the network. The default setting is
enabled.

1. Access Web Config and select the Scan/Copy tab > Network Scan.

2. Make sure that Enable scanning of EPSON Scan is selected.

If it is selected, this task is completed. Close Web Config.
If it is cleared, select it and go to next step.

3. Click Next.

4. Click OK.
The network is re-connected, and then the settings are enabled.

Related Information
& “Running Web Config on a Web Browser” on page 406

Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printers Only)

Before Using Fax Features

Set up the following to use the fax features.
❏ Connect the printer correctly with the phone line and, if necessary, with a phone
❏ Complete the Fax Setting Wizard, which is required to make basic settings.

Set the following as necessary.

❏ Output destinations and related settings, such as network settings and mail server settings
❏ Contacts registration
❏ User Settings that define default values for Fax menu items
❏ Report Settings to print reports when faxes are sent, received, or forwarded

516
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Related Information
& “Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line” on page 517
& “Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 520
& “Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 520
& “Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)” on page 418
& “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483
& “Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 487
& “Making Contacts Available” on page 503
& “User Settings” on page 418
& “Report Settings” on page 418

Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line

Compatible Telephone Lines

You can use the printer over standard analogue telephone lines (PSTN = Public Switched Telephone Network) and
PBX (Private Branch Exchange) telephone systems.
You may not be able to use the printer with the following phone lines or systems.
❏ VoIP phone line such as DSL or fiber-optic digital service
❏ Digital phone line (ISDN)
❏ Some PBX telephone systems
❏ When adapters such as terminal adapters, VoIP adapters, splitters, or DSL router are connected between the
telephone wall jack and the printer

Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line

Connect the printer to a telephone wall jack using an RJ-11 (6P2C) phone cable. When connecting a telephone to
the printer, use a second RJ-11 (6P2C) phone cable.
Depending on the area, a phone cable may be included with the printer. If it is included, use that cable.
You may need to connect the phone cable to an adapter provided for your country or region.
Note:
Remove the cap from the EXT. port of the printer only when connecting your telephone to the printer. Do not remove the cap
if you are not connecting your telephone.

In areas where lightning strikes occur frequently, we recommend that you use a surge protector.

517
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Connecting to a Standard Phone Line (PSTN) or PBX

Connect a phone cable from the telephone wall jack or PBX port to the LINE port on the back of the printer.

Connecting to DSL or ISDN

Connect a phone cable from the DSL modem or the ISDN terminal adapter to the LINE port on the back of the
printer. See the documentation provided with the modem or the adapter for more details.
Note:
If your DSL modem is not equipped with a built-in DSL filter, connect a separate DSL filter.

Connecting Your Phone Device to the Printer

When using the printer and your telephone on a single phone line, connect the telephone to the printer.

518
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Note:
❏ If your phone device has a fax function, disable the fax function before connecting. See the manuals that came with the
phone device for details. Depending on the model of the phone device, the fax function cannot be completely disabled, so
you may not be able to use it as an external phone.
❏ If you connect an answering machine, make sure the printer's Rings to Answer setting is set higher than the number of
rings your answering machine is set to answer a call.

1. Remove the cap from the EXT. port on the back of the printer.

2. Connect the phone device and the EXT. port with a phone cable.

519
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Note:
When sharing a single phone line, make sure you connect the phone device to the EXT. port of the printer. If you split
the line to connect the phone device and the printer separately, the phone and the printer do not work correctly.

3. Select Fax on the home screen.

4. Pick up the handset.

If a message to start sending or receiving faxes is displayed as shown on the following screen, the connection
has been established.

Related Information
& “Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes” on page 520
& “Making Settings to Use an Answering Machine” on page 523
& “Making Settings to Receive Faxes Operating Only a Connected Phone” on page 523
& “Receive Mode:” on page 420

Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes

Fax Setting Wizard configures the basic fax features to make the printer ready to send and receive faxes.
The Wizard is displayed automatically when the printer is turned on for the first time. You can also display the
wizard manually from the printer's control panel. You need to run the wizard again in case the wizard is skipped
when the printer is first turned on or when the connection environment has changed.
❏ The items below are what you can set through the wizard.
❏ Header (Your Phone Number and Fax Header)
❏ Receive Mode (Auto or Manual)
❏ Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) Setting

❏ The items below are set automatically according to the connection environment.
❏ Dial Mode (such as Tone or Pulse)

❏ Other items in Basic Settings remain as they are.

Related Information
& “Basic Settings” on page 419

520
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Making the Printer Ready to Send and Receive Faxes Using Fax Setting Wizard

1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax
Settings > Fax Setting Wizard.

2. Following the on-screen instructions, enter the sender name such as your company name, your fax number.
Note:
Your sender name and your fax number appear as the header for outgoing faxes.

3. Make the distinctive ring detection (DRD) setting.

❏ If you have subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company:
Go to the next screen and select the ring pattern to be used for incoming faxes.
When you tap any item except All, Receive Mode is set to Auto and you continue to the next screen where
you can check the settings you made.
❏ If you have not subscribed to a distinctive ring service from your telephone company, or you do not need to
set this option:
Skip this setting and go to the screen where you can check the settings you made.

Note:
❏ Distinctive ring services, offered by many telephone companies (the service name differs by company), allows you to
have several phone numbers on one phone line. Each number is assigned a different ring pattern. You can use one
number for voice calls and another for fax calls. Select the ring pattern assigned to fax calls in DRD.
❏ Depending on the region, On and Off are displayed as the DRD options. Select On to use the distinctive ring feature.

4. Make the Receive Mode setting.

❏ If you do not need to connect a phone device to the printer:
Select No.
Receive Mode is set to Auto.
❏ If you need to connect a phone device to the printer:
Select Yes, and then select whether or not to receive faxes automatically.

5. Check the settings you made on the screen displayed, and then proceed to the next screen.

To correct or change settings, tap .

6. Check the fax connection by selecting Start Checking, and then select Print to print a report that shows the
connection status.
Note:
❏ If there are any errors reported, follow the instructions on the report to solve them.
❏ If the Select Line Type screen is displayed, select the line type.
- When you are connecting the printer to a PBX phone system or terminal adapter, select PBX.
- When you are connecting the printer to a standard phone line, select PSTN, and then select Do Not Detect on the
Confirmation screen displayed. However, setting this to Do Not Detect may cause the printer to skip the first digit of
a fax number when dialing and send the fax to the wrong number.

Related Information
& “Connecting the Printer to a Phone Line” on page 517
& “Making Settings to Use an Answering Machine” on page 523

521
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

& “Receive Mode:” on page 420

& “Making Settings to Receive Faxes Operating Only a Connected Phone” on page 523
& “Basic Settings” on page 419

Making Settings for the Printer's Fax Features According to Use

You can configure the printer's fax features individually using the printer's control panel according to use. The
settings made using Fax Setting Wizard can also be changed. For more details, see the descriptions of the Fax
Settings menu.
Note:
❏ Using Web Config, you can configure the printer's fax features.
❏ When you use Web Config to display the Fax Settings menu, there may be slight differences in the user interface and in
location compared to the printer's control panel.

Related Information
& “Fax Settings (Fax-Capable Printers Only)” on page 418
& “Receiving Incoming Faxes” on page 152
& “Making Settings for a PBX Phone System” on page 522
& “Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device” on page 523
& “Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes” on page 524
& “Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes with Specific Conditions” on page 527
& “Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes” on page 531
& “Making Settings to Send and Receive Faxes on a Computer” on page 531

Making Settings for a PBX Phone System

Make the following settings when using the printer in offices that use extensions and require external access codes,
such as 0 and 9, to get an outside line.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings.

3. Select Line Type, and then select PBX.

4. When sending a fax to an outside fax number using # (hash) instead of the actual external access code, select
the Access Code box, and then select Use.
The # entered instead of the actual access code, is replaced with the stored access code when dialing. Using #
helps avoid connection problems when connecting to an outside line.
Note:
You cannot send faxes to recipients in Contacts in which an external access code such as 0 or 9 is set.
If you have registered recipients in Contacts using an external access code such as 0 or 9, set the Access Code to Do Not
Use. Otherwise, you must change the code to # in Contacts.

5. Tap the Access Code input box, enter the external access code used for your phone system, and then tap OK.

522
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

6. Select OK to apply the settings.

The access code is stored in the printer.

Making Settings When You Connect a Phone Device

Making Settings to Use an Answering Machine

You need settings to use an answering machine.

1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel..

2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings.

3. Set Receive Mode to Auto.

4. Set the Rings to Answer setting of the printer to a higher number than the number of rings for the answering
machine.
If Rings to Answer is set lower than the number of rings for the answering machine, the answering machine
cannot receive voice calls to record voice messages. See the manuals that came with the answering machine for
its settings.
The printer's Rings to Answer setting may not be displayed, depending on the region.

Related Information
& “Basic Settings” on page 419

Making Settings to Receive Faxes Operating Only a Connected Phone

You can start receiving incoming faxes by only picking up the handset and operating the phone, without operating
the printer at all.
The Remote Receive feature is available for telephones that support tone dialing.

1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Remote Receive.

3. Tap Remote Receive to set this to On.

4. Select Start Code, enter a two digit code (you can enter 0 to 9, *, and #), and then tap OK.

5. Select OK to apply the settings.

Related Information
& “Basic Settings” on page 419

523
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes

The printer is set to print received faxes by default. Besides printing, you can set the printer to save and/or forward
received faxes.
Note:
As well as using the printer's control panel, you can also make settings using Web Config.

Related Information
& “Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 524
& “Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes” on page 525
& “Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specific Conditions” on page 527
& “Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specified Conditions” on page 529

Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes

You can make saving settings to receive faxes to the inbox and an external memory device regardless of the sender
or time. Saving a fax to the inbox allows you to confirm the contents of the received fax by viewing the fax on the
printer's LCD screen before the printer prints the fax.
To make settings to save received faxes to a computer using the PC-FAX feature, see “ Feature: PC-FAX Send/
Receive (Windows/Mac OS)” on page 141.
Note:
❏ As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Config to make saving settings to receive faxes. Select the
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward, and then make the saving destination settings in
Fax Output.
❏ You can also print and/or forward the received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Fax Output screen
mentioned above.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax Settings.

2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward.

When a message is displayed, check the content, and then tap OK.

3. Make settings for the saving destinations, the inbox and/or an external memory device.

❏ To save received faxes to the Inbox:

A Select Save to Inbox to set this to On.
B If a message is displayed, check the content, and then select OK.

524
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

❏ To save received faxes to an external memory device:

A Insert a memory device into the printer's external interface USB port.
B Select Save to Memory Device.
C Select Yes. To print the documents automatically while saving them in the memory device, select Yes
and Print instead.
D Check the message that is displayed, and then tap Create.
A folder for saving received documents is created in the memory device.
E Check the message, tap Close or wait until the message is cleared, and then tap Close.
F When the next message is displayed, check it, and then tap OK.

c Important:
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the documents are saved in the
memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory full error disables sending and receiving faxes, keep
the memory device connected to the printer.

Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of saving faxes, when saving is
complete. As necessary, select Email Notifications, set the processes, and then set the destination to which you want to
send notifications.

4. Select Close to complete the Unconditional Save/Forward Settings.

This completes making unconditional saving settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.

Related Information
& “Save/Forward Settings” on page 424
& “Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 157

Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes

You can make forwarding settings to up to five destinations, email addresses, shared folders, and/or another fax
machine regardless of the sender or time. If you make settings to forward received faxes, first add the forwarding
destinations to the contacts list. To forward to an email address, you also need to configure the email server
settings beforehand.
“Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 487
“Making Contacts Available” on page 503
Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. They are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.
Note:
❏ As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Config to make forwarding settings to receive faxes. Select
the Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward, and then make the forwarding destination
settings in Fax Output.
❏ You can also print and/or save received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Fax Output screen mentioned
above.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, then select General Settings > Fax Settings.

525
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward.

When a message is displayed, check the content, and then tap OK.

3. Make settings for up to five forwarding destinations.

A Select Forward.
B Select Yes. To print the documents automatically while forwarding them, select Yes and Print instead.
CDestination > Add Entry, and then select forwarding destinations from the contacts list. You can specify up
to five forwarding destinations.
D Tap Close to finish selecting forwarding destinations, and then tap Close.
E In Options When Forwarding Failed, select whether to print received documents or save them in the
printer's Inbox when forwarding fails.
F Tap OK.

c Important:
When the Inbox is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from the inbox once they
have been checked. The number of documents that have failed to be forwarded is displayed on the on the
home screen, in addition to other unprocessed jobs.

Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of forwarding faxes when the
forwarding process is complete. As necessary, select Email Notifications, set the processes, and then select the
destination to which you want to send notifications from the contacts list.

4. Select Close to complete the Unconditional Save/Forward Settings.

Note:
❏ This completes making unconditional forwarding settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
❏ If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the forwarding destination, we recommend that
you test if you can send a scanned image to the destination in the scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network
Folder/FTP from the home screen, select the destination, and then start scanning.

Related Information
& “Save/Forward Settings” on page 424

526
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes with Specific Conditions
You can save and/or forward received faxes under set conditions.
Note:
❏ The printer is set to print received faxes by default.
❏ You can also receive and save faxes without any conditions.
“Making Settings to Save and Forward Received Faxes” on page 524

Related Information
& “Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specific Conditions” on page 527
& “Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specified Conditions” on page 529

Making Saving Settings to Receive Faxes with Specific Conditions

You can make settings to save received faxes to the inbox and an external memory device from a specified sender
or at a specified time. Saving a fax in a confidential box or the inbox allows you to confirm the contents of the
received fax by viewing the fax on the printer's LCD screen before the printer prints the fax.
Before you use the feature to save received faxes at a specified time, make sure the printer's Date/Time and Time
Difference settings are correct. Access the menu from Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/Time
Settings.
Note:
❏ As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Config to make saving settings to receive faxes. Select the
Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, select the number of the confidential box, and then
select Edit and make the saving destination settings.
❏ You can also print and/or forward received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Edit screen mentioned above.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax Settings.

2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, and then tap on an
unregistered box under Conditional Save/Forward.

3. Select the Name box and enter the name you want to register.

4. Select the Condition(s) box to make a condition setting.

❏ Sender Fax Number match: If the incoming fax number matches the conditions you selected in this item,
the printer saves and forwards the received faxes.
Select the Sender Fax Number match condition and enter the fax number (max. 20 digits) by selecting the
Fax Number box.
❏ Subaddress(SUB) perfect match: If the subaddress (SUB) is a perfect match, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Subaddress(SUB) perfect match setting and enter the password by selecting the
Subaddress(SUB) box.
❏ Password(SID) perfect match: If the password (SID) is perfectly matched, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Password(SID) perfect match setting and input the password by selecting the Password(SID)
box.

527
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

❏ Receiving Time: The printer saves and forwards received faxes during the specified time period.
Enable the Receiving Time setting and then set the time in Start Time and End Time.

5. Select Save/Forward Destination and then make settings for the target destination, box, and/or an external
memory device.

❏ To save the received faxes to the Inbox or a confidential box:

A Select Save to Fax Box.
B Tap Save to Fax Box to set this to On.
C Select the box in which to save the document.
❏ To save received faxes to an external memory device:
A Insert a memory device into the printer's external interface USB port.
B Select Save to Memory Device.
C Tap Save to Memory Device to set this to On.
D Check the message that is displayed, and then tap Create.
A folder for saving received documents is created in the memory device.

c Important:
Received documents are saved in the printer's memory temporarily before the documents are saved in the
memory device connected to the printer. Because a memory full error disables sending and receiving faxes, keep
the memory device connected to the printer.

Note:
To print received faxes at the same time, tap Print to set this to On.

6. Select Close to complete the Save/Forward Destination Settings.

Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of saving faxes, when saving is
complete. As necessary, select Email Notifications, set the processes, and then select the destination to which you want
to send notifications from the contacts list.

7. Select OK until you return to the Save/Forward Settings screen to complete Conditional Save/Forward.

8. Select the registered box for which you made a condition setting, and then select Enable.
This completes making conditional saving settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.

528
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Related Information
& “Save/Forward Settings” on page 424
& “Viewing Received Faxes Saved in the Printer on the LCD Screen” on page 157

Making Forwarding Settings to Receive Faxes with Specified Conditions

You can make forwarding settings to a destination, an email address, shared folders or another fax machine from a
specified sender or at a specified time. If you make settings to forward received faxes, first add the forwarding
destination to the contacts list. To forward to an email address, you also need to configure the email server settings
beforehand.
“Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483
“Setting a Shared Network Folder” on page 487
“Making Contacts Available” on page 503
Before you use the feature to forward received faxes at a specified time, make sure the printer's Date/Time and
Time Difference settings are correct. Access the menu from Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Date/
Time Settings.
Color documents cannot be forwarded to another fax machine. They are processed as documents that failed to be
forwarded.
Note:
❏ As well as using the printer's control panel, you can use Web Config to make forwarding settings to receive faxes. Select
the Fax tab > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, select the number of the confidential box, and then
select Edit and make the forwarding destination settings.
❏ You can also print and/or save received faxes at the same time. Make the settings on the Edit screen mentioned above.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel, and then select General Settings > Fax Settings.

2. Select Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings > Conditional Save/Forward, and then tap on an
unregistered box under Conditional Save/Forward.

3. Select the Name box and enter the name you want to register.

4. Select the Condition(s) box to make a condition setting.

❏ Sender Fax Number match: If the incoming fax number matches the conditions you selected in this item,
the printer saves and forwards the received faxes.
Select the Sender Fax Number match condition and enter the fax number (max. 20 digits) by selecting the
Fax Number box.
❏ Subaddress(SUB) perfect match: If the subaddress (SUB) is a perfect match, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Subaddress(SUB) perfect match setting and enter the password by selecting the
Subaddress(SUB) box.
❏ Password(SID) perfect match: If the password (SID) is perfectly matched, the printer saves and forwards
the received faxes.
Enable the Password(SID) perfect match setting and input the password by selecting the Password(SID)
box.
❏ Receiving Time: The printer saves and forwards received faxes during the specified time period.
Enable the Receiving Time setting and then set the time in Start Time and End Time.

529
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

5. Select Save/Forward Destination, and then make settings for a forwarding destination.

A Select Forward.
B Select Yes. To print the documents automatically while forwarding them, select Yes and Print instead.
C Select Destination > Add Entry, and then select forwarding destinations from the contacts list. You can
specify a forwarding destination.
D When you have finished selecting forwarding destinations, tap Close.
E Check that the forwarding destination you selected is correct, and then select Close.
F In Options When Forwarding Failed, select whether to print received documents or save them in the
printer's Inbox when forwarding fails.

c Important:
When the Inbox or a confidential box is full, receiving faxes is disabled. You should delete the documents from
the inbox once they have been checked. The number of documents that have failed to be forwarded is displayed
on the on the home screen, in addition to other unprocessed jobs.

6. Select Close to complete the Save/Forward Destination Settings.

Note:
You can set the printer to send emails to people you want to notify about the results of forwarding faxes when the
forwarding process is complete. As necessary, select Email Notifications, set the processes, and then select the
destination to which you want to send notifications from the contacts list.

7. Select OK until you return to the Save/Forward Settings screen to complete Conditional Save/Forward.

8. Select the registered box for which you made a condition setting, and then select Enable.
This is completes making conditional saving settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary.
For details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
Note:
❏ This completes making conditional forwarding settings to receive faxes. You can set Common Settings as necessary. For
details, see the explanation for Common Settings in the Save/Forward Settings menu.
❏ If you have selected a shared folder on a network or an email address as the forwarding destination, we recommend that
you test if you can send a scanned image to the destination in the scan mode. Select Scan > Email, or Scan > Network
Folder/FTP from the home screen, select the destination, and then start scanning.

Related Information
& “Save/Forward Settings” on page 424

530
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Fax Features Available (Fax-Capable Printe…

Making Settings for Blocking Junk Faxes

You can block junk faxes.

1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Basic Settings > Rejection Fax.

3. Set the condition to block junk faxes.

Select Rejection Fax, and then enable the following options.
❏ Blocked Number List: Rejects faxes that are in the Rejection Number List.
❏ Fax Header Blank: Rejects faxes that have blank header information.
❏ Caller not in Contacts: Rejects faxes that have not been added to the contact list.

4. Tap to return to the Rejection Fax screen.

5. If you are using the Blocked Number List, select Edit Blocked Number list, and then edit the list.

Making Settings to Send and Receive Faxes on a Computer

To send and receive faxes on a client computer, FAX Utility must be installed on the computer connected by
network or USB cable.

Enabling Sending Faxes from a Computer

Set up the following using Web Config.

1. Access Web Config, click the Fax tab, and then click Send Settings > Basic.

2. Select Use for the PC to FAX Function.

The default setting value of the PC to FAX Function is Use. To disable sending faxes from any
computer, select Do Not Use.

3. Click OK.

Making Save to Computer Setting to Receive Faxes

You can receive faxes on a computer by using the FAX Utility. Install FAX Utility on the client
computer and make the setting. For details, see Basic Operations in the FAX Utility help (displayed
on the main window).
The setting item below on the printer's control panel is set to Yes, and the faxes received can be saved
on the computer.
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Save/Forward Settings >
Unconditional Save/Forward > Save to Computer

Making Save to Computer Setting to Also Print on the Printer to Receive Faxes
You can make the setting to print received faxes on the printer as well as save them on a computer.

1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

531
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer

2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings.

3. Select Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward > Save to Computer > Yes and
Print.

Making Save to Computer Setting not to Receive Faxes

To set the printer not to save received faxes on the computer, change the settings on the printer.
Note:
You can also change the settings using the FAX Utility. However, if there are any faxes that have been unsaved
to the computer, the feature does not work.

1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings.

3. Select Save/Forward Settings > Unconditional Save/Forward > Save to Computer > No.

Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer

Setting the Control Panel

Setup for the printer's control panel. You can set up as follows.

1. Access Web Config and select the Device Management tab > Control Panel.

2. Set up the following items as necessary.

❏ Language
Select the displayed language on the control panel.
❏ Panel Lock
If you select ON, you cannot select items that require the administrator's authority. To select them, log in to
the printer as the administrator. If the administrator password is not set, the panel lock is disabled.
❏ Operation Timeout
If you select ON, when you log in as the access control user or administrator, you are automatically logged
out and go to the initial screen if there is no activity for a certain period of time.
You can set between 10 seconds and 240 minutes by the second.

Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
❏ Language : Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Language
❏ Panel Lock : Settings > General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin Settings > Lock
Setting
❏ Operation Time Out : Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Operation Time Out (You can specify On or
Off.)

3. Click OK.

532
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer

Power Saving Settings During Inactivity

You can set up the time to shift to the power saving mode or to turn the power off when the printer’s control panel
is not operated for a certain period of time. Set the time depending on your usage environment.

1. Access Web Config and select the Device Management tab > Power Saving.

2. Enter the time for the Sleep Timer to switch to power saving mode when inactivity occurs.
Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sleep Timer

3. Select the turning off time for the Power Off Timer or Power Off If Inactive depending on the location of
purchase. If you use the fax function, set to None or Off depending on the location of purchase.
Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Power Off Timer or Power Off Settings

4. Click OK.

Setting the Sound

Make the sound settings when operating the control panel, printing, faxing and so on.
Note:
You can also set up from the printer’s control panel.
Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Sounds

1. Access Web Config and select the Device Management tab > Sound.

2. Set up the following items as necessary.

❏ Normal Mode
Set the sound when the printer is set to Normal Mode.
❏ Quiet Mode
Set the sound when the printer is set to Quiet Mode.
This is enabled when the one of the following items is enabled.

❏ Printer's control panel:

Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Quiet Mode
Settings > General Settings > Fax Settings > Receive Settings > Print Settings > Quiet Mode
❏ Web Config :
Fax tab > Print Settings > Quiet Mode

3. Click OK.

533
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Making Basic Operation Settings for the Printer

Synchronizing the Date and Time with Time Server

When synchronizing with the time server (NTP server), you can synchronize the time of the printer and the
computer on the network. The time server may be operated within the organization or published on the Internet.
When using the CA certificate or Kerberos authentication, time-related trouble can be prevented by synchronizing
with the time server.

1. Access Web Config and select the Device Management tab > Date and Time > Time Server.

2. Select Use for Use Time Server.

3. Enter the time server address for Time Server Address.

You can use IPv4, IPv6 or FQDN format. Enter 252 characters or less. If you do not specify this, leave it blank.

4. Enter Update Interval (min).

You can set up to 10,080 minutes by the minute.

5. Click OK.
Note:
You can confirm the connection status with the time server on Time Server Status.

Setting the Default Value for Scanning,Copying and Sending Faxes. (User
Default Settings)
You can set the default value for the functions.
You can set the following functions.
❏ Scan to Network Folder/FTP
❏ Scan to Email
❏ Scan to Memory Device
❏ Scan to Cloud
❏ Copy
❏ Fax

1. Access Web Config and select the functions for which you want to set the default value for the Scan/Copy tab
> User Default Settings.
Select the Fax tab > User Default Settings to set the default value for fax.

2. Set each item.

3. Click OK.
If the combination of the value is invalid, it is automatically modified, and then a valid value is set.

534
Administrator Information > Settings to Use the Printer > Problems when Making Settings

Problems when Making Settings

Hints to Solving Problems

❏ Checking the error message
When trouble has occurred, first check whether there are any messages on the printer's control panel or driver
screen. If you have the notification email set when the events occur, you can promptly learn the status.
❏ Network connection report
Diagnose the network and the printer status, and then print the result.
You can find the diagnosed error from the printer side.
❏ Checking the communication status
Check the communication status of server computer or client computer by using the command such as ping
and ipconfig.
❏ Connection test
For checking the connection between the printer to the mail server, perform the connection test from the
printer. Also, check the connection from the client computer to the server to check the communication status.
❏ Initializing the settings
If the settings and communication status show no problem, the problems may be solved by disabling or
initializing the network settings of the printer, and then setting up again.

Cannot Access Web Config

The IP address is not assigned to the printer.
A valid IP address may not be assigned to the printer. Configure the IP address using the printer’s
control panel. You can confirm the current setting information with a network status sheet or from
the printer’s control panel.

Web browser does not support the Encryption Strength for SSL/TLS.
SSL/TLS has the Encryption Strength. You can open Web Config by using a web browser that
supports bulk encryptions as indicated below. Check you are using the a supported browser.
❏ 80bit: AES256/AES128/3DES
❏ 112bit: AES256/AES128/3DES
❏ 128bit: AES256/AES128
❏ 192bit: AES256
❏ 256bit: AES256

CA-signed Certificate is expired.

If there is a problem with the expiration date of the certificate, "The certificate has expired" is
displayed when connecting to Web Config with SSL/TLS communication (https). If the message
appears before its expiration date, make sure that the printer's date is configured correctly.

535
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Introduction of Product Security Features

The common name of the certificate and the printer do not match.
If the common name of the certificate and the printer do not match, the message "The name of the
security certificate does not match···" is displayed when accessing Web Config using SSL/TLS
communication (https). This happens because the following IP addresses do not match.
❏ The printer's IP address entered to common name for creating a Self-signed Certificate or CSR
❏ IP address entered to web browser when running Web Config

For Self-signed Certificate, update the certificate.

For CA-signed Certificate, take the certificate again for the printer.

The proxy server setting of local address is not set to web browser.
When the printer is set to use a proxy server, configure the web browser not to connect to the local
address via the proxy server.
❏ Windows:
Select Control Panel > Network and Internet > Internet Options > Connections > LAN settings
> Proxy server, and then configure not to use the proxy server for LAN (local addresses).
❏ Mac OS:
Select System Preferences > Network > Advanced > Proxies, and then register the local address
for Bypass proxy settings for these Hosts & Domains.
Example:
192.168.1.*: Local address 192.168.1.XXX, subnet mask 255.255.255.0
192.168.*.*: Local address 192.168.XXX.XXX, subnet mask 255.255.0.0

Managing the Printer

Introduction of Product Security Features

This section introduces the security function of the Epson Devices.

Feature name Feature type What to set What to prevent

Setup for the Locks the system settings, An administrator sets a Prevent from illegally reading
administrator such as connection setup for password to the device. and changing the
password network or USB, detail setup information stored in the
You can set or change from
for fax reception/transmission device such as ID, password,
both Web Config and the
or transferring, and the user network settings, and
printer's control panel.
default settings. contacts. Also, reduce a wide
You can also make settings for range of security risks such as
the password policy to set leakage of information for the
password rules. network environment or
security policy.

536
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

Feature name Feature type What to set What to prevent

Setup for access Limits the functions that can Register any user account, The risk of leakage and
control be used on devices, such as and then select the function unauthorized viewing of data
print, scan, copy, and fax for you want to allow, such as can be reduced by
each user. If you log on with a copy and scan. minimizing the numbers of
user account registered in functions in accordance with
You can register up to 10 user
advance, you are allowed to the business content and the
accounts.
use certain functions. role of the user.
In addition, after logging on
from the control panel, you
will be logged off
automatically if there is no
activity for a certain period of
time.

Setup for external Controls the interface, such as Enable or disable the USB ❏ USB port control: Reduces
interface USB port that connects to the port for connecting external the possibility of data
device. devices such as USB memory being taken through
and USB connection with the unauthorized scanning of
computer. confidential documents.
❏ USB connection of
computer: Prevents
unauthorized use of the
device by prohibiting
printing or scanning
without going through
the network.

Setup for processing Automatically erases job data Set whether to automatically By overwriting with a specific
saved data temporarily stored in the delete when the job is pattern, you can prevent
built-in hard disc of the finished. You can also erase all someone from restoring and
device. You can also safely the data if you want to using the data even if the
erase all data stored in the discard the device. hard disc is removed.
hard disc.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Configuring the Administrator Password” on page 537
& “Restricting Available Features” on page 547
& “Disabling the External Interface” on page 549
& “Making Settings for Processing Saved Data” on page 550

Administrator Settings

Configuring the Administrator Password

When you set the administrator password, you can prevent the users from changing system management settings.
You can set and change the administrator password using either Web Config, the printer's control panel, or Epson
Device Admin. When using Epson Device Admin, see the Epson Device Admin guide or help.

537
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Software for Managing Devices on the Network (Epson Device Admin)” on page 407

Configuring the Administrator Password from the Control Panel

You can set the administrator password from the printer's control panel.
Note:
When the password policy is available, enter a password that meets the requirement.
You can make settings for the password policy by selecting Settings > General Settings > System Administration >
Security Settings > Password Policy.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin Settings.

3. Select Admin Password > Register.

4. Enter the new password.

5. Enter the password again.

Note:
You can change or delete the administrator password when you select Change or Reset on the Admin Password screen and
enter the administrator password.

Configuring the Administrator Password from a Computer

You can set the administrator password using Web Config.
Note:
When the password policy is available, enter a password that meets the requirement.
You can make settings for the password policy by selecting the Product Security tab > Password Policy.

1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab > Change Administrator Password.

2. Enter a password to New Password and Confirm New Password.

If you want to change the password to new one, enter a current password.

3. Select OK.
Note:
❏ To set or change the locked menu items, click Log in, and then enter the administrator password.
❏ To delete the administrator password, click Product Security tab > Delete Administrator Password, and then enter
the administrator password.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

538
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

Controlling the Panel Operation

If you set the administrator password and enable the Lock Setting, you can lock the items related to the printer’s
system settings so that users cannot change them.

Enabling the Lock Setting

Enable the Lock Setting for the printer where the password is set.
Specify an administrator's password first.

Enabling the Lock Setting from the Control Panel

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Admin Settings.

3. Select On on Lock Setting.

Check that is displayed on the home screen.

Enabling the Lock Setting from a Computer

1. Access Web Config and click the Log in.

2. Enter the password, and then click OK.

3. Select the Device Management tab > Control Panel.

4. On the Panel Lock, select ON.

5. Click OK.

6. Check that is displayed on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Lock Setting Items for General Settings Menu

This is a list of the Lock Setting items in Settings > General Settings on the control panel.
Some functions can be set enabled or disabled individually.

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Basic Settings -

539
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

General Settings menu Panel Lock

LCD Brightness -

Sounds -

Detect Double Feed ✓*1

Sleep Timer ✓

Wake from Sleep -

Power Off Timer or Power Off Settings ✓

Date/Time Settings ✓

Country/Region ✓

Language ✓*1

Start-up Screen ✓

Edit Home ✓

Wall Paper ✓

Operation Time Out ✓

Color Print Count Alert ✓

Keyboard -

Default Screen(Job/Status) ✓

Screen Effect ✓

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Printer Settings -

540
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Paper Source Settings -

Output: Copy ✓

Output: Fax ✓

Output: Other ✓

Printing Language ✓

Universal Print Settings ✓

PDL Print Configuration ✓

Auto Error Solver ✓

Memory Device ✓

Thick Paper ✓*1

Quiet Mode ✓*1

Optimize Finishing ✓

Print Speed Priority ✓*1

PC Connection via USB ✓

USB I/F Timeout Setting ✓

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Network Settings ✓

541
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Wi-Fi Setup ✓

Wired LAN Setup ✓

Network Status ✓

Wired LAN/Wi-Fi Status ✓*2

Wi-Fi Direct Status ✓*2

Email Server Status ✓*2

Print Status Sheet ✓*2

Connection Check ✓*3

Advanced ✓

Device Name ✓

TCP/IP ✓

Proxy Server ✓

Email Server ✓

IPv6 Address ✓

MS Network Sharing ✓

Link Speed & Duplex ✓

Redirect HTTP to HTTPS ✓

Disable IPsec/IP Filtering ✓

Disable IEEE802.1X ✓

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Web Service Settings ✓

Epson Connect Services ✓

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Fax Settings ✓

542
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

General Settings menu Panel Lock

User Settings ✓

Basic Settings ✓

Send Settings ✓

Receive Settings ✓

Report Settings ✓

Security Settings ✓

Check Fax Connection ✓

Fax Setting Wizard ✓

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Scan Settings ✓

Initial tab ✓

Quick Operation Button(Folder) ✓

Quick Operation Button(Mail) ✓

Confirm Recipient ✓

Document Capture Pro ✓

Email Server ✓

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Storage Settings ✓

Shared Folder Access Control ✓

Shared Folder File Management ✓

Personal Folder File Management ✓

Additional Action ✓

View Options ✓

Search Options ✓

General Settings menu Panel Lock

System Administration ✓

543
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

General Settings menu Panel Lock

Contacts Manager ✓

Add/Edit/Delete ✓*1*4

Frequent ✓*4

Print Contacts ✓

View Options ✓*4

Search Options ✓*4

Print Head Cleaning Settings ✓

Copy Color Sensitivity ✓

Reset Page count ✓

Clear Internal Memory Data ✓

HDD Erase Settings ✓

Security Settings ✓

Restrictions ✓

Access Control ✓

Admin Settings ✓

Admin Password ✓

Lock Setting ✓

Password Policy ✓

Password Encryption ✓

Audit Log ✓

Program Verification on Start Up ✓

Customer Research ✓

Restore Default Settings ✓

Firmware Update ✓

Maintenance/Service Mode ✓

✓ = To be locked.
- = Not to be locked.
*1 : You can enable or disable the lock from General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Restrictions.
*2 : Even though items on the upper level can be locked by administrator lock, you can still access them from the same name
menu of Settings > Printer Status/Print.
*3 : Even though items on the upper level can be locked by administrator lock, you can still access them from Home >

> Description > When you cannot connect to the network.

544
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

*4 : Even though items on the upper level can be locked by administrator lock, you can still access them from the same name
menu of Settings > Contacts Manager.

Related Information
& “Other Lock Setting Items” on page 545
& “Items That Can Be Set Individually” on page 545

Other Lock Setting Items

Besides the General Settings menu, Lock Setting would be enabled to the items below.
❏ Presets
❏ Add New
❏ Delete
❏ Rename
❏ Add or remove to Home screen
❏ Changing user settings

❏ Settings > User Settings.

Related Information
& “Lock Setting Items for General Settings Menu” on page 539
& “Items That Can Be Set Individually” on page 545

Operating Display and Function Setting Individually

For the some target items of the Lock Setting, you can individually set whether they are enabled or disabled.
You can set each user’s availability as necessary, such as registering or changing the contacts, displaying job history,
etc.

1. Select Settings on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Restrictions.

3. Select the item for the function that you want to change the setting of, and then set to On or Off.

Items That Can Be Set Individually

The administrator can permit the items below to display and change settings individually.
❏ Job Log Access : Job/Status > Log
Control the display of the status monitor's job history. Select On to permit the job history to display.
❏ Access to Register/Delete Contacts : Settings > Contacts Manager > Add/Edit/Delete
Control the registering and changing of contacts. Select On to register or change the contacts.
❏ Fax Recent Access : Fax > Recipient > Recent
Control the display of destination when sending and receiving a fax. Select On to display the destination.

545
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Administrator Settings

❏ Fax Transmission Log Access : Fax > Menu > Transmission Log
Control the display of the communication history of a fax. Select On to display the communication history.
❏ Access to Fax Report : Fax > Menu > Fax Report
Control the printing of the fax report. Select On to permit printing.
❏ Access to Print Save History of Scan to Network Folder/FTP : Scan > Network Folder/FTP > Menu > Print
Recently Saved
Control the printing of save history for scan to network folder function. Select On to permit the printing.
❏ Access to Recent of Scan to Email : Scan > Email > Recipient > Recent
Control the display of the history for the scan to mail function. Select On to display the history.
❏ Access to Show Sent History of Scan to Email : Scan > Email > Menu > Show Recently Sent
Control the display of the history of email sending for the scan to mail function. Select On to display the history
of email sending.
❏ Access to Print Sent History of Scan to Email : Scan > Email > Menu > Print Recently Sent
Control the printing of the history of email sending for the scan to mail function. Select On to permit the
printing.
❏ Access to Language : Settings > Language
Control the changing of the language displayed on the control panel. Select On to change the languages.
❏ Access to Thick Paper : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Thick Paper
Control the changing of the settings of the Thick Paper function. Select On to change the settings.
❏ Access to Quiet Mode : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Quiet Mode
Control the changing of settings of the Quiet Mode function. Select On to change the settings.
❏ Access to Print Speed Priority: Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Print Speed Priority
Control the changing of settings of the Print Speed Priority function. Select On to change the settings.
❏ Access to Detect Double Feed: Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Detect Double Feed
Control the changing of settings of the Detect Double Feed function. Select On to change the settings.
❏ Protection of Personal Data :
Control the display of the destination information on speed dial registration. Select On to display the
destination as (***).
❏ Access to Copy Output Tray: Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Output: Copy
Control the changing of where to output when copying. Select On to change the settings.
❏ Accept Power Off:
Control the permission to turn off the printer. Select On to permit it to turn off.

Related Information
& “Lock Setting Items for General Settings Menu” on page 539
& “Other Lock Setting Items” on page 545

Logging on to the Printer as an Administrator

If the administrator password is set to the printer, you need to log on as an administrator to operate the locked
menu items.

546
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Restricting Available Features

Logging on the Printer Using the Control Panel

1. Tap .

2. Tap Administrator.

3. Enter the administrator password, and then tap OK.

is displayed when being authenticated, then you can operate the locked menu items.

Tap to log off.

Note:
When you select On for Settings > General Settings > Basic Settings > Operation Time Out, you log off automatically
after a specific length of time if there is no activity on the control panel.

Logging on to the Printer from a Computer

When you log in to Web Config as an administrator, you can operate items that are set in the Lock Setting.

1. Enter the printer's IP address into a browser to run Web Config.

2. Click Log in.

3. Enter the administrator password in Current password.

4. Click OK.
The locked items and Log out are displayed when being authenticated.
Click Log out to log off.
Note:
When you select ON for the Device Management tab > Control Panel > Operation Timeout, you log off automatically
after a specific length of time if there is no activity on the control panel.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Restricting Available Features

You can register user accounts on the printer, link them with functions, and control functions that users can use.
When enabling access control, the user can use functions such as copy, fax, etc. by entering the password on the
printer’s control panel and logging in to the printer.
The unavailable functions will be grayed out and cannot be selected.
From the computer, when you register the authentication information to the printer driver or scanner driver, you
will be able to print or scan. For details of the driver settings, see the driver's help or manual.

547
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Restricting Available Features

Creating the User Account

Create the user account for access control.

1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > User Settings.

2. Click Add for the number you want to register.

c Important:
When using the printer with the authentication system of Epson or other companies, register the user name of
the restriction setting in number 2 to number 10.
Application software such as the authentication system uses number one, so that the user name is not displayed
on the printer's control panel.

3. Set each item.

❏ User Name :
Enter the name displayed on the user name list between 1 and 14 characters long using alphanumeric
characters.
❏ Password :
Enter a password between 0 and 20 characters long in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). When initializing the password,
leave it blank.
❏ Select the check box to enable or disable each function.
Select the function that you permit to use.

4. Click Apply.
Return to the user setting list after a specific length of time.
Check that the user name you registered on User Name is displayed and changed Add to Edit.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Editing the User Account

Edit the account registered to access control.

1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > User Settings.

2. Click Edit for the number you want to edit.

3. Change each item.

4. Click Apply.
Return to the user setting list after a specific length of time.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

548
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Disabling the External Interface

Deleting the User Account

Delete the account registered to access control.

1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > User Settings.

2. Click Edit for the number you want to delete.

3. Click Delete.

c Important:
When clicking Delete, the user account will be deleted without a confirmation message. Take care when
deleting the account.

Return to the user setting list after a specific length of time.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Enabling Access Control

When enabling access control, only the registered user will be able to use the printer.

1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab > Access Control Settings > Basic.

2. Select Enables Access Control.

If you select Allow printing and scanning without authentication information from a computer, you can
print or scan from the drivers that are not set with the authentication information. Set it when you want to
control the operation only from the printer's control panel and to permit printing and scanning from the
computers.

3. Click OK.
The completion message is displayed after a certain period of time.
Confirm that the icons such as copy and scan are grayed out on the printer's control panel.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Disabling the External Interface

You can disable the interface that is used to connect the device to the printer. Make the restriction settings to
restrict printing and scanning other than via network.
Note:
You can also make the restriction settings on the printer's control panel.
❏ Memory Device : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > Memory Device
❏ PC Connection via USB : Settings > General Settings > Printer Settings > PC Connection via USB

549
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Making Settings for Processing Saved Data

1. Access Web Config and select the Product Security tab > External Interface.

2. Select Disable on the functions you want to set.

Select Enable when you want to cancel controlling.
❏ Memory Device
Prohibit saving the data to external memory via USB port for external device connection.
❏ PC Connection via USB
You can restrict the usage of the USB connection from the computer. If you want to restrict it, select
Disable.

3. Click OK.

4. Check that the disabled port cannot be used.

❏ Memory Device
Confirm that there is no response when connecting a storage device such as USB memory to the external
interface USB port.
❏ PC Connection via USB
If the driver was installed on the computer
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, and then confirm that the printer does not print
and scan.
If the driver was not installed on the computer
Windows:
Open the device manager and keep it, connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, and then
confirm that the device manager's display contents stays unchanged.
Mac OS:
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable, and then confirm that the printer is not listed if you
want to add the printer from Printers & Scanners.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Making Settings for Processing Saved Data

You can make settings for processing data stored in the internal hard disc.
Jobs for printing, copying, and scanning are temporarily saved to the hard disc in order to handle the data for
authenticated printing and the large amount of copying, scanning, printing, etc. Make settings to safely erase this
data.

Sequential Deletion from Hard Disk

When enabled, the target data is erased sequentially when it becomes unnecessary, such as when printing or
scanning is completed. The target to be deleted is data written while this function is enabled.
Because access to the hard disc is necessary, the time to enter power saving mode will be delayed.

550
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Monitoring a Remote Printer

Erase All Memory

Erases all data on the hard disc. You cannot perform other operations or turn off the device during formatting.
❏ High Speed: Erases all data with a dedicated erase command.
❏ Overwrite: Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites other data in all areas to erase all
data.
❏ Triple Overwrite: Erases all data with a dedicated erase command, and overwrites other data in all areas three
times to erase all data.

Making Settings for Sequential Deletion

Note:
You can also make settings from the device's control panel.

1. Access Web Config and select the Device Management > Stored Data.

2. Select ON for Sequential Deletion from Hard Disk.

3. Click OK.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Formatting the Internal Hard Disc

1. Select Settings on the home screen on the printer's control panel.

2. Select General Settings > System Administration > HDD Erase Settings.

3. Select Erase All Memory.

4. Select High Speed, Overwrite, or Triple Overwrite according to the purpose.

5. Select Yes on the confirmation screen.

Monitoring a Remote Printer

Checking Information for a Remote Printer

You can check the following information of the operating printer from Status by using Web Config.
❏ Product Status
Check the status, cloud service, product number, MAC address, etc.
❏ Network Status
Check the information of the network connection status, IP address, DNS server, etc.

551
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Monitoring a Remote Printer

❏ Usage Status
Check the first day of printings, printed pages, printing count for each language, scanning count, etc.
❏ Hardware Status
Check the status of each function of the printer.
❏ Job History
Check the job log for print jobs, transmission jobs, and so on.
❏ Panel Snapshot
Display a screen image snapshot that is displayed on the control panel of the device.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Receiving Email Notifications When Events Occur

About Email Notifications

This is the notification function that, when events such as printing stop and printer error occur, send the email to
the specified address.
You can register up to five destinations and set the notification settings for each destination.
To use this function, you need to set up the mail server before setting up notifications.

Related Information
& “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

Configuring Email Notification

Configure email notification by using Web Config.

1. Access Web Config and select the Device Management tab > Email Notification.

2. Set the subject of email notification.

Select the contents displayed on the subject from the two pull-down menus.
❏ The selected contents are displayed next to Subject.
❏ The same contents cannot be set on left and right.
❏ When the number of characters in Location exceeds 32 bytes, characters exceeding 32 bytes are omitted.

3. Enter the email address for sending the notification email.

Use A-Z a-z 0-9 ! # $ % & ' * + - . /= ? ^ _ { | } ~ @, and enter between 1 and 255 characters.

4. Select the language for the email notifications.

5. Select the check box on the event for which you want to receive a notification.
The number of Notification Settings is linked to the destination number of Email Address Settings.

552
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Monitoring a Remote Printer

Example :
If you want a notification sent to the email address set for number 1 in Email Address Settings when the
printer is out of paper, select the check box column 1 in line Paper out.

6. Click OK.
Confirm that an email notification will be sent by causing an event.
Example : Print by specifying the Paper Source where paper is not set.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Configuring a Mail Server” on page 483

Items for Email Notification

Items Settings and Explanation

Ink cartridge(s) to be replaced Notice when the ink is expended.

Ink low Notice when the ink is nearing expended.

Maintenance box: end of service life Notice when the maintenance box is full.

Maintenance box: nearing end Notice when the maintenance box is nearing full.

Administrator password changed Notice when administrator password has been changed.

Paper out Notice when the paper-out error has occurred in the specified paper source..

Paper Low Notice when the paper-low error has occurred in the specified paper source.

Printing stopped* Notice when the printing is stopped due to paper jam or paper cassette not set.

Printer error Notice when the printer error has occurred.

Scanner error Notice when the scanner error has occurred.

Fax error Notice when the fax error has occurred.

Wi-Fi failure Notice when the error of the wireless LAN interface has occurred.

TPM failure Notice when an error in the TPM chip has occurred.

HDD error Notice when the error of the internal hard disc.

Additional Network failure Notice when an error in the additional network interface card has occurred. This
item is displayed when the additional network interface card is installed.

Related Information
& “Configuring Email Notification” on page 552

553
Administrator Information > Managing the Printer > Backing Up the Settings

Backing Up the Settings

You can export the setting value set from Web Config to the file. You can use it for backing up the contacts, setting
values, replacing the printer, etc.
The exported file cannot be edited because it is exported as a binary file.

Export the settings

Export the setting for the printer.

1. Access Web Config, and then select the Device Management tab > Export and Import Setting Value >
Export.

2. Select the settings that you want to export.

Select the settings you want to export. If you select the parent category, subcategories are also selected.
However, subcategories that cause errors by duplicating within the same network (such as IP addresses and so
on) cannot be selected.

3. Enter a password to encrypt the exported file.

You need the password to import the file. Leave this blank if you do not want to encrypt the file.

4. Click Export.

c Important:
If you want to export the printer’s network settings such as the device name and IPv6 address, select Enable to
select the individual settings of device and select more items. Only use the selected values for the replacement
printer.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Import the settings

Import the exported Web Config file to the printer.

c Important:
When importing values that include individual information such as a printer name or IP address, make sure the
same IP address does not exist on the same network.

1. Access Web Config, and then select the Device Management tab > Export and Import Setting Value >
Import.

2. Select the exported file, and then enter the encrypted password.

3. Click Next.

4. Select the settings that you want to import, and then click Next.

554
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Security Settings and Prevention of Danger

5. Click OK.

The settings are applied to the printer.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Advanced Security Settings

This section explains advanced security features.

Security Settings and Prevention of Danger

When a printer is connected to a network, you can access it from a remote location. In addition, many people can
share the printer, which is helpful in improving operational efficiency and convenience. However, risks such as
illegal access, illegal use, and tampering with data are increased. If you use the printer in an environment where
you can access the Internet, the risks are even higher.
For printers that do not have external access protection, it is possible to read the contacts list that is stored in the
printer from the Internet.
In order to avoid this risk, Epson printers have a variety of security technologies.
Set the printer as necessary according to the environmental conditions that have been built with the customer's
environment information.

Name Feature type What to set What to prevent

Password encryption Encrypts confidential Configure the password Because the encryption key is
information stored in the encryption and back up the not accessible from outside
printer (all passwords, private encryption key. the printer, encrypted
keys for the certificates, hard confidential information can
disk authentication keys). be protected.

Control of protocol Controls the protocols and A protocol or service that is Reducing security risks that
services to be used for applied to features allowed or may occur through
communication between prohibited separately. unintended use by
printers and computers, and preventing users from using
it enables and disables unnecessary functions.
features.

SSL/TLS The communication content Obtain a CA-signed Clearing an identification of

communications is encrypted with SSL/TLS certificate, and then import it the printer by the CA-signed
communications when to the printer. certification prevents
accessing to the Epson server impersonation and
on the Internet from the unauthorized access. In
printer, such as addition, communication
communicating to the contents of SSL/TLS are
computer via web browser, protected, and it prevents the
using Epson Connect, and leakage of contents for
updating firmware. printing data and setup
information.

555
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Making Settings for Password Encryption

Name Feature type What to set What to prevent

IPsec/IP filtering You can set to allow severing Create a basic policy and Protect unauthorized access,
and cutting off of data that is individual policy to set the and tampering and
from a certain client or is a client or type of data that can interception of
particular type. Since IPsec access the printer. communication data to the
protects the data by IP packet printer.
unit (encryption and
authentication), you can
safely communicate
unsecured protocol.

IEEE802.1X Only allows authenticated Authentication setting to the Protect unauthorized access
users to connect to the RADIUS server and use to the printer.
network. Allows only a (authentication sever).
permitted user to use the
printer.

S/MIME Encrypts emails sent from the Import a CA-signed Encryption prevents
printer or attaches digital certificate, update a self- information from leaking
signatures to the emails. This signed certificate, and when third parties attempt to
feature is available for Scan to configure a digital certificate view the content of the email.
Email, Box to Email, and Fax for the mail destination. Also, Also, detect sender
to Email. make the S/MIME basic impersonation and email
settings. tampering by attaching a
digital signature to the email.

Related Information
& “Making Settings for Password Encryption” on page 556
& “Controlling Using Protocols” on page 558
& “SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer” on page 569
& “Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 571
& “Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network” on page 582
& “S/MIME Settings” on page 585

Security Feature Settings

When setting IPsec/IP filtering or IEEE802.1X, it is recommended that you access Web Config using SSL/TLS to
communicate settings information in order to reduce security risks such as tampering or interception.
Make sure you configure the administrator password before setting IPsec/IP filtering or IEEE802.1X.
Also, you can use Web Config by connecting the printer directly to the computer using an Ethernet cable, and then
entering the IP address into a web browser. The printer can be connected in a secure environment after the security
settings have been completed.

Making Settings for Password Encryption

Password encryption allows you to encrypt confidential information (all passwords, certificate private keys, hard
disk authentication keys) stored in the printer. The encryption key for decrypting encrypted confidential
information is stored in the TPM (Trusted Platform Module) chip. Since the TPM chip is not accessible from
outside the printer, you can protect encrypted confidential information without sharing the encryption key.

556
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Making Settings for Password Encryption

c Important:
If the TPM chip fails and the encryption key cannot be used, you cannot restore the confidential information in the
printer and use the printer. Therefore, make sure to back up your encryption key to a USB memory.

Encrypting the Password

When you want to encrypt the password, you need to back up the encryption key. Prepare a USB memory for
backup in advance. You need 1 MB or more free space in the USB memory.

c Important:
When replacing the TPM chip, you need a USB memory that contains the encryption key. Store this in a safe place.

1. Select Settings on the home screen.

2. Select General Settings > System Administration > Security Settings > Password Encryption.

3. Select On for Password Encryption.

When a message is displayed, check the content, and then tap OK.

4. Select Proceed to Backup.

The encryption key backup screen is displayed.

5. Connect the USB memory to the printer's external interface USB port.

6. Tap Start Backup.

Writing to the USB memory starts. If an encryption key has already been stored in the USB memory, it is
overwritten.

7. When a backup completion message is displayed, tap Close.

8. Press the P button to turn off the printer.

9. Press the P button to turn on the printer again.

The password is encrypted.
The printer may take longer to start than usual.

Restoring the Password Encryption Key

If the TPM chip fails, you can restore the encryption key to the replaced TPM chip by using its backup. Follow the
steps below to replace the TPM chip while the password is encrypted.

1. Press the P button to turn on the printer.

The printer's control panel displays a message that the TPM has been replaced.

557
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Controlling Using Protocols

2. Select Restore from Backup.

When the administrator password has been set, enter the password and tap OK.

3. Connect the USB memory that contains the encryption key to the printer's external interface USB port.

4. Tap Restore from Backup.

The encryption key is restored to the TPM chip.

5. Check the message, and then tap OK.

The printer restarts.

Controlling Using Protocols

You can print using a variety of pathways and protocols.
If you are using a multi-function printer, you can use network scanning and PC-FAX from an unspecified number
of network computers.
You can lower unintended security risks by restricting printing from specific pathways or by controlling the
available functions.

Controlling protocols
Configure the protocol settings.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > Protocol.

2. Configure each item.

3. Click Next.

4. Click OK.
The settings are applied to the printer.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Protocols you can Enable or Disable” on page 558
& “Protocol Setting Items” on page 559

Protocols you can Enable or Disable

Protocol Description

Bonjour Settings You can specify whether to use Bonjour. Bonjour is used to search for devices, print, and so
on.

SLP Settings You can enable or disable the SLP function. SLP is used for push scanning and network
searching in EpsonNet Config.

558
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Controlling Using Protocols

Protocol Description

WSD Settings You can enable or disable the WSD function. When this is enabled, you can add WSD devices,
and print from the WSD port.

LLTD Settings You can enable or disable the LLTD function. When this is enabled, it is displayed on the
Windows network map.

LLMNR Settings You can enable or disable the LLMNR function. When this is enabled, you can use name
resolution without NetBIOS even if you cannot use DNS.

LPR Settings You can specify whether or not to allow LPR printing. When this is enabled, you can print from
the LPR port.

RAW(Port9100) Settings You can specify whether or not to allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100). When this is
enabled, you can print from the RAW port (Port 9100).

RAW(Custom Port) Settings You can specify whether or not to allow printing from the RAW port (custom port). When this
is enabled, you can print from the RAW port (custom port).

IPP Settings You can specify whether or not to allow printing from IPP. When this is enabled, you can print
over the Internet.

FTP Settings You can specify whether or not to allow FTP printing. When this is enabled, you can print over
an FTP server.

SNMPv1/v2c Settings You can specify whether or not to enable SNMPv1/v2c. This is used to set up devices,
monitoring, and so on.

SNMPv3 Settings You can specify whether or not to enable SNMPv3. This is used to set up encrypted devices,
monitoring, etc.

Related Information
& “Controlling protocols” on page 558
& “Protocol Setting Items” on page 559

Protocol Setting Items

Bonjour Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Use Bonjour Select this to search for or use devices through Bonjour.

Bonjour Name Displays the Bonjour name.

Bonjour Service Name Displays the Bonjour service name.

Location Displays the Bonjour location name.

Top Priority Protocol Select the top priority protocol for Bonjour print.

Wide-Area Bonjour Set whether to use Wide-Area Bonjour.

SLP Settings

559
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Controlling Using Protocols

Items Setting value and Description

Enable SLP Select this to enable the SLP function.

This is used such as network searching in EpsonNet Config.

WSD Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Enable WSD Select this to enable adding devices using WSD, and print
and scan from the WSD port.

Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD printing
between 3 to 3,600 seconds.

Scanning Timeout (sec) Enter the communication timeout value for WSD scanning
between 3 to 3,600 seconds.

Device Name Displays the WSD device name.

Location Displays the WSD location name.

LLTD Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Enable LLTD Select this to enable LLTD. The printer is displayed in the
Windows network map.

Device Name Displays the LLTD device name.

LLMNR Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Enable LLMNR Select this to enable LLMNR. You can use name resolution
without NetBIOS even if you cannot use DNS.

LPR Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Allow LPR Port Printing Select to allow printing from the LPR port.

Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for LPR printing between 0 to 3,600
seconds. If you do not want to timeout, enter 0.

RAW(Port9100) Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Allow RAW(Port9100) Printing Select to allow printing from the RAW port (Port 9100).

Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW (Port 9100) printing be-
tween 0 to 3,600 seconds. If you do not want to timeout, en-
ter 0.

560
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Controlling Using Protocols

RAW(Custom Port) Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Allow RAW(Custom Port) Printing Select to allow printing from the RAW port (custom port).

Port Number Enter the port number for RAW printing between 1024 and
65535 (except for 9100, 1865, 2968).

Printing Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for RAW (custom port) printing be-
tween 0 to 3,600 seconds. If you do not want to timeout, en-
ter 0.

IPP Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Enable IPP Select to enable IPP communication. Only printers that sup-
port IPP are displayed.

Allow Non-secure Communication Select Allowed to allow the printer to communicate without
any security measures (IPP).

Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for IPP printing between 0 to 3,600
seconds.

URL(Network) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the printer is con-
nected to the network. The URL is a combined value of the
printer’s IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name.

URL(Wi-Fi Direct) Displays IPP URLs (http and https) when the printer is con-
nected by Wi-Fi Direct. The URL is a combined value of the
printer’s IP address, Port number, and IPP printer name.

Printer Name Displays the IPP printer name.

Location Displays the IPP location.

FTP Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Enable FTP Server Select to enable FTP printing. Only printers that support FTP
printing are displayed.

Communication Timeout (sec) Enter the timeout value for FTP communication between 0
to 3,600 seconds. If you do not want to timeout, enter 0.

SNMPv1/v2c Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Enable SNMPv1/v2c Select to enable SNMPv1/v2c.

Access Authority Set the access authority when SNMPv1/v2c is enabled. Se-
lect Read Only or Read/Write.

Community Name (Read Only) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

561
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using a Digital Certificate

Items Setting value and Description

Community Name (Read/Write) Enter 0 to 32 ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

SNMPv3 Settings

Items Setting value and Description

Enable SNMPv3 SNMPv3 is enabled when the box is checked.

User Name Enter between 1 and 32 characters using 1 byte characters.

Authentication Settings

Algorithm Select an algorithm for an authentication for SNMPv3.

Password Enter the password for an authentication for SNMPv3.

Enter between 8 and 32 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). If
you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Confirm Password Enter the password you configured for confirmation.

Encryption Settings

Algorithm Select an algorithm for an encryption for SNMPv3.

Password Enter the password for an encryption for SNMPv3.

Enter between 8 and 32 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). If
you do not specify this, leave it blank.

Confirm Password Enter the password you configured for confirmation.

Context Name Enter within 32 characters or less in Unicode (UTF-8). If you

do not specify this, leave it blank. The number of characters
that can be entered varies depending on the language.

Related Information
& “Controlling protocols” on page 558
& “Protocols you can Enable or Disable” on page 558

Using a Digital Certificate

About Digital Certification

❏ CA-signed Certificate
This is a certificate signed by the CA (Certificate Authority.) You can obtain it to apply to the Certificate
Authority. This certificate certifies the existence of the printer is and used for SSL/TLS communication so that
you can ensure the safety of data communication.
When it is used for SSL/TLS communication, it is used as a server certificate.
When it is set to IPsec/IP Filtering, IEEE802.1x communication, or S/MIME, it is used as a client certificate.

562
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using a Digital Certificate

❏ CA Certificate
This is a certificate that is in chain of the CA-signed Certificate, also called the intermediate CA certificate. It is
used by the web browser to validate the path of the printer's certificate when accessing the server of the other
party or Web Config.
For the CA Certificate, set when to validate the path of server certificate accessing from the printer. For the
printer, set to certify the path of the CA-signed Certificate for SSL/TLS connection.
You can obtain the CA certificate of the printer from the Certification Authority where the CA certificate is
issued.
Also, you can obtain the CA certificate used to validate the server of the other party from the Certification
Authority that issued the CA-signed Certificate of the other server.
❏ Self-signed Certificate
This is a certificate that the printer signs and issues itself. It is also called the root certificate. Because the issuer
certifies itself, it is not reliable and cannot prevent impersonation.

❏ When using for SSL/TLS communication

Use it when making the security setting and performing simple SSL/TLS communication without the CA-
signed Certificate.
If you use this certificate for an SSL/TLS communication, a security alert may be displayed on a web browser
because the certificate is not registered on a web browser.
❏ When setting to S/MIME
You can also use a self-signed certificate instead of a CA-signed certificate. You can use S/MIME functions
without the cost of obtaining a CA-signed certificate, for example in a network environment that does not
have an external connection (Internet connection), such as an enterprise network. However, it is
recommended to use a CA-signed certificate when using external connections because a self-signed
certificate is low-security.

Related Information
& “Configuring a CA-signed Certificate” on page 563
& “Updating a Self-signed Certificate” on page 567
& “Configuring a CA Certificate” on page 569

Configuring a CA-signed Certificate

Obtaining a CA-signed Certificate

To obtain a CA-signed certificate, create a CSR (Certificate Signing Request) and apply it to certificate authority.
You can create a CSR using Web Config and a computer.
Follow the steps to create a CSR and obtain a CA-signed certificate using Web Config. When creating a CSR using
Web Config, a certificate is the PEM/DER format.

1. Access Web Config, and then select the Network Security tab.

2. Select one of the following.

❏ SSL/TLS > Certificate
❏ IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certificate
❏ IEEE802.1X > Client Certificate

563
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using a Digital Certificate

❏ S/MIME > Client Certificate

Whatever you choose, you can obtain the same certificate and use it in common.

3. Click Generate of CSR.

A CSR creating page is opened.

4. Enter a value for each item.

Note:
Available key length and abbreviations vary by a certificate authority. Create a request according to rules of each
certificate authority.

5. Click OK.
A completion message is displayed.

6. Select the Network Security tab.

7. Select one of the following.

❏ SSL/TLS > Certificate
❏ IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certificate
❏ IEEE802.1X > Client Certificate
❏ S/MIME > Client Certificate

8. Click one of the download buttons of CSR according to a specified format by each certificate authority to
download a CSR to a computer.

c Important:
Do not generate a CSR again. If you do so, you may not be able to import an issued CA-signed Certificate.

9. Send the CSR to a certificate authority and obtain a CA-signed Certificate.

Follow the rules of each certificate authority on sending method and form.

10. Save the issued CA-signed Certificate to a computer connected to the printer.
Obtaining a CA-signed Certificate is complete when you save a certificate to a destination.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

CSR Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

Key Length Select a key length for a CSR.

564
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using a Digital Certificate

Items Settings and Explanation

Common Name You can enter between 1 and 128 characters. If this is an IP address, it should be a
static IP address. You can enter 1 to 5 IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, host names,
FQDNs by separating them with commas.
The first element is stored to the common name, and other elements are stored to
the alias field of the certificate subject.
Example:
Printer's IP address : 192.0.2.123, Printer name : EPSONA1B2C3
Common Name : EPSONA1B2C3,EPSONA1B2C3.local,192.0.2.123

Organization/ Organizational Unit/ You can enter between 0 and 64 characters in ASCII (0x20-0x7E). You can divide
Locality/ State/Province distinguished names with commas.

Country Enter a country code in two-digit number specified by ISO-3166.

Sender's Email Address You can enter the sender's email address for the mail server setting. Enter the
same email address as the Sender's Email Address for the Network tab > Email
Server > Basic.
When creating a CSR by selecting the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client
Certificate, this setting is not required because the sender's email address for the
mail server setting is set automatically. Configure the sender's email address for
the mail server settings in advance.

Related Information
& “Obtaining a CA-signed Certificate” on page 563

Importing a CA-signed Certificate

Import the obtained CA-signed Certificate to the printer.

c Important:
❏ Make sure that the printer’s date and time is set correctly. Certificate may be invalid.
❏ If you obtain a certificate using a CSR created from Web Config, you can import a certificate one time.
❏ When you import a CA-signed Certificate by selecting the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client
Certificate, you cannot change Sender's Email Address on the Network tab > Email Server > Basic. If you
want to change Sender's Email Address, change all signature settings to Do not add signature by selecting the
Network Security tab > S/MIME > Basic, and then delete the imported CA-signed Certificate.

1. Access Web Config, and then select the Network Security tab.

2. Select one of the following.

❏ SSL/TLS > Certificate
❏ IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certificate
❏ IEEE802.1X > Client Certificate
❏ S/MIME > Client Certificate

3. Click Import.
A certificate importing page is opened.

565
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using a Digital Certificate

4. Enter a value for each item. Set CA Certificate 1 and CA Certificate 2 when verifying the path of the
certificate on the web browser that accesses the printer.
Depending on where you create a CSR and the file format of the certificate, required settings may vary. Enter
values to required items according to the following.
❏ A certificate of the PEM/DER format obtained from Web Config
❏ Private Key: Do not configure because the printer contains a private key.
❏ Password: Do not configure.
❏ CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional

❏ A certificate of the PEM/DER format obtained from a computer

❏ Private Key: You need to set.
❏ Password: Do not configure.
❏ CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Optional

❏ A certificate of the PKCS#12 format obtained from a computer

❏ Private Key: Do not configure.

❏ Password: Optional
❏ CA Certificate 1/CA Certificate 2: Do not configure.

5. Click OK.
A completion message is displayed.
Note:
Click Confirm to verify the certificate information.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Deleting a CA-signed Certificate” on page 567
& “Configuring S/MIME Basic Settings” on page 585

CA-signed Certificate Importing Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

Server Certificate or Client Certificate Select a certificate’s format.

For SSL/TLS connection, the Server Certificate is displayed.
For IPsec/IP Filtering, IEEE802.1x, or S/MIME, the Client Certificate is displayed.

Private Key If you obtain a certificate of the PEM/DER format by using a CSR created from a
computer, specify a private key file that is match a certificate.

Password If the file format is Certificate with Private Key (PKCS#12), enter the password
for encrypting the private key that is set when you obtain the certificate.

CA Certificate 1 If your certificate’s format is Certificate (PEM/DER), import a certificate of a

certificate authority that issues a CA-signed Certificate used as server certificate.
Specify a file if you need.

566
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using a Digital Certificate

Items Settings and Explanation

CA Certificate 2 If your certificate’s format is Certificate (PEM/DER), import a certificate of a

certificate authority that issues CA Certificate 1. Specify a file if you need.

Related Information
& “Importing a CA-signed Certificate” on page 565

Deleting a CA-signed Certificate

You can delete an imported certificate when the certificate has expired or when an encrypted connection is no
longer necessary.

c Important:
If you obtain a certificate using a CSR created from Web Config, you cannot import a deleted certificate again. In
this case, create a CSR and obtain a certificate again.

1. Access Web Config, and then select the Network Security tab.

2. Select one of the following.

❏ SSL/TLS > Certificate
❏ IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certificate
❏ IEEE802.1X > Client Certificate
❏ S/MIME > Client Certificate

3. Click Delete for CA-signed Certificate or Client Certificate.

4. Confirm that you want to delete the certificate in the message displayed.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Configuring a Self-signed Certificate

Updating a Self-signed Certificate

Because the Self-signed Certificate is issued by the printer, you can update it when it has expired or when the
content described changes.
A self-signed certificate for SSL/TLS and one for S/MIME are issued separately. Update each certificate as
necessary.

567
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using a Digital Certificate

c Important:
When you update a self-signed certificate by selecting the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client Certificate,
you cannot change Sender's Email Address on the Network tab > Email Server > Basic. If you want to change
Sender's Email Address, change all signature settings to Do not add signature by selecting the Network Security
tab > S/MIME > Basic, and then delete the self-signed certificate for S/MIME.

1. Access Web Config, and then select the Network Security tab. Next, select SSL/TLS > Certificate or S/MIME
> Client Certificate.

2. Click Update.

3. Enter Common Name.

You can enter up to 5 IPv4 addresses, IPv6 addresses, host names, FQDNs between 1 to 128 characters and
separating them with commas. The first parameter is stored to the common name, and the others are stored to
the alias field for the subject of the certificate.
Example:
Printer's IP address : 192.0.2.123, Printer name : EPSONA1B2C3
Common name : EPSONA1B2C3,EPSONA1B2C3.local,192.0.2.123

4. Specify a validity period for the certificate.

5. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

6. Click OK.
The printer is updated.
Note:
You can check the certificate information by clicking Confirm on the Network Security tab > SSL/TLS > Certificate > Self-
signed Certificate or S/MIME > Client Certificate > Self-signed Certificate.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Deleting a Self-signed Certificate for S/MIME” on page 568
& “Configuring S/MIME Basic Settings” on page 585

Deleting a Self-signed Certificate for S/MIME

You can delete the self-signed certificate for S/MIME when it is no longer necessary.
Even if you delete it, the self-signed certificate for SSL/TLS is not deleted.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client Certificate.

2. Click Delete for Self-signed Certificate.

3. Confirm that you want to delete the certificate in the message displayed.

568
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Configuring a CA Certificate
When you set the CA Certificate, you can validate the path to the CA certificate of the server that the printer
accesses. This can prevent impersonation.
You can obtain the CA Certificate from the Certification Authority where the CA-signed Certificate is issued.

Importing a CA Certificate
Import the CA Certificate to the printer.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > CA Certificate.

2. Click Import.

3. Specify the CA Certificate you want to import.

4. Click OK.

When importing is complete, you are returned to the CA Certificate screen, and the imported CA Certificate is
displayed.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Deleting a CA Certificate
You can delete the imported CA Certificate.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > CA Certificate.

2. Click Delete next to the CA Certificate that you want to delete.

3. Confirm that you want to delete the certificate in the message displayed.

4. Click Reboot Network, and then check that the deleted CA Certificate is not listed on the updated screen.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer

When the server certificate is set using SSL/TLS (Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security) communication
to the printer, you can encrypt the communication path between computers. Do this if you want to prevent remote
and unauthorized access.

569
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > SSL/TLS Communication with the Printer

Configuring Basic SSL/TLS Settings

If the printer supports the HTTPS server feature, you can use an SSL/TLS communication to encrypt
communications. You can configure and manage the printer using Web Config while ensuring security.
Configure encryption strength and redirect feature.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab > SSL/TLS > Basic.

2. Select a value for each item.

❏ Encryption Strength
Select the level of encryption strength.
❏ Redirect HTTP to HTTPS
Redirect to HTTPS when HTTP is accessed.

3. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Configuring a Server Certificate for the Printer

1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab > SSL/TLS > Certificate.

2. Specify a certificate to use on Server Certificate.

❏ Self-signed Certificate
A self-signed certificate has been generated by the printer. If you do not obtain a CA-signed certificate,
select this.
❏ CA-signed Certificate
If you obtain and import a CA-signed certificate in advance, you can specify this.

3. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Configuring a CA-signed Certificate” on page 563
& “Updating a Self-signed Certificate” on page 567

570
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

About IPsec/IP Filtering

You can filter traffic based on IP addresses, services, and port by using IPsec/IP Filtering function. By combining of
the filtering, you can configure the printer to accept or block specified clients and specified data. Additionally, you
can improve security level by using an IPsec.
Note:
Computers that run Windows Vista or later or Windows Server 2008 or later support IPsec.

Configuring Default Policy

To filter traffic, configure the default policy. The default policy applies to every user or group connecting to the
printer. For more fine-grained control over users and groups of users, configure group policies.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic.

2. Enter a value for each item.

3. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Default Policy Setting Items

Default Policy

Items Settings and Explanation

IPsec/IP Filtering You can enable or disable an IPsec/IP Filtering feature.

❏ Access Control
Configure a control method for traffic of IP packets.

Items Settings and Explanation

Permit Access Select this to permit configured IP packets to pass through.

Refuse Access Select this to refuse configured IP packets to pass through.

IPsec Select this to permit configured IPsec packets to pass through.

571
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

❏ IKE Version
Select IKEv1 or IKEv2 for IKE Version. Select one of them according to the device that the printer is connected
to.
❏ IKEv1
The following items are displayed when you select IKEv1 for IKE Version.

Items Settings and Explanation

Authentication Method To select Certificate, you need to obtain and import a CA-signed certificate in advance.

Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared key
between 1 and 127 characters.

Confirm Pre-Shared Key Enter the key you configured for confirmation.

❏ IKEv2
The following items are displayed when you select IKEv2 for IKE Version.

Items Settings and Explanation

Local Authentication Method To select Certificate, you need to obtain and import a CA-signed certificate in
advance.

ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the printer.

ID Enter the printer's ID that matches the type of ID.

You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the first character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.

Confirm Pre-Shared Enter the key you configured for confirmation.

Key

572
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

Items Settings and Explanation

Remote Authentication Method To select Certificate, you need to obtain and import a CA-signed certificate in
advance.

ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the device that you want to authenticate.

ID Enter the printer's ID that matches to the type of ID.

You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the first character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.

Confirm Pre-Shared Enter the key you configured for confirmation.

Key

❏ Encapsulation
If you select IPsec for Access Control, you need to configure an encapsulation mode.

Items Settings and Explanation

Transport Mode If you only use the printer on the same LAN, select this. IP packets of layer 4 or later are
encrypted.

Tunnel Mode If you use the printer on the Internet-capable network such as IPsec-VPN, select this
option. The header and data of the IP packets are encrypted.
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode): If you select Tunnel Mode for Encapsulation, enter a
gateway address between 1 and 39 characters.

❏ Security Protocol
If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option.

Items Settings and Explanation

ESP Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data, and encrypt data.

AH Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data. Even if encrypting data is
prohibited, you can use IPsec.

573
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

❏ Algorithm Settings
It is recommended that you select Any for all settings or select an item other than Any for each setting. If you
select Any for some of the settings and select an item other than Any for the other settings, the device may not
communicate depending on the other device that you want to authenticate.

Items Settings and Explanation

IKE Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for IKE.

The items vary depending on the version of IKE.

Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for IKE.

Key Exchange Select the key exchange algorithm for IKE.

The items vary depending on the version of IKE.

ESP Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for ESP.

This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.

Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for ESP.

This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.

AH Authentication Select the encryption algorithm for AH.

This is available when AH is selected for Security Protocol.

Related Information
& “Configuring Default Policy” on page 571

Configuring Group Policy

A group policy is one or more rules applied to a user or user group. The printer controls IP packets that match with
configured policies. IP packets are authenticated in the order of a group policy 1 to 10 then a default policy.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic.

2. Click a numbered tab you want to configure.

3. Enter a value for each item.

4. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

5. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

574
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

Group Policy Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

Enable this Group Policy You can enable or disable a group policy.

Access Control
Configure a control method for traffic of IP packets.

Items Settings and Explanation

Permit Access Select this to permit configured IP packets to pass through.

Refuse Access Select this to refuse configured IP packets to pass through.

IPsec Select this to permit configured IPsec packets to pass through.

Local Address(Printer)
Select an IPv4 address or IPv6 address that matches your network environment. If an IP address is assigned
automatically, you can select Use auto-obtained IPv4 address.
Note:
If an IPv6 address is assigned automatically, the connection may be unavailable. Configure a static IPv6 address.

Remote Address(Host)
Enter a device's IP address to control access. The IP address must be 43 characters or less. If you do not enter an IP
address, all addresses are controlled.
Note:
If an IP address is assigned automatically (e.g. assigned by DHCP), the connection may be unavailable. Configure a static IP
address.

Method of Choosing Port

Select a method to specify ports.
❏ Service Name
If you select Service Name for Method of Choosing Port, select an option.
❏ Transport Protocol
If you select Port Number for Method of Choosing Port, you need to configure an encapsulation mode.

Items Settings and Explanation

Any Protocol Select this to control all protocol types.

TCP Select this to control data for unicast.

UDP Select this to control data for broadcast and multicast.

ICMPv4 Select this to control ping command.

575
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

❏ Local Port
If you select Port Number for Method of Choosing Port and if you select TCP or UDP for Transport
Protocol, enter port numbers to control receiving packets, separating them with commas. You can enter 10 port
numbers at the maximum.
Example: 20,80,119,5220
If you do not enter a port number, all ports are controlled.
❏ Remote Port
If you select Port Number for Method of Choosing Port and if you select TCP or UDP for Transport
Protocol, enter port numbers to control sending packets, separating them with commas. You can enter 10 port
numbers at the maximum.
Example: 25,80,143,5220
If you do not enter a port number, all ports are controlled.

IKE Version
Select IKEv1 or IKEv2 for IKE Version. Select one of them according to the device that the printer is connected to.
❏ IKEv1
The following items are displayed when you select IKEv1 for IKE Version.

Items Settings and Explanation

Authentication Method If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option. Used certificate is common with a
default policy.

Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared key
between 1 and 127 characters.

Confirm Pre-Shared Key Enter the key you configured for confirmation.

576
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

❏ IKEv2
The following items are displayed when you select IKEv2 for IKE Version.

Items Settings and Explanation

Local Authentication Method If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option. Used certificate is
common with a default policy.

ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the printer.

ID Enter the printer's ID that matches the type of ID.

You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the first character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.

Confirm Pre-Shared Enter the key you configured for confirmation.

Key

Remote Authentication Method If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option. Used certificate is
common with a default policy.

ID Type If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, select the type of
ID for the device that you want to authenticate.

ID Enter the printer's ID that matches to the type of ID.

You cannot use "@", "#", and "=" for the first character.
Distinguished Name : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.
You need to include "=".
IP Address : Enter IPv4 or IPv6 format.
FQDN : Enter a combination of between 1 and 255 characters using A-Z, a-z,
0-9, "-", and period (.).
Email Address : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. You
need to include "@".
Key ID : Enter 1 to 255 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

Pre-Shared Key If you select Pre-Shared Key for Authentication Method, enter a pre-shared
key between 1 and 127 characters.

Confirm Pre-Shared Enter the key you configured for confirmation.

Key

Encapsulation
If you select IPsec for Access Control, you need to configure an encapsulation mode.

577
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

Items Settings and Explanation

Transport Mode If you only use the printer on the same LAN, select this. IP packets of layer 4 or later are
encrypted.

Tunnel Mode If you use the printer on the Internet-capable network such as IPsec-VPN, select this
option. The header and data of the IP packets are encrypted.
Remote Gateway(Tunnel Mode): If you select Tunnel Mode for Encapsulation, enter a
gateway address between 1 and 39 characters.

Security Protocol
If you select IPsec for Access Control, select an option.

Items Settings and Explanation

ESP Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data, and encrypt data.

AH Select this to ensure the integrity of an authentication and data. Even if encrypting data is
prohibited, you can use IPsec.

Algorithm Settings
It is recommended that you select Any for all settings or select an item other than Any for each setting. If you
select Any for some of the settings and select an item other than Any for the other settings, the device may not
communicate depending on the other device that you want to authenticate.

Items Settings and Explanation

IKE Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for IKE.

The items vary depending on the version of IKE.

Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for IKE.

Key Exchange Select the key exchange algorithm for IKE.

The items vary depending on the version of IKE.

ESP Encryption Select the encryption algorithm for ESP.

This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.

Authentication Select the authentication algorithm for ESP.

This is available when ESP is selected for Security Protocol.

AH Authentication Select the encryption algorithm for AH.

This is available when AH is selected for Security Protocol.

Related Information
& “Configuring Group Policy” on page 574
& “Combination of Local Address(Printer) and Remote Address(Host) on Group Policy” on page 579
& “References of Service Name on Group Policy” on page 579

578
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

Combination of Local Address(Printer) and Remote Address(Host) on Group Policy

Setting of Local Address(Printer)

IPv4 IPv6*2 Any addresses*3

Setting of Remote IPv4*1 ✓ – ✓

Address(Host)
IPv6*1*2 – ✓ ✓

Blank ✓ ✓ ✓

*1If IPsec is selected for Access Control, you cannot specify in a prefix length.
*2If IPsec is selected for Access Control, you can select a link-local address (fe80::) but group policy will be disabled.
*3Except IPv6 link local addresses.

References of Service Name on Group Policy

Note:
Unavailable services are displayed but cannot be selected.

Service Name Protocol type Local port Remote port Features controlled
number number

Any – – – All services

ENPC UDP 3289 Any port Searching for a printer from

applications such as Epson Device
Admin, a printer driver and the a
scanner driver

SNMP UDP 161 Any port Acquiring and configuring of MIB from
applications such as Epson Device
Admin, the Epson printer driver and
the Epson scanner driver

LPR TCP 515 Any port Forwarding LPR data

RAW (Port9100) TCP 9100 Any port Forwarding RAW data

IPP/IPPS TCP 631 Any port Forwarding data of IPP/IPPS printing

WSD TCP Any port 5357 Controlling WSD

WS-Discovery UDP 3702 Any port Searching for a printer from WSD

Network Scan TCP 1865 Any port Forwarding scan data from the
scanning software

Network Push TCP Any port 2968 Acquiring job information of push
Scan scanning from the scanning software

Network Push UDP 2968 Any port Searching for a computer when push
Scan Discovery scanning from the scanning software
is executed

FTP Data (Local) TCP 20 Any port FTP server (forwarding data of FTP
printing)

579
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

Service Name Protocol type Local port Remote port Features controlled
number number

FTP Control TCP 21 Any port FTP server (controlling FTP printing)
(Local)

FTP Data TCP Any port 20 FTP client (forwarding scan data and
(Remote) received fax data)
However this can control only an FTP
server that uses remote port number
20.

FTP Control TCP Any port 21 FTP client (controlling to forward scan
(Remote) data and received fax data)

CIFS (Local) TCP 445 Any port CIFS server (Sharing a network folder)

CIFS (Remote) TCP Any port 445 CIFS client (forwarding scan data and
received fax data to a folder)

NetBIOS Name UDP 137 Any port CIFS server (Sharing a network folder)
Service (Local)

NetBIOS UDP 138 Any port

Datagram
Service (Local)

NetBIOS Session TCP 139 Any port

Service (Local)

NetBIOS Name UDP Any port 137 CIFS client (forwarding scan data and
Service (Remote) received fax data to a folder)

NetBIOS UDP Any port 138

Datagram
Service (Remote)

NetBIOS Session TCP Any port 139

Service (Remote)

HTTP (Local) TCP 80 Any port HTTP(S) server (forwarding data of

Web Config and WSD)
HTTPS (Local) TCP 443 Any port

HTTP (Remote) TCP Any port 80 HTTP(S) client (communicating

between Epson Connect, firmware
HTTPS (Remote) TCP Any port 443 updating and root certificate
updating)

Configuration Examples of IPsec/IP Filtering

Receiving IPsec packets only

This example is to configure a default policy only.
Default Policy:
❏ IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
❏ Access Control: IPsec

580
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering

❏ Authentication Method: Pre-Shared Key

❏ Pre-Shared Key: Enter up to 127 characters.

Group Policy: Do not configure.

Receiving printing data and printer settings

This example allows communications of printing data and printer configuration from specified services.
Default Policy:
❏ IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
❏ Access Control: Refuse Access

Group Policy:
❏ Enable this Group Policy: Check the box.
❏ Access Control: Permit Access
❏ Remote Address(Host): IP address of a client
❏ Method of Choosing Port: Service Name
❏ Service Name: Check the box of ENPC, SNMP, HTTP (Local), HTTPS (Local) and RAW (Port9100).

Note:
To avoid receiving HTTP (Local) and HTTPS (Local), clear their checkboxes in Group Policy. When doing so, disable
IPsec/IP filtering from the printer's control panel temporarily to change the printer settings.

Receiving access from a specified IP address only

This example allows a specified IP address to access the printer.
Default Policy:
❏ IPsec/IP Filtering: Enable
❏ Access Control:Refuse Access

Group Policy:
❏ Enable this Group Policy: Check the box.
❏ Access Control: Permit Access
❏ Remote Address(Host): IP address of an administrator’s client

Note:
Regardless of policy configuration, the client will be able to access and configure the printer.

Configuring a Certificate for IPsec/IP Filtering

Configure the Client Certificate for IPsec/IP Filtering. When you set it, you can use the certificate as an
authentication method for IPsec/IP Filtering. If you want to configure the certification authority, go to CA
Certificate.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Client Certificate.

581
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network

2. Import the certificate in Client Certificate.

If you have already imported a certificate published by a Certification Authority, you can copy the certificate
and use it in IPsec/IP Filtering. To copy, select the certificate from Copy From, and then click Copy.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Configuring a CA-signed Certificate” on page 563
& “Configuring a CA Certificate” on page 569

Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network

Configuring an IEEE802.1X Network

When you set IEEE802.1X to the printer, you can use it on the network connected to a RADIUS server, a LAN
switch with authentication function, or an access point.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > IEEE802.1X > Basic.

2. Enter a value for each item.

If you want to use the printer on a Wi-Fi network, click Wi-Fi Setup and select or enter an SSID.
Note:
You can share settings between Ethernet and Wi-Fi.

3. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

IEEE802.1X Network Setting Items

Items Settings and Explanation

IEEE802.1X (Wired LAN) You can enable or disable settings of the page (IEEE802.1X > Basic) for IEEE802.1X (Wired
LAN).

IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) The connection status of IEEE802.1X (Wi-Fi) is displayed.

Connection Method The connection method of a current network is displayed.

582
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network

Items Settings and Explanation

EAP Type Select an option for an authentication method between the printer and a RADIUS server.

EAP-TLS You need to obtain and import a CA-signed certificate.

PEAP-TLS

EAP-TTLS You need to configure a password.

PEAP/MSCHAPv2

User ID Configure an ID to use for an authentication of a RADIUS server.

Enter 1 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

Password Configure a password to authenticate the printer.

Enter 1 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters. If you are using a Windows server as a
RADIUS server, you can enter up to 127 characters.

Confirm Password Enter the password you configured for confirmation.

Server ID You can configure a server ID to authenticate with a specified RADIUS server. Authenticator
verifies whether a server ID is contained in the subject/subjectAltName field of a server
certificate that is sent from a RADIUS server or not.
Enter 0 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

Certificate Validation You can set certificate validation regardless of the authentication method. Import the
certificate in CA Certificate.

Anonymous Name If you select PEAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2 for EAP Type, you can configure an
anonymous name instead of a user ID for a phase 1 of a PEAP authentication.
Enter 0 to 128 1-byte ASCII (0x20 to 0x7E) characters.

Encryption Strength You can select one of the followings.

High AES256/3DES

Middle AES256/3DES/AES128/RC4

Related Information
& “Configuring an IEEE802.1X Network” on page 582

Configuring a Certificate for IEEE802.1X

Configure the Client Certificate for IEEE802.1X. When you set it, you can use EAP-TLS and PEAP-TLS as an
authentication method of IEEE802.1x. If you want to configure the certification authority certificate, go to CA
Certificate.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Network Security tab > IEEE802.1X > Client Certificate.

2. Enter a certificate in the Client Certificate.

If you have already imported a certificate published by a Certification Authority, you can copy the certificate
and use it in IEEE802.1X. To copy, select the certificate from Copy From, and then click Copy.

583
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Connecting the Printer to an IEEE802.1X Network

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Configuring a CA-signed Certificate” on page 563
& “Configuring a CA Certificate” on page 569

Checking IEEE802.1X Network Status

You can check the IEEE802.1X status by printing a network status sheet.

Status ID IEEE802.1X Status

Disable IEEE802.1X feature is disable.

EAP Success IEEE802.1X authentication has succeeded and network connection is available.

Authenticating IEEE802.1X authentication has not been completed.

Config Error Authentication has failed since the user ID has not been set.

Client Certificate Error Authentication has failed since the client certificate is out of date.

Timeout Error Authentication has failed since there is no answer from the RADIUS server and/or
authenticator.

User ID Error Authentication has failed since the printer's user ID and/or certificate protocol is
incorrect.

Server ID Error Authentication has failed since the server ID of the server certificate and the
server's ID do not match.

Server Certificate Error Authentication has failed since there are the following errors in the server
certificate.
❏ The server certificate is out of date.
❏ The chain of the server certificate is incorrect.

CA Certificate Error Authentication has failed since there are the following errors in a CA certificate.
❏ Specified CA certificate is incorrect.
❏ The correct CA certificate is not imported.
❏ CA certificate is out of date.

EAP Failure Authentication has failed since there are the following errors in the printer
settings.
❏ If EAP Type is EAP-TLS or PEAP-TLS, client certificate is incorrect or has
certain problems.
❏ If EAP Type is EAP-TTLS or PEAP/MSCHAPv2, user ID or password is not
correct.

Related Information
& “Printing a Network Status Sheet” on page 327

584
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > S/MIME Settings

S/MIME Settings

Configuring S/MIME Basic Settings

Configure the email encryption and the digital signature attachment to the emails for each function that you use.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Basic.

2. Set each item.

3. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

S/MIME Setting Items

Mail Encryption
❏ To use email encryption, you need to import an encryption certificate for each destination registered in the
contacts list.
“Importing the Encryption Certificate to the Email Destination” on page 587
❏ Unencrypted emails will be sent to the destinations that do not have an imported encryption certificate.

Items Settings and Explanation

Scan to Email Configure email encryption when using Scan to Email.

If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to encrypt the email when sending it.

Default at runtime Select the default value of mail encryption when sending the mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Scan to Email.

Box to Email Configure email encryption when using Box to Email.

If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to encrypt the email when sending it.

Default at runtime Select the default value of mail encryption when sending the mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Box to Email.

Fax to Email Configure email encryption when using Fax to Email.

Algorithm Select an algorithm for mail encryption.

585
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > S/MIME Settings

Digital Signature
To use the S/MIME signature function, you need to configure the Client Certificate for the Network Security tab
> S/MIME > Client Certificate.
“Configuring a Certificate for S/MIME” on page 586

Items Settings and Explanation

Scan to Email Configure the digital signature attachment to the email when using Scan to Email.
If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to add the digital signature to the mail
when sending it.

Default at runtime Select the default value of the digital signature attachment when sending the
mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Scan to Email.

Box to Email Configure the digital signature attachment to the email when using Box to Email.
If you select Select at runtime, you can select whether or not to add the digital signature to the mail
when sending it.

Default at runtime Select the default value of the digital signature attachment when sending the
mail.
This is available when Select at runtime is selected for Box to Email.

Fax to Email Configure the digital signature attachment to the email when using Fax to
Email.

Algorithm Select an algorithm for the digital signature.

Related Information
& “Configuring S/MIME Basic Settings” on page 585

Configuring a Certificate for S/MIME

Configure the client certificate to use the S/MIME signature function.

1. Access Web Config and select the Network Security tab > S/MIME > Client Certificate.

2. Specify a certificate to use in Client Certificate.

❏ Self-signed Certificate
If a self-signed certificate has been generated by the printer, you can select this.
❏ CA-signed Certificate
If you obtain and import a CA-signed certificate in advance, you can specify this.

3. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

586
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Solving Problems for Advanced Security

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Configuring a CA-signed Certificate” on page 563
& “Updating a Self-signed Certificate” on page 567

Importing the Encryption Certificate to the Email Destination

To use email encryption, you need to import an encryption certificate for each destination registered in the
contacts list.
This section explains the procedure to import an encryption certificate to the email destination registered in the
contacts list.

1. Access Web Config and select the Scan/Copy or Fax tab > Contacts.

2. Select the destination number for which you want to import the encryption certificate, and then click Edit.

3. Import the encryption certificate to the destination for Encryption Certificate or Change encryption
certificate.

4. Click Apply.
When an encryption certificate has been imported, a key icon is displayed on the contacts list.
Note:
You can check the certificate information for Encryption certificate status by selecting the destination number to which you
have imported the encryption certificate and clicking Edit.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Solving Problems for Advanced Security

Restoring the Security Settings

When you establish a highly secure environment such as IPsec/IP Filtering or IEEE802.1X, you may not be able to
communicate with devices because of incorrect settings or trouble with the device or server. In this case, restore
the security settings in order to make settings for the device again or to allow you temporary use.

Disabling the Security Function Using the Control Panel

You can disable IPsec/IP Filtering or IEEE802.1X using the printer's control panel.

1. Select Settings > General Settings > Network Settings.

2. Select Advanced.

3. Select from the following items that you want to disable.

❏ Disable IPsec/IP Filtering

587
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Solving Problems for Advanced Security

❏ Disable IEEE802.1X

4. Select Start Setup on the confirmation screen.

Problems Using Network Security Features

Forgot a Pre–shared Key

Re-configure a pre-shared key.

To change the key, access Web Config and select the Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic > Default
Policy or Group Policy.
When you change the pre-shared key, configure the pre-shared key for computers.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 571

Cannot Communicate with IPsec Communication

Specify the algorithm that the printer or the computer does not support.
The printer supports the following algorithms. Check the settings of the computer.

Security Methods Algorithms

IKE encryption algorithm AES-CBC-128, AES-CBC-192, AES-CBC-256, AES-GCM-128*, AES-GCM-192*,

AES-GCM-256*, 3DES

IKE authentication algorithm SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, MD5

IKE key exchange algorithm DH Group1, DH Group2, DH Group5, DH Group14, DH Group15, DH

Group16, DH Group17, DH Group18, DH Group19, DH Group20, DH
Group21, DH Group22, DH Group23, DH Group24, DH Group25, DH
Group26, DH Group27*, DH Group28*, DH Group29*, DH Group30*

ESP encryption algorithm AES-CBC-128, AES-CBC-192, AES-CBC-256, AES-GCM-128, AES-GCM-192,

AES-GCM-256, 3DES

ESP authentication algorithm SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, MD5

AH authentication algorithm SHA-1, SHA-256, SHA-384, SHA-512, MD5

*available for IKEv2 only

Related Information
& “Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 571

588
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Solving Problems for Advanced Security

Cannot Communicate Suddenly

The IP address of the printer has been changed or cannot be used.

When the IP address registered to the local address on Group Policy has been changed or cannot be used, IPsec
communication cannot be performed. Disable IPsec using the printer's control panel.
If the DHCP is out of date, rebooting or the IPv6 address is out of date or has not been obtained, then the IP
address registered for the printer's Web Config (Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic > Group
Policy > Local Address(Printer)) may not be found.
Use a static IP address.

The IP address of the computer has been changed or cannot be used.

When the IP address registered to the remote address on Group Policy has been changed or cannot be used, IPsec
communication cannot be performed.
Disable IPsec using the printer's control panel.
If the DHCP is out of date, rebooting or the IPv6 address is out of date or has not been obtained, then the IP
address registered for the printer's Web Config (Network Security tab > IPsec/IP Filtering > Basic > Group
Policy > Remote Address(Host)) may not be found.
Use a static IP address.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405
& “Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 571

Cannot Create the Secure IPP Printing Port

The correct certificate is not specified as the server certificate for SSL/TLS communication.
If the specified certificate is not correct, creating a port may fail. Make sure you are using the correct certificate.

The CA certificate is not imported to the computer accessing the printer.

If a CA certificate is not imported to the computer, creating a port may fail. Make sure a CA certificate is imported.

Related Information
& “Configuring a Server Certificate for the Printer” on page 570

Cannot Connect After Configuring IPsec/IP Filtering

The settings of IPsec/IP Filtering are incorrect.

Disable IPsec/IP filtering from the printer’s control panel. Connect the printer and computer and make the
IPsec/IP Filtering settings again.

Related Information
& “Encrypted Communication Using IPsec/IP Filtering” on page 571

589
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Solving Problems for Advanced Security

Cannot Access the Printer or Scanner after Configuring IEEE802.1X

The settings of IEEE802.1X are incorrect.

Disable IEEE802.1X and Wi-Fi from the printer’s control panel. Connect the printer and a computer, and then
configure IEEE802.1X again.

Related Information
& “Configuring an IEEE802.1X Network” on page 582

Problems on Using a Digital Certificate

Cannot Import a CA-signed Certificate

CA-signed Certificate and the information on the CSR do not match.

If the CA-signed Certificate and CSR do not have the same information, the CSR cannot be imported. Check the
following:
❏ Are you trying to import the certificate to a device that does not have the same information?
Check the information of the CSR and then import the certificate to a device that has the same information.
❏ Did you overwrite the CSR saved into the printer after sending the CSR to a certificate authority?
Obtain the CA-signed certificate again with the CSR.

CA-signed Certificate is more than 5KB.

You cannot import a CA-signed Certificate that is more than 5KB.

The password for importing the certificate is incorrect.

Enter the correct password. If you forget the password, you cannot import the certificate. Re-obtain the CA-signed
Certificate.

Related Information
& “Importing a CA-signed Certificate” on page 565

Cannot Update a Self-Signed Certificate

The Common Name has not been entered.

Common Name must be entered.

Unsupported characters have been entered to Common Name.

Enter between 1 and 128 characters of either IPv4, IPv6, host name, or FQDN format in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).

A comma or space is included in the common name.

If a comma is entered, the Common Name is divided at that point. If only a space is entered before or after a
comma, an error occurs.

590
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Solving Problems for Advanced Security

Related Information
& “Updating a Self-signed Certificate” on page 567

Cannot Create a CSR

The Common Name has not been entered.

The Common Name must be entered.

Unsupported characters have been entered to Common Name, Organization, Organizational Unit,
Locality, and State/Province.
Enter characters of either IPv4, IPv6, host name, or FQDN format in ASCII (0x20-0x7E).

A comma or space is included in the Common Name.

If a comma is entered, the Common Name is divided at that point. If only a space is entered before or after a
comma, an error occurs.

Related Information
& “Obtaining a CA-signed Certificate” on page 563

Warning Relating to a Digital Certificate Appears

Messages Cause/What to do

Enter a Server Certificate. Cause:

You have not selected a file to import.
What to do:
Select a file and click Import.

CA Certificate 1 is not entered. Cause:

CA certificate 1 is not entered and only CA certificate 2 is entered.
What to do:
Import CA certificate 1 first.

Invalid value below. Cause:

Unsupported characters are contained in the file path and/or password.
What to do:
Make sure that the characters are entered correctly for the item.

Invalid date and time. Cause:

Date and time for the printer have not been set.
What to do:
Set date and time using Web Config, EpsonNet Config or the printer's control
panel.

591
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Solving Problems for Advanced Security

Messages Cause/What to do

Invalid password. Cause:

The password set for CA certificate and entered password do not match.
What to do:
Enter the correct password.

Invalid file. Cause:

You are not importing a certificate file in X509 format.
What to do:
Make sure that you are selecting the correct certificate sent by a trusted certificate
authority.

Cause:
The file you have imported is too large. The maximum file size is 5KB.
What to do:
If you select the correct file, the certificate might be corrupted or fabricated.

Cause:
The chain contained in the certificate is invalid.
What to do:
For more information on the certificate, see the website of the certificate
authority.

Cannot use the Server Certificates that Cause:

include more than three CA
The certificate file in PKCS#12 format contains more than 3 CA certificates.
certificates.
What to do:
Import each certificate as converting from PKCS#12 format to PEM format, or
import the certificate file in PKCS#12 format that contains up to 2 CA certificates.

The certificate has expired. Check if the Cause:

certificate is valid, or check the date
The certificate is out of date.
and time on your printer.
What to do:
❏ If the certificate is out of date, obtain and import the new certificate.
❏ If the certificate is not out of date, make sure the printer's date and time are set
correctly.

592
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using Epson Open Platform

Messages Cause/What to do

Private key is required. Cause:

There is no paired private key with the certificate.
What to do:
❏ If the certificate is the PEM/DER format and it is obtained from a CSR using a
computer, specify the private key file.
❏ If the certificate is the PKCS#12 format and it is obtained from a CSR using a
computer, create a file that contains the private key.

Cause:
You have re-imported the PEM/DER certificate obtained from a CSR using Web
Config.
What to do:
If the certificate is the PEM/DER format and it is obtained from a CSR using Web
Config, you can only import it once.

Setup failed. Cause:

Cannot finish the configuration because the communication between the printer
and computer failed or the file cannot be read by some errors.
What to do:
After checking the specified file and communication, import the file again.

Related Information
& “About Digital Certification” on page 562

Delete a CA-signed Certificate by Mistake

There is no backup file for the CA-signed certificate.

If you have the backup file, import the certificate again.
If you obtain a certificate using a CSR created from Web Config, you cannot import a deleted certificate again.
Create a CSR and obtain a new certificate.

Related Information
& “Importing a CA-signed Certificate” on page 565
& “Deleting a CA-signed Certificate” on page 567

Using Epson Open Platform

Epson Open Platform Overview

Epson Open Platform is a platform to use Epson printers with the function provided by the server of the
authentication system.

593
Administrator Information > Advanced Security Settings > Using Epson Open Platform

You can acquire the logs of each device and user in cooperation with the server, and configure restrictions on the
device and functions that can be used for each user and group. It can be used with Epson Print Admin (Epson
Authentication System) or a third-party authentication system.
If you connect an authentication device, you can also perform user authentication using the ID card.

Configuring Epson Open Platform

Enable Epson Open Platform so that you can use the device from the authentication system.

1. Access Web Config and then select the Epson Open Platform tab > Product Key or License Key.

2. Enter a value for each item.

❏ Serial Number
The serial number of the device is displayed.
❏ Epson Open Platform Version
Select the version of Epson Open Platform. The corresponding version varies depending on the
authentication system.
❏ Product Key or License Key
Enter the product key obtained from the dedicated Web site. See the Epson Open Platform manual for
details such as how to obtain the product key.

3. Click Next.
A confirmation message is displayed.

4. Click OK.
The printer is updated.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

Configuring the Authentication Device

You can configure the authentication device used in the authentication system from the Device Management tab >
Card Reader.
For more information, see the manual of the authentication system.

Related Information
& “Application for Configuring Printer Operations (Web Config)” on page 405

594
Where to Get Help

Technical Support Web Site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Contacting Epson Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Where to Get Help > Contacting Epson Support > Help for Users in Taiwan

Technical Support Web Site

If you need further help, visit the Epson support website shown below. Select your country or region and go to the
support section of your local Epson website. The latest drivers, FAQs, manuals, or other downloadables are also
available from the site.
http://support.epson.net/
http://www.epson.eu/Support (Europe)
If your Epson product is not operating properly and you cannot solve the problem, contact Epson support services
for assistance.

Contacting Epson Support

Before Contacting Epson

If your Epson product is not operating properly and you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting
information in your product manuals, contact Epson support services for assistance. If Epson support for your area
is not listed below, contact the dealer where you purchased your product.
Epson support will be able to help you much more quickly if you give them the following information:
❏ Product serial number
(The serial number label is usually on the back of the product.)
❏ Product model
❏ Product software version
(Click About, Version Info, or a similar button in the product software.)
❏ Brand and model of your computer
❏ Your computer operating system name and version
❏ Names and versions of the software applications you normally use with your product

Note:
Depending on the product, the dial list data for fax and/or network settings may be stored in the product’s memory. Due to
breakdown or repair of a product, data and/or settings may be lost. Epson shall not be responsible for the loss of any data, for
backing up or recovering data and/or settings even during a warranty period. We recommend that you make your own
backup data or take notes.

Help for Users in Europe

Check your Pan-European Warranty Document for information on how to contact Epson support.

Help for Users in Taiwan

Contacts for information, support, and services are:

596
Where to Get Help > Contacting Epson Support > Help for Users in New Zealand

World Wide Web

http://www.epson.com.tw
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, and products enquiry are available.

Epson HelpDesk
Phone: +886-2-80242008
Our HelpDesk team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty

Repair service center:

http://www.tekcare.com.tw/branchMap.page
TekCare corporation is an authorized service center for Epson Taiwan Technology & Trading Ltd.

Help for Users in Australia

Epson Australia wishes to provide you with a high level of customer service. In addition to your product manuals,
we provide the following sources for obtaining information:

Internet URL
http://www.epson.com.au
Access the Epson Australia World Wide Web pages. Worth taking your modem here for the occasional surf! The
site provides a download area for drivers, Epson contact points, new product information and technical support (e-
mail).

Epson Helpdesk
Phone: 1300-361-054
Epson Helpdesk is provided as a final backup to make sure our clients have access to advice. Operators on the
Helpdesk can aid you in installing, configuring and operating your Epson product. Our Pre-sales Helpdesk staff
can provide literature on new Epson products and advise where the nearest dealer or service agent is located. Many
types of queries are answered here.
We encourage you to have all the relevant information on hand when you ring. The more information you prepare,
the faster we can help solve the problem. This information includes your Epson product manuals, type of
computer, operating system, application programs, and any information you feel is required.

Transportation of Product
Epson recommends retaining product packaging for future transportation.

Help for Users in New Zealand

Epson New Zealand wishes to provide you with a high level of customer service. In addition to your product
documentation, we provide the following sources for obtaining information:

597
Where to Get Help > Contacting Epson Support > Help for Users in Thailand

Internet URL
http://www.epson.co.nz
Access the Epson New Zealand World Wide Web pages. Worth taking your modem here for the occasional surf!
The site provides a download area for drivers, Epson contact points, new product information and technical
support (e-mail).

Epson Helpdesk
Phone: 0800 237 766
Epson Helpdesk is provided as a final backup to make sure our clients have access to advice. Operators on the
Helpdesk can aid you in installing, configuring and operating your Epson product. Our Pre-sales Helpdesk staff
can provide literature on new Epson products and advise where the nearest dealer or service agent is located. Many
types of queries are answered here.
We encourage you to have all the relevant information on hand when you ring. The more information you prepare,
the faster we can help solve the problem. This information includes your Epson product documentation, type of
computer, operating system, application programs, and any information you feel is required.

Transportation of Product
Epson recommends retaining product packaging for future transportation.

Help for Users in Singapore

Sources of information, support, and services available from Epson Singapore are:

World Wide Web

http://www.epson.com.sg
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries,
and Technical Support via e-mail are available.

Epson HelpDesk
Toll Free: 800-120-5564
Our HelpDesk team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problem troubleshooting
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty

Help for Users in Thailand

Contacts for information, support, and services are:

World Wide Web

http://www.epson.co.th
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), and e-mail are
available.

598
Where to Get Help > Contacting Epson Support > Help for Users in Indonesia

Epson Call Centre

Phone: 66-2685-9899
Email: [email protected]
Our Call Centre team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty

Help for Users in Vietnam

Contacts for information, support, and services are:

Epson Service Center

65 Truong Dinh Street, District 1, Hochiminh City, Vietnam.
Phone(Ho Chi Minh City): 84-8-3823-9239, 84-8-3825-6234
29 Tue Tinh, Quan Hai Ba Trung, Hanoi City, Vietnam
Phone(Hanoi City): 84-4-3978-4785, 84-4-3978-4775

Help for Users in Indonesia

Contacts for information, support, and services are:

World Wide Web

http://www.epson.co.id
❏ Information on product specifications, drivers for download
❏ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries, questions through e-mail

Epson Hotline
Phone: +62-1500-766
Fax: +62-21-808-66-799
Our Hotline team can help you with the following over the phone or fax:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Technical support

Epson Service Center

Province Company Name Address Phone

E-mail

DKI JAKARTA ESS JAKARTA Ruko Mall Mangga Dua No. 48 Jl. Arteri (+6221) 62301104
MANGGADUA Mangga Dua, Jakarta Utara - DKI JAKARTA
[email protected]

599
Where to Get Help > Contacting Epson Support > Help for Users in Indonesia

Province Company Name Address Phone

E-mail

NORTH ESC MEDAN Jl. Bambu 2 Komplek Graha Niaga Nomor (+6261) 42066090 / 42066091
SUMATERA A-4, Medan - North Sumatera
[email protected]

WEST JAWA ESC BANDUNG Jl. Cihampelas No. 48 A Bandung Jawa (+6222) 4207033
Barat 40116
bdg-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id

DI ESC YOGYAKARTA YAP Square, Block A No. 6 Jl. C Simanjutak (+62274) 581065
YOGYAKARTA Yogyakarta - DIY
[email protected]

EAST JAWA ESC SURABAYA Hitech Mall Lt. 2 Block A No. 24 Jl. Kusuma (+6231) 5355035
Bangsa No. 116 - 118 Surabaya - JATIM
[email protected]

SOUTH ESC MAKASSAR Jl. Cendrawasih NO. 3A, kunjung mae, (+62411) 8911071
SULAWESI mariso, MAKASSAR - SULSEL 90125
mksr-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id

WEST ESC PONTIANAK Komp. A yani Sentra Bisnis G33, Jl. Ahmad (+62561) 735507 / 767049
KALIMANTAN Yani - Pontianak Kalimantan Barat
pontianak-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id

RIAU ESC PEKANBARU Jl. Tuanku Tambusai No.459A Pekanbaru (+62761) 8524695
Riau
pkb-admin@epson-
indonesia.co.id

DKI JAKARTA ESS JAKARTA Wisma Keiai Lt. 1 Jl. Jenderal Sudirman Kav. (+6221) 5724335
SUDIRMAN 3 Jakarta Pusat - DKI JAKARTA 10220
[email protected]

EAST JAWA ESS SURABAYA Ruko Surya Inti Jl. Jawa No 2-4 Kav. 29 (+6231) 5014949
Surabaya - Jawa Timur
[email protected]

BANTEN ESS SERPONG Ruko Mall WTC Matahari No. 953, Serpong- (+6221) 53167051 / 53167052
Banten
[email protected]

CENTRAL ESS SEMARANG Komplek Ruko Metro Plaza Block C20 Jl. MT (+6224) 8313807 / 8417935
JAWA Haryono No 970 Semarang - JAWA TENGAH
[email protected]

EAST ESC SAMARINDA Jl. KH. Wahid Hasyim (M. Yamin) Kelurahan (+62541) 7272904
KALIMANTAN Sempaja Selatan Kecamatan Samarinda
[email protected]
UTARA - SAMARINDA - KALTIM

SOUTH ESC PALEMBANG Jl. H.M Rasyid Nawawi No. 249 Kelurahan 9 (+62711) 311330
SUMATERA Ilir Palembang Sumatera Selatan
[email protected]

EAST JAVA ESC JEMBER JL. Panglima Besar Sudirman Ruko no.1D (+62331) 488373 / 486468
Jember-Jawa Timur (Depan Balai Penelitian
[email protected]
& Pengolahan Kakao)

NORTH ESC MANADO Tekno Megamall Lt LG 11 TK 21, Kawasan (+62431) 8890996

SULAWESI Megamas Boulevard, Jl Piere Tendean,
MND-ADMIN@EPSON-
Manado - SULUT 95111
INDONESIA.CO.ID

600
Where to Get Help > Contacting Epson Support > Help for Users in Malaysia

For other cities not listed here, call the Hot Line: 08071137766.

Help for Users in Hong Kong

To obtain technical support as well as other after-sales services, users are welcome to contact Epson Hong Kong
Limited.

Internet Home Page

http://www.epson.com.hk
Epson Hong Kong has established a local home page in both Chinese and English on the Internet to provide users
with the following information:
❏ Product information
❏ Answers to Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
❏ Latest versions of Epson product drivers

Technical Support Hotline

You can also contact our technical staff at the following telephone and fax numbers:
Phone: 852-2827-8911
Fax: 852-2827-4383

Help for Users in Malaysia

Contacts for information, support, and services are:

World Wide Web

http://www.epson.com.my
❏ Information on product specifications, drivers for download
❏ Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), Sales Enquiries, questions through e-mail

Epson Call Centre

Phone: +60 1800-8-17349
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
❏ Enquiries on repair services and warranty

Head Office
Phone: 603-56288288
Fax: 603-5628 8388/603-5621 2088

601
Where to Get Help > Contacting Epson Support > Help for Users in the Philippines

Help for Users in India

Contacts for information, support, and services are:

World Wide Web

http://www.epson.co.in
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, and products enquiry are available.

Helpline
❏ Service, product information, and ordering consumables (BSNL Lines)
Toll-free number: 18004250011
Accessible 9am to 6pm, Monday through Saturday (Except public holidays)
❏ Service (CDMA & Mobile Users)
Toll-free number: 186030001600
Accessible 9am to 6pm, Monday through Saturday (Except public holidays)

Help for Users in the Philippines

To obtain technical support as well as other after sales services, users are welcome to contact the Epson Philippines
Corporation at the telephone, fax numbers and e-mail address below:

World Wide Web

http://www.epson.com.ph
Information on product specifications, drivers for download, Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), and E-mail
Enquiries are available.

Epson Philippines Customer Care

Toll Free: (PLDT) 1-800-1069-37766
Toll Free: (Digital) 1-800-3-0037766
Metro Manila: (+632)441-9030
Web Site: https://www.epson.com.ph/contact
E-mail: [email protected]
Accessible 9am to 6pm, Monday through Saturday (Except public holidays)
Our Customer Care team can help you with the following over the phone:
❏ Sales enquiries and product information
❏ Product usage questions or problems
❏ Enquiries on repair service and warranty

Epson Philippines Corporation

Trunk Line: +632-706-2609
Fax: +632-706-2663

602